Keyence Programming

96M0366
INDEX
Installation
Support
Software
Programming
2. System Installation
3. Access Window
4. KV-D20 Operator
Interface Panel
1. Introduction
1. Programming
2. Editor
2. Instructions
3. Simulator
3. Interrupts
4. Monitor
4. High-speed Counters
5. Appendices
5. Positioning Control
6. Interrupts, High-speed
Counters, Positioning
Control
5. KV-10/80 Hardware
6. Handheld Programmer
7. Serial Communication
7. KV-L2 Serial Interface

Module
8. Programming
Examples
8. KV-AN6 Analog I/O

Module
9. KV-AD4/DA4 Analog
I/O Unit
10. Troubleshooting
11. Appendices
Specifications are subject to change without notice.

AFFILIATED COMPANIES
KEYENCE CORPORATION
1-3-14, Higashi-Nakajima,
Higashi-Yodogawa-ku,
Osaka, 533-8555, Japan
PHONE: 81-6-6379-2211
FAX: 81-6-6379-2131
KEYENCE CORPORATION OF AMERICA

PHONE: 201-930-0100 FAX: 201-930-0099
KEYENCE (MALAYSIA) SDN BHD

PHONE: 03-252-2211 FAX: 03-252-2131
KEYENCE (UK) LIMITED

PHONE: 01908-696900 FAX: 01908-696777
KEYENCE (THAILAND) CO., LTD.

PHONE: 02-369-2777 FAX: 02-369-2775
KEYENCE DEUTSCHLAND GmbH

PHONE: 0711-79 73 71-0 FAX: 0711-797 77 99
KEYENCE THAIWAN CO., LTD.

PHONE: 02-2627-3100 FAX: 02-2798-8925
KEYENCE FRANCE S.A.

PHONE: 01 47 92 76 76 FAX: 01 47 92 76 77
KEYENCE KOREA CORPORATION

PHONE: 02-563-1270 FAX: 02-563-1271
KEYENCE SINGAPORE PTE LTD.

PHONE: 392-1011 FAX: 392-5055
KEYENCE CORPORATION, 1999 NKVP-UM-4-1000 Printed in Japan
User's Manual
Visual KV Series 3 Programming
1. Configuration and
Specifications
Visual KV Series
Programming
How this manual is organized:

The Visual KV Series Users Manual is composed of 3 separate
manuals; 1-Installation, 2-Support Software, 3-Programming.
Please read each manual relevant to your purpose.
Safety Precautions
This instruction manual describes the operation and function of the KV Series PLC.
Read this manual carefully to ensure safe use and maximum performance from your
KV Series PLC.
Symbols
The following symbols alert you to important messages. Be sure to read these
messages carefully.
Failure to follow instructions may lead to injury. (electric
WARNING shock, burn, etc.)
CAUTION
Note:
Failure to follow instructions may lead to product damage.
Provides additional information on proper operation.
Conventions
This manual describes the operation/function of all Keyence KV Series PLC.
Note following conventions when you use.
Visual KV (Series)
KV-10xx, 16xx, 24xx, 40xx
KV-10AR/AT/DR/DT
KV-24AR/AT/DR/DT
KV-16AR/AT/DR/DT
KV-40AR/AT/DR/DT
Conventional KV (Series)
KV-300 (Series)
KV-10/80 (Series)
KV-10R(W)/T(W)
KV-24R(W)/T(W)
KV-80R(W)/T(W)
KV-300
KV-16R(W)/T(W)
KV-40R(W)/T(W)
General Precautions
At startup and during operation, be sure to monitor the functions and performance of the KV Sereis PLC.
We recommend that you take substantial safety measures to avoid any damage
in the event a problem occurs.
Do not open or modify the KV Series PLC or use it in any way other than described in the specifications.
When the KV Series PLC is used in combination with other instruments, functions and performance may be degraded, depending on operating conditions and
the surrounding environment.
Do not use the KV Series PLC for the purpose of protecting the human body.
Note: The built-in display may show the error message "Error 40" blinking the very
first time you turn on the power supply to the Visual KV Series. Press any key
around the display to cancel this message.
The Visual KV Series shows this message when no program is loaded.
(1)
Note to User
When using the Visual KV Series in the following conditions or environments, be
sure to use the Visual KV Series with sufficient margin regarding the rating and
functions, take appropriate safety precautions such as fail-safe, and contact our
sales personnel if any questions arise.
Use in conditions or environments not described in this manual
Use for nuclear power control, railway facilities, air service facilities, vehicles,
combustion devices, medical equipment, amusement machines, safety equipment, etc.
Use for applications where large effects are predicted to be given on human lives
and properties and safety is especially requested.
Restriction on Acquiring the CE Marking

Restriction to be compatible with EMC directives
When using a relay output type unit (whose model name ends with "R"), connect
spark killers having the appropriate withstand voltage against the load to the
output terminals in parallel to contacts (because the unit discharges when a relay
contact becomes open and noise is generated). In our experiments, we use the
following models of spark killers.
XEB0101 0.1 F-10 manufactured by OKAYA DENKI SANGYO
The following 1-turn ferrite core is added to the AC power input circuit of the KV40AR/T, the KV-24AR/T and to the DC power input circuit of the KV-40DR/T.
ZCAT3035-1330 manufactured by TDK
Note: The contents above do not by themselves ensure that the entire machine
manufactured in accordance with the above contents is compatible with EMC
directives.
You must judge by yourself whether or not the entire machine is compatible with
EMC directives because compatibility may change depending on the component
configuration, wiring and location inside of the machine.
Restriction on compatibility with low-voltage directives (IEC-1010-1)
Use insulated type crimp-style terminals.
For wiring materials, use lead wires whose sheath is 0.4 mm or more.
The Visual KV Series is allowed to be installed in a vertical position only.

(Spacers for expansion units are not available.)
Be sure to use the Visual KV Series inside the control panel.
(2)
Features of the Visual KV Series

Extremely small
The Visual KV Series is the smallest in the world among AC type PLCs equipped
with screw terminal blocks, and saves installation space.
Extremely fast
The minimum scan time is 140 s and minimum instruction execution time is 0.7
s, which is the fastest control in its class.
AC power built-in type newly added
AC power built-in type units are newly added. This type can be used in small
spaces where a switching power supply unit cannot be installed.
Excellent Access Window
An Access Window with two-color backlight is adopted in all models to facilitate
changing and monitoring of device data. Changing between RUN mode and
PROGRAM mode, checking the error code when an error has occurred, etc. can
be performed in a Visual KV Series unit without the need for any handheld
programmer.
The analog trimmer, which has been popular in the conventional KV Series, is
digitized to enable more detail settings. [Digital trimmers]
User message setting function
In the Access Window, 256 different user messages can be displayed. This
function can be used to give instructions on works on the production line, indicate
abnormalities in the units, etc.
Program write in RUN mode
Ladder programs can be changed even while the system is running.
Equipped with two serial ports
Visual KV Series basic units are equipped with two serial ports to connect peripheral units, improving the debug environment.
(The KV-10xx is equipped with only one serial port.)
Easy Ramp-up/down control function
The one-axis motor control function is offered separately from high-speed
counters so that feedback control is enabled.
Equipped with two 24-bit high-speed 30 kHz, two-phase counters
The Visual KV Series is equipped with two high-speed counters each with a twopoint comparator output function that enables high-speed encoder input.
Specified frequency pulse output function
High-speed counters can function as pulse oscillators of 50 kHz maximum with
easy setting, without creating a complicated ladder program.
Frequency counter function
High-speed counters can function as frequency counters with easy setting,
without creating complicated ladder programs.
Cam switch function
High-speed counters can function as cam switches with easy setting, without
creating complicated ladder programs.
(3)
Interrupt function
The Visual KV Series is equipped with four high-speed interrupt inputs of
10 s maximum.
Input time constant change function
The time constant can be set in 7 steps from 10 s to 10 ms.
Double memory backup functions
In addition to a conventional SRAM battery backup function, the Visual KV Series
is also equipped with an EEPROM backup function.
Compatibility with Conventional KV Series Peripheral Units

The Visual KV Series functions as a high-end compatible model of the conventional
KV Series. Peripheral units of the conventional KV Series such as the ladder support
software "KV IncrediWare (DOS)" and "LADDER BUILDER for KV" and the
handheld programmer KV-P3E(01) can be used since they are part of the Visual KV
Series.
However, it should be noted that the contents have changed as follows.
The internal clock cycle of high-speed counters consists of three types: 1 s, 10

s, and 100 s.
The time constant for an input relay specified by the HSP instruction is 10 s.
The analog trimmer function is set with the Access Window built into the basic
unit.
The available device setting range of the TMIN instruction is from 0 to 65535.
[Handheld programmer KV-P3E(01) can display 0 to 9999 .]
The RUN/PROGRAM LED is displayed in the Access Window provided on the

front face of the basic unit.
Transistor output is not independent, but is common.
With the transistor type, the output terminal layout is different.
The specifications for output current of transistor outputs Nos. 500 to 502 is 100
mA.
Conventional KV Series expansion units are not available as expansion units for
the Visual KV Series.
The channel setting switch is not provided for expansion units. Channels are
determined in connection order.
Scans in expansion I/O units are not synchronous with the scan time in Visual KV
Series basic units.
Assignment of special utility relays has partially changed.
Data memory device Nos. DM1000 to DM1999 are assigned as special data
memories.
(4)
Cautions when using the previous version of ladder support software

Pay strict attention to the following items when using the ladder support software.
CAUTION
When using the ladder support software "KV IncrediWare (DOS)" or "LADDER
BUILDER for KV Ver. 1.0x", set the model to "KV-300".
DM0 to DM1999 are only available.
When the ladder support software "LADDER BUILDER for KV Ver. 1.0x" is
used, do not use the monitors Change All function. If the Change All function
is used, the basic unit may be damaged. Never use the Change All function.
Peripheral units and other units incompatible with the Visual KV Series
Peripheral units in the conventional KV Series and other units shown below are not
compatible with the Visual KV Series.
Expansion I/O units for the conventional KV Series: KV-8ER/8ET/8EX/16EX/

8EYR/8EYT/16EYR/16EYT
Analog I/O units for the conventional KV Series: KV-AD4/DA4
Cautions when Using the Serial Port

The KV-16xx/24xx/40xx units are equipped with two RJ-11 modular connectors for
serial communication.
When using them, pay strict attention to the following contents:
(5)
Programs can be transferred and monitored using either communication port A or

B. However, never connect the ladder software and a handheld programmer to
the two ports at the same time.
The KV-D20 operator interface panel can be connected to either communication

port A or B. However, only one KV-D20 unit can be connected to a single basic
unit.
Never leave both the KV-D20 operator interface panel and KV-P3E(01) handheld
programmer on simultaneously for a long period of time.
(6)
How this manual is organized

The Visual KV Series Users Manual is composed of 3 separate manuals;
1-Installation, 2-Support Software, 3-Programming. Please read each manual
relevant to your purpose.
1 Installation
Chapter 1
Configuration and Specifications [Visual KV Series Only]

Describes the system configuration of the Visual KV Series, the names and functions of
each part, and the specifications.
Chapter 2
System Installation [Visual KV Series Only]

Describes the installation and connection of each Visual KV Series unit as well as
system maintenance.
Chapter 3
Access Window [Visual KV Series Only]

Describes the Access Window used for changing and monitoring data.
Chapter 4
KV-D20 Operator Interface Panel [Visual KV Series Only]

Describes the KV-D20 Operator Interface Panel used for changing, monitoring, and
displaying the status of inside relays, timers, counters and data memories.
Chapter 5
KV-300, KV-10/80 Hardware [KV-300, KV-10/80 Series Only]

Describes the hardware specifications and wirings for KV-300 and KV-10/80 Series.
Chapter 6
Handheld Programmer
Describes how to use the handheld programmer and memory card.
Chapter 7
KV-L2 Serial Interface Module [KV-300 Series Only]

Describes the serial interface modules for KV-300 Series.
Chapter 8
KV-AN6 Analog I/O Module [KV-300 Series Only]

Describes the optional Analog I/O module for KV-300 Series
Chapter 9
KV-AD4/DA4 Analog I/O Unit [KV-10/80 Series Only]

Describes the optional Analog I/O unit for KV-10/80 Series.
Chapter 10
Troubleshooting
This chapter describes the error code list, countermeasures against problems, and error
indications for each unit.
Appendices
The appendix includes a list of ladder program applications and the index.
2 Support Software
Chapter 1
Introduction
Describes the items included in the package, the product outline, the method to connect
a personal computer, the installation method, etc.
(7)
Chapter 2
Editor
Describes the operating procedures in Editor mode.
Chapter 3
Simulator
Describes the operating procedures in Simulator mode.
Chapter 4
Monitor
Describes the operating procedures in Monitor mode.
Appendices
Includes instructions list, devices list, sample program list and quick reference for key
operation and shortcuts.
3 Programming
Chapter 1
Programming
Describes basic knowledge including program creation procedures, device configuration,
relay assignments, special functions to set and confirm Visual KV Series operations, as
well as the extended ladder diagrams. Understand the contents described here completely at first before creating programs.
Chapter 2
Instructions
Describes the concrete usage of instructions in the KV Series.
Refer to "Chapter 3 Interrupts" on page 3-183 for details of interrupt instructions.
Refer to "Chapter 4 High-speed counters" on page 3-195 for details of the high-speed
counters used in the application instruction.
Chapter 3
Interrupts [Visual KV Series Only]

The interrupt processing function executes an interrupt program when an external input
or request from the high-speed counter comparator (interrupt factor) is encountered
during KV operation.
This chapter describes the types of interrupt factors as well as inputs and outputs
encountered during interrupt processing.
Chapter 4
High-speed Counters [Visual KV Series Only]

Describes high-speed counters and high-speed counter comparators, which allow highspeed pulse measurement and pulse output, independent of the scan time.
Chapter 5
Positioning Control [Visual KV Series Only]

Describes ramp-up/down control of stepping motors and servo motors.
Chapter 6
Interrupts, High-speed Counters, Positioning Control [KV-300, KV-10/80 Series Only]

Describes ramp-up/down control of stepping motors and servo motors.
Chapter 7
Serial Communication
The KV Series can be connected to an external device with an RS-232C interface to
establish communication.
This chapter describes communications specifications, how to connect the KV Series to
external devices, and how to perform communication.
Chapter 8
Programming Examples
Describes the typical programming examples for KV-10/80 Series. These programs can
be used for Visual KV Series. However, pay attention to the I/O addressing compatibility
before use.
(8)
Contents
3
Programming
Chapter 1
Programming
1.1
Before Creating Programs .............................................................................. 3-2
1.1.1 Flow from Introduction to Operation ................................................................... 3-2
1.1.2 Scan Time ........................................................................................................... 3-3
Scan time ..................................................................................................... 3-3
Input response time delay ............................................................................ 3-3
1.2
User Memory .................................................................................................... 3-4
1.2.1 Program Capacity ............................................................................................... 3-4
Maximum number of lines in a program ....................................................... 3-4
Calculating the byte count used ................................................................... 3-4
1.3
Device Configuration ....................................................................................... 3-5
1.3.1 Device List .......................................................................................................... 3-5
Relay list ...................................................................................................... 3-5
List of I/O relays in basic units ..................................................................... 3-5
List of relays in expansion units ................................................................... 3-6
1.3.2 Relay No. ............................................................................................................ 3-7
Address No. ................................................................................................. 3-7
Contact No. .................................................................................................. 3-8
Channel No. ................................................................................................. 3-8
1.3.3 Assigning Relay Nos. .......................................................................................... 3-8
1.3.4 Input Relays ........................................................................................................ 3-9
Basic unit ..................................................................................................... 3-9
Expansion unit ........................................................................................... 3-10
1.3.5 Output Relays ................................................................................................... 3-10
Output operation time ................................................................................ 3-10
1.3.6 Internal Utility Relays ........................................................................................ 3-11
Retentive function of internal utility relays .................................................. 3-11
1.3.7 Special Utility Relays ........................................................................................ 3-12
Description ................................................................................................. 3-12
1.3.8 Special Utility Relay List ................................................................................... 3-14
Special relays and arithmetic operation flags ............................................ 3-14
Special utility relays for high-speed counter(0) .......................................... 3-14
Special utility relays for high-speed counter(1) .......................................... 3-15
Other special utility relays .......................................................................... 3-15
1.3.9 Timers and Counters ........................................................................................ 3-18
Timer/Counter list ....................................................................................... 3-18
Description ................................................................................................. 3-18
1.3.10 Data Memories ................................................................................................. 3-19
1.3.11 Temporary Data Memory .................................................................................. 3-21
1.3.12 Relay Nos. and Functions ................................................................................. 3-22
1.4
Special Functions .......................................................................................... 3-23
1.4.1 Input Time Constant Change Function ............................................................. 3-23
Setting the input time constant for basic units using special utility relays .. 3-23
1.4.2 Modifying the Input Relay Time Constant ......................................................... 3-24
Modification within the CPU ....................................................................... 3-24
1.4.3 Constant Scan Time Mode ............................................................................... 3-25
1.4.4 Output Disabled Function ................................................................................. 3-26
1.4.5 Input Refresh Disabled Function ...................................................................... 3-26
1.4.6 Contact Comment Save Function ..................................................................... 3-27
1.4.7 Special Functions ............................................................................................. 3-28
Constant Scan Time Mode ........................................................................ 3-28
Output Disabled Function .......................................................................... 3-28
Input Refresh Disabled Function ................................................................ 3-28
1.5
1.5.1
1.5.2
1.5.3
(9)
Extended Ladder Diagrams .......................................................................... 3-29

Features of Extended Ladder Diagrams ........................................................... 3-29
Advantages of Extended Ladder Diagrams ...................................................... 3-30
Example of an Extended Ladder Diagram ........................................................ 3-31
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Instructions
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
2.1.5
Instruction List [Visual KV Series] .............................................................. 3-34

Basic Instructions .............................................................................................. 3-34
Application Instructions ..................................................................................... 3-36
Arithmetic Instructions ...................................................................................... 3-38
Interrupt Instructions .........................................................................................3-41
Function No. List (Alphabetical order) .............................................................. 3-41
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
Instruction List [KV-300 Series, KV-10/80] ................................................. 3-42

Arithmetic Instructions ...................................................................................... 3-48
Interrupt Instructions .........................................................................................3-54
2.3
Convention Details ........................................................................................ 3-55
2.4
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.4.3
Instruction Details .......................................................................................... 3-56

Arithmetic Instructions .................................................................................... 3-134
2.5
Programming Notes ..................................................................................... 3-189
Interrupts
Visual KV
3.1
Interrupt Instructions ................................................................................... 3-192
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
Interrupt Processing .................................................................................... 3-194

Interrupt Processing ........................................................................................ 3-194
Types of Interrupts .......................................................................................... 3-195
Interrupt Priority .............................................................................................. 3-196
Interrupt Program ............................................................................................ 3-196
3.3
Direct Input/Output ...................................................................................... 3-197
3.3.1 Direct Input ..................................................................................................... 3-197
3.3.2 Direct Output ................................................................................................... 3-197
3.4
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.3
3.4.4
Chapter 4
Applications of Interrupt Programs ........................................................... 3-198

Interrupt with a Signal Converter .................................................................... 3-198
Interrupt with a High-speed Counter ............................................................... 3-199
Measuring the ON Time of High-speed Pulses .............................................. 3-200
Measuring the Period in which a Target Passes between Two Points ........... 3-201
High-speed Counters
4.1
Visual KV
High-speed Counter Instructions ............................................................... 3-204
4.2
Outline of High-speed Counters ................................................................. 3-206
4.2.1 High-speed Counters and High-speed Counter Comparators ........................ 3-206
Structure of high-speed counters and high-speed counter comparators . 3-206
Specifications of high-speed counters ..................................................... 3-208
High-speed counter comparators ............................................................. 3-209
4.2.2 Internal Clock for High-speed Counters .......................................................... 3-210
4.3
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.3
4.3.4
4.3.5
4.3.6
Setting and Operation of High-speed Counters ........................................ 3-211

Reading the Current Value of the High-speed Counter .................................. 3-211
Preset Value of the High-speed Counter Comparator .................................... 3-211
Comparator Output ......................................................................................... 3-211
Count Input Method ........................................................................................ 3-212
Resetting the High-speed Counter ................................................................. 3-214
Differences with the CTH Instruction between the
Conventional and Visual KV Series ................................................................ 3-216
4.3.7 Applications of High-speed Counters ............................................................. 3-217
4.4
4.4.1
4.4.2
4.4.3
4.4.4
4.4.5
Extended Functions of High-speed Counters ........................................... 3-221

24-bit High-speed Counter .............................................................................. 3-221
Changing the Current Value of a 24-bit High-speed Counter ......................... 3-223
Application Example of 24-bit High-speed Counter (single-phase input) ....... 3-224
Ring Counter Function .................................................................................... 3-225
Applications of Ring Counters ........................................................................ 3-226
4.5
Special Functions Using High-speed Counters ........................................ 3-228
(10)
4.5.1
4.5.2
4.5.3
4.5.4
4.5.5
Specified Frequency Pulse Output Function .................................................. 3-228

Applications of the Specified Frequency Pulse Output ................................... 3-229
Frequency Counter Function .......................................................................... 3-231
Applications of Frequency Counters ............................................................... 3-232
Cam Switch Function ...................................................................................... 3-233
Cam switch mode .................................................................................... 3-233
Multi-step comparator mode .................................................................... 3-234
Setting method .........................................................................................3-234
4.5.6 Application of the Cam Switch (Cam Switch Mode) ....................................... 3-236
4.6
Direct Clock Pulse Output ........................................................................... 3-237
4.6.1 Outline of Direct Clock Pulse Output .............................................................. 3-237
4.6.2 Pulse Output Setting with the High-speed Counter Comparator .................... 3-238
Changing the pulse period and width ....................................................... 3-238
Calculating the pulse period and comparator preset value ...................... 3-239
Operation with special utility relays .......................................................... 3-239
4.7
4.7.1
4.7.2
4.7.3
4.7.4
Chapter 5
Examples of Direct Clock Pulse Output .................................................... 3-242

Example of Outputting a Pulse with 1:1 ON/OFF Ratio .................................. 3-242
Example of Outputting a Pulse with Variable ON/OFF Ratio .......................... 3-245
Example of Stopping the Pulse Output at a Specified Pulse Count ............... 3-249
Application of Direct Clock Pulse Output (Ramp-up/down control) ................ 3-251
Positioning Control
Visual KV
5.1
Outline of Positioning Control .................................................................... 3-254
5.1.1 Ramp-up/down Control ................................................................................... 3-254
5.2
Parameter Setting and Operating Procedures .......................................... 3-255
5.2.1 Parameter Setting Procedure ......................................................................... 3-255
5.2.2 Operating Procedure ...................................................................................... 3-257
5.3
5.3.1
5.3.2
5.3.3
Chapter 6
Examples of Using the Positioning Control Function .............................. 3-258

Connection Example ....................................................................................... 3-258
Tips .................................................................................................................3-258
Application Examples of the Positioning Control Function ............................. 3-259
Interrupts, High-speed Counters,

Positioning Control
KV-300, KV-10/80
6.1
Interrupt Instructions ................................................................................... 3-268
6.1.1 Description of Interrupts .................................................................................. 3-268
Input processing for routine program and interrupt routine ...................... 3-268
Types of interrupt ..................................................................................... 3-268
Interrupt priority ........................................................................................ 3-269
Interrupt routine ........................................................................................ 3-269
Direct output ............................................................................................. 3-270
Direct input ...............................................................................................3-270
6.1.2 Interrupt Instructions ....................................................................................... 3-271
6.2
Direct Clock Pulse ........................................................................................ 3-276
6.2.1 Output of Direct Clock Pulse ........................................................................... 3-276
Outline of High-Speed Counters .............................................................. 3-276
Outline of Pulse Output ............................................................................ 3-279
Examples of Pulse Output ....................................................................... 3-284
6.3
Positioning Control ...................................................................................... 3-296
6.3.1 Positioning Control (Ramp-up/down Control) ................................................. 3-296
Outline of positioning control .................................................................... 3-296
Setting and application of parameters ..................................................... 3-297
Examples of stepping motor control ......................................................... 3-300
Chapter 7
7.1
7.1.1
7.1.2
7.1.3
Communications Specifications ................................................................ 3-306

Communications Specification ........................................................................ 3-306
Connection with the KV Unit ........................................................................... 3-306
Connecting the KV-300 CPU to a Personal Computer ................................... 3-307
7.2
Serial Communication ................................................................................. 3-308
7.2.1 Command Transmission Procedure ............................................................... 3-308
(11)
Chapter 8
7.2.2
7.2.3
7.2.4
7.2.5
7.2.6
7.2.7
Format of Commands/Responses .................................................................. 3-309

Communication Command/Response List ..................................................... 3-310
Setting Communication Commands and Responses to Commands .............. 3-311
Other Response Codes .................................................................................. 3-315
Error Code List ................................................................................................ 3-316
Example Program ........................................................................................... 3-317
7.3
7.3.1
7.3.2
7.3.3
Loading Text Data ........................................................................................ 3-318

Receiving Text Data ....................................................................................... 3-318
Transmitting Text Data ................................................................................... 3-319
Sample Program ............................................................................................. 3-320
7.4
ASCII Code List ............................................................................................ 3-321
8.1
List
......................................................................................................... 3-324
8.2
Details ......................................................................................................... 3-326
8.2.1 Reference Program Examples ........................................................................ 3-326
Basic Instructions ..................................................................................... 3-326
Application Instructions ............................................................................ 3-334
Arithmetic Instructions .............................................................................. 3-343
WARRANTIES AND DISCLAIMERS
3-367
Installation
Chapter 1
Configuration and Specifications
Visual KV
1.1
System Configuration ...................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.1 System Configuration ......................................................................................... 1-2
1.2
Specifications ................................................................................................... 1-4
1.2.1 General Specifications ........................................................................................ 1-4
1.2.2 AC Power Specifications .................................................................................... 1-5
Visual KV Series operation at power interruption ........................................ 1-5
1.2.3 Performance Specifications ................................................................................ 1-6
Data backup function against instantaneous power interruption ................. 1-7
1.3
Common I/O Specifications of Basic Units ................................................... 1-8
1.3.1 Model of a Basic Unit .......................................................................................... 1-8
1.3.2 Common I/O Specifications ................................................................................ 1-8
1.4
KV-10AR/AT(P)/DR/DT(P) (10-I/O Basic Unit) ............................................. 1-10
1.4.1 Part Names and Functions ............................................................................... 1-10
1.4.2 Terminal Layout Drawings and I/O Circuit Diagrams ........................................ 1-11
KV-10AR/DR (Relay output type) .............................................................. 1-11
KV-10AT(P)/DT(P) (Transistor output type) ............................................... 1-13
1.4.3 AC Power Input (KV-10AR/AT(P)) .................................................................... 1-14
1.4.4 Relationship between Continuous Simultaneous ON Ratio and Ambient Temperature 1-15
1.4.5 Dimensions ....................................................................................................... 1-16
1.5
1.5.5 Dimensions ....................................................................................................... 1-23
1.6
1.6.5 Dimensions ....................................................................................................... 1-30
1.7
KV-40AR/AT(P)/DR/DT(P) (40-I/O Basic Unit) .............................................. 1-31
(12)

1.7.5 Dimensions ....................................................................................................... 1-37
1.8
1.8.1
1.8.2
1.8.3
KV-E4X/E8X/E16X (Expansion Input Unit) .................................................. 1-38

Part Names and Functions ............................................................................... 1-38
Input Specifications ........................................................................................... 1-38
Terminal Layout Drawings and Input Circuit Diagrams .................................... 1-39
KV-E4X (4-I/O expansion input unit) .......................................................... 1-39
KV-E8X (8-I/O expansion input unit) .......................................................... 1-40
KV-E16X (16-I/O expansion input unit) ...................................................... 1-41
1.8.4 Dimensions ....................................................................................................... 1-42
1.9
KV-E4R/E4T/E8R/E8T(P)/E16R/E16T(P) (Expansion Output Unit) ............. 1-43
1.9.2 Output Specifications ........................................................................................ 1-43
KV-E4R/E8R/E16R (Relay output type) ..................................................... 1-44
KV-E4T/E8T(P)/E16T(P) [Transistor output type (NPN/PNP)] .................. 1-44
1.9.3 Terminal Layout Drawings and Input Circuit Diagrams .................................... 1-45
KV-E4R [4-I/O expansion output unit (relay output type)] .......................... 1-45
KV-E4T [4-I/O expansion output unit transistor output type)] .................... 1-46
KV-E8R [8-I/O expansion output unit (relay output type)] .......................... 1-47
KV-E8T(P) [8-I/O expansion output unit (transistor output type)] .............. 1-48
KV-E16R [16-I/O expansion output unit (relay output type)] ...................... 1-49
KV-E16T(P) [16-I/O expansion input unit (transistor output)] .................... 1-50
1.9.4 Dimensions ....................................................................................................... 1-51
1.10
1.10.1
1.10.2
1.10.3
KV-E4XR/E4XT(P) (Expansion I/O Unit) ....................................................... 1-52

Input Specifications ........................................................................................... 1-53
Output Specifications ........................................................................................ 1-53
KV-E4XR (Relay output type) .................................................................... 1-53
KV-E4XT(P) (Transistor output type) ......................................................... 1-53
1.10.4 Terminal Layout Drawings and Input Circuit Diagrams .................................... 1-54
KV-E4XR (Relay output type) .................................................................... 1-54
KV-E4XT(P) (Transistor output type) ......................................................... 1-56
1.10.5 Dimensions ....................................................................................................... 1-58
1.11
1.11.1
1.11.2
1.11.3
1.11.4
Chapter 2
KV-D20 (Operator Interface Panel) ............................................................... 1-59

General Specifications ...................................................................................... 1-60
Functional Specifications .................................................................................. 1-60
Dimensions ....................................................................................................... 1-61
System Installation
Visual KV
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
Installation Environment ............................................................................... 1-64

Installation Environment ................................................................................... 1-64
Installation Position ........................................................................................... 1-65
Installation Procedure ....................................................................................... 1-66
Expansion unit spacer ................................................................................ 1-66
2.1.4 Cautions on Wiring for Each Unit ...................................................................... 1-67
Wiring procedures for basic units ............................................................... 1-67
Cautions on wiring for I/O units .................................................................. 1-68
Terminal ..................................................................................................... 1-68
Cautions on grounding ............................................................................... 1-69
2.1.5 Contact Protection ............................................................................................ 1-69
2.2
Connecting Visual KV Series Expansion Units .......................................... 1-70
2.2.1 Visual KV Series Expansion Units .................................................................... 1-70
2.2.2 Connecting Visual KV Series Expansion Units ................................................. 1-71
Connection methods .................................................................................. 1-72
Number of connectable units ..................................................................... 1-73
2.2.3 Confirming the Connection Settings of Expansion Units .................................. 1-74
Expansion unit relay list ............................................................................. 1-74
Connection information for expansion units ............................................... 1-75
Input time constant for expansion units ..................................................... 1-76
(13)
Clearing the input value when disconnecting ............................................. 1-76

2.2.4 Transferring I/O Information between Expansion Units and the Basic Unit ...... 1-77
When inputting ........................................................................................... 1-77
In the case of output .................................................................................. 1-77
2.3
Inspection and Maintenance ......................................................................... 1-78
2.3.1 Inspection ......................................................................................................... 1-78
2.3.2 Maintenance .....................................................................................................1-78
Chapter 3
Access Window
Visual KV
3.1
Overview of the Access Window .................................................................. 1-80
3.1.1 What is the Access Window ............................................................................. 1-80
3.1.2 Access Window Use Examples ........................................................................ 1-80
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.2.5
Basic Operating Procedures ......................................................................... 1-81

Operation Mode ................................................................................................1-81
Access Window Modes ..................................................................................... 1-81
Part Names and Functions of the Access Window ........................................... 1-82
Selecting Modes and Setting/Resetting Key Lock ............................................ 1-82
Turbo Function .................................................................................................. 1-83
3.3
Digital Trimmer Mode .................................................................................... 1-84
3.3.1 Function and Operating Procedure ................................................................... 1-84
Key operation and screen display .............................................................. 1-84
Function and operating procedure ............................................................. 1-84
3.4
Device Mode ................................................................................................... 1-87
Devices that can be displayed and changed ............................................. 1-87
Selecting the device and displaying the current value/set value ................ 1-88
Changing a numeric value ......................................................................... 1-89
Holding the setting ..................................................................................... 1-91
3.4.2 Screen Display for Each Device Type .............................................................. 1-91
Data memory (DM) .................................................................................... 1-91
Temporary data memory (TM) ................................................................... 1-91
Timer/counter (T/C) .................................................................................... 1-92
High-speed counter comparator (CTC) ...................................................... 1-92
Trimmer (TRM) .......................................................................................... 1-93
Relay (RLY) ...............................................................................................1-93
3.5
System Mode .................................................................................................. 1-94
LOAD mode and SAVE mode .................................................................... 1-96
Display in LOAD/SAVE mode .................................................................... 1-96
3.6
Message Display ............................................................................................ 1-97
3.6.1 Error Messages and Error Status ..................................................................... 1-97
3.6.2 User Messages ................................................................................................. 1-97
How to use the user messages .................................................................. 1-98
Chapter 4
KV-D20 Operator Interface Panel
Visual KV
4.1
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
Before Operation .......................................................................................... 1-100

Checking Package Contents .......................................................................... 1-100
Part Names and Functions ............................................................................. 1-101
Details about the KV-D20 ............................................................................... 1-102
General specifications .............................................................................. 1-102
Functional specifications .......................................................................... 1-102
Dimensions .............................................................................................. 1-103
4.1.4 Installation and Environment .......................................................................... 1-104
Use environment ...................................................................................... 1-104
Panel mounting ........................................................................................ 1-105
4.1.5 Inspection and Maintenance ........................................................................... 1-106
Inspection ................................................................................................. 1-106
Maintenance ............................................................................................ 1-106
4.2
Overview and Operation .............................................................................. 1-107
4.2.1 Use Examples for the KV-D20 ........................................................................ 1-107
(14)
4.2.2 Connection with the KV Series ....................................................................... 1-108

Connection ...............................................................................................1-108
Precautions .............................................................................................. 1-108
4.2.3 Overview of the KV-D20 ................................................................................. 1-109
Switching the display mode ..................................................................... 1-109
Overview of each display mode ............................................................... 1-110
Assignment of relays/DM ......................................................................... 1-111
Other functions .........................................................................................1-112
Precautions about screen change function .............................................. 1-115
4.2.4 Operator Mode ................................................................................................1-117
Screen selection in operator mode .......................................................... 1-117
Operator screen ....................................................................................... 1-118
Direct access screen ................................................................................ 1-126
KV-I/O monitor screen ............................................................................. 1-127
Switch comment screen ........................................................................... 1-128
Lamp comment screen ............................................................................ 1-128
Screen change permission in operator mode .......................................... 1-129
4.2.5 Device Mode ................................................................................................... 1-130
Device mode ............................................................................................ 1-130
Operation example for device mode ........................................................ 1-132
4.2.6 System Mode .................................................................................................. 1-134
System mode ........................................................................................... 1-134
4.3
Examples of Ladder Programs ................................................................... 1-135
4.3.1 Basic Ladder Programs .................................................................................. 1-135
Before creating ladder programs ............................................................. 1-135
Basic ladder programs ............................................................................. 1-136
4.3.2 Examples of Ladder Programs ....................................................................... 1-143
Example of displaying user messages ..................................................... 1-143
Example of displaying messages with titles ............................................. 1-145
Example of position control ...................................................................... 1-146
Example of frequency counter ................................................................. 1-149
Example of 24-bit high-speed counter ..................................................... 1-152
Example of cam switch function ............................................................... 1-154
4.4
4.4.1
4.4.2
4.4.3
Chapter 5
Appendix ....................................................................................................... 1-158

Troubleshooting .............................................................................................. 1-158
Available Character List .................................................................................. 1-162
Comment Draft Sheet ..................................................................................... 1-163
KV-300, KV-10/80 Hardware
KV-300, KV-10/80
5.1
System Configuration .................................................................................. 1-166
5.1.1 KV-300 ............................................................................................................1-166
5.1.2 KV-10/80 ......................................................................................................... 1-167
5.2
Module/Unit Specifications ......................................................................... 1-168
5.2.1 Wiring: KV-U4 Power Supply Module ............................................................. 1-168
Parts and functions .................................................................................. 1-168
5.2.2 Wiring: KV-U5 DC Power Distribution Module ................................................ 1-169
5.2.3 Wiring: KV-300 CPU ....................................................................................... 1-170
5.2.4 Wiring: KV-C16X/C32X Connector Input Module ........................................... 1-171
5.2.5 Wiring: KV-C32T/B16R/B16S Connector Output Module ............................... 1-172
5.2.6 Wiring: KV-R1A I/O Distribution Module ......................................................... 1-173
5.2.7 Wiring: KV-R8X/R16X/R8R/R16R/R8T/R16T I/O Terminal Modules ............. 1-174
5.2.8 Module Names and Functions ........................................................................ 1-175
5.2.9 Peripheral Equipment Names and Functions ................................................. 1-176
5.3
5.3.1
5.3.2
5.3.3
Module/Unit Connections ............................................................................ 1-178

Environmental Requirements ......................................................................... 1-178
Installation Guidelines ..................................................................................... 1-178
Assembling the System .................................................................................. 1-179
Connecting modules ................................................................................ 1-179
5.3.4 Mounting to the DIN Rail ................................................................................. 1-180
5.3.5 Removing the Terminal Block ......................................................................... 1-181
(15)
5.3.6 Connecting the AC Power Supply Module and DC Power Distribution Module .... 1-182
KV-U4 AC Power Supply Module ............................................................ 1-182
KV-U5 DC Power Distribution Module ..................................................... 1-182
5.3.7 I/O Connectors ................................................................................................ 1-183
KV-300 CPU ............................................................................................ 1-183
KV-C16X/C32X ........................................................................................ 1-184
KV-C32T/B16R/B16S .............................................................................. 1-185
KV-R8X/R16X/R8R/R16R/R8T/R16T ...................................................... 1-186
5.3.8 I/O Terminal Modules: Communication Cables and Power Distribution ......... 1-187
Transmission distance by cable type ....................................................... 1-187
Connection patterns ................................................................................. 1-187
Incorrect wiring patterns ........................................................................... 1-188
Power distribution .................................................................................... 1-188
5.3.9 Connector Assembly Instructions ................................................................... 1-189
5.3.10 KV-300 CPU I/O Indicators ............................................................................. 1-191
5.3.11 KV-10/80 Expansion Units .............................................................................. 1-192
5.3.12 Mounting Environment .................................................................................... 1-194
Chapter 6
Handheld Programmer
6.1
Using the Handheld Programmer ............................................................... 1-196
6.1.1 Outline of the Handheld Programmer ............................................................. 1-196
6.1.2 Precautions ..................................................................................................... 1-198
6.2
Basic Operations ......................................................................................... 1-200
6.2.1 Basic Programming Operation ........................................................................ 1-200
6.3
Functions ...................................................................................................... 1-216

Function Nos. list ..................................................................................... 1-216
ALL CLEAR .............................................................................................. 1-217
HANDHELD PROGRAMMER CLEAR ..................................................... 1-217
COUNTER CLEAR .................................................................................. 1-218
HIGH-SPEED COUNTER CLEAR ........................................................... 1-218
ALL DATA MEMORY CLEAR .................................................................. 1-219
ALL LATCHING RELAYS RESET ........................................................... 1-219
PROGRAM SENT OR RECEIVED .......................................................... 1-220
OFFLINE EDITOR START ...................................................................... 1-221
OFFLINE EDITOR STOP ........................................................................ 1-221
TIMER/COUNTER CURRENT VALUE CHANGE ................................... 1-222
TIMER/COUNTER SETTING CHANGE .................................................. 1-224
RELAY ON/OFF ....................................................................................... 1-226
WRITE INTO DATA MEMORY ................................................................ 1-227
READ TRIMMER SETTING ..................................................................... 1-228
SYNTAX CHECK ..................................................................................... 1-228
PROGRAM CAPACITY CHECK .............................................................. 1-229
6.4
Memory Card ................................................................................................ 1-230
6.4.1 Functions [used with KV-P3E(01)] .................................................................. 1-230
6.4.2 Storage Capacity ............................................................................................ 1-230
CLEAR ..................................................................................................... 1-232
NEW ......................................................................................................... 1-233
ACCS ....................................................................................................... 1-234
ACCS: SAVE ........................................................................................... 1-235
ACCS: LOAD ........................................................................................... 1-236
ACCS: VERIFY ........................................................................................ 1-236
ACCS: DELETE ....................................................................................... 1-237
Chapter 7
KV-L2 Serial Interface Module
KV-300
7.1
Outline ......................................................................................................... 1-240
7.1.1 Features .......................................................................................................... 1-240
7.2
7.2.1
7.2.2
7.2.3
Configuration ............................................................................................... 1-241

Parts and Functions ........................................................................................ 1-241
System Configuration ..................................................................................... 1-242
Outline of Operation Modes ............................................................................ 1-244
7.3
7.3.1
7.3.2
7.3.3
Installation .................................................................................................... 1-245

Setting the Operation Mode ............................................................................ 1-245
Communications Protocols ............................................................................. 1-247
Connector Wiring ............................................................................................ 1-248
(16)
7.3.4 Connecting to External Units .......................................................................... 1-249

Connecting to An External Display .......................................................... 1-249
Connecting to an IBM PC-AT Computer .................................................. 1-249
Connecting to the KV-10/16/24/40/80 ...................................................... 1-250
Connecting KV-L2s .................................................................................. 1-250
7.4
Software Setup ............................................................................................. 1-252
7.4.1 Using KV Software [KV IncrediWare (DOS)] .................................................. 1-252
Starting KV IncrediWare (DOS) from the KV-L2 ........................................................ 1-252
7.5
KV Mode Programming ............................................................................... 1-253
7.5.1 Operating in KV Mode .................................................................................... 1-253
Communications protocol ........................................................................ 1-253
7.5.2 Serial Communications Procedure ................................................................. 1-255
Command transmission procedure .......................................................... 1-255
Command/response format ..................................................................... 1-256
Communications commands and responses ........................................... 1-256
Communications commands .................................................................... 1-257
7.5.3 Transmission and Reception of Text Data ...................................................... 1-262
Assigning relay nos. and data memory address nos. .............................. 1-262
Transmitting Text Data ............................................................................. 1-264
Receiving text data .................................................................................. 1-265
ASCII code/binary conversion function .................................................... 1-266
Example program ..................................................................................... 1-269
7.6
Display Interface Mode Programming ....................................................... 1-270
7.6.1 Operating in Display Interface Mode .............................................................. 1-270
Communications protocols ....................................................................... 1-270
Communications control procedure ......................................................... 1-271
7.6.2 Command and Response Format ................................................................... 1-273
7.6.3 Commands and Responses ........................................................................... 1-275
List of commands and responses ............................................................ 1-275
Description of commands and responses ................................................ 1-277
End codes ................................................................................................1-291
7.7
Non-procedure Mode Programming .......................................................... 1-292
7.7.1 Operating in Non-procedure Mode ................................................................. 1-292
Connecting to the KV-L2 .......................................................................... 1-293
7.7.2 Assignment of Relay Nos. and Data Memory Address Nos. .......................... 1-294
Assigning relay nos. and data memory address nos. .............................. 1-294
7.7.3 Transmitting Text Data ................................................................................... 1-297
Data transmission and internal data memory addresses ......................... 1-297
7.7.4 Receiving Text Data ....................................................................................... 1-298
Format of received data and data memory addresses ............................ 1-298
7.7.5 ASCII code/Binary Conversion Function ........................................................ 1-300
7.8
Troubleshooting Guide ............................................................................... 1-304
7.8.1 Troubleshooting .............................................................................................. 1-304
7.8.2 Precautions .....................................................................................................1-305
7.9
Specifications ...............................................................................................1-306
7.9.1 Specifications .................................................................................................. 1-306
General specifications .............................................................................. 1-306
RS-232C connector specifications ........................................................... 1-306
RS-422A terminal block specifications ..................................................... 1-306
7.9.2 Dimensions .....................................................................................................1-307
7.10 Command List .............................................................................................. 1-308
7.10.1 List of Commands and Responses ................................................................. 1-308
7.10.2 List of Commands and Responses in Display Interface mode ....................... 1-309
Chapter 8
KV-AN6 Analog I/O Module

8.1
KV-300
Outline ......................................................................................................... 1-312

Features ................................................................................................... 1-312
8.2
Configuration ...............................................................................................1-313
8.2.1 Parts and Functions ........................................................................................ 1-313
8.2.2 System Configuration ..................................................................................... 1-314
8.3
Installation .................................................................................................... 1-315
8.3.1 Terminal Nos. ................................................................................................. 1-315
(17)
8.3.2
8.3.3
8.3.4
8.3.5
Removing the Terminal Block ......................................................................... 1-316

Example of Voltage I/O Wiring ........................................................................ 1-317
Example of Current I/O Wiring ........................................................................ 1-318
Setting I/O Ranges ......................................................................................... 1-319
8.4
8.4.1
8.4.2
8.4.3
8.4.4
8.4.5
8.4.6
8.4.7
8.4.8
8.4.9
Programming ................................................................................................ 1-320

Input Characteristics (A/D) .............................................................................. 1-320
Calculating Input Data (A/D) ........................................................................... 1-321
Output Characteristics (D/A) ........................................................................... 1-322
Calculating Output Data (D/A) ........................................................................ 1-323
Assigning Data Memory (DM) Addresses ....................................................... 1-324
Reading Analog Input ..................................................................................... 1-325
Measuring Analog Input Average ................................................................... 1-326
Writing Analog Output ..................................................................................... 1-327
Converting Analog Input to Analog Output ..................................................... 1-328
8.5
8.5.1
8.5.2
8.5.3
KV-AN6 Appendices .................................................................................... 1-329

Troubleshooting .............................................................................................. 1-329
Precautions ..................................................................................................... 1-330
Specifications .................................................................................................. 1-331
Environmental specifications ................................................................... 1-331
System specifications .............................................................................. 1-331
8.5.4 Dimensions ..................................................................................................... 1-332
Chapter 9
KV-AD4/DA4 Analog I/O Unit

9.1
KV-10/80
Outline ......................................................................................................... 1-334

Features ................................................................................................... 1-334
9.2
Configuration ............................................................................................... 1-335
9.2.1 Part Names and Functions ............................................................................. 1-335
KV-AD4 .................................................................................................... 1-335
KV-DA4 .................................................................................................... 1-336
9.2.2 Specifications .................................................................................................. 1-337
KV-AD4 .................................................................................................... 1-337
KV-DA4 .................................................................................................... 1-339
9.2.3 System Configuration ..................................................................................... 1-341
9.3
9.3.1
9.3.2
9.3.3
Installation .................................................................................................... 1-342

Installation Procedure ..................................................................................... 1-342
Checking the Installation Environment ........................................................... 1-343
Setting the KV-AD4 Input Mode ...................................................................... 1-344
Setting the input mode ............................................................................. 1-344
9.3.4 Connecting External Instruments .................................................................... 1-345
Wiring ....................................................................................................... 1-345
Wiring diagrams ....................................................................................... 1-346
9.3.5 Connecting to the KV-10 to 80 ........................................................................ 1-348
9.3.6 Maintenance ................................................................................................... 1-349
Inspection and Cleaning .......................................................................... 1-349
9.4
Programming ................................................................................................ 1-350
9.4.1 Programming the KV-AD4 .............................................................................. 1-350
A/D Conversion Mechanism .................................................................... 1-350
About Digital Data after A/D Conversion .................................................. 1-351
Calculating Voltage and Current Values from Digital Data ...................... 1-352
9.4.2 Programming the KV-DA4 .............................................................................. 1-353
D/A Conversion Mechanism .................................................................... 1-353
Converting Digital Data to Voltage or Current Values to be Output ......... 1-354
Writing Digital Data to Data Memory for D/A Conversion ........................ 1-356
9.4.3 A/D and D/A Conversion Tables ..................................................................... 1-357
Voltage Conversion Table ........................................................................ 1-357
Current Conversion Table ........................................................................ 1-358
9.5
Programming Examples .............................................................................. 1-359

Calculating Analog Data Values from Digital Data ................................... 1-359
Writing Data to be Analog-output ............................................................. 1-361
Outputting Analog Trimmer Values .......................................................... 1-364
Outputting Analog Input Data ................................................................... 1-365
Outputting Analog Input from a Pressure Sensor to an Air Valve ............ 1-366
Setting the Minimum and Maximum Voltage Limits and Measuring the
Average Voltage ...................................................................................... 1-367
9.6
Troubleshooting ........................................................................................... 1-370
(18)
Chapter 10
Troubleshooting
10.1
10.1.1
10.1.2
10.1.3
10.1.4
Error List ....................................................................................................... 1-372

List of Error Codes in Basic Units ................................................................... 1-372
Error indication in Expansion Units ................................................................. 1-374
Program Errors ...............................................................................................1-375
Memory Card Errors and Other Errors ........................................................... 1-376
10.2
Replacing Relays .........................................................................................1-377

Replacement procedure ........................................................................... 1-377
10.3 Troubleshooting ........................................................................................... 1-378

10.3.1 Troubleshooting List ....................................................................................... 1-378
10.4
Error Messages ............................................................................................ 1-380
Appendices
Appendix A. Specifications and Dimensions [Visual KV Series] .................... 1-382
A.1
System Specifications [Visual KV Series] ....................................................... 1-382
Hardware ................................................................................................. 1-382
Software and Programming ..................................................................... 1-383
AC power supply unit ............................................................................... 1-384
A.2
Common I/O Specifications of Basic Units ..................................................... 1-384
Input specifications .................................................................................. 1-384
Output specifications (relay output): KV-10AR/DR, KV-16AR/DR,
KV-24AR/DR, and KV-40AR/DR .............................................................. 1-385
Output specifications (transistor output): KV-10AT(P)/DT(P),
KV-16AT(P)/DT(P), KV-24AT(P)/DT(P), and KV-40AT(P)/DT(P) ............ 1-385
A.3
Expansion Unit Specifications ........................................................................ 1-385
A.4
Dimensions .....................................................................................................1-389
Appendix B. Specifications and Dimensions [KV-300 Series] ......................... 1-392
B.1
System Specifications [KV-300 Series] .......................................................... 1-392
Hardware ................................................................................................. 1-392
Software and Programming ..................................................................... 1-393
AC Power supply module/DC power distribution module ........................ 1-394
B.2
Module Specifications ..................................................................................... 1-398
KV-300 CPU ............................................................................................ 1-398
KV-C16X/C32X Input Modules ................................................................ 1-399
KV-C32T/B16R/B16S Output Modules ................................................... 1-400
KV-R8X/R16X I/O Terminal Modules ....................................................... 1-401
KV-R8T/R16T/R8R/R16R I/O Terminal Modules ..................................... 1-402
KV-R8T/R16T/R8R/R16R I/O Terminal Modules (RUN Output) .............. 1-403
KV-R1A I/O Distribution Module .............................................................. 1-403
B.3
Dimensions .....................................................................................................1-404
Appendix C.
Ladder Program List ...................................................................... 1-406
Appendix D. A/D and D/A Conversion Tables [KV-AN6] ..................................... 1-408

Voltage conversion table .......................................................................... 1-408
Current conversion table .......................................................................... 1-409
1-419
Support software
Chapter 1
Introduction
1.1
Items Included in the Package ........................................................................ 2-2
1.2
Outline of the Ladder Builder for KV .............................................................. 2-3
1.2.1 Operating environment and system configuration .............................................. 2-3
1.2.2 Features and functions of the Ladder Builder for KV .......................................... 2-4
Features of the Ladder Builder for KV ......................................................... 2-4
Functions of the Ladder Builder for KV ........................................................ 2-6
1.3
Before Programming ....................................................................................... 2-7

Machines to be prepared ............................................................................. 2-7
1.3.1 Differences from the KV IncrediWare (DOS) ...................................................... 2-8
1.3.2 Differences from the Ladder Builder for KV Ver 1.0 ........................................... 2-8
1.4
(19)
Installing the Software ..................................................................................... 2-9
1.4.1 Preparation for installation .................................................................................. 2-9

1.4.2 Installation Procedure ....................................................................................... 2-10
Installation in Windows 95 ......................................................................... 2-10
Installation in Windows 3.1 ........................................................................ 2-12
Chapter 2
1.5
Cautions for Use ............................................................................................ 2-13
1.6
1.6.1
1.6.2
1.6.3
1.6.4
1.6.5
Basic Operations ........................................................................................... 2-14

Program creation flow and available modes ..................................................... 2-14
Starting up and exiting from the software ......................................................... 2-16
Screen .............................................................................................................. 2-18
Mouse operation and keyboard operation ........................................................ 2-21
Online Help ....................................................................................................... 2-23
Editor
KV-300
2.1
Outline of the Editor Functions .................................................................... 2-26
2.1.1 Cautions for editing ladder programs ................................................................ 2-26
2.2
Edit Screen .....................................................................................................2-27
2.2.1 Name and function of each part of the screen .................................................. 2-27
2.2.2 Ladder program window screen ....................................................................... 2-28
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.3.4
2.3.5
2.3.6
2.3.7
File Management ............................................................................................ 2-29

Creating a new file ............................................................................................ 2-29
Setting the automatic file read function ............................................................. 2-30
Setting automatic file save for the file ............................................................... 2-31
Saving and reading files ................................................................................... 2-32
Reading and saving a file in another format ..................................................... 2-33
Saving a ladder diagram in text format ............................................................. 2-36
Verifying files .................................................................................................... 2-36
2.4
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.4.3
2.4.4
2.4.5
2.4.6
Entering/Deleting Symbols and Connection Lines .................................... 2-37

Entering symbols .............................................................................................. 2-37
Deleting symbols .............................................................................................. 2-42
Entering contacts/coils directly ......................................................................... 2-42
Changing the device at the current cursor position .......................................... 2-43
Entering/Deleting connection lines ................................................................... 2-44
Canceling edit operations ................................................................................. 2-45
2.5
2.5.1
2.5.2
2.5.3
Entering Comments/Labels ......................................................................... 2-46

Editing comments/labels ................................................................................... 2-46
Editing line comments ....................................................................................... 2-50
Changing ladder lines into comments ............................................................... 2-51
2.6
Edit and Arrangement .................................................................................. 2-52
2.6.1 Copy, move, and delete .................................................................................... 2-52
2.6.2 Inserting and deleting lines ............................................................................... 2-57
2.7
2.7.1
2.7.2
2.7.3
2.7.4
2.7.5
Jump, Search, and Replace ......................................................................... 2-58

Jump .................................................................................................................2-58
Searching for instruction words/operands ........................................................ 2-62
Searching for the device at the cursor position ................................................. 2-63
Replacing operands .......................................................................................... 2-64
Converting a/b contacts .................................................................................... 2-65
2.8
Editing the Mnemonic List ........................................................................... 2-67
2.8.1 Displaying and terminating a mnemonic list ..................................................... 2-67
2.8.2 Copy, move, and delete .................................................................................... 2-69
2.9
Displaying the Use Status ............................................................................. 2-70
2.9.1 Displaying a use status list ............................................................................... 2-70
2.10 Setting the System .........................................................................................2-71
2.10.1 Setting the system ............................................................................................ 2-71
2.11 Entering and Developing Macros ................................................................ 2-72
2.11.1 Creating a macro file .........................................................................................2-72
2.11.2 Entering and developing macros ...................................................................... 2-74
2.12
2.12.1
2.12.2
2.12.3
Compilation .................................................................................................... 2-75

Executing compilation ....................................................................................... 2-75
Error display ......................................................................................................2-76
Double coil check .............................................................................................. 2-76
2.13
Printing Functions .........................................................................................2-77
(20)
2.13.1 Printing .............................................................................................................. 2-77

2.13.2 Preview display ................................................................................................. 2-81
2.14 Changing the Display Color on the Screen ................................................. 2-82
2.14.1 Changing display colors on the screen ............................................................. 2-82
Chapter 3
Simulator
3.1
Outline of the Simulator Functions .............................................................. 2-84
3.1.1 Outline of the functions ..................................................................................... 2-84
3.1.2 Restrictions in the simulator .............................................................................. 2-84
3.2
Starting up and Exiting from the Simulator ................................................. 2-86
3.2.1 Operating procedure for startup and exit .......................................................... 2-86
3.2.2 Name and function of each part of the screen .................................................. 2-88
Chapter 4
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
3.3.5
Ladder Monitor ............................................................................................... 2-89

Outline of the ladder monitor ............................................................................ 2-89
Executing scans ................................................................................................ 2-89
Executing steps .............................................................................................. 2-101
Jump and search ............................................................................................ 2-105
Stop/reset and device all clear ........................................................................ 2-108
3.4
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.3
3.4.4
3.4.5
Monitor All .................................................................................................... 2-109

Outline of monitor all ....................................................................................... 2-109
Displaying, saving, and reading the monitor all window ................................. 2-109
Monitor all window .......................................................................................... 2-113
Registering devices ........................................................................................ 2-113
Selecting and changing devices ..................................................................... 2-116
3.5
3.5.1
3.5.2
3.5.3
3.5.4
3.5.5
3.5.6
3.5.7
Registration Monitor .................................................................................... 2-119

Outline of the registration monitor ................................................................... 2-119
Displaying, saving, and reading the registration monitor ................................ 2-119
Registration monitor window ........................................................................... 2-122
Registering devices ........................................................................................ 2-122
Selecting and changing devices ..................................................................... 2-123
Manipulating timing charts .............................................................................. 2-128
Printing out the registration monitor ................................................................ 2-131
Monitor
4.1
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
Outline of the Monitor Functions ............................................................... 2-134

Outline of the functions ................................................................................... 2-134
Restrictions in the monitor .............................................................................. 2-134
Precautions for communication ...................................................................... 2-135
4.2
Communicating with the PLC ..................................................................... 2-136
4.2.1 Setting the PLC communication parameters .................................................. 2-136
4.2.2 Setting the comment transfer .......................................................................... 2-138
4.3
Starting up and Exiting from the Monitor .................................................. 2-139
4.3.1 Operating procedures for startup and exit ...................................................... 2-139
4.3.2 Name and function of each part of the screen ................................................ 2-143
4.4
4.4.1
4.4.2
4.4.3
4.4.4
4.4.5
4.4.6
4.4.7
Ladder Monitor ............................................................................................. 2-144

Outline of the ladder monitor .......................................................................... 2-144
Displaying the ladder monitor window ............................................................ 2-144
PLC error check .............................................................................................. 2-144
Starting the monitor ........................................................................................ 2-145
Stopping the monitor ....................................................................................... 2-145
Screen displayed while the monitor is running ............................................... 2-146
Setting the PLC operation mode ..................................................................... 2-147
4.5
Monitor All and Registration Monitor ......................................................... 2-148
4.5.1 Functions of the monitor all window ................................................................ 2-148
4.5.2 Functions of the registration monitor .............................................................. 2-148
4.6
4.6.1
4.6.2
4.6.3
(21)
Monitor Function .......................................................................................... 2-149

Disabling the input refresh/Disabling the output ............................................. 2-149
Changing the current values all at once ......................................................... 2-150
Device all clear ...............................................................................................2-154
Appendices
Appendix A Error Message List ......................................................................... 2-156
A-1
System errors ................................................................................................. 2-156
A-2
Memory errors ................................................................................................ 2-156
A-3
File errors ........................................................................................................ 2-157
A-4
Installation errors ............................................................................................ 2-157
A-5
Errors that occur in the editor ......................................................................... 2-158
A-6
Errors that occur in the monitor/simulator ....................................................... 2-159
A-7
Communication errors (displayed in the monitor) ........................................... 2-159
A-8
PLC errors ...................................................................................................... 2-160
A-9
Errors that occur during compilation ............................................................... 2-161
Appendix B Instruction List ............................................................................... 2-163
B-1
Basic instructions ............................................................................................ 2-163
B-2
Application instructions ................................................................................... 2-164
B-3
Arithmetic instructions ..................................................................................... 2-165
B-4
Interrupt instructions ....................................................................................... 2-166
Appendix C Relay No. List .................................................................................. 2-167
C-1
Relays, timers, counters, and memory numbers for each model ................... 2-167
Appendix D Special Utility Relay List ................................................................ 2-168
D-1
Special relays and arithmetic operation flags ................................................. 2-168
D-2
Special utility relays for high-speed counter (0) .............................................. 2-168
D-3
Special utility relays for high-speed counter (1) .............................................. 2-169
D-4
Other special utility relays ............................................................................... 2-169
D-5
Memory switches ............................................................................................ 2-172
D-6
Special memory list ......................................................................................... 2-172
Appendix E Devices for KV-10R(W)/T(W) to 80R(W)/T(W), KV-300 ................ 2-174
E-1
Special utility relays ........................................................................................ 2-174
E-2
Memory switches ............................................................................................ 2-176
E-3
Special memory list ......................................................................................... 2-176
Appendix F Sample Program List ..................................................................... 2-178
F-1
Description of sample ladder programs .......................................................... 2-178
Appendix G Quick Reference ............................................................................. 2-180
G-1 Editor .............................................................................................................. 2-180
G-2 Simulator ......................................................................................................... 2-188
G-3 Monitor ............................................................................................................ 2-195
Appendix H Notes for Programming ................................................................. 2-201
H-1
Circuits that must be modified ........................................................................ 2-201
H-2
Precautions for programming ......................................................................... 2-202
H-3
Programs which cannot be decompiled .......................................................... 2-203
Appendix I
List of Files Used ............................................................................ 2-204
Appendix J
Countermeasures for Frequent Communication Errors ............ 2-205
2-215
(22)

See 3-367.
Caution
No part of this manual may be reprinted or reproduced in any form or by any

means without the prior written permission of KEYENCE CORPORATION.
The content of this manual is subject to change without notice.
KEYENCE has thoroughly checked and reviewed this manual. Please contact
the sales office listed at the end of this manual if you have any questions or
comments regarding this manual or if you find an error.
KEYENCE assumes no liability for damages resulting from the use of the information in this manual, item 3 above notwithstanding.
KEYENCE will replace any incomplete or incorrectly collated manual.
All company names and product names in this manual are registered trademarks or
trademarks of their respective owners.
(23)
Chapter 1
Programming
This chapter describes basic knowledge including program creation procedures,
device configuration, relay assignments, special functions to set and confirm Visual
KV Series operations, as well as the extended ladder diagrams. Understand the
contents described here completely at first before creating programs.
For a detailed description of instructions, refer to "2.4. Instruction Details" (p.3-56).
1.1
Before Creating Programs .......................................................... 3-2
1.1.1
1.1.2
Flow from Introduction to Operation ........................................................... 3-2

Scan Time .................................................................................................. 3-3
1.2
User Memory ................................................................................ 3-4
1.2.1
Program Capacity ...................................................................................... 3-4
1.3
Device Configuration ................................................................... 3-5
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.3.3
1.3.4
1.3.5
1.3.6
1.3.7
1.3.8
1.3.9
1.3.10
1.3.11
1.3.12
Device List .................................................................................................. 3-5

Relay No. ................................................................................................... 3-7
Assigning Relay Nos. ................................................................................. 3-8
Input Relays ............................................................................................... 3-9
Output Relays .......................................................................................... 3-10
Internal Utility Relays ............................................................................... 3-11
Special Utility Relays ................................................................................ 3-12
Special Utility Relay List ........................................................................... 3-14
Timers and Counters ................................................................................ 3-18
Data Memories ......................................................................................... 3-19
Temporary Data Memory ......................................................................... 3-21
Relay Nos. and Functions ........................................................................ 3-22
1.4
Special Functions ...................................................................... 3-23
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
1.4.4
1.4.5
1.4.6
1.4.7
Input Time Constant Change Function ....................................................

Modifying the Input Relay Time Constant ................................................
Constant Scan Time Mode .......................................................................
Output Disabled Function .........................................................................
Input Refresh Disabled Function ..............................................................
Contact Comment Save Function ............................................................
Special Functions .....................................................................................
1.5
Extended Ladder Diagrams ...................................................... 3-29
1.5.1
1.5.2
1.5.3
Features of Extended Ladder Diagrams .................................................. 3-29

Advantages of Extended Ladder Diagrams ............................................. 3-30
Example of an Extended Ladder Diagram ............................................... 3-31
3-23
3-24
3-25
3-26
3-26
3-27
3-28
1.1 Before Creating Programs

This section describes what you should know before creating programs and operations for the Visual KV Series.
1.1.1 Flow from Introduction to Operation

This section describes an overview of program creation procedures, functions used,
and setting items.
In the example described below, a latch circuit is created as a program for the Visual
KV Series.
Introduction
Examining contents of operations

Figure 1 shows a latch circuit which operates as follows.
Pushbutton switch PB1: ON
Pilot lamp (PL) turns on.
Pushbutton switch PB2: OFF
Fig. 1
PB1 = N.O. contact switch
PB2 = N.C. contact switch
PB1
PB2
Pushbutton switch PB1: OFF Pilot lamp (PL) remains

lit even if PB1 turns
Pushbutton switch PB2: OFF
OFF.
Pushbutton switch PB1: OFF Pilot lamp (PL) goes out
Pushbutton switch PB2: ON
when PB2 is set to ON.
RL
(Relay)
Time chart
PB1 contact
PB2 contact
PL
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
PL
OFF
Next, a program is created that will use the same operation as this circuit to control a PLC.
Program examination
Circuit 1 shows relay symbols for the latch circuit.
Examine which contact in the Visual KV Series is used for each pushbutton switch and pilot lamp
(Table 1). When many I/O devices are required for control, expansion units should also be considered.
Table 1
Circuit 1
RL
PB1 PB2
RL
Relay (coil)
Relay (contact)
RL
Relay (contact)
PL
Pilot lamp
I/O device
Pushbutton switch PB1 (N.O. contact)
Pushbutton switch PB2 (N.C. contact)
Relay RL
Pilot lamp PL
Contact No.
Input relay (0000)
Input relay (0001)
Internal relay (1000)
Output coil (0500)
Program creation
Edit a program using the "LADDER BUILDER for KV" programming support software creation tool.
Ladder diagram
0000
0001*
1000
1000
1000
0500
Coding list
LD
0000
OR
1000
AND 0001
OUT 1000
LD
1000
OUT 0500
END
* Enter "N.O. (AND X001)" to 0001 to

use N.C. contact.
Transferring and confirming the program

Transfer the created program to the Visual KV Series, perform a test run, and then confirm operations
with the actual devices.
Operation
3-2
Chapter 1 Programming
1.1.2 Scan Time

Scan time
The Visual KV Series repeatedly executes a ladder based on the sequence circuit
as follows.
Writes the ON/OFF status of all input terminals to the input
memory before executing the program.
Input processing
Program execution
Output processing
Reads the ON/OFF status of each device (internal utility relay,

timer, counter, etc.) based on the instructions, and performs
arithmetic operations.
Writes the arithmetic operation result to the output memory.
Outputs the contents of the output memory to output terminals.
The duration of time required to perform one cycle is called the scan time (or cycle
time). The scan time varies based on program size and the instructions used in the
program.
Input response time delay

In addition to the I/O processing time, there is also an input time delay in the Visual
KV Series caused by the scan time. The input time delay is generated because the
input status can only be read during the input processing time. If the input status is
changed after input processing, the changed contents can only be read during the
next scan time.
In the figure below, 1 and 2 can be read but 3 cannot be read.
1
Input signal
ON
OFF
Scan time
Input processing
Program
execution
Output processing
Input processing
Program
execution
Output processing
Program
execution
Input processing
Read
Output processing
Input processing
Program
execution
Output processing
Input processing
Output processing
Read
Scan time
Reference: The maximum and minimum values of the input response time are as
follows.
Maximum value: Input time constant + Scan time x 2 + Output response delay time
Minimum value: Input time constant + Scan time + Output response delay time
Note 1: When the input time constant is made small by setting the HSP instruction,
special utility relay 2813, and data memory DM1940, a signal may not be received if
its ON time is shorter than the scan time.
Note 2: The INT instruction is independent of the scan time.
Note 3: The minimum scan time is 140 s (with the basic unit).
3-3
11
1.2 User Memory
1.2 User Memory

This section describes the allowable size (capacity) of a program which can be
created in the Visual KV Series.
1.2.1 Program Capacity

When a user program is created for the Visual KV Series, the maximum number of
steps a program can contain using the mnemonic diagram varies based on the byte
count of the instructions used. The instruction byte count is determined individually
for each instruction.
For more about byte counts for each instruction, refer to "2.1 Instruction List" (p.3-34).
Maximum number of lines in a program

In the KV-10xx/16xx, a program with approximately 2,000 steps can be written. In
the KV-24xx/40xx, a program with approximately 4,000 steps can be written.
Total byte count of the memory used by instructions 6,000 bytes / 12,000
bytes
Total byte count of the memory used by objects of instructions 12,000

bytes / 24,000 bytes
* In the description above, a value on the left side indicates the byte count for
the KV-10xx/16xx, while a value on the right side indicates the byte count for
the KV-24xx/40xx.
* The memory occupied by objects indicates the memory required to execute a
program when operation is started.
For example, the allowable number of steps to be written can be calculated from the
memory occupied by the instructions as follows.
12,000 bytes / 3 bytes (average byte count of an instruction) = 4,000 steps
Note: If either the memory occupied by the instructions or the memory occupied by
objects of a program exceeds the specified memory capacity, the program cannot
be written or executed.
Calculating the byte count used

The byte count used in this program can be calculated as shown in the table below.
#00020
T000
0000
0500
T000
0500
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
Byte count
00000
LD
0000
00001
OR
0500
00002
TMR
000#00020
00003
ANB
T000
OUT
0500
00004
Total
3-4
Number of objects
14 bytes
32 bytes
1.3 Device Configuration

"Device" is a general name for relays, registers, etc. processed by instructions.
This section describes the available devices in the Visual KV Series and their
general use.
1.3.1 Device List

Relay list
Relay No.
Normal use
High-speed
use (1)
High-speed use (2)
They function as B phase of high-speed

counters through specification of utility relays in
KV-10.
0000
0001
0002
Input relays
(Direct input
allowed area)
Interrupt inputs
INT0 to INT3
Remarks
(Polarity inversion
allowed)
Input captures
0003
High-speed
counter 0 input
High-speed
counter 1 input
0004
0005
0006
Input relays
0007
0008
0009
0010 to 0415
0502
A phase
input
B phase
input
Output relays
(Direct output
allowed area)
11
Preset
input
Input relays
0500
0501
High-speed
counter 0
High-speed
counter 1
High-speed
counter 0
High-speed
counter 1
High-speed
counter 0
High-speed
counter 1
High-speed counter 0 output

High-speed
Specified frequency
counter 1
pulse output
output
Ramp-up/down control output
0503
70 points
0504 to 0915
Output relays
76 points
1000 to 1915
Internal utility relays
160 points
2000 to 2815
Special utility relays
144 points
2900 to 2915
HKEY information storage area
3000 to 17915 Internal utility relays
2,144 points
Note 1: The ON/OFF status of the set functions is always cleared when the operation mode is changed from PROGRAM to RUN. However, special utility relays 2700
to 2715 are held even when the operation mode is changed from PROGRAM to
RUN or when the power is turned off.
Note 2: Internal utility relays can be held by setting the MEMSW instruction
List of I/O relays in basic units

Model
KV-10xx
KV-16xx
KV-24xx
KV-40xx
Basic input relays
0000 to 0005
0000 to 0009
0000 to 0015
0000 to 0107
Basic output relays
0500 to 0503
0500 to 0505
0500 to 0507
0500 to 0515
3-5
List of relays in expansion units

Input units
Connection
order
1st input
module
2nd input
module
3rd input
module
4th input
module
KV-E4X
KV-E8X
KV-40
KV-10/16/24
KV-10/16/24
KV-E16X
KV-40
KV-40
KV-10/16/24
100 to 103 200 to 203 100 to 107 200 to 207 100 to 115 200 to 215
200 to 203 300 to 303 200 to 207 300 to 307 200 to 215 300 to 315
300 to 303 400 to 403 300 to 307 400 to 407 300 to 315 400 to 415
400 to 403
400 to 407
400 to 415
Output units
Connection
order
1st output
module
2nd output
module
3rd output
module
4th output
module
KV-E4T(P)/R
KV-E8T(P)/R
KV-E16T(P)/R
600 to 603
600 to 607
600 to 615
700 to 703
700 to 707
700 to 715
800 to 803
800 to 807
800 to 815
900 to 903
900 to 907
900 to 915
I/O units
KV-E4XR/T(P)
Connection
order
1st input
module
2nd input
module
3rd input
module
4th input
module
1st output
module
2nd output
module
3rd output
module
4th output
module
*
*
3-6
Input relays
Output relays
KV-10/16/24
KV-40
100 to 103
200 to 203
200 to 203
300 to 303
300 to 303
400 to 403
KV-10/16/24
KV-40
603 to 606
603 to 606
703 to 703
703 to 703
803 to 803
803 to 803
903 to 903
903 to 903
400 to 403
Relay Nos. of expansion units are automatically assigned in the order of connection.
The connection order is counted only for input and output units. When I/O units are
connected, they are counted as input units and output units separately.
1.3.2 Relay No.

The relay No. configuration is shown below.
Channel No.
12515
Contact No.
(00 to 15)
Address No.
(Input: 0 to 4, output: 5 to 9)
Address No.
Address Nos. are assigned to basic units, input expansion units, output expansion
units, and I/O expansion units. Zero to 4 are assigned to input units, while 5 to 9 are
assigned to output units. Address Nos. assigned in a unit vary based on the number
of I/O terminals and the connection position of the unit.
Model
Basic units
Input expansion units
Output expansion units

I/O expansion units
Address Nos.
KV-10xx
0, 5
KV-16xx
0, 5
KV-24xx
0, 5
KV-40xx
0, 1, 5
kV-E4X
1 to 4*
KV-E8X
1 to 4*
KV-E16X
1 to 4*
KV-E4R/E4T(P)
6 to 9
KV-E8R/E8T(P)
6 to 9
KV-E16R/E16T(P)
6 to 9
KV-E4XR/E4XT(P)
1 to 4*, 6 to 9
11
* 2 to 4 in KV-40xx
Address No. assignment procedure

The address No. is represented as a number 0 to 9.
Address Nos. 0 to 4 are provided for inputs, while address Nos. 5 to 9 are provided for outputs.
3-7
Contact No.
Contact Nos. are input/output terminal Nos. of basic units, input expansion units,
output expansion units, and I/O expansion units.
The contact No. is represented as a number 0 to 15.
Example
In the KV-E4X, with 4 input terminals, the contact Nos. are 0 to 3. In the KVE16T(P), with 16 input terminals, the contact Nos. are 0 to 15.
In a unit with 16 or more terminals, the contact No. of the 17th terminal returns to
0 and its address No. is increased by 1.
Example
In the KV-40AR, with 40 terminals (24 input and 16 output terminals), address
No. 0 is assigned to input terminal Nos. 1 to 16 and address No. 1 is assigned to
input terminal Nos. 17 to 24
Channel No.
The channel No. is the higher order digit in the contact No.
1 1.3.3 Assigning Relay Nos.

When assigning relay Nos., the unit No. is based on the connection position of the
unit, and the address No. is determined based on the unit type and I/O contacts.
a) KV-16AR
Basic unit
Input: 10 points
Output: 6 points
b) KV-E4X Input
expansion
unit
Input: 4 points
c) KV-E8R Output
expansion unit
Output: 8 points
With the connections above, the relay Nos. for each unit are assigned as shown in
the table below.
3-8
Unit
Assigned relay Nos.
a) KV-16AR
0000 to 0009 (input) and 0500 to 0505 (output)
b) KV-E4X
0100 to 0103 (input)
c) KV-E8R
01600 to 0607 (output)
1.3.4 Input Relays

Input relays receive ON/OFF signals sent from external input equipment.
Note 1: Input relays function as contacts in programs. They cannot be used as relay
coils (outputs).
Note 2: There is no restriction of the contact type (N.O. or N.C.) used, the order the
relay Nos. are used, or the number of relays used.
Basic unit
Input relay time constant
Though the time constant is usually 10 ms 20%, it can be changed using the
following settings.
When the HSP instruction is used: 10 s 20%
While special utility relay 2813 remains ON, the time constant can be changed in
7 steps by setting data memory DM1940 as follows.
When DM1940 is set to 0: 10s 20%
1: 20 s 20%
2: 500 s 20%
3: 1 ms 20%
4: 2.5 ms 20%
5: 5 ms 20%
6: 10 ms 20%
Never set a numeric value of 7 or larger.
11
For more about changing the input time constant, refer to "1.4.1 Input Time Constant Change
Function" (p.3-23).
Hardware input (independent of scan time)

High-speed counter
When the time constant is set to 10 s using the HSP instruction or data memory
DM1940 (only while special utility relay 2813 remains ON), the maximum input
response of input relays 0004 and 0005 of CTH0 and CTH1 becomes 30 kHz.
INT instruction: 0000 to 0003

This instruction can receive any signal without regard to the scan time as far as
the signal ON time is longer than the input time constant.
"HSP instruction" (p.3-86), "INT instruction" (p.3-192), "4.1 High-speed Counter Instructions"
(p.3-204)
Note 1: While special utility relay 2813 remains ON, the input time constant can be
specified for all input relays in a basic unit.
Note 2: Never enter a number of 7 or larger to data memory DM1940.
Note 3: The input time constant specified by data memory DM1940 becomes
effective at the rising edge of special utility relay 2813. To change the input time
constant, first change data memory DM1940, then set special utility relay 2813 to
OFF and ON again. Or change the operation mode of a KV basic unit from PROGRAM to RUN.
Note 4: If the HSP instruction and special utility relay 2813 are used at the same
time, priority is given to the HSP instruction.
Note 5: Only when a high-speed counter input or INT instruction is given, available
input signals do not depend on the scan time.
3-9
Expansion unit
Input relay time constant
By setting special utility relays 2609 to 2612 to ON, the time constant in input expansion units can be set to 10 s.
Special utility
relay No.
2609*
2610
2611
2612
*
Function
Input time constant of input expansion unit
with relay Nos. 0100 to 0115
OFF: 10 ms, ON: 10 s

Not available with the KV-40xx
1.3.5 Output Relays

Output relays output the program execution results to the outside. There are two
types of outputs, relay and transistor.
Note 1: Output relays function as contacts and relay coils in programs.

Output operation time
Transistor output
OFF ON: 50 s or less (10 s or less in 500 to 502)
ON OFF: 250 s or less (10 s or less in 500 to 502, 100 s or less for other
outputs in the basic unit)
Relay output
OFF ON: 10 ms or less
ON OFF: 10 ms or less
Transistor output type
KV-10AT(P)/DT(P)
KV-16AT(P)/DT(P)
Relay output type

KV-10AR/DR
KV-16AR/DR
KV-24AT(P)/DT(P)
KV-40AT(P)/DT(P)
KV-24AR/DR
KV-40AR/DR
KV-E4T
KV-E8T(P)
KV-E4R
KV-E8R
KV-E16T(P)
KV-E4XT(P)
KV-E16R
KV-E4XR
Note 1: When programming direct clock pulses, output relays 0500 and 0501 are
used to output pulses in a transistor-type output unit.
Note 2: When the ramp-up/down control function is used, output relay 0502 outputs
positioning pulses in a transistor-type output unit.
"Chapter 5. Positioning Control" (p.3-253)
Note 3: When the specified frequency pulse output function is used, output relay
0501 outputs pulses in a transistor-type output unit.
"4.5.1 Specified Frequency Pulse Output Function" (p.3-228)
3-10
1.3.6 Internal Utility Relays

In a relay circuit, when one relay contact is used twice or more inside the circuit, a
multi-pole relay with the same number of poles as the number used may be needed.
Internal utility relays function only in programs, and eliminate the complexity of relay
circuits to facilitate circuit design.
Note 1: Internal utility relays function as contacts and relay coils in programs.
Retentive function of internal utility relays

Except for internal utility relays, all relays turn OFF when the operation mode is
changed or when operation is stopped via a power shutdown. When operation is
restarted, all relays remain OFF except relays whose input condition is ON. However, internal utility relays can be set using the MEMSW (memory switch) whether or
not they are to be retained. (Internal utility relays 2700 to 2715, however, are always
retained.)
When an internal utility relay is set to be retained, its ON/OFF status is stored even if
the power is turned off. By using the retained relay all clear function (FUN65), all
relays which are set to be retained can be set to OFF.
For more about setting the memory switch, refer to "MEMSW instruction" (p.3-92).
Application example of a retentive function: Lift vertical movement control

Internal utility relays 1000 and 1001 are set to be retained.
When the upper/lower limit switch turns ON, the direction of lift movement is
inverted. Even if the power is turned off while the lift is moving up (or down), the lift
continues to move up (or down) when the power is turned on again.
MEMSW
$0004
0000
Upper limit
switch
(0000)
0001
1000
0001
#00010
T000
0000
1001
Lower limit
switch
(0001)
Move-down
(0500)
1000
1001
#00010
T001
T000
0501
0500
T001
0500
0501
END
Move-up
(0501)
ENDH
Note: The retentive function is effective only when internal utility relays retained by
the self-retentive circuit or the SET/SFT/KEEP instruction are also retained by the
memory switch.
Internal utility relays are not retained in the program shown below.
0000
1001
3-11
11
1.3.7 Special Utility Relays

Each special utility relay has a unique function. By using special utility relays effectively, programs can be simplified and program control improved.
Note 1: A special utility relay can be used as many times as desired in one program.
Note 2: Special utility relays dedicated for reading can be used as contacts, but
cannot be used as outputs.
For more about relays dedicated for reading, refer to "1.3.8 Special Utility Relay List" (p.3-14).
Description
Relay 2002: Always ON
By setting an output relay to ON using relay 2002, the output relay can be used as a
"running indicator output".
2002
HSP
0100
2002
00000
LDA
DM0000
STA
Set the input time constant of relay 0100 to 10 s.

Transfer the ON/OFF status data of channel 0000 to DM0000.
Relay 2003: Always OFF.

Opposite that of relay 2002, use relay 2003 where it is not required to be turned on.
For example, when using only the up function of an up/down counter, use relay 2003
in the DW (down) input.
Relays 2004, 2005 and 2006: Clock pulse
For each relay, the time ratio is "ON:OFF = 1:1". (Accordingly, the ON time of relay
2005 is 0.05 sec/pulse.)
However, because these relays depend on the scan time, error as much as the scan
time is generated.
By combining an output relay, an "intermittent output" can be made.

By using relay 2006 as input for a counter, the counter can be used as a longterm timer.
1000
#03600
C000
2006
1000
C000
1000 turns ON at every hour.
Relay 2007: Remains OFF during only one scan when operation is started.
This relay can be used when a signal needs to be sent after a specific period
(equivalent to one scan) after operation is started. This relay can also be used for
an initial reset at the start of operation.
After one scan, this relay remains ON.
1000
2007
#00100
C005
0000
When operation is started, this relay returns

the current value of C005 to 0.
3-12

Relay 2008: Remains ON during only one scan when operation is started.
This relay can be used for an initial reset at the start of operation.
After one scan, this relay remains OFF.
0000
1000
SFT
D
1100
CLK
1100
2008
RES
When operation is started, this relay sets all internal

utility relays used by the SFT instruction to OFF.
2008
#00000
LDA
DM0000
STA
When operation is started, this relay returns the current

value of DM0000 to 0.
Relay 2813: Sets the input time constant of the CPU.

While relay 2813 remains ON, the input time constant of a basic unit can be set
using the value of DM1940.
3-13
11
1.3.8 Special Utility Relay List

Special relays and arithmetic operation flags
"1.3.7 Special Utility Relays" (p.3-12)
Relay No.
Always ON.
2003*
Always OFF.
2004*
0.01-s clock pulse (duty cycle: 50%)
2005*
2006*
2007*
Remains OFF during first scan after startup.
2008*
2010*
Remains ON during first scan after startup.

Turns ON when result of arithmetic operation is negative or when an
overflow is generated.
Turns ON when result of arithmetic operation is 0.
2011*
Turns ON when result of arithmetic operation is positive.
2012*
Turns ON when an arithmetic operation generates an error.
2009*
Function
2002*
Read-only relay.
Special utility relays for high-speed counter(0)
"Chapter 4. High-Speed Counters" (p.3-203)
Relay No.
Function
2100*
Internal clock used only for CTH0 (1 s)
2101*

Automatic clear of CTH0 when comparator CTC0
2103
turns ON.
Prohibits/permits direct output to 0500 when
2104
comparator CTC0 turns ON.
Direct output to 0500 is set to OFF when comparator
2105
CTC0 turns ON.
Direct output to 0500 is set to ON when comparator
2106
CTC0 turns ON.
ON/OFF status of output to 0500 is reversed each
2107
time comparator CTC0 turns ON.
2108
2109
CTC1 turns ON.
2110
CTC1 turns ON.
2111
A
utomatic clear of CTH0 when comparator CTC1
2112
turns ON.
Selects multiplication mode for comparator CTH0.
2113
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
2114
OFF: 1 pulse
OFF: x2
ON: x4 ON: 2 pulses
Read-only relay.
2102*
Multiplication
mode
2113
2114
ON: Cleared
OFF: Not cleared
ON: Prohibited
OFF: Permitted
ON: Set to OFF
OFF: Not set to OFF
ON: Set to ON
OFF: Not set to ON
ON: Reversed
OFF: Not reversed
ON: Prohibited
OFF: Permitted
ON: Set to OFF
OFF: Not set to OFF
ON: Set to ON
FF: Not set to ON
ON: Reversed
OFF: Not reversed
ON: Cleared
OFF: Not cleared
1 pulse
x2
x4
2 pulses
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Note: Never use special utility relays that are not shown above.
3-14
Special utility relays for high-speed counter(1)
"Chapter 4. High-Speed Counters" (p.3-203)
Relay No.
2200*
2201*
2202*

turns ON.
CTC2 turns ON.
CTC2 turns ON.
CTC3 turns ON.
CTC3 turns ON.
turns ON.
Selects multiplication mode for comparator CTH1.
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF: 1 pulse OFF: x2 ON: x4 ON: 2 pulses
2203
2204
2205
2206
2207
2208
2209
2210
2211
2212
2213
2214
*
Function
ON: Cleared
OFF: Not cleared
ON: Prohibited
OFF: Permitted
ON: Set to OFF
OFF: Not set to OFF
ON: Set to ON
OFF: Not set to ON
ON: Reversed
OFF: Not reversed
ON: Prohibited
OFF: Permitted
ON: Set to OFF
OFF: Not set to OFF
ON: Set to ON
OFF: Not set to ON
ON: Reversed
OFF: Not reversed
ON: Cleared
OFF: Not cleared
Read-only relay.
Multiplication
mode
2213
2214
1 pulse
x2
x4
2 pulses
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Other special utility relays

Relay No.
2305
Function
External outputs disabled
(outputs 0500 to 0915)
External refresh inputs disabled
(inputs 0000 to 0415)
Constant scan time mode
(write preset value in TM29)
Remains ON for one scan when scan time exceeds
preset constant scan time.
Start flag for frequency counter operation.
2306
Specified frequency pulse output
2307
2308
Error flag for specified frequency pulse output

Stops motor driver when turned ON.
Turns ON when motor driver is in operation. Stops motor driver in
emergencies when turned OFF by interrupt instruction.
Starts motor driver when turned ON (detection at rising edge).
Start flag for cam switch operation.
Turns ON when an error occurs in cam switch operation.
2300
2301
2303
2304
2309
2310
2314
2315
ON: Disabled
OFF: Not disabled
ON: Disabled
OFF: Not disabled
ON: Enabled
OFF: Disabled
ON: Enabled
OFF: Disabled
* Read-only relay.
3-15
11

Relay No.
2400
2401
2402
2403
2404
2405
2406
2407
2408
2409
2410
2411
2412
2413
2414
2415
2500
2501
2502
2503
2504
2505
2506
2507
2508
2509
2510
2511
2512
2513
2515
3-16
Function
Timing of CTH0 external signal
OFF
External preset
OFF
OFF
not used
ON
At falling edge
ON
OFF
At rising edge
ON
ON
Level
Interrupt polarity of INT

OFF
OFF
At rising edge
OFF
ON
At falling edge
ON
OFF
At rising edge
ON
ON
At both edges
Interrupt polarity of INT1

OFF
OFF
At rising edge
OFF
ON
At falling edge
ON
OFF
At rising edge
ON
ON
At both edges
CTH0 set as ring counter

ON: Set
OFF: Not set
Ignore phase B input when CTH0 is set to no multiplication mode.
ON: Ignore phase B input and always count up.
OFF: Use phase B input as usual.
Timing of CTH1 external preset
OFF
External preset
OFF
OFF
not used
ON
At falling edge
ON
OFF
At rising edge
ON
ON
Level

OFF
OFF
At rising edge
OFF
ON
At falling edge
ON
OFF
At rising edge
ON
ON
At both edges

OFF
OFF
At rising edge
OFF
ON
At falling edge
ON
OFF
At rising edge
ON
ON
At both edges
CTH1 set as ring counter

ON: Set
OFF: Not set
Ignore phase B input when CTH1 is set to no multiplication mode.
ON: Ignore phase B input and always count up.
OFF: Use phase B as usual.
Customized switch [F1] on KV-D20 operator interface panel is assigned.
Customized indicator lamp 1 on KV-D20 operator interface panel is
assigned.
assigned.
assigned.
assigned.
Permits change between operator
OFF: Not
mode and device mode of KV-D20
ON: Permitted
permitted
operator interface panel .
Permits the KV-D20 operator interface
OFF: Not
panel to be shifted between operator
ON: Permitted
permitted
mode and system mode.
Specifies the display language for the
ON: Japanese
OFF: English
KV-D20 operator interface panel
Sets the beep for the KV-D20 operator
ON: Use beep
OFF: No beep
interface panel
Reserved for system
Reserved for system
Displays a user message (contents of ON: Display
OFF: Do not
DM1950) in the Access Window
message
display message

Relay No.
2609
2610
2611
2612
2613
Function
Input time constant of input expansion unit with relay
Nos. 0100 to 0115
Nos. 0200 to 0215
Nos. 0300 to 0315
Nos. 0400 to 0415
Clearing of input at expansion disconnect
2712
Disconnect error OFF: Normal

ON: Disconnection in connected unit
2714
Use of high-speed input correction circuit

ON: Used OFF: Not used
OFF: 10 ms
ON: 10 s
OFF: 10 ms
ON: 10 s
OFF: 10 ms
ON: 10 s
OFF: 10 ms
ON: 10 s
OFF: Cleared
ON: Not cleared
This area is stored
even when the
operation mode is
changed from
PROGRAM to RUN,
or when the power is
turned off (without
being affected by the
MEMSW instruction).
This area is not
cleared even if the
utility relay All Clear
function is activated.
However, this area is
cleared when an All
Clear is executed
without registering a
program.
2715
ON while cam switch is in operation.
2800
Break signal send to communication port A (remains ON while sending).

Receives text data from communication port A, and remains ON during only
1 scan while receiving text data.
Communication port A text data acceptance error. Remains ON during only
1 scan ON when text data is received while either relay 2801 or relay 2803
is ON.
Communication port A text data receive error
Remains ON during only 1 scan when a text data receive error occurs.
Communication port A text data send start (remains ON during sending.)
Break signal send to communication port B (remains ON while sending).
Receives communication port B text data, and remains ON during only 1
scan while receiving text data.
Communication port B text data acceptance error.
Remains ON during only 1 scan ON when text data is being received while
relay 2806 or relay 2808 is ON.
Communication port B text data receive error
Remains ON during only 1 scan when a text data receive error occurs.
Communication port B text data send start (remains ON during sending.)
Turns ON when an abnormality occurs with backup battery.
2801
2802
2803
2804
2805
2806
2807
2808
2809
2812
2813
Sets input time constant to all inputs in basic module (except inputs used by
HSP instruction).
OFF: Sets input time constant to 10 ms.
ON: Refers to value stored in DM1940, then determines input time constant.
2814
HKEY instruction: Multiple keys are prohibited.
2815
HKEY instruction: Scan is finished.
2900 to 2915 HKEY information storage area.
3-17
11
1.3.9 Timers and Counters

Timers and counters can be set in a program, and their outputs can be used as
contacts elsewhere in the program. [There is no restriction on the contact type (N.O.
or N.C.) and the order of use.]
A same number can be assigned to only one timer or counter. For example, T005
and C005 cannot be used in the same program.
Timer/Counter list
Name
Timer
Counter
Timer (0.1-s timer)

High-speed timer
(0.01-s timer)
High-speed 1-ms timer
(0.001-s timer)
Counter
Up/down counter
Contact
T000 to T249
Coil
(instruction)
TMR000 to 249
TMH000 to 249
TMS000 to 249
C000 to C249
Number
250 in total
C000 to 249
UDC000 to 249
Description
Timers
When 0.1-s timers (TMR) and high-speed 0.001-s timers (TMS) are used as
contacts, the "Tnnn" No. is used for both types. However, the form for setting is
different. "TMRnnn#ddddd" is used for 0.1-s timers, "TMHnnn#ddddd" is used for
high-speed 0.01-s timers, and "TMSnnn#ddddd" is used for high-speed 1-ms
timers (nnn = timer No, ddddd = timer set value).
In a single program, different timer Nos. must be assigned to each of TMRnnn,

TMHnnn, and TMSnnn.
When the PLC is stopped, all timers are reset and their current values become
equivalent to set values.
Counters
When counters (C) and up/down counters (UDC) are used as contacts, the
"Cnnn" No. is used for both types. However, the form for setting is different.
"Cnnn#ddddd" is used for counters, while "UDCnnn#ddddd" is used for up/down
counters.
In one program, different numbers must be assigned to each of the counters and
up/down counters.
Even when operation is stopped, each counter stores whatever value it has at
that time.
"TMR instruction" (p.3-67), "TMH instruction" (p.3-68), "TMS instruction" (p.3-69), "C instruction" (p.372), "UDC instruction" (p.3-76).
High-speed counters and high-speed counter comparators

The Visual KV Se ries is equipped with two high-speed counters (CTH0 and CTH1)
and four high-speed counter comparators (CTC0, CTC1, CTC2, and CTC3) with a
30-kHz input response speed (frequency), two phases, and size of 16 or 24 bits.
Note: When a high-speed counter or high-speed counter comparator will be used as
a 24-bit device, a set value is required to be stored in a data memory using the
MEMSW instruction.
3-18
For details about high-speed counters and high-speed counter comparators, refer to "Chapter 4 Highspeed Counters" (p.3-203).
1.3.10 Data Memories

Data memories store various types of data.
Data memories are not usually used in a program that consists of contacts, coils,
timers, and counters. When arithmetic instructions are used, however, data memories can be used to store data for arithmetic operations as well as the results of
arithmetic operations.
DM No.
DM0 to DM999
Description
Not specified (can be used by user)
DM1000 to DM1099
Text receive port A
DM1100 to DM1199
Text send port A
DM1200 to DM1299
Text receive port B
DM1300 to DM1399
Text send port B
DM1400
DM1403
Cam switch function: The first output relay No.

Cam switch function: Comparison value in multi-step comparator
mode
Cam switch function: Pulse count of one cycle of equipment input
to CTH0
DM1404
Measurement cycle (ms)
DM1405
Result of frequency count (Hz)

Cam switch function: Set value of angle at which output relay
turns ON/OFF
Cam switch function: Set value of angle at which output relay +1
turns ON/OFF
:
Cam switch function: Set value of angle at which output relay +31
turns ON/OFF
Reserved by system (cannot be used by user)
DM1401
DM1402
DM1406/DM1407
DM1408/DM1409
:
DM1468/DM1469
DM1470
DM1471 to DM1479
DM1480
DM1481
DM1482
DM1483
DM1484
DM1485
DM1486

Ramp-up/down control function: Startup frequency (Hz) (200 to
50,000)
Ramp-up/down control function: Operating frequency (Hz) (200 to
50,000)
Ramp-up/down control function: Acceleration time (ms)
(0 to 4,000)
Ramp-up/down control function: Output pulse count (lower digit)
(0 to 65,535)
Ramp-up/down control function: Output pulse count (upper digit)
(0 to 65,535)
Ramp-up/down control function: Error code (11 to 17)
DM1487 to DM1499
DM1565 to DM1569
DM1578 and DM1579 Not specified (can be used by user)

DM1580 to DM1599
KV-D20 Operator interface panel: Display device No.
DM1664 to DM1699
DM1670 to DM1675

KV-D20 Operator interface panel: Screen shift permission setting
in operator mode
DM1676
3-19
11

DM No.
DM1680 to DM1699
Description
Area for direct access mode for the KV-D20 operator interface
panel
KV-D20 Operator interface panel: Display device attributes
DM1764 to DM1799
DM1806 to DM1809
DM1826 to DM1899
DM1677 to DM1679
DM1900/DM1901*
24-bit value read from CTH0 (lower digit/upper digit)
DM1902/DM1903*
24-bit value read from CTH1 (lower digit/upper digit)
DM1904/DM1905*
24-bit value read from CTC0 (lower digit/upper digit)
DM1906/DM1907*
DM1908/DM1909*
DM1910/DM1911*
DM1912/DM1913
24-bit current value written to CTH0 (lower digit/upper digit)
DM1914/DM1915
24-bit current value written to CTH1 (lower digit/upper digit)
DM1916/DM1917
24-bit current value written to CTC0 (lower digit/upper digit)
DM1918/DM1919
DM1920/DM1921
DM1922/DM1923
DM1924/DM1925
CTH0 preset input (lower digit/upper digit)
DM1926/DM1927
CTH1 preset input (lower digit/upper digit)
DM1928/DM1929*
Input capture when INT0 is generated (lower digit/upper digit)
DM1930/DM1931*
DM1932/DM1933*
DM1934/DM1935*
DM1936
Specified frequency pulse output function: Set frequency (Hz)
DM1937
I/O expansion unit connection information
DM1938
Digital trimmer No. 0: Upper limit value
DM1939
Digital trimmer No. 1: Upper limit value

Input time constant setting
0: 10 s 1: 20 s
2: 500 s
3: 1 m s
4: 2.5 ms 5: 5 ms
6: 10 ms
Any other value cannot be set.
Number of instructions converted into 1 scan when division
conversion is performed
DM1940
DM1941 to DM1943
DM1944
DM1945 to DM1949
DM1950
DM1951 to DM1999
Access window error display (0 to 255)

Read-only relay.
Note 1: 16-bit binary data is stored in each of the data memories as for internal
registers.
Note 2: The data stored in data memories is held even when the power is turned off
or when the All Clear function is executed. The backup time is 20 days or more in
the KV-10xx, and 2 months or more in other models.
Note 3: DM1000 to DM1999 are assigned as special data memories.
3-20
1.3.11 Temporary Data Memory

These data memories are used for temporary storage. When arithmetic instructions
are used, temporary data memories can be used to temporarily store the data for
arithmetic operations as well as the results of arithmetic operations.
TM No.
Usage
Attribute
TM00
Used for arithmetic operations (DIV/MUL)
R/W
TM01
Used for arithmetic operations (DIV)
R/W
TM02 to TM27 Not specified (can be used by user)

Stores scan time (module: 1 ms) beyond set value while
TM28
constant scan time operation is performed.
Stores set value (module: 1 ms) of constant scan time
TM29
operation
TM30
Stores CTC0 value when INT3 interruption is given.
Stores measured scan time (mean value of every 10
TM31
scans) (module: 0.1 ms).
Attribute
*
R: Read
R/W
R*
R/W
R*
R
W: Write
Both R and W are enabled when special functions are not used.
Note 1: Temporary data memories are initialized when the power is turned on.
Note 2: TM20, TM30, and TM31 are read-only, so cannot be used for writing.
However, TM28 can be used for both reading and writing if special functions are not
used.
Note 3: TM00 and TM01 are used by the MUL and DIV instructions. Never use them
for any other purpose.
3-21
11
1.3.12 Relay Nos. and Functions

Assignment of Relay Nos.
The components of a relay no. are shown below.
0 7 5 1 5
Channel No.
Relay No. (00 to 15)
Module No. (07 to 17)
Address No. Input (0 to 4)

Output (5 to 9)
Unit Nos.
Unit nos. are assigned to units within the KV-300 system, with the unit connected to
the right of the KV-300 CPU (see the figure below) assigned as no. 7. The CPU is
assigned as unit no. 0.
Power supply unit
CPU
0
16
17
Address Nos.
Address nos. are assigned to the input units, output units, and I/O terminal units.
The following table shows the assignment of address nos. to units.
Unit
KV-300 CPU
CPU
0, 5
KV-C16X
16-input unit
KV-C32X
32-input unit
0. 1
KV-B16R
16-output unit
KV-B16S
16-output unit
KV-C32T
32-output unit
5, 6
KV-R8X
8-input terminal unit
0 to 4 *
KV-R16X
16-input terminal unit
KV-R8R
8-output terminal unit
KV-R16R
KV-R8T
KV-R16T
3-22
Address No.
5 to 9 *
The KV-R1A I/O Distribution Unit accommodates 5 input units and 5 output units.
Addresses are set with address switches.
1.4 Special Functions

This section describes special functions to set and confirm operations on the Visual
KV Series, and useful functions for program debugging and adjustment of external
equipment.
1.4.1 Input Time Constant Change Function

The input time constant can be changed when a signal is read from an input contact.
When connecting external equipment which has no contact in which chattering such
as transistor outputs does not occur, and inputting pulses of short width, the input
time constant change function can be used to decrease the input time constant.
Setting the input time constant for basic units using special utility relays
The input time constant for a basic unit can be changed using data memory DM1940
and special utility relay 2813.
Though the input time constant is usually 10 ms, it can be changed to a value that
corresponds to the number stored in DM1940 by setting special utility relay 2813 to
ON.
If the HSP instruction and special utility relay 2813 are used at the same time,
priority is given to the HSP instruction and the number stored in DM1940 is ignored.
Special utility relay 2813
OFF: Sets the input time constant to 10 ms.
ON: Refers to the number stored in DM1940, then determines the input time
constant.
Number stored in DM1940
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7 or more
Input time constant

10 s
20 s
500 s
1 ms
2.5 ms
5 ms
10 ms
Not allowed
Note 1: Be sure to set the input time constant to 10 s when using the 30-kHz high-speed
counter input.
Note 2: Never enter a number that is 7 or larger to data memory DM1940.
Note 3: The input time constant specified by data memory DM1940 becomes effective at the
rising edge of special utility relay 2813.
To change the input time constant, first change data memory DM1940, then set special utility
relay to OFF and ON again. Or change the operation mode of the KV basic unit from
PROGRAM to RUN.
Note 4: The input time constant for input relays set by the HSP instruction is 10 s.
For more about the HSP instruction, refer to "HSP instruction" (p.3-86).
For more about setting the input time constant for expansion units, refer to "Input time
constant for expansion units" (p.1-76).
Note 5: Set the special utility relay using the SET/RES instructions.
Note 6: When the input time constant is set to 1 ms or less, connect the output equipment
without contacts. If connecting output equipment with contacts, contact bounds may enter.
Note 7: Except for interrupts and high-speed counters, signals whose ON time is shorter than
the scan time may not be received even if the input time constant is set to a small value.
3-23
11
1.4.2 Modifying the Input Relay Time Constant
KV-300 PLC Only
Modifying with External Switches

KV-C32X/C16X KV-R16X/R8X
Input time constant
selection switch
3
24V
1 ms
0 ms 10 ms
5V 0 ms 10 ms
1 ms
As shown in above figures, an external switch can be used to select the input time
constant only on the KV-C32X/C16X Connector Input Units and KV-R16X/R8X I/O
Terminal Units.
In the following table, white represents the switch position.

Input time constant
KV-C32X/C16X
KV-R16X/R8X
0ms 1ms 10ms
25 s 20%
0ms 1ms 10ms

0ms 1ms 10ms
1 ms 20%
0ms 1ms 10ms
10 ms 20%
0ms 1ms 10ms
0ms 1ms 10ms
Note: Connect a solid-state contact output device when the input time constant is
set to 1 ms for 25 s. Connection of a contact output device may result in contact
bounce.
Modification within the CPU

The input time constant for KV-300 CPU input relay nos. 0000 to 0009 can be
modified in the program.
Input time constant
Setting
10 s 20%
Turn ON special utility relay 2813 (0000 to 0009).
25 s 20%
Use the HSP instruction.
10 ms 20%
Default
Note 1: When using the 30 kHz high-speed counter input, turn ON special utility
relay 2813.
Note 2: When special utility relay 2813 is ON, the input time constant of input relays
0000 to 0009 is set to 10 s 20%.
Note 3: The input time constant remains 10 ms 20% if the HSP instruction is used
when special utility relay 2813 is ON.
Note 4: When the input time constant is set to 10 s or 25 s, a solid-state output
device must be connected. Connection of a contact output device may result in
contact bounce.
3-24
1.4.3 Constant Scan Time Mode

This function executes a program while keeping the scan time at a constant value
which usually changes based on the processing contents. This section describes
how to set this function.
Though the scan time changes usually depending on the processing contents, it can
be kept at a constant value by using this function. This function can be used to
acquire data from external equipment at a constant time interval.
The set value should be longer than the maximum scan time because the scan time
is kept at a constant value until the end of processing.
Setting procedure
Set the desired scan time to temporary data memory TM29.
Set special utility relay 2303 to ON.
The scan time is written to TM31.
The scan time can be set in 1-ms increments.
Enter the desired scan time (ms) to the temporary data memory.
Setting example
In this example, the scan time is kept at 20 ms.
2008
#00020
LDA
TM29
STA
11
2303
SET
Note 1: Be sure to set the constant scan time value so it is larger than the actual
scan time.
Note 2: If the actual scan time exceeds the set scan time, special utility relay 2304
turns ON (during the next 1 scan) while the actual scan time is written to TM28 (unit:
1 ms).
Note 3: The scan time can be set up to 200 ms in temporary data memory TM29. If
a value larger than 200 ms is input, it will be treated as 200 ms.
3-25
1.4.4 Output Disabled Function

This function disables outputs from each unit in RUN mode without regard to the
program used. By disabling external outputs, the program can be debugged while
external equipment is connected, even when output of signals to the external
equipment is not desired.
Setting procedure
When special utility relay 2300 turns ON, all outputs from all output relays (0500 to
0915) to the outside are cleared after 1 scan is finished.
However, the display in the Access Window and the output indicator lamps are not
cleared.
Setting example
By setting/resetting special utility relay 2300 using the Access Window, the "KV
IncrediWare (DOS)" or "LADDER BUILDER for KV" programming support software,
or the KV-P3E(01) handheld programmer, the external output prohibition function
can be used.
External outputs are prohibited while input 0000 is ON. External outputs are permitted, though, while input 0000 is OFF.
0000
2300
For more about operating procedures, refer to the "Chapter 6. Handheld Programmer" (p.1-195).
1.4.5 Input Refresh Disabled Function

This function disables the update of inputs from each unit triggered by input signals
from external equipment.
By disabling external input refresh, inputs from each unit can be set to ON/OFF in
monitor status without mechanical operations to enable a program check.
Setting procedure
When special utility relay 2301 turns ON, input refresh (read of input relays) for all
input relays (0000 to 0415 used by the QL Series) is skipped.
In this status, inputs can be set to ON/OFF from the Access Window, the "KV
or the KV-P3E(01) handheld programmer.
Setting example
By setting/resetting special utility relay 2301 using the Access Window, the "KV
or the KV-P3E(01) handheld programmer, the external input refresh prohibition
function can be used.
External input refresh is prohibited while input 0000 is ON. External input refresh is
permitted, though, while input 0000 is OFF.
0000
2301
For more about operating procedures, refer to the "Chapter 6. Handheld Programmer" (p.1-195).
Note: Once external input refresh is prohibited, it can be permitted only by setting
special utility relay 2301 to OFF from the Access Window, the "KV IncrediWare
(DOS)" or "LADDER BUILDER for KV" programming support software, or the KVP3E(01) handheld programmer.
3-26
1.5 Extended Ladder Diagrams
1.4.6 Contact Comment Save Function
This function transfers contact comments to the Visual KV Series using the "KV
IncrediWare (DOS)" or "LADDER BUILDER for KV" programming support
software.
The Visual KV Series can store not only programs but also comments registered
to each contact using the "KV IncrediWare (DOS)" or "LADDER BUILDER for
KV" programming support software.
A program may not be easy to understand if only device Nos. are used. By
registering comments to the contacts, the program can be easily debugged and
more efficiently maintained.
The number of contact comments that can be transferred is up to 1,000 for both
normal transfer and compression transfer.
The KV-D20 operator interface panel includes the contact comment display
function.
For more about operating procedures, refer to "2.5 Entering Comments/Labels" (p.1-46) and "4.2.2
Setting the comment transfer" (p.2-138).
Note 1: Line comments cannot be stored.

Note 2: The KV-P3E(01) handheld programmer cannot read or write contact comments.
Note 3: The KV-D20 operator interface panel cannot display contact comments
which have been compressed and transferred.
3-27
11
1.4.7 Special Functions
KV-300 PLC only
Constant Scan Time Mode

In this mode, operation can take place according to a preset scan time (in ms).
Setting
Write the desired scan time into TM29 (temporary data memory), then turn on
special utility relay No. 2303. The scan time can also be written into TM31. Specify a
scan time in increments of 10 ms (a value of less than 10 ms is invalid).
Here, write a value into TM equivalent to 10 times the scan time.
Example
Set the constant scan time to 20 ms.
02008
#00200
LDA
TM29
STA
2303
SET
Note 1: The set value for the constant scan time must be greater than the actual
scan time. Otherwise, special utility relay 2304 turns on during every scan to disable
constant scan time mode.
Note 2: If the scan time exceeds the set value, special utility relay no. 2304 turns on
during the next scan.
Output Disabled Function

During checking of a program, this function clears output from output relays regardless of the program currently running.
Setting
Turn on special utility relay No. 2300. After one scan is completed, all output relays
(00500 to 00503, 07500 to 17915) are cleared.
Example
Use the output disabled function by executing FORCED RESET/RESET to special
utility relay No. 2300 from the monitor display.
To execute FORCED RESET or RESET, refer to "Chapter 6 Handheld Programmer" (p.1-195).
Input Refresh Disabled Function

Set this function if it is desired to turn ON/OFF input relays from the monitor display
without activating the machine when checking a program.
Setting
Turn ON special utility relay No. 2301 to skip input refresh (reading from input
relays). Input relays can then be turned ON/OFF with the KV-P3E(01) or with KV
IncrediWare (DOS) on the monitor display.
Example
Set input relay No. 0000 to ON to disable input refresh; set to OFF to enable input
refresh.
0000
2301
Note: If input refresh is disabled, it is not enabled until input relay No. 0000 is turned
on from the handheld programmer.
3-28

This section describes KEYENCEs unique extended ladder diagram.
1.5.1 Features of Extended Ladder Diagrams

The extended ladder diagram is a programming method developed to reduce
problems related to design, testing, operation, and maintenance of programs.
In a conventional ladder diagram, output instructions can be written only on the right
side of a ladder diagram. On the other hand, in an extended ladder diagram, output
instructions can be written anywhere except on the left. As the result, the programs
shown below can be written.
Mixture of input and output circuits
Conventional ladder diagram
Only input circuits

can be written.
Only output
circuits can
be written.
Extended ladder diagram
Only input
circuits can
be
assembled.
Both input
circuits and
output circuits
can be
assembled.
Only output
circuits can
be
assembled.
Connection of two or more instructions on one line

Instructions can be written only from the

left end to the right end on one line.
Many instructions can be connected.
Branch from output coil

Branches can be made only from input

contacts.
Branches can also be made from output

coils.
There is only a single line, so the ladder

diagram is easier to understand.
Three lines are required.
3-29
11
1.5.2 Advantages of Extended Ladder Diagrams

The number of lines in a ladder diagram can be reduced.
Because both output instructions and input instructions can be written side by side,
the number of program lines can be reduced.
As the result, the contents of the program can be seen at a glance.
Example
When DM0000 stores 1000, 0500 turns ON.
2000, 0501 turns ON.
3000, 0502 turns ON.

DM0000 #01000
LDA
CMP
2010
0500
#01000
CMP
#02000
CMP
2010
0501
2010
0500
#03000
CMP
2010
0502
2002
#02000
CMP
2010
0501
2002
#03000
CMP
2010
0502
DM0000
LDA
2002
2002
In a conventional ladder diagram, operations

performed by the program cannot be easily
understood. In an extended ladder diagram,
operations performed by the program can be
understood at a glance.
Processing sequence is clear.

Ladder symbols can be laid out in processing sequence, so the program flow is
easier to understand. In addition, maintainability is considerably improved.
Example
When the start switch is set to ON, a lamp is lit for three seconds, a buzzer is
sounded for two seconds, and then the motor starts to rotate.
0000
1100
DIFU
1100
1000
STG
0500
#00030
T000
T000
1001
JMP
1001
STG
0501
#00020
T001
T001
1002
JMP
1002
STG
0502
0000
1000
SET
ENDS

0000
1000
T000
1001
T001
T001
T002
1001
#00020
T001
#00030
T002
1001
0500
1003
3-30
1001
STG
1003
1003
When the start switch (0000) is set to OFF, the motor is stopped
and all operations are reset.
#00010
T000
1003
1002
When timer 1 turns ON two seconds later, the buzzer is stopped

and the motor (0502) starts to rotate.
0000
1002
1002
When timer 0 turns ON three seconds later, the lamp goes out, a
buzzer (0501) is sounded, and timer 1 is activated.
1000
DIFU
T002
T000
When the start switch (0000) is set to ON, a lamp (0500) is lit and
timer 0 is activated.
0501
1000
DIFU
1000
1001
SET
0500
#00010
T000
T000
1002
JMP
1002
STG
0501
#00020
T001
T001
1003
JMP
1003
STG
0500
#00030
T002
T002
1001
JMP
0501
By using an extended ladder diagram as shown

above, the program can be executed in the
sequence of the processing to be performed. So
even a person who uses a relay sequence for the
first time can understand the processing contents.
By combining the STG instruction, double coils
can also be used.

Note: When an extended ladder diagram is used, the number of lines in ladder
diagram may be reduced. However, this may not necessarily reduce the number of
mnemonics in the program.
0000
0500
0000
0500
0501
0501
LD 0000
OUT 0500
OUT 0501
LD 0000
OUT 0500
CON
OUT 0501
The CON instruction for connection is added.
(The scan time is not affected.)
1.5.3 Example of an Extended Ladder Diagram

Using W-UE
Only when inputs are given in the order "0000 0001 0002", output 0500 turns
ON.
1002
DIFU
0001
0002
1002
1003
DIFU
0000
1000
1000
1001
1000
1003
At the rising edge of input

0001, 1002 turns ON.
At the rising edge of input
1003, 1002 turns ON.
If input 0000 is ON, 1000
turns ON.

0000
0001
1000
1000
0002
1001
0500
1001
Input 0000 Input 0001 Input 0002 Output 0500

turns ON. turns ON. turns ON. turns ON.
If 1000 is ON, 1001 turns ON.
1001
1001
0500
When 1001 turns ON, output 0500

turns ON.
Because the program can be written in only one line when an extended adder
diagram is used, it is easier to look at and understand compared with a program
written using a conventional ladder diagram.
3-31
11
3-32
Chapter 2
Instructions
Describes the concrete usage of instructions in the KV Series.
Refer to "Chapter 3 Interrupts" on page 3-191 for details of interrupt instructions.
Refer to "Chapter 4 High-speed counters" on page 3-203 for details of the highspeed counters used in the application instruction.
2.1
Instruction List [Visual KV Series] ....................................... 3-34
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
2.1.5
Basic Instructions ................................................................................. 3-34

Application Instructions ........................................................................ 3-36
Arithmetic Instructions .......................................................................... 3-38
Interrupt Instructions ............................................................................ 3-41
Function No. List (Alphabetical order) .................................................. 3-41
2.2
Instruction List [KV-300 Series, KV-10/80] .......................... 3-42
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4

Interrupt Instructions ............................................................................ 3-54
2.3
Convention Details ................................................................. 3-55
2.4
Instruction Details .................................................................. 3-56
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.4.3

2.5
Programming Notes ............................................................... 3-189
2.1 Instruction List
Visual KV Series
Visual KV Series
The KV Series uses 80 instructions.

The instructions are divided into four categories according to their functions: basic
instructions, application instructions, arithmetic instructions, and interrupt instructions.
The following is an overview of applications and functions. For details, refer to the
respective description pages for each instruction.
2.1.1 Basic Instructions

Instruction
Symbol
nnnn
LOAD
LOAD BAR
nnnn
AND
nnnn
Function
Exec.time
(s)
Bytes
Page
LD
Connects N.O. contact to bus.
0.7 to 1.6
3 (12)
3-57
LDB
Connects N.C. contact to bus.
0.7 to 1.6
3 (12)
3-57
0.7 to 0.9
3 (8)
3-58
0.7 to 0.9
3 (8)
3-58
Mnemonic Operand Operand value
AND
R No.
T/C No.
Connects N.O. contact in

0000 to 17915 series with previous contact.
T000 to T249
C000 to C249 Connects N.C. contact in
CTC0 to CTC3 series with previous contact.
AND BAR
nnnn
OR
nnnn
OR
Connects N.O. contact in

parallel with previous contact.
0.7 to 0.9
3 (8)
3-60
OR BAR
nnnn
ORB
Connects N.C. contact in

parallel with previous contact.
0.7 to 0.9
3 (8)
3-60
0.8
1 (4)
3-61
0.8
1 (4)
3-63
1.5
3 (12)
3-65
1.5
3 (12)
3-65
1.9 to 12.8
3 (14)
3-66
0500 to 1915
2009
2100 to 17915
Forces R/T/C OFF when input 1.9 to 20.5
T000 to T249
is ON.
C000 to C249
CTH0 to CTH1
CTC0 to CTC3
3 (14)
3-66
ANB
AND LOAD
ANL
OR LOAD
ORL
OUT
nnnn
Connects in series blocks

made of one or more
contacts.
Connects in parallel blocks
made of one or more
contacts.
OUT
R No.
OUT BAR
SET
nnnn
nnnn
SET
OUB
0500 to 1915
2009
2300 to 17915 Forces relay ON and holds
T000 to T249 this status when input is ON.
C000 to C249
SET
R No.
T/C No.
nnnn
RES
RES
0.1-s
TIMER
#ddddd
Txxx
TMR
0.01-s
TIMER
#ddddd
T
Txxx
H
TMH
(FUN49)
RESET
3-34
Outputs input ON/OFF status

0500 to 1915 to R coil.
2009
2300 to 17915 Outputs inverted input ON/
OFF status to R coil.
T No.,
# preset
value
Chapter 2 Instructions
000 to 249
#00000 to
#65535
16-bit on-delay T that counts

down in 0.1-s decrements.
12.0 to 17.8
2 (6)
3-67
16-bit on-delay T that counts

12.0 to 17.8
2 (6)
3-68
Exec.time
(s)
Bytes
Page
16-bit on-delay T that

T No.,
000 to 249
# preset value #0000 to #65535 counts down in 1-ms
decrements.
12.0 to 17.8
2 (7)
3-69
#00000 to
# preset value,
#65535
Sets 16-bit up-counter.
C No., counter 000 to 249
input R
0000 to 17915
12.0 to 17.8
4 (7)
3-72
13.0 to 24.0
2 (10)
3-76
3 (10)
3-78
3 (10)
3-78
3 (11)
3-80
(*)
5 (15)
3-82
Reduces input relay time

constant to 10 s for
higher input response.
3.8 to 9.4
3 (8)
3-86
MC
(FUN24)
Selects ON/OFF status of

R coils, Ts, or Cs.
0.2
1 (4)
3-89
MCR
MCR
(FUN25)
Represents end of MC.
0.2
1 (0)
3-89
MEMSW
$xxxx
MEMSW
(FUN26)
Sets memory switches.
3 (0)
3-92
Performs no operation.
1 (0)
3-94
END
Indicates end of each

routine of program.
1 (1)
3-94
ENDH
Indicates end of entire

program.
1 (0)
3-94
Instruction
Symbol
Mnemonic
1-ms
TIMER
#ddddd
T
S Txxx
TMS
(FUN51)
COUNTER
#ddddd
Cxxx
nnnn
UP-DOWN
COUNTER
UP
DW #ddddd
RES
DIFFERENTIATE UP
nnnn
DIFU
DIFFERENTIATE
DOWN
nnnn
DIFD
KEEP
UDC xxx
UDC
(FUN52)
DIFD
(FUN09)
KEEP
KEEP
(FUN22)
SET nnnn
RES
SFT
(FUN39)
D
nnnn
CLK
RES mmmm
HSP
nnnn
MASTER
CONTROL
MC
MEMORY
SWITCH
HSP
(FUN18)
END HI
R No.
nnnn: 1st R
No. mmmm:
Last R No.
R No.
$ constant
NOP
(FUN30)
NOP
END
C No.,
# preset value
R No.
HIGH
SPEED
MASTER
CONTROL
RESET
Operand
DIFU
(FUN10)
SFT
SHIFT
Visual KV Series
END
ENDH
Operand value
000 to 249
#00000 to
#65535
1000 to 1915
3000 to 9915
0500 to 1915
2009
2100 to 17915
Function
Sets a 16-bit up-down

counter.
Turns ON R for 1 scan

11.2 to 13.2
time at rising edge of
input.
10.0 to 12.8
time at falling edge of
input.
Turns ON R and holds this
status when SET input is ON.
8.2 to 19.8
Turns OFF R when RESET
input is ON.
1000 to 1915
Sets shift register.
3000 to 9915
(KV-10)
0000 to 0005
(KV-16)
0000 to 0009
(KV-24)
0000 to 0015
(KV-40)
0000 to 0107
$ 0000 to
$ FFFF
Number of bytes represents the memory capacity required for each instruction.
Number in ( ) represents the memory capacity required for object code of each
instruction.
*1 34 + 0.25 + n x 0.25 (n: No. of shift steps)
All operand values are shown in normal notation. The corresponding relay numbers in X-Y-M notation are shown below:
Normal notation
0000 to 0415
0500 to 0915
1000 to 6915
7000 to 17915
X-Y-M notation
X000 to X04F
Y050 to Y09F
M1000 to M6915
X700 to X174F or Y750 to Y179F
3-35
12
Visual KV Series
2.1.2 Application Instructions

Instruction
Symbol
Mnemonic
Operand Operand value
WAIT ON
nnnn
ON
mmmm
W-ON
WAIT OFF
nnnn
OFF
mmmm
W-OFF
17915
T000 to T249
nnnn:
R, T, C C000 to C249
CTC0 to CTC3
Nos.
mmmm:
mmmm: 1000 to 1915
3000 to 9915
R No.
1000 to 1915
R No.
WAIT UP
EDGE
WAIT
DOWN
EDGE
W-UE
nnnn
mmmm
CON
(FUN 06)
PUSH
MPS
READ
MRD
POP
MPP
nnnn
STG
nnnn
JMP
JMP
(FUN 21)
END
STAGE
ENDS
ENDS
(FUN 14)
STEP
STEP END
STP
nnnn
STP
(FUN 45)
STE
STE
(FUN 43)
Page
5 (12)
3-96
5 (12)
3-96
5 (12)
3-98
1 (0)
3-98
1 (4)
3-102
3.2
1 (4)
3-103
6.8
1 (4)
3-103
10.5 to 13.0
3 (10)
3-103
Executes instructions in STG

block when R (operand) is ON. 4.5 to 12.5
3 (8)
3-106
1 (4)
3-106
2.5
3 (10)
3-106
5 (12)
1 (0)
3-114
Turns ON
3-114
R (output operand [mmmm])

when R, T, or C (input operand 10.4 to 12.6
[nnnn]) is ON.
Turns ON R (output operand
[mmmm]) when R, T, or C (input 13.6 to 18.5
operand [nnnn]) is OFF.
[mmmm]) at rising edge of R, T, 13.6 to 18.5
or C (input operand [nnnn]).
Reads input status and

arithmetic flag stored with
PUSH.
Reads & clears input status
and arithmetic flag stored
with PUSH.
R, T, C
Nos.
3000 to 9915
0000 to 0009 When input is ON, turns R of
current stage OFF and moves 4.3 to 7.5
to stage specified by operand.
Turns current stage OFF and
next stage ON when input is
ON.
R No.
nnnn:
0000 to
0500 to 9915
Executes program between
T000 to T249 STP & STE when R (operC000 to C249 and) is ON.
CTC0 to CTC3
11.2 to 13.4
Is used with STEP to make
program step.
instruction.
All operand values are shown in normal notation. The corresponding relay
numbers in X-Y-M notation are shown below:
Normal notation
0000 to 0415
0500 to 0915
1000 to 6915
7000 to 17915
3-36
Bytes
Stores input status and

arithmetic flag.
STG
(FUN 44)
JUMP
Exec.time
(s)

[mmmm]) at falling edge of R, T, 6.8 to 5.3
or C (input operand [nnnn]).
Represents series connection
of output instruction together
with another instruction.
W-DE
CONNECT
STAGE
nnnn
mmmm
Function
X-Y-M notation
X000 to X04F
Y050 to Y09F
M1000 to M6915
Instruction
INTERVAL
TIMER
16-BIT
COUNTER
16-BIT
COUNTER
COMPARATOR
16-BIT
COUNTER
Symbol
ITVL
PLS
DMnnnn
PAUSE
mmmm
RES
CTH0
nnnn
#ddddd
CTCn
CTH1
nnnn
16-BIT
COUNTER
COMPARATOR
#ddddd
CTCn
SUBROUTINE
CALL
nn
CALL
Mnemonic
CTH
Count input
R
CTC
n:
Comparator
n: 0,1
No.
ddddd: #00001
ddddd:
to #65535
# preset
value
5 (10)
3-117
0004
2100
2101
2102
14.4
4 (6)
3-204
Hardware-based comparator
between preset & current
values of high-speed counter
2.3 to 3.5
(CTH0). This comparator is
turned ON when these
values are equal.
2 (6)
3-204
0005
0500
2200
2201
2202
16-bit (0 to 65535) updown counter for clock

pulses with input
response frequency of 30
kHz.
14.4
4 (6)
3-204
16-bit (0 to 65535) updown counter for clock

pulses with input response
frequency of 30 kHz.
CTC
values of high-speed counter
(CTH1). This comparator is
turned ON when these
values are equal.
2.3 to 3.5
2 (6)
3-204
CALL
(FUN 03)
Subroutine
No.
00 to 99
Executes subroutine
specified by operand.
5.4 to 6.5
2 (8)
3-122
Subroutine
No.
00 to 99
Represents beginning of
subroutine specified by
operand.
2 (4)
3-122
4.3
1 (4)
3-122
12.0 to
18.0
3 (20)
3-125
0.5
1 (4)
3-125
22.1 to
180.0
5 (10)
3-131
RET
(FUN 33)
REPEAT
START
FOR
nnnn
FOR
(FUN 16)
Represents end of
subroutine.
# constant,
DM No.
TMxx
#00000 to
#65535
DM0000 to
DM1999
TM00 to TM29
HKEY
(FUN 17)
Executes program
between FOR & NEXT
for number of times
Represents end of
repetition.
NEXT
(FUN 29)
20.0 to 80.0
n:
Comparator
n: 2,3
No.
ddddd: #00001
ddddd:
to #65535
# preset
value
RET
Page
Count input
R
SUBROUTINE
RETURN
HKEY
nnnn
mmmm
Bytes
CTH
SBN
(FUN 38)
16-KEY INPUT
Exec.time
(s)
Function
DMnnnn:
DM0000 to Measures pulse-to-pulse
DM1985
interval & pulse width in
mmmm:
specified mode.
1000 to 1912
3000 to 9912
ITVL
SBN
nn
NEXT
Operand value
DMnnnn:
DM No.
mmmm: R
No.
SUBROUTINE
ENTRY
REPEAT END
Operand
Visual KV Series
nnnn:
Input R
mmmm:
Output R
nnnn:
0000 to 415
mmmm:
0500 to 915
Reads 16-key data by

time-sharing and outputs
these data into special
utility Rs 2900 to 2915.
instruction.
Normal notation
0000 to 0415
0500 to 0915
1000 to 6915
7000 to 17915
X-Y-M notation
X000 to X04F
Y050 to Y09F
M1000 to M6915
3-37
12
Visual KV Series
2.1.3 Arithmetic Instructions

Instruction
DATA
MEMORY
WRITE
TRIMMER
SETTING
Symbol
Mnemonic
nnnn
DW
DMmmmm
DW
n
TMIN
TMIN
(FUN 50)
Operand value
nnnn:
#/$ constant
DMmmmm:
DM No.
nnnn:
#0000 to
#65535
$0000 to
$FFFF
DMmmmm:
DM0000 to
DM1999
Writes constant into data

memory.
0 to 1
Inputs value set by

access windows digital
trimmer (0 to 65535) to
internal register.
Trimmer No.
n
TMIN
nnnn
LDA
LOAD A
nnnn
LDA
@TMIN
@(FUN 50)
0000 to 17915
T000 to T249
C000 to C249
LDA
CTH0 to CTH1
(FUN 23)
R No.,
DM0000 to
C/T No.,
DM1999
DM No,
TM00 to TM31
TM xx,
#00000 to
#/$ constant,
#65535
@LDA
#TMxx
$0000 to $FFFF
@(FUN 23)
#TM00 to
#TM29
2
STA
(FUN 42)
nnnn
STA
STORE A
nnnn
STA
@STA
@(FUN 42)
nnnn
CMP
CMP
(FUN 04)
nnnn
CMP
@CMP
@(FUN 04)
nnnn
ADD
ADD
(FUN00)
R No.,
C/T No.,
DM No.,
TM xx,
#TMxx
0500 to 1915
2100 to 17915
T000 to T249
C000 to C249
CTH0 to
CTC3
DM0000 to
DM1999
TM00 to TM29
#TM00 to
#TM29
COMPARE
ADD
nnnn
ADD
nnnn
SUB
SUBTRACT
nnnn
SUB
DM0000 to
DM1999
TM00 to TM31
@ADD
#00000 to
@(FUN 00) DM/TM No.
#65535
TMxx,
$0000 to
#/$ constant,
$FFFF
SUB
#TMxx
#TM00 to
(FUN 46)
#TM29
@SUB
@(FUN 46)
nnnn
MUL
MUL
(FUN 28)
nnnn
MUL
@MUL
@(FUN28)
MULTIPLY
3-38
Function
Operand
Inputs value specified by

operand into internal
register or inputs current
value when T/C is
specified as operand.
Transfers content of
internal register to
location specified by
operand, or changes
preset value when T/C is
specified as operand.
Compares content of
internal register and
value specified by
operand.
Exec.time
(s)
Bytes
Page
8.0
5 (8)
3-136
8.9
1 (6)
3-138
20.9
1 (16)
6.4 to 14.0
3 (8)
3-140
18.4 to 26.0
3 (18)
6.6 to 28.5
3 (8)
3-140
18.0 to 40.5
3 (18)
10.8 to 35.6
3 (6)
3-146
22.8 to 47.6
Adds content of internal

9.4 to 34.2
register and value
specified by operand and
inputs result back to
21.4 to 46.2
same register.
Subtracts value specified
10.8 to 35.6
by operand from content
of register and inputs
result back to same
22.8 to 47.6
register.
Multiplies content of
14.4 to 38.1
internal register by value
specified by operand and
inputs result back to
26.4 to 50.1
same register.
3 (16)
3 (6)
3-150
3 (16)
3 (6)
3-150
3 (16)
3 (6)
3-150
3 (16)
instruction.
Instruction
Symbol
nnnn
DIV
DIVIDE
nnnn
DIV
nnnn
ANDA
AND A
nnnn
ANDA
nnnn
ORA
OR A
nnnn
ORA
nnnn
EORA
EXCLUSIVE
OR A
nnnn
EORA
SHIFT
RIGHT A
SHIFT LEFT
A
Mnemonic
Operand
DM0000 to
DM1999
TM00 to TM31
R No.,
#00000 to
DM No.,
#65535
TM xx,
$0000 to
#/$ constant,
@DIV
$FFFF
#TMxx
@(FUN 11)
#TM00 to
#TM29
DIV
(FUN 11)
ANDA
(FUN 01)
0000 to 17915
DM0000 to
DM1999
@ANDA
R No.,
TM00 to TM31
@(FUN 01) DM No.,
#00000 to
TM xx,
#65535
#/$
constant,
ORA
$0000 to
#TMxx
(FNC 31)
$FFFF
#TM00 to
@ORA
#TM29
@(FUN 31)
0000 to 17915
DM0000 to
DM1999
R No.,
TM00 to TM31
DM No.,
#00000 to
TM xx,
#65535
#/$ constant,
$0000 to
#TMxx
@EORA
$FFFF
@(FUN 15)
#TM00 to
#TM29
EORA
(FUN 15)
#dd
SRA
SRA
(FNC 41)
#dd
SRA
@SRA
@(FUN 41)
#dd
SLA
SLA
(FNC 40)
#dd
SLA
@SLA
@(FUN 40)
#dd
RRA
RRA
(FUN 37)
#dd
RRA
@RRA
@(FUN 37)
#dd
RLA
RLA
(FUN 35)
ROTATE
LEFT A
#dd
RLA
@RLA
@(FUN 35)
Exec.time
(s)
Function
17.4 to 43.3
Divides content of internal
register by value specified
by operand and inputs
result back to same
29.4 to 55.3
register.
ANDs each of 16 bits of

8.2 to 33.1
internal register and that
of value specified by
operand, and inputs result
20.2 to 45.1
back to same register.
ORs each of 16 bits of
8.2 to 33.1
internal register and that
operand, and inputs result 20.2 to 45.1
EXCLUSIVE-ORs each of
16 bits of internal register
and that of value specified
by operand, and inputs
result back to same
register.
Moves content of internal

register serially right by
value specified by
operand.
Moves content of internal

register serially left by
value specified by
operand.
# constant
ROTATE
RIGHT A
Operand value
Visual KV Series
8.2 to 33.1
Bytes
Page
3 (6)
3-150
3 (16)
3 (8)
3-159
3 (18)
3 (8)
3-161
3 (18)
3 (8)
3-164
20.2 to 45.1
3 (18)
9.3 to 27.6
2 (6)
12
3-166
21.3 to 39.6
2 (16)
9.2 to 27.6
2 (6)
3-166
21.2 to 39.6
2 (16)
#01 to #16
10.3 to 28.6
Rotates contents of
internal register and carry
bit (2009) clockwise by
operand value.
22.3 to 40.6
10.3 to 28.6
Rotates contents of
internal register and carry
bit (2009) counterclock22.3 to 40.6
wise by operand value.
2 (6)
3-169
2 (16)
2 (6)
3-169
2 (16)
instruction.
All operand values are shown in normal notation. The corresponding relay numbers in X-Y-M notation are shown below:
Normal notation
0000 to 0415
0500 to 0915
1000 to 6915
7000 to 17915
X-Y-M notation
X000 to X04F
Y050 to Y09F
M1000 to M6915
3-39
Instruction
Visual KV Series
Symbol
Mnemonic
COM
COM
(FUN 05)
COMPLEMENT
INCREMENT
MEMORY
DECREMENT
MEMORY
MULTIPLEXER
COM
@COM
@(FUN 05)
nnnn
INC
INC
(FNC 19)
nnnn
INC
@INC
@(FUN 19)
nnnn
DEC
DEC
(FNC 07)
nnnn
DEC
@DEC
@(FUN 07)
#n
MPX
MPX
(FUN 27)
#n
MPX
@MPX
@(FUN 27)
DMX
DMX
(FUN 12)
DMX
@DMX
@(FUN 12)
TBCD
TBCD
(FUN 47)
TBCD
@TBCD
@(FUN 47)
TBIN
TBIN
(FUN 48)
TBIN
@TBIN
@(FUN 48)
Operand
DM/TM No.
# constant
2
TRANSFER
BCD
TRANSFER
BIN
ASC
ASC
(FUN 02)
ASC
@ASC
@(FUN 02)
RASC
RASC
(FUN 32)
RASC
@RASC
@(FUN 32)
ROOT
ROOT
(FUN 36)
ROOT
@ROOT
@(FUN 36)
ASCII
CONVERT
REVERSE
ASCII
CONVERT
SQUARE
ROOT
Exec.time
(s)
Bytes
5.6
1 (4)
3-171
17.6
1 (14)
9.8
3 (6)
21.8
3 (16)
10.4
3 (6)
22.4
3 (16)
DM0000 to
DM1999
TM00 to
TM29
Adds 1 to content of data

memory specified by
operand.
DM0000 to
DM1999
TM00 to
TM29
Subtracts 1 from content

of data memory specified
by operand.
10.1
1 (6)
#0 to #3
Converts 4-bit data

(specified by operand) of
internal register into 16-bit
data.
22.1
1 (16)
Converts position of
highest order bit with 1 in
internal register into 4-bit
data.
22.6
1 (4)
34.6
1 (14)
Converts content of
internal register (16-bit
binary) into 4-digit BCD
data.
5.6
1 (4)
17.6
1 (14)
9.6
1 (4)
21.6
1 (14)
9.7
1 (4)
21.7
1 (14)
9.3
1 (4)
21.3
1 (14)
95.7
1 (4)
107.7
1 (14)
Converts content of
internal register (4-digit
BCD) into 16-bit binary
data.
Converts content of lower

order 8 bytes of internal
register into 2-digit ASCII
code.
Converts 2-digit ASCII
code of internal register
into 2-digit numerical
value.
Takes square root of 32bit data (TM00: higher
order byte, internal
register: lower order byte)
and inputs result back to
same register.
Page
3-172
3-172
3-176
3-176
3-180
3-180
3-183
3-183
3-185
instruction.
Normal notation
0000 to 0415
0500 to 0915
1000 to 6915
7000 to 17915
3-40
Function
Inverts content of each bit

in internal register.
DM/TM No.
DEMULTIPLEXER
Operand
value
X-Y-M notation
X000 to X04F
Y050 to Y09F
M1000 to M6915
X700 to X174F or Y750 to Y179F (OUTPUT)
Visual KV Series
2.1.4 Interrupt Instructions

Instruction
Symbol
Mnemonic
INTERRUPT
DISABLED
DI
DI
(FUN 08)
INTERRUPT
ENABLED
EI
EI
(FUN 13)
INT
nnnn
INT
CTCn
RETI
R No.
000 to 003
Comparator
No.
CTC0 to
CTC3
RETI
(FUN 34)
Exec.time
(s)
Bytes
Page
Disables execution of
interrupt.
2.2
1 (12)
3-193
Enables execution of
interrupt.
4.0
1 (10)
3-193
Executes interrupt
instructions between INT
and RETI at rising/falling
edge of input relays 0000
through 0003.
60.0 to
90.0
1 (8)
3-192
Used with comparators

CTC0 to CTC3 and
executes instructions
between INT and RETI.
60.0 to
90.0
1 (8)
3-192
Represents end of
interrupt.
18.0 to
22.0
1 (4)
3-192
Function
Operand value
INT
(FUN 20)
INTERRUPT
RETURN
INTERRUPT
Operand
instruction.
Normal notation
0000 to 0415
0500 to 0915
1000 to 6915
7000 to 17915
X-Y-M notation
X000 to X04F
Y050 to Y09F
M1000 to M6915
2.1.5 Function No. List (Alphabetical order)

The following list shows the function Nos. used to enter instructions with the KVP3E(01) handheld programmer.
Function No. Instruction
Refer to "Chapter 6 Handheld Programmer" on page 1-195 for details.

00
ADD
13
EI
26
MEMSW
39
SFT
01
ANDA
14
ENDS
27
MPX
40
SLA
02
ASC
15
EORA
28
MUL
41
SRA
03
CALL
16
FOR
29
NEXT
42
STA
04
CMP
17
HKEY
30
NOP
43
STE
05
COM
18
HSP
31
ORA
44
STG
06
CON
19
INC
32
RASC
45
STP
07
DEC
20
INT
33
RET
46
SUB
08
DI
21
JMP
34
RET1
47
TBCD
09
DIFD
22
KEEP
35
RLA
48
TBIN
10
DIFU
23
LDA
36
ROOT
49
TMH
11
DIV
24
MC
37
RRA
50
TMIN
12
DMX
25
MCR
38
SBN
51
TMS
52
UDC
Reference: To find function No. assigned to desired function:

1. Press the [FUN] key.
2. When the cursor appears at the position where the function No. is to be entered,
press the ON or OFF key and scroll the functions and assigned Nos. to find the
desired function.
3-41
12
KV-300
KV-300 Series,
Series, KV-10/80
KV-300 Series, KV-10/80
instruction.
Abbreviations: R: Relay, T: Timer, C: Counter, #: Decimal, $: Hex.

KV-10/16/24/40/80
Instruction Symbol
KV-10/16/24/40/80
Mnemonic Operand Operand value Operand value Exec.time
Bytes
KV-10/16
(s)
KV-24/40/80
nnnn
LOAD
LOAD BAR
nnnn
AND BAR
1.5 to 2.5
3 (4)
Connects N.O. contact

to bus.
3-57
LDB
2.1 to 3.5
3 (6)
Connects N.C. contact

to bus.
3-57
AND
1.5 to 2.5
R No.
T/C No.
ANB
0000 to 2915
T000 to T063
C000 to C063
CTC0 to CTC3
0000 to 6915
T000 to T119
C000 to C119
2.7 to 4.5
CTC0 to CTC3
OR
nnnn
OR
1.5 to 2.5
OR BAR
nnnn
ORB
2.7 to 4.5
AND LOAD
ANL
1.0 to 1.4
OR LOAD
ORL
1.0 to 1.4
nnnn
OUT
OUT
0500 to 1915
2009
2300 to 2915
nnnn
OUT BAR
OUB
nnnn
SET
(SET)
nnnn
RESET
(RES)
0.1-s TIMER
#ddddd
T xxx
SET
R No.
0500 to 1915
2009
2100 to 2915
T000 to T063
C000 to C063
CTH0 to CTH1
CTC0 to CTC3
RES
5.2 to 8.4
0500 to 1915
2009
2300 to 6915 6.4 to 10.4 3 (17) ON/OFF status to R
coil.
0500 to 1915
2009
2100 to 6915
T000 to T119 3.1 to 24.0 3 (8)
C000 to C119
CTH0 to CTH1
CTC0 to CTC3
TMR
17.0 to 22.0 2 (5)

T No.,
# preset
value
000 to 063
#00000 to
#65535
#ddddd
H xxx
TMH
(FNC49)
1-ms TIMER
#ddddd
S xxx
TMS
(FNC51)
COUNTER
#ddddd
C xxx
nnnn
# preset
value, C
No., clock
source R
#00000 to
65535
000 to 063
0000 to 6915
UP-DOWN
COUNTER
UP #ddddd
DW
RES
UDC
(FNC52)
C No.,
# preset
value
000 to 063
#00000 to
#65535
3-42

in series with previous
contact.
3 (8) in series with previous
contact.
3 (4) in parallel with previous
contact.
3 (8) in parallel with previous
contact.
Connects in series
1 (2) blocks made of one or
more contacts.
Connects in parallel
1 (2) blocks made of one or
more contacts.
Outputs input ON/OFF
3 (13) status to R coil.
Outputs inverted input
3 (4)
000 to 119
#00000 to
#65535
17.0 to 22.0 2 (5)

17.0 to 22.0 2 (5)
3-58
3-58
3-60
3-60
3-61
3-63
3-65
3-65
0500 to 1915 0500 to 1915

2009
2009
Forces R ON and holds
2100 to 2915 2100 to 6915 3.1 to 23.0 3 (8) this status when input is 3-66
T000 to T063 T000 to T119
ON.
C000 to C063 C000 to C119
0.01-s
TIMER
UDC xxx
Page
LD
nnnn
nnnn
AND
Function
#00000 to
#65535
19.0 to 21.0 4 (7)
000 to 119
0000 to 6915
000 to 119
#00000 to
#65535
21.0 to 26.0 2 (5)
Forces R/T/C OFF

when input is ON.

counts down in 0.1-s
decrements.
decrements.
counts down in 1-ms
decrements.
3-66
3-67
3-68
3-69
3-72
Sets a 16-bit up-down

counter.
3-76
Instruction
Symbol
DIFFERENTIATE UP
nnnn
DIFU
DIFFERENTIATE
DOWN
KEEP
KEEP
(FNC22)
R No.
0500 to 1915
2009
2100 to 2915
SFT
(FNC39)
R No.1st
& last R
Nos.
1000 to 1915
HSP
(FNC18)
R No.
(KV-10)
0000 to 0005
(KV-16)
0000 to 0009
D
nnnn
CLK
RES mmmm
HIGH
SPEED
HSP
MASTER
CONTROL
MC
nnnn
SFT
nnnn
MCR
MEMSW
$xxxx
$xxxx
NOP
END
END HI
1000 to 1915
DIFD
(FNC09)
SHIFT
MEMORY
SWITCH
DIFU
(FNC10)
nnnn
DIFD
SET
RES
MASTER
CONTROL
RESET
KV-10/16/24/40/80
Operand
value
Mnemonic Operand
Operand value Exec.time
Bytes
KV-10/16
(s)
KV-24/40/80
R No.
KEEP
END
ENDH
1000 to 1915
3000 to 6915
0500 to 1915
2009
2100 to 6915
1000 to
19153000 to
6915
(KV-24)
0000 to 0015
(KV-40)
0000 to 0107
Page
Turns ON R for 1
11.0 to 13.0 3 (5) scan time at rising
edge of input.
Turns ON R for 1
11.0 to 13.0 3 (5) scan time at falling
edge of input.
Turns ON R and
9.0 to 26.0 3 (5) holds this status when
SET input is ON.
5 (7) Turns OFF R when
RESET input is ON.
(*)
8.0 to 9.0
MC
(FNC24)
1.8 to 3.2
MCR
(FNC25)
0.6 to 1.0
MEMSW $ constant
(FNC26)
Function
3 (4)
3-78
3-78
3-80
3-82
Sets shift register.
3-86

1 (7) constant to 25 ms for
Selects ON/OFF
1 (2) status of R coils, Ts,
or Cs.
3-89
3-89
3 (0)
NOP
(FNC30)
Performs no opera1 (0) tion.
3-94
END
1 (3) Indicates end of each

routine of program.
3-94
ENDH

1 (0) program.
3-94
$ 0000 to $ FFFF
3-92
KV-300
KV-300
Instruction
Symbol
Exec.time
Bytes
(s)
Function
Page
LD
0.15 to 0.70 3 (5)

to bus.
3-57
LDB
0.15 to 0.90 3 (7)

to bus.
3-57
Mnemonic Operand
Operand value
nnnn
LOAD
nnnn
LOAD BAR
nnnn
AND
AND BAR
AND
R No.
T/C No.
nnnn
ANB
0000 to 0009
0500 to 17915
T000 to T249
C000 to C249
CTC0 to CTC3
0.15 to 0.50 3 (4)
0.15 to 0.80 3 (8)
OR
nnnn
OR
0.15 to 0.50 3 (4)
OR BAR
nnnn
ORB
0.15 to 0.80 3 (8)
AND LOAD
ANL
0.55
1 (3)
OR LOAD
ORL
0.55
1 (3)

contact.
contact.
in parallel with
previous contact.
in parallel with
previous contact.
Connects in series
blocks made of one or
more contacts.
Connects in parallel
blocks made of one or
more contacts.
3-58
3-58
3-60
3-60
3-61
3-63
3-43
12
KV-300
KV-300 Series,
Series, KV-10/80
KV-300
Instruction
Symbol
Mnemonic Operand
Operand value
Exec.time
Bytes
(s)
0500 to 1915
2009
2300 to 17915
0.20 to 0.56
nnnn
OUT
OUT
nnnn
OUB
OUT BAR
nnnn
(SET)
SET
nnnn
RESET
(RES)
0.1-s TIMER
#ddddd
T xxx
SET
RES
#ddddd
H xxx
TMH
(FNC49)
1-ms TIMER
#ddddd
S xxx
TMS
(FNC51)
COUNTER
#ddddd
C xxx
nnnn
UP-DOWN
COUNTER
UP #ddddd
DW
RES
UDC xxx
Forces R/T/C OFF

0.50 to 4.40 3 (12) when input is ON.
# preset
value, C
No., clock
source R
C No.,
UDC
(FNC52) # preset
value
000 to 249
#00000 to 65535
#00000 to #65535
000 to 249
0000 to 0009
0500 to 17915
7.60 to 9.45
000 to 249
#00000 to #65535
8.00 to 11.60 2 (10) Sets a 16-bit up-down

counter.
DIFU
FNC10)
DIFFERENTIATE DOWN
nnnn
DIFD
DIFD
(FNC09)
KEEP
KEEP
(FNC22)
R No.
SFT
(FNC39)
1st &
last R
Nos.
0500 to 1915
2009
2100 to 17915
1000 to 1915
3000 to 6915
(*) 7000 to 9915
HSP
(FNC18)
R No.
0000 to 0009
R No.
SHIFT
D
nnnn
CLK
RES mmmm
nnnn
SFT
HSP
HIGH
SPEED
nnnn

decrements.
5.60 to 10.40 2 (7) counts down in 0.01-s
decrements.
5.60 to 10.40 2 (7) counts down in 1-ms
decrements.
5.60 to 10.40 2 (7)
T No.,
# preset
value
3-65
0500 to 1915
2009
2100 to 17915
T000 to T249
C000 to C249
CTH0 to CTH1
CTC0 to CTC3
nnnn
DIFU
SET
RES
Outputs inverted input

0.50 to 1.20 3 (11) ON/OFF status to R
coil.
3-65
Forces R ON and holds

3-66
0.20 to 5.70 3 (12) this status when input
is ON.
DIFFERENTIATE UP
KEEP
Outputs input ON/OFF

status to R coil.
Page
0500 to 1915
2009
2100 to 17915
T000 to T249
C000 to C249
TMR
0.01-s TIMER
R No.
3 (8)
Function
1000 to 1915
3000 to 6915
(*) 7000 to 9915
4 (7)
3-66
3-67
3-68
3-69
3-72
3-76

3 (10) time at rising edge of
input.
3 (10) time at falling edge of
6.70
input.
Turns ON R and holds
6.10 to 7.90 3 (11) this status when SET
input is ON.
3-78
6.40 to 8.20 5 (15) Turns OFF R when

RESET input is ON.
3-82
6.70
4.66 to 4.92
3-78
3-80
3 (8) Sets shift register.
3-86

1 (4) constant to 25 ms for
3-89
MASTER
CONTROL
MC
MC
(FNC24)
0.20
MASTER
CONTROL
RESET
MCR
MCR
(FNC25)
1 (0)
Selects ON/OFF status

of R coils, Ts, or Cs.
3-89
MEMORY
SWITCH
MEMSW
$xxxx
$xxxx
3 (0)

3-92
NOP
(FNC30)
1 (0)
3-94
END
0.95
1 (1)
Indicates end of each

routine of program.
3-94
ENDH
1 (0)

program.
3-94
NOP
END
END HI
END
ENDH
MEMSW $ constant
(FNC26)
$0000 to $FFFF
Note: 14.0 + 3.0 x (n) to 17.0 + 3.0 x (n) (n represents number of times the original
data is generated.)
3-44

KV-10/16/24/40/80
Instruction Symbol
KV-10/16/24/40/80
Bytes
(s)
KV-10/16
KV-24/40/80
nnnn
ON
mmmm
W-ON
WAIT OFF
nnnn
OFF
mmmm
W-OFF
WAIT UP
EDGE
nnnn
mmmm
W-UE
WAIT DOWN
EDGE
nnnn
mmmm
W-D
WAIT ON
nnnn:
0000 to 2915
T000 to T063
nnnn: C000 to C063
R,T, or C CTC0 to CTC3
No.
mmmm:
1000 to 1915
nnnn:
0000 to 6915
T000 to T119
C000 to C119
CTC0 to CTC3
mmmm:
1000 to 1915
3000 to 6915
11.0 to
13.0
11.0 to
13.0
14.0 to
18.0
14.0 to
18.0
CONNECT
CON
[FNC 06]
0.4 to
0.6
PUSH
MPS
11.0 to
14.0
READ
MRD
8.0 to
10.0
POP
MPP
10.0 to
12.0
nnnn
STG
STG
[FNC 44]
11.0 to
14.0
JUMP
nnnn
JMP
JMP
[FNC 21]
END
STAGE
ENDS
ENDS
[FNC 14]
STEP
STP
nnnn
STP
[FNC 45]
STAGE
R No.
STEP END
STE
ITVL
SUBROUTINE ENTRY
SUBROUTINE
RETURN
DM0000 to
DM1985
1000 to 1912
3000 to 6912
3-96
3-98
3-98
3-102
3-103

1 (3) arithmetic flag stored with
3-103
PUSH.
1 (3) and arithmetic flag stored with 3-103
PUSH.
Executes instructions between
3 (7) STG & JMP when R
3-106
(operand) is ON.
1 (3) Turns current stage OFF when 3-106

input is ON.
3.7 to
5.3

3 (7) STP & STE when R (operand) 3-114
is ON.
0.00
DM0000 to
DM0985
1000 to 1912
1 (3) Stores input status and

arithmetic flag.
3-96
7.0 to
9.0
29.0 to
79.0
Clock
source Rs
0004
2100 to 2102
9.0 to
39.0
#ddddd
CTCn
CTC
n:
Comparator
No.
ddddd: #
preset value
n: 0,1
ddddd: #00000 to #00255
3.0 to 4.0
CTH1
nnnn
CTH
Clock
source Rs
0005
2200 to 2202
8.0 to
48.0
#ddddd
CTCn
CTC
n: Comparator No.
ddddd: #
preset value
n: 2,3
ddddd: #00000 to #65535
3.0 to 4.0
nn
CALL
CALL
[FNC 03]
Subroutine No.
00 to 99
8.0 to
10.0
SBN
nn
SBN
[FNC 38]
Subroutine No.
00 to 99
0.00
RET
RET
[FNC 33]
CTH0
nnnn
SUBROUTINE CALL
STE
[FNC 43]
Turns ON R (2nd operand

5 (7) [mmmm]) when R, T, or C (1st
operand [nnnn]) turns ON.
When R, T, or C (1st operand
5 (7) [nnnn]) turns OFF, R (2nd
operand [mmmm]) turns ON.
R (2nd operand [mmmm])
5 (7) turns ON at rising edge of R, T,
or C (1st operand [nnnn]).
5 (7) turns ON at falling edge of R,
T, or C (1st operand [nnnn]).
301 of output instruction together

3 (5) next stage ON when input is
ON.
CTH
8-BIT
COUNTER
16-BIT
COUNTER
COMPARATOR
0000 to 6915
T000 to T119
C000 to C119
CTC0 to CTC3
Page
10.0 to
13.0
DM & R
No.
PLS
nnnn
DM
PAUSE mmmm
RES
16-BIT
COUNTER
0000 to 2915
T000 to T063
C000 to C063
CTC0 to CTC3
1000 to 1915
3000 to 6915
ITVL
INTERVAL
TIMER
8-BIT
COUNTER
COMPARATOR
R, T, C
Nos.
1000 to 1915
Function
3-106
1 (0) Is used with STEP to make

program step.
3-114
Measures pulse-to-pulse
5 (7) interval & pulse width in
specified mode.
3-117
8-bit (0 to255) up-counter for

4 (4) clock pulses with input
response frequency of 10 kHz.
2 (5) values of high speed counter.
This comparator is turned ON
when these values are equal.
16-bit (0 to 65535) up-counter
4 (4) for clock pulses with input
response frequency of 10 kHz.
2 (5) values of high speed counter.
3-277
3-277
3-204
3-204
2 (6) Executes subroutine specified

by operand.
3-122
2 (0) subroutine specified by
operand.
3-122
4.6 to 6.2 1 (5) Represents end of subroutine. 3-122
3-45
12
Instruction
Symbol
KV-300
KV-300 Series,
Series, KV-10/80
Mnemonic Operand
REPEAT
START
FOR
nnnn
FOR
[FNC 16]
REPEAT
END
NEXT
NEXT
[FNC 29]
HKEY
nnnn
mmmm
16-KEY
INPUT
HKEY
[FNC 17]
# constant,
DM No.
KV-10/16/24/40/80
Operand value Operand value Exec.time
Bytes
KV-10/16
(s)
KV-24/40/80
Function
Page
#00000 to
#00000 to
#65535
#65535
DM0000 to 5.0 to 20.0 3 (15)
DM0000 to
DM1999
DM0999
TM00 to TM29 TM00 to TM29
Executes program
between FOR & NEXT
for number of times
3-125
1 (3)
Represents end of
repetition.
3-125
5 (7)
Reads 16-key data by

time-sharing and
outputs these data into 3-131
special utility Rs 2900
to 2915.
1.7 to 2.3
I/O R
nnnn:0000 to 0009
10000 to 10415
:
17000 to 17415
mmmm:10500 to 10915
:
17500 to 17915
71 to 370
KV-300
KV-300
Instruction
Symbol
Mnemonic Operand
WAIT ON
nnnn
ON
mmmm
W-ON
WAIT OFF
nnnn
OFF
mmmm
W-OFF
WAIT UP
EDGE
nnnn
mmmm
W-UE
WAIT DOWN
EDGE
nnnn
mmmm
W-DE
nnnn:
R,T, or
C No.
Operand value
nnnn:
0000 to 0009
0500 to 17915
T000 to T249
C000 to C249
CTC0 to CTC3
mmmm:
1000 to 1915
3000 to 6915
(*)7000 to 9915
Exec.time
Bytes
(s)
Function
Turns ON R (2nd operand

[mmmm]) when R, T, or C (1st
operand [nnnn]) turns ON.
When R, T, or C (1st operand
5.00 to 6.10 5 (9) [nnnn]) turns OFF, R (2nd
operand [mmmm]) turns ON.
6.10 to 7.50 5 (10) turns ON at rising edge of R,
6.10 to 7.50 5 (10) turns ON at falling edge of R,
1 (0) of output instruction together

5.00 to 6.10 5 (9)
CONNECT
CON
[FNC 06]
PUSH
MPS
1.30
1 (9)
READ
MRD
2.70

1 (18) arithmetic flag stored with
PUSH.
POP
MPP
nnnn
STG
STAGE
STG
[FNC 44]
R No.
JUMP
nnnn
JMP
JMP
[FNC 21]
END
STAGE
ENDS
ENDS
[FNC 14]
STEP
STEP END
INTERVAL
TIMER
16-BIT
COUNTER
3-46
STP
nnnn
STP
[FNC 45]
STE
STE
[FNC 43]
ITVL
PLS
nnnn
DM
PAUSE mmmm
RES
CTH0
nnnn
R, T,
C Nos.
1000 to 1915
3000 to 6915
(*)7000 to 9915
0000 to 0009
0500 to 6915
(*)7000 to 9915
T000 to T249
C000 to C249
CTC0 to CTC3
ITVL
DM & R No.
DMnnnn:
DM0000 to DM9985
mmmm:
1000 to 1912
3000 to 6912
(*)7000 to 9912
CTH
Clock
source Rs
0004
2100
2101
2102
Stores input status and

arithmetic flag.
Page
3-96
3-96
3-98
3-98
3-102
3-103
3-103

3-103
and arithmetic flag stored
with PUSH.
Executes instructions
5.60 to 6.50 3 (10) between STG & JMP when R 3-106
(operand) is ON.
3.80 to 6.00 3 (7) next stage ON when input is 3-106
ON.
1.40
1 (9)
1 (0)
Turns current stage OFF

when input is ON.
3-106
1.30
3 (9)

STP & STE when R
(operand) is ON.
3-114
1 (0)
Is used with STEP to make

program step.
3-114
13.80 to
17.30
3.85
Measures pulse-to-pulse
5 (11) interval & pulse width in
specified mode.
4 (7)
3-117
16-bit (0 to 65535) up-counter

for clock pulses with input
3-204
response frequency of 30
kHz.
KV-300
Instruction Symbol
Mnemonic Operand
Operand value
Exec.time
Bytes
(s)
CTC
n:
Comparator
No.
ddddd: #
preset value
n: 0, 1
ddddd:
#00000 to #65535
CTH
Clock
source Rs
0005
2200
2201
2202
CTC
n:
Comparator
No.
ddddd: #
preset value
n: 2, 3
ddddd:
#00000 to #65535
CALL
Subroutine
[FNC 03]
No.
00 to 99
3.16
SBN
nn
SBN
[FNC 38]
00 to 99
RET
RET
[FNC 33]
REPEAT
START
FOR
nnnn
FOR
[FNC 16]
REPEAT
END
NEXT
NEXT
[FNC 29]
16-BIT
COUNTER
COMPARATOR
#ddddd
CTCn
16-BIT
COUNTER
CTH1
nnnn
16-BIT
COUNTER
COMPARATOR
#ddddd
CTCn
SUBROUTINE CALL
nn
CALL
SUBROUTINE ENTRY
SUBROUTINE
RETURN
16-KEY
INPUT
HKEY
nnnn
mmmm
HKEY
[FNC 17]
Subroutine
No.
#00000 to #65535
DM0000 to DM9999
TM00 to TM29
16-bit (0 to 65535) up4 (7) counter for clock pulses with

input response frequency of
30 kHz.
3.85
1.55
I/O R
nnnn:0000 to 0009
10000 to 10415
:
17000 to 17415
mmmm:0500 to 0503
10500 to 10915
:
17500 to 17915
16.50
Page
2 (0) values of high speed counter. 3-204
3-204
2 (0) values of high speed counter. 3-204
2 (17) Executes subroutine

1.15 to 1.45
# constant,
DM No.
Function
3-122
2 (0) subroutine specified by
operand.
3-122
Represents end of
subroutine.
3-122

3 (19) FOR & NEXT for number of
times specified by operand.
3-125
1 (6)
1 (0) Represents end of repetition. 3-125
Reads 16-key data by time5 (9) sharing and outputs these

data into special utility Rs
2900 to 2915.
3-131
3-47
12
KV-300
KV-300 Series,
Series, KV-10/80

KV-10/16/24/40/80
Instruction
DATA
MEMORY
WRITE
Symbol
nnnn
< DW >
DMmmmm
< TMIN >
TRIMMER
SETTING
KV-10/16/24/40/80
Function
Bytes
KV-10/16
(s)
KV-24/40/80
#00000 to
#0000 to
#65535
#65535
#/$
$0000 to
$0000 to
3.6 to 6.0 5 (6) Writes constant into
constant,
DW
data memory.
$FFFF
$FFFF
DM No.
DM0000 to
DM0000 to
DM0999
DM1999
TMIN
[FNC 50]
@TMIN
TMIN > @[FNC 50]
Trimmer
No.
0 to 1
nnnn
< LDA >
LOAD A
nnnn
LDA >
nnnn
< STA >
STORE A
nnnn
STA >
nnnn
< CMP >
COMPARE
nnnn
CMP >
nnnn
< ADD >
ADD
nnnn
ADD >
nnnn
< SUB >
0000 to 2915
T000 to T063
C000 to C063
LDA
R No., CTH0 to CTH1
[FNC 23]
C/T No.,
DM0000 to
DM/TM
DM0999
No.,
TM00 to TM31
#/$
#00000 to
constant,
#65535
@LDA
$0000 to
#TMxx
@[FNC 23]
$FFFF
#TM00 to
#TM29
R No.,
C/T No.,
DM/TM
No.,
#/$
@STA
constant,
@[FNC 42] #TMxx
STA
[FNC 42]
CMP
[FNC 04]
nnnn
SUB >
nnnn
< MUL >
MULTIPLY
nnnn
MUL >
nnnn
< DIV >
SUB
[FNC 46]
@SUB
@[FNC 46]
DIV >
@DIV
@[FNC 11]
Inputs value specified

by operand into
internal register or
inputs current value
when T/C is specified
as operand.
3-136
3-138
3-140
Transfers content of
operand, or changes
preset value when T/
C is specified as
operand.
3-140
14.0 to 68.0 3 (5) Compares content of

value specified by
26.0 to 82.0 3 (12) operand.
3-146
Adds content of
13.0 to 65.0 3 (5) internal register and
value specified by
operand and inputs
25.0 to 79.0 3 (12) result back to same
register.
Subtracts value
15.0 to 68.0 3 (5) specified by operand
from content of
register and inputs
register.
DM0000 to
DM0000 to
DM0999
DM1999
MUL
#00000 to
#00000 to 17.0 to 71.0 3 (5)
[FNC 28] DM/TM
#65535
#65535
No.,
$0000 to
$0000 to
#/$
No.,
@MUL
$FFFF
$FFFF
29.0 to 85.0 3 (12)
@[FNC 28] #TMxx
#TM00 to
#TM00 to
#TM29
#TM29
DIV
22.0 to 79.0 3 (5)
[FNC 11]
DIVIDE
nnnn
0500 to 1915
2100 to 2915
T000 to T063
C000 to C063
DM0000 to
DM0999
TM00 to TM29
#TM00 to
#TM29
13.0 to 15.0 1 (4) Converts trimmer

rotation angle into 0
to 249 and inputs it
25.0 to 29.0 1 (11) into internal register.
0000 to 6915
T000 to T119
C000 to C119 10.0 to 46.0 3 (5)
CTH0 to CTH1
DM0000 to
DM1999
TM00 to TM31
#00000 to
#65535
22.0 to 60.0 3 (12)
$0000 to
$FFFF
#TM00 to
#TM29
0500 to 1915
2100 to 6915
T000 to T119 9.0 to 99.0 3 (5)
C000 to C119
DM0000 to
DM1999
TM00 to TM29 21.0 to 113.0 3 (12)
#TM00 to
#TM29
DM0000 to
DM0000 to
DM1999
DM0999
DM/TM TM00 to TM31 TM00 to TM31
@CMP
#00000 to
#00000 to
No.,
@[FNC 04]
#65535
#65535
#/$
$0000 to
$0000 to
constant,
ADD
$FFFF
$FFFF
#TMxx
[FNC 00]
#TM00 to
#TM00 to
#TM29
#TM29
@ADD
@[FNC 00]
SUBTRACT
3-48
Page
internal register by
value specified by
operand and inputs
result back to same
register.
Divides content of
internal register by
value specified by
operand and inputs
register.
3-150
3-150
3-150
3-150
Instruction
Symbol
nnnn
<ANDA>
AND A
nnnn
ANDA>
nnnn
< ORA >
OR A
nnnn
ORA >
EXCLUSIVE
OR A
SHIFT
RIGHT A
0000 to 2915 0000 to 6915

DM0000 to
DM0000 to
DM0999
DM1999
@ANDA
R No.,
@[FNC 01]
#00000 to
DM/TM No.,
#00000 to
#65535
#/$ No.,
#65535
ORA
$0000 to
#TMxx
$0000 to
[FNC 31]
$FFFF
$FFFF
#TM00 to
#TM00 to
@ORA
#TM29
#TM29
@[FNC 31]
#dd
< SRA >
SRA
[FNC 41]
#dd
@SRA
@[FNC 41]
#dd
SLA
[FNC 40]
< SLA >

#dd
< RRA >
#dd
RLA
[FNC 35]
Moves content of
internal register serially
right, allowing each bit
3-169
that leaves right end to
24.0 to 44.0 2 (11) enter carry bit and then
leftmost bit.
Moves content of
12.0 to 29.0 2 (4) internal register serially
left, allowing each bit 3-169
that leaves left end to
24.0 to 43.0 2 (11) enter carry bit and then
rightmost bit.
12.0 to 30.0 2 (4)
< COM >
COM
[FNC 05]
COM >
@COM
@[FNC 05]
17.0 to 20.0 1 (10)
INC
[FNC 19]
12.0 to 15.0 3 (5)
nnnn
< INC >

nnnn
INC >
nnnn
< DEC >

nnnn
DEC >
#n
MULTIPLEXER
#01 to #16
@RLA
@[FNC 35]
COMPLEMENT
< MPX >
5.0 to 6.0
DM/TM No.
MPX >
3-171
DM0000 to
DM0000 to
DM0999
DM1999TM00
TM00 to TM29
to TM29
14.0 to 17.0 3 (5)
@DEC
@[FNC 07]
MPX
[FNC 27]
@MPX
@[FNC 27]
Inverts content of
each bit in internal
register.
Subtracts 1 from
content of data
memory specified by
26.0 to 31.0 3 (12) operand.
Converts 4-bit data

(specified by
operand) of internal
36.0 to 39.0 1 (11) register into 16bit
data.
3-172
24.0 to 25.0 1 (4)

# constant
#n
1 (3)
Adds 1 to content of
data memory
3-172
24.0 to 29.0 3 (12) specified by operand.
@INC
@[FNC 19]
DEC
[FNC 07]
12
Moves content of
internal register
3-166
serially left by value
22.0 to 42.0 2 (11) specified by operand.
RLA >
#dd
3-166
10.0 to 28.0 2 (4)
RRA
[FNC 37]
@RRA
@[FNC 37]
< RLA >
DECREMENT
MEMORY
ANDs each of 16 bits

of internal register and
that of value specified
3-159
by operand, and inputs
register.
11.0 to 63.0 3 (5) internal register and
3-161
by operand, and
23.0 to 77.0 3 (12) inputs result back to
same register.
11.0 to 64.0 3 (5)
Moves content of
internal register
serially right by
value specified by
23.0 to 42.0 2 (11) operand.
@SLA
@[FNC 40]
#dd
RRA >
INCREMENT
MEMORY
Page
11.0 to 28.0 2 (4)
# constant
#dd
ROTATE
LEFT A
Function
0000 to 2915 0000 to 6915

DM0000 to
DM0000 to 10.0 to 63.0 3 (5) EXCLUSIVE-ORs
<EORA>
DM0999
DM1999
each of 16 bits of
R No.,
DM/TM No.,
#00000 to
#00000 to
3-164
that of value
#/$ No.,
#65535
#65535
specified by operand,
#TMxx
$0000 to
$0000 to
and inputs result
@EORA
nnnn
$FFFF
$FFFF
22.0 to 77.0 3 (12) back to same
EORA> @[FNC 15]
#TM00 to
#TM00 to
register.
#TM29
#TM29
EORA
[FNC 15]
SLA >
ROTATE
RIGHT A
KV-10/16/24/40/80
Bytes
KV-10/16
(s)
KV-24/40/80
ANDA
[FNC 01]
nnnn
SRA >
SHIFT
LEFT A
Mnemonic Operand
#0 to #3
3-176
3-49
Instruction
Symbol
DMX
[FNC 12]
DMX >
@DMX
@[FNC 12]
<TBCD>
TBCD
[FNC 47]
TBCD>
@TBCD
@[FNC 47]
< TBIN >
TBIN
[FNC 48]
TBIN>
@TBIN
@[FNC 48]
< ASC >
ASC
[FNC 02]
ASC >
@ASC
@[FNC 02]
<RASC>
RASC
[FNC 32]
TRANSFER
BIN
ASCII
CONVERT
REVERSE
ASCII
CONVERT
Function
Page
28.0 to 30.0 1 (3)
highest order bit with
1 in internal register
40.0 to 44.0 1 (10) into 4-bit data.
3-176
Converts content of
internal register (16bit binary) into 4-digit
31.0 to 35.0 1 (10) BCD data.
3-180
19.0 to 21.0 1 (3)
18.0 to 20.0 1 (3)
Converts content of
internal register (4digit BCD) into 16-bit
30.0 to 34.0 1 (10) binary data.
8.0
12.0 to 14.0
ROOT
[FNC 36]
3-183
1 (3)

code into one byte
data.
24.0 to 28.0 1 (10)
3-183

register: lower order
1 (10) byte) and inputs result
3-185
102.0 to
103.0
@ROOT
ROOT>
@[FNC 36]
3-180
1 (3)
Converts content of
lower order byte of
internal register into
20.0 to 22.0 1 (10) 2-digit ASCII code.
@RASC
RASC>
@[FNC 32]
<ROOT>
SQUARE
ROOT
KV-10/16/24/40/80
Operand
value
Mnemonic Operand
Operand value Exec.time
Bytes
KV-10/16
(s)
KV-24/40/80
< DMX >
DEMULTIPLEXER
TRANSFER
BCD
KV-300
KV-300 Series,
Series, KV-10/80
114.0 to
117.0
1 (3)
KV-300
KV-300
Instruction
Symbol
DATA
MEMORY
WRITE
nnnn
< DW >
DMmmmm
TRIMMER
SETTING
< TMIN >
DW
@TMIN
TMIN > @[FNC 50]
< LDA >
LOAD A
nnnn
LDA >
nnnn
< STA >
STORE A
nnnn
STA >
#/$
constant,
DM No.
Operand value
nnnn:
#0000 to #65535
$0000 to $FFFF
DMmmmm:
DM0000 to DM9999
TMIN
[FNC 50]
nnnn
3-50
Mnemonic Operand
Trimmer
No.
LDA
[FNC 23]
R No.,
C/T No.,
DM/TM
No.,
#/$
@LDA
@[FNC 23] constant,
#TMxx
STA
[FNC 42]
R No.,
C/T No.,
DM/TM
No.,
#/$
@STA
constant,
@[FNC 42]
#TMxx
0, 1
Exec.time
Bytes
(s)
0500 to 1915
2100 to 17915
T000 to T249
C000 to C249
CTC0 to CTC3
DM0000 to DM9999
TM00 to TM29
#TM00 to #TM29
Page
0.60 to
1.40
5 (11) Writes constant into

data memory.
3-136
5.10 to
5.60
1 (11) Converts trimmer

rotation angle into 0 to
249 and inputs it into
1 (25) internal register.
3-138
2.00 to
5.70
0000 to 0009
0500 to 17915
T000 to T249
C000 to C249
CTH0 to CTH1
DM0000 to DM9999
TM00 to TM31
#00000 to #65535
$0000 to $FFFF
#TM00 to #TM29
Function
0.30 to
28.00
3 (12)
2.30 to
30.00
3 (26)
0.20 to
30.00
3 (12) Transfers content of

3-140
operand, or changes
preset value when T/C
3 (26) is specified as operand.
2.20 to
32.00
Inputs value specified

by operand into internal
register or inputs
3-140
current value when T/C
is specified as operand.
KV-300
Instruction
Symbol
nnnn
< CMP >
Mnemonic Operand
Operand value
Exec.time
Bytes
(s)
9.20 to
36.00
CMP
[FNC 04]
COMPARE
nnnn
CMP >
nnnn
< ADD >
@CMP
@[FNC 04]
ADD
[FNC 00]
ADD
DM/TM
No.,
#/$
constant,
#TMxx
DM0000 to DM9999
TM00 to TM31
#00000 to #65535
$0000 to $FFFF
#TM00 to #TM29
11.20 to
38.00
7.70 to
35.00
9.70 to
37.00
nnnn
SUB
[FNC 46]
8.40 to
35.00
nnnn
@SUB
@[FNC 46]
10.40 to
37.00
nnnn
MUL
[FNC 28]
SUBTRACT
SUB >
< MUL >
MULTIPLY
DM/TM
No.,
#/$ No.,
#TMxx
DM0000 to DM9999
TM00 to TM31
#00000 to #65535
$0000 to $FFFF
#TM00 to #TM29
9.80 to
37.00
nnnn
@MUL
@[FNC 28]
nnnn
DIV
[FNC 11]
13.70 to
41.00
nnnn
@DIV
@[FNC 11]
15.70 to
42.00
nnnn
ANDA
[FNC 01]
6.90 to
33.00
MUL >
< DIV >
11.80 to
39.00
DIVIDE
DIV >
<ANDA>
AND A
nnnn
@ANDA
@[FNC 01]
nnnn
< ORA >
ORA
[FNC 31]
nnnn
@ORA
@[FNC 31]
ANDA>
OR A
ORA >
R No.,
DM/TM
No.,
#/$ No.,
nnnn
@EORA
EORA> @[FNC 15] #TMxx
nnnn
EXCLUSIVE
OR A
EORA
[FNC 15]
R No.,
DM/TM
No.,
#/$ No.,
#TMxx
<EORA>
0000 to 0009
0500 to 17915
DM0000 to DM9999
TM00 to TM31
#00000 to #65535
$0000 to $FFFF
#TM00 to #TM29
8.90 to
35.00
6.90 to
33.00
8.90 to
35.00
0000 to 0009
0500 to 17915
DM0000 to DM9999TM00 to
TM31
#00000 to #65535
$0000 to $FFFF
#TM00 to #TM29
6.90 to
33.00
8.9 to
35.00
3 (12) Compares content of

value specified by
3 (26) operand.
3-146
Adds content of internal

register and value
3-150
specified by operand
3 (26) and inputs result back
to same register.
@ADD
@[FNC 00]
< SUB >
Page
3 (12)
nnnn
ADD >
Function
Subtracts value
3 (12) specified by operand
from content of register
and inputs result back
3 (26) to same register.
3-150
3 (12) internal register by
value specified by
operand and inputs
3 (26) result back to same
register.
3-150
Divides content of
3 (12) internal register by
value specified by
3-150
operand and inputs
register.
ANDs each of 16 bits of
3 (12) internal register and that
3-159
operand, and inputs
register.
3 (12) internal register and
by operand, and inputs 3-161
register.
EXCLUSIVE-ORs each
3 (12) of 16 bits of internal
register and that of value 3-164
specified by operand,
3 (26) and inputs result back to
same register.
3-51
12
KV-300
KV-300 Series,
Series, KV-10/80
KV-300
Instruction Symbol
#dd
@SRA
@[FNC 41]
12.80
#dd
SLA
[FNC 40]
10.80
< SLA >

#dd
SLA >
10.80
@SLA
@[FNC 40]
12.80
# constant
12.00
@RRA
@[FNC 37]
14.00
RLA
[FNC 35]
12.00
RLA >
@RLA
@[FNC 35]
14.00
< COM >
COM
[FNC 05]
6.10
#dd
RRA >
#dd
< RLA >
ROTATE
LEFT A
#dd
COMPLEMENT
COM >
nnnn
< INC >
INCREMENT
MEMORY
nnnn
INC >
nnnn
DECREMENT
MEMORY
< DEC >
3-52
Moves content of
2 (11) internal register serially
left, allowing each bit
that leaves left end to
2 (25) enter carry bit and then
rightmost bit.
3-169
1 (9)
7.70
3 (12)
@INC
@[FNC 19]
9.70
3 (26)
7.70
3 (12)
@DEC
@[FNC 07]
9.70
#n
MPX
[FNC 27]
7.30
Inverts content of each

bit in internal register.
3-171
Adds 1 to content of
data memory specified
by operand.
3-172
Subtracts 1 from content

of data memory
3-172
3 (26) specified by operand.
MPX >
@MPX
@[FNC 27]
9.30
1 (11) Converts 4-bit data

(specified by operand)
of internal register into
1 (25) 16- bit data.
< DMX >
DMX
[FNC 12]
6.70
1 (9)
DMX >
@DMX
@[FNC 12]
< MPX >
DEMULTIPLEXER
3-169
INC
[FNC 19]
DM0000 to DM9999
TM00 to TM29
# constant
#n
#0 to #3
8.70
3-166
Moves content of
2 (11) internal register serially
right, allowing each bit
that leaves right end to
2 (25) enter carry bit and then
leftmost bit.
1 (23)
DM/TM
No.
Page
2 (11) Moves content of

left by value specified by 3-166
2 (25) operand.
8.10
DEC
[FNC 07]
Function
2 (22) Moves content of

right by value specified
2 (25) by operand.
@COM
@[FNC 05]
nnnn
DEC >
MULTIPLEXER
#01 to #16
RRA
[FNC 37]
#dd
< RRA >
ROTATE
RIGHT A
Exec.time
Bytes
(s)
SRA
[FNC 41]
SRA >
SHIFT
LEFT A
Operand value
< SRA >
#dd
SHIFT
RIGHT A
Mnemonic Operand
highest order bit with 1
in internal register into
1 (23) 4-bit data.
3-176
3-176
KV-300
Instruction
TRANSFER
BCD
Symbol
Mnemonic
<TBCD>
TBCD
[FNC 47]
@TBCD
TBCD> @[FNC 47]
Exec.time
Bytes
(s)
13.20
15.20
TBIN
[FNC 48]
14.00
TBIN>
@TBIN
@[FNC 48]
16.00
< ASC >
ASC
[FNC 02]
8.50
ASC >
@ASC
@[FNC 02]
10.50
<RASC>
RASC
[FNC 32]
6.80
ASCII
CONVERT
@RASC
RASC> @[FNC 32]
<ROOT>
SQUARE
ROOT
Operand value
< TBIN >
TRANSFER
BIN
REVERSE
ASCII
CONVERT
Operand
Page
Converts content of
internal register (16-bit
binary) into 4-digit BCD
1 (23) data.
3-180
Converts content of
internal register (4-digit
BCD) into 16-bit binary
1 (23) data.
3-180
1 (9)
1 (9)
1 (9)
Converts content of
lower order byte of
internal register into 21 (23) digit ASCII code.
3-183
1 (9)
code into one byte data. 3-183
8.80
ROOT
[FNC 36]
77.70
@ROOT
79.70
ROOT> @[FNC 36]
Function
1 (23)
3-185
register: lower order
1 (23) byte) and inputs result
1 (9)
3-53
12
KV-300
KV-300 Series,
Series, KV-10/80

KV-10/16/24/40/80
Mnemonic Operand
Function
Page
Symbol
INTERRUPT
DISABLED
< DI >
DI
[FNC 08]
3.0 to 4.6
1 (4)
Disables execution
of interrupt.
3-193
INTERRUPT
ENABLED
< EI >
EI
[FNC 13]
3.0 to 4.6
1 (4)
Enables execution
of interrupt.
3-193
INT
nnn
R No.
RETI
1 (8)
Comparator
No.
INT
CTCn
RETURN
INTERRUPT
35.0 to 48.0
000 to 003
INT
[FNC 20]
INTERRUPT
KV-10/16/24/40/80
Bytes
KV-10/16
(s)
KV-24/40/80
Instruction
Used with comparators CTC0 to CTC3

3-192
and executes
instructions between
INT and RETI.
35.0 to
48.8
CTC0 to CTC3
RETI
[FNC 34]
20.0 to
23.0
Executes instructions between INT

and RETI at rising
edge of any of input 3-192
000 to 003 or at
falling edge of 003.
1 (3)
Represents end of
interrupt.
3-192
KV-300
KV-300
Mnemonic Operand
Exec.time
Bytes
(s)
Instruction
Symbol
INTERRUPT
DISABLED
< DI >
DI
[FNC 08]
3.20
INTERRUPT
ENABLED
< EI >
EI
[FNC 13]
5.80
INT
nnn
R No.
INT
CTCn
3-54
000 to 003
Function
Page
1 (9)
Disables execution
of interrupt.
3-193
1 (0)
Enables execution
of interrupt.
3-193
40.00 to
80.00
1 (0)
Executes instructions
between INT and
RETI at rising edge
3-192
of any of input 000 to
003 or at falling edge
of 003.
40.00 to
80.00
1 (0)
60 to 100
1 (0)
INT
[FNC 20]
INTERRUPT
RETURN
INTERRUPT
Operand value
RETI
Comparator
No.
RETI
[FNC 34]
CTC0 to CTC3
Used with comparators CTC0 to CTC3

3-192
and executes
instructions between
INT and RETI.
Represents end of
interrupt.
3-192
2.3 Convention Details
2.3 Convention Details

In this chapter, each instruction is described as follows:
Ladder symbol
Represents the form
of the instruction on a
ladder diagram.
Instruction key
Represents the key or
function No. for entry.
Instruction
Describes the name
and brief function of
the instruction.
SET / RES
2.4 Instruction Details
SET: Set
Mnemonic
Represents the instruction in ladder language.
RES: Reset
SET
RES
Example
Example
Timing diagram
Description
Perform programming
using the given example
to gain experience.
nnnn
SET
nnnn
RES
Turns ON specified relay when input is ON

and enables this relay to remain ON.
Turns OFF specified relay, timer, or counter
when input is ON.
0000
0500
SET
0001
0500
RES
Coding
Line No.
Instruction
LD
0000
0001
SET
0500
0002
LD
0001
0003
OUB
0500
Description
Output relay 0500 remains ON after input relay 0000 turns OFF. Output relay
0500 turns OFF when input relay 0001 turns ON.
SET instruction sets a latch whereas RES instruction resets it.
RES instruction not only turns OFF relay coils but serves as a reset signal when
a timer or counter is used as an operand.
0001
#00100
C000
00000
C000
RES
0002
Note
Describes the notes
for the instruction.
0001
0002
Coding
Shows the
coding for
the given
example.
#00100
C000
0000
Note: The SET and RES instructions can be entered in any order. Note, however,
that priority is given to the instruction that is entered last.
In the above example, when both 0000 and 0001 are ON, RES has priority over
SET, causing 0500 to remain OFF.
Tips
Differences between SET/RES and KEEP
Basically , SET/RES and KEEP ( p. 3-57 and p. 3-71) serve the same purpose.
SET and RES can be used separately. Therefore, RES can be placed before
SET.
Another instruction may be placed between SET and RES.
KEEP needs only three lines of program, therefore saving memory space when
used a number of times.
Tips
Describes hands-on
techniques for efficient
programming.
Operand
Shows operands (element
Nos.) that can be used for
the instruction.
Operand
0000
0000
0500
RES
0001
0500
SET
LD
RES
LD
SET
0000
0000
0500
0001
0500
KEEP
SET
0500
0001
LD
0000
LD
0001
KEEP 0500
RES
Operands
NEW KV
KV-300
KV-10/16
KV-24/40/80
0500 to 1915
2009
2100 to 17915
T000 to T249
C000 to C249
0500 to 1915
2009
2100 to 17915
T000 to T249
C000 to C249
0500 to 1915
2009
2100 to 2915
T000 to T063
C000 to C063
0500 to 1915
2009
2100 to 6915
T000 to T119
C000 to C119
CTH0 to CTH1 (RES only)

CTC0 to CTC3 (RES only)
Key operation
Describes the basic key
operations on the handheld
programmer. Set the mode
switch to PROGRAM.
Key operation
SET
3-66
Operand
ENT
R-SRCH
RES
Operand
ENT
R-SRCH
* The above page is created for explanation purposes only.

This page may be different from the actual page.
3-55
12

This section describes the basic instructions used for programming. You can create
complete programs with only these basic instructions.
Instruction
Load
3-57
LDB
3-57
And
AND
3-58
And Bar
ANB
3-58
OR: Or
OR
3-60
ORB
3-60
ANL: And Load
ANL
3-61
Or Load
ORL
3-63
OUT: Out
OUT
3-65
OUB: Out Bar
OUB
3-65
SET: Set
SET
3-66
RES: Reset
RES
3-66
TMR: 0.1-s Timer
TMR
3-67
TMH: 0.01-s Timer
TMH (FUN49)
3-68
TMS: 1-ms Timer
TMS (FUN51)
3-69
3-72
C: Counter
UDC: Up-Down Counter
UDC (FUN52)
3-76
DIFU: Differentiate Up
DIFU (FUN10)
3-78
DIFD: Differentiate Down
DIFD (FUN09)
3-78
KEEP: Keep
KEEP (FUN22)
3-80
SFT: Shift
SFT (FUN39)
3-82
HSP: High Speed
HSP (FUN18)
3-86
MC: Master Control
MC (FUN24)
3-89
MCR: Master Control Reset
MCR (FUN25)
3-89
MEMSW (FUN26)
3-92
NOP: No Operation
NOP
3-94
END: End
END
3-94
ENDH: End Hi
END
3-94
MEMSW: Memory Switch
3-56
Reference page
LD
Load Bar
ORB: Or Bar
Mnemonic
LD / LDB
LD: Load
LD
nnnn
LDB: Load Bar
LDB
nnnn
7
4
Connects N.O. contact to bus.

Connects N.C. contact to bus.
Example
0000
0500
0001
0501
Coding
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
0000
LD
0000
0001
OUT
0500
0002
LDB
0001
0003
OUT
0501
When input relay 0000 turns ON, output relay 0500 turns ON.
When input relay 0001 turns OFF, output relay 0501 turns ON.
12
Description
LD and LDB instructions are used to connect a contact to the bus.

LD and LDB instructions are also used to separate program blocks when ANL or
ORL instruction is used.
Operands
Visual KV
KV-300
KV-10/16
KV-24/40/80
0000 to 17915
T000 to T249
C000 to C249
CTC0 to CTC3
CTC0 to CTC3
0000 to 0009
0500 to 17915
T000 to T249
C000 to C249
0000 to 2915
T000 to T063
C000 to C063
CTC0 to CTC3
0000 to 6915
T000 to T119
C000 to C119
CTC0 to CTC3
Key operation
Example: LD C014
LD
LDB
Operand
ENT
R-SRCH
L D CTR SET LDB

7 ( C) 1
4
ENT
R-SRCH
3-57
AND / ANB
AND: And
AND
nnnn
ANB: And Bar
ANB
nnnn
Connects N.O. contact in series with

previous contact.
Connects N.C. contact in series with
previous contact.
Example
0000
0001
0500
0002
0003
0501
0502
0004
0503
Coding
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
0000
LD
0000
0001
AND
0001
0002
OUT
0500
0003
LD
0002
0004
ANB
0003
0005
OUT
0501
0006
OUT
0502
0007
AND
0004
0008
OUT
0503
To turn ON 0503, 0002 must be ON, 0003 OFF, and 0004 ON at the same time. The
AND and ANB instructions are used when two or more conditions (in this case,
0002: ON, 0003: OFF, 0004: ON) must be satisfied at the same time.
Description
As many contacts as desired can be connected in series provided these contacts

are used in the same program.
As OUT 0503 shown in the above example, when an AND or ANB instruction is
used immediately after an OUT instruction to connect the other relay via a
contact (0004 in the example), the AND or ANB can be used as many times as
desired, provided the program syntax is correct.
The following two circuits operate in the same manner, but the coding for these
circuits are different.
0000
0001
0000
0501
0001
0500
0500
Coding
Line No.
Coding
Instruction
Operand
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
0000
0000
LD
0000
0000
LD
0001
OUT
0500
0001
MPS
0002
AND
0001
0002
AND
0001
0003
OUT
0501
0003
OUT
0501
0004
MPP
0005
OUT
3-58
0501
"MPS instruction" (p. 3-103)

"MPP instruction" (p. 3-103)
0500
AND / ANB
Operand
Visual KV
KV-300
KV-10/16
KV-24/40/80
0000 to 17915
T000 to T249
C000 to C249
CTC0 to CTC3
0000 to 0009
0500 to 17915
T000 to T249
C000 to C249
0000 to 2915
T000 to T063
C000 to C063
CTC0 to CTC3
0000 to 6915
T000 to T119
C000 to C119
CTC0 to CTC3
Key operation
Example: AND T012
AND
ANB
Operand
ENT
R-SRCH
AND TMR SET ANL

8 (T) 1
2
ENT
R-SRCH
12
3-59
OR / ORB
OR: Or
OR
nnnn
ORB
nnnn
ORB: Or Bar
Connects N.O. contact in parallel with

previous contact.
Connects N.C. contact in parallel with
previous contact.
Example
0000
0500
0003
0001
0002
0004
Coding
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
0000
LD
0000
0001
OR
0000
0002
ORB
0002
0003
AND
0003
0004
OR
0004
0005
OUT
0500
0000 must be ON or
To turn ON 0500,
0003 must be ON, and
0001 ON or
or,
0002 OFF.
0004 must be ON.
The OR and ORB instructions are used when at least one of the conditions (here,
two sets of conditions: <0003: ON, 0004: ON>, and <0000: ON, 0001: ON, 0002:
OFF> are given) must be satisfied.
Description
The OR and ORB instructions are used to connect in parallel the contacts for
these instructions with contacts on the previous line. An LD or LDB instruction is
used together with the OR and ORB instructions.
As many contacts as desired can be connected in parallel provided they are used
in the same program.
Note: Output circuits (except for

and
)
cannot be included in the parallel connection.
0500
0000
Incorrect
0001
0501
Operands
Visual KV
KV-300
KV-10/16
KV-24/40/80
0000 to 6915
T000 to T119
C000 to C119
CTC0 to CTC3
0000 to 0009
0500 to 17915
T000 to T249
C000 to C249
CTC0 to CTC3
0000 to 2915
T000 to T063
C000 to C063
CTC0 to CTC3
0000 to 6915
T000 to T119
C000 to C119
CTC0 to CTC3
Key operation
Example: OR T018
OR
ORB
Operand
3-60
ENT
R-SRCH
O R TMR SET AND

9 ( T) 1
8
ENT
R-SRCH
ANL
ANL: And Load
ANL
Connects in series blocks made of one or

more contacts.
Example
0000
0001
0002
0003
0500
ANL
Coding
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
0000
LD
0000
0001
OR
0002
0002
LD
0001
0003
OR
0003
0004
ANL
0005
OUT
0500
12
Description
0000
The above example shows a serial connection between Block A
0002
0001
and Block B
series.
0003
. The ANL instruction is used to connect two or more blocks in
Operands
Key operation
ANL
ENT
R-SRCH
3-61
ANL
Applications of ANL Instruction

0000
0002
0004
0001
0003
0005
0500
Coding (1)
Line No.
Coding (2)
Instruction
Operand
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
0000
LD
0000
0000
LD
0000
0001
OR
0001
0001
OR
0001
0002
LD
0002
0002
LD
0002
0003
OR
0003
0003
OR
0003
0004
ANL
0004
LD
0004
0005
LD
0004
0005
OR
0005
0006
OR
0005
0006
ANL
0007
ANL
0008
OUT
0500
0007
ANL
0008
OUT
0500
The ANL instruction can be used as many times as desired. Note, however, that
in example (2) above, ANL is entered one less time than the number of blocks to
be connected.
Also, ANL can be used only 8 times or less in example (2), whereas in example
(1) it can be used as many times as desired.
Note: "LOGIC ERROR" is displayed on the programmer when ANL is used 9 or

more times in example (2).
3-62
ORL
ORL: Or Load
ORL
Connects in parallel blocks made of one or

more contacts.
Example
0000
0001
0002
0003
0050
ORL
Coding
Line No.
Instruction
0000
LD
Operand
0000
0001
AND
0001
0002
LD
0002
0003
AMD
0003
0004
ORL
0005
OUT
0500
Description
The above example shows a parallel connection of Block A
and Block B
parallel.
0002 0003
0000 0001
12
. The ORL instruction is used to connect two or more blocks in
Operands
Key operation
ORL
ENT
R-SRCH
3-63
ORL
Applications of ORL Instruction

0000
0001
Block
0002
0003
Block
0004
0005
Block
0500
Coding (1)
Line No.
Coding (2)
Instruction
Operand
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
0000
LD
0000
0000
LD
0000
0001
AND
0001
0001
AND
0001
0002
LD
0002
0002
LD
0002
0003
AND
0003
0003
AND
0003
0004
ORL
0004
LD
0004
0005
0005
LD
0004
0005
AND
0006
AND
0005
0006
ORL
0007
ORL
0008
OUT
0500
0007
ORL
0008
OUT
0500
The ORL instruction can be used as many times as desired. Note, however, that
in example (2) above, ORL is entered one less time than the number of blocks to
be connected.
Also, ORL can be used only 8 times or less in example (2), whereas in example
(1) it can be used as many times as desired.
Note: "LOGIC ERROR" is displayed on the programmer when ORL is used 9 times
or more in example (2).
3-64
OUT / OUB
OUT: Out
OUB: Out Bar
OUT
nnnn
OUB
nnnn
Outputs ON/OFF status of input to relay coil.

Outputs inverted ON/OFF status of input to
relay coil.
Example
0500
0000
0501
Coding
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
0000
LD
0000
0001
OUT
0500
0002
OUB
0501
Description
When input relay 0000 turn ON, output relay 0500 turns ON and output relay
0501 turns OFF.
The OUT and OUB instructions are used to drive relay coils for output relays,
internal utility relays, and latch relays. These instructions are not used for input
relays, timers, counters, or data memories.
Note: Double coil

When one output relay receives input from two or more OUT or OUB instructions,
priority is given to the instruction that is entered last.
When 0001 is OFF, 0500 does not turn ON even if 0000 turns ON.
Operands
Visual KV
KV-300
KV-10/16
KV-24/40/80
0000 to 1915
2009
2300 to 17915
0500 to 1915
2009
2300 to 17915
0500 to 1915
2009
2300 to 2915
0500 to 1915
2009
2300 to 6915
Key operation
OUT
Operand
ENT
R-SRCH
OUB
Operand
ENT
R-SRCH
3-65
12
SET / RES
SET: Set
RES: Reset
SET
nnnn
SET
RES
nnnn
RES
1
0
Example
Turns ON specified relay when input is ON

and enables this relay to remain ON.
Turns OFF specified relay, timer, or counter
when input is ON.
0000
0500
SET
0001
0500
RES
Coding
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
0000
LD
0000
0001
SET
0500
0002
LD
0001
0003
OUB
0500
Description
Output relay 0500 remains ON after input relay 0000 turns OFF. Output relay
0500 turns OFF when input relay 0001 turns ON.
SET instruction sets a latch whereas RES instruction resets it.
RES instruction not only turns OFF relay coils but serves as a reset signal when
a timer or counter is used as an operand.
#00100
C000
00000
C000
RES
0001
0002
0001
#00100
C000
0000
0002
Note: The SET and RES instructions can be entered in any order. Note, however,
that priority is given to the instruction that is entered last.
In the above example, when both 0000 and 0001 are ON, RES has priority over
SET, causing 0500 to remain OFF.
Tips
Differences between SET/RES and KEEP
Basically , SET/RES and KEEP ( See above and p. 3-80) serve the same purpose.
SET and RES can be used separately. Therefore, RES can be placed before
SET.
Another instruction may be placed between SET and RES.
KEEP needs only three lines of program, therefore saving memory space when
used a number of times.
0000
0500
RES
0001
0500
SET
LD
RES
LD
SET
0000
0000
0500
0001
0500
KEEP
SET
0500
0001
LD
0000
LD
0001
KEEP 0500
RES
Operands
Visual KV
KV-300
KV-10/16
KV-24/40/80
0500 to 1915
2009
2100 to 17915
T000 to T249
C000 to C249
0500 to 1915
2009
2100 to 17915
T000 to T249
C000 to C249
0500 to 1915
2009
2100 to 2915
T000 to T063
C000 to C063
0500 to 1915
2009
2100 to 6915
T000 to T119
C000 to C119
CTH0 to CTH1 (RES only)

CTC0 to CTC3 (RES only)
Key operation
SET
3-66
Operand
ENT
R-SRCH
RES
Operand
ENT
R-SRCH
TMR
TMR: 0.1-s Timer
TMR
(T)
Sets a 16-bit on-delay timer that counts

#ddddd
Txxx
Example
0000
#00010
T000
Preset value: 1 s
#00035
T001
Preset value: 3.5 s
T000
0500
T001
0501
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
Instruction
LD
TMR
TMR
LD
OUT
LD
OUT
Operand
0000
000 #00010*1
001 #00035*2
T000
0500
T001
0501
*1 0.1 s x 10 = 1 s
*2 0.1 s x 35 = 3.5 s
12
Timing diagram (TMR000 #00010 and 0500 in the above example)

Scan
Input 0000
ON
OFF
Current #00010
value of
TMR000
#00000
ON
Output 0500
0500 and 0501 turn ON 1 second and 3.5 seconds respectively after 0000 turns
ON.
TMR000 is a subtraction timer. When the current value reaches "#00000",
contact T000 turns ON, and then output relay 0500 turns ON.
When input relay 0000 turns OFF, contact T000 and T001 turn OFF and the
current values of TMR000 and TMR001 are reset.
Note 1: The TMR number cannot be the same as any other TMS, TMH, TMR, C, or UDC
instructions in the same program.
Note 2: The current value of TMR is not retained but is reset to the preset value if a power
failure occurs or if power is turned OFF.
Tips
When the number specified by TMR is used as a contact (T000 in the above
example), this contact can be used as many times as desired. It can also be
used as both N.O. and N.C. contacts.
Timer accuracy = 0.1 sec. + (1 scan time) (max.)
Operands
Visual KV
KV-300
KV-10/16
KV-24/40/80
No.: 000 to 249

Preset value:
#00000 to #65535
No.: 000 to 249

Preset value:
#00000 to #65535
No.: 000 to 063

Preset value:
#00000 to #65535
No.: 000 to 119

Preset value:
#00000 to #65535
Key operation
TMR
(T)
Operand
Operand
(TMR No.)
(Preset value)
ENT
R-SRCH
3-67
TMH
TMH: 0.01-s Timer
FUN
LDB
OR
Sets a 16-bit on-delay timer that

counts down in 0.01-s decrements.
#ddddd
T
Txxx
H
Example
0000
#00010
T
T000
H
T000
0500
Coding
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
0000
LD
0000
0001
TMH
000 #00010*1
0002
LD
T000
0003
OUT
0500
*1 0.01 s x 10 = 0.1 s
Description
0500 and 0501 turn ON 0.1-s after 0000 turns ON.

TMH is a subtraction timer. When the current value reaches "#00000", the
contact of the timer No. turns ON.
When input relay 0000 turns OFF, contact T000 turns OFF and the current value
of TMH000 is reset.
Note 1: The TMH number cannot be the same as any other TMS, TMH, TMR, C, or
UDC instructions in the same program.
Note 2: The current value of TMH is not retained but is reset to the preset value if
power failure occurs or if power is turned OFF.
When the number specified by TMH is used as a contact (T000 in the above
Operand
Visual KV
KV-300
KV-10/16
KV-24/40/80
No.: 000 to 249

Preset value:
#00000 to #65535
No.: 000 to 249

Preset value:
#00000 to #65535
No.: 000 to 063

Preset value:
#00000 to #65535
No.: 000 to 119

Preset value:
#00000 to #65535
Key operations
FUN
3-68
LDB
OR
ENT
Operand
Operand
ENT
R-SRCH
(TMH No.)
(Preset value)
R-SRCH
TMS
TMS: 1-ms Timer
ANB SET
FUN 5
Sets a 16-bit on-delay timer that

counts down in 0.01 ms decrements.
#ddddd
T Txxx
S
Example
0000
#00100
T
T000
S
T000
0500
Preset value: 0.1 s
Coding
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
0000
LD
0000
0001
TMS
000 #00010*1
0002
LD
T000
0003
OUT
0500
*1 0.001 s x 100 = 0.1 s
Description
0500 and 0501 turn ON 0.1-s after 0000 turns ON.

TMS is a subtraction timer. When the current value reaches "#00000", the
contact of the timer No. turns ON.
When input relay 0000 turns OFF, contact T000 turns OFF and the current value
of TMS000 is reset.
Note 1: The TMS number cannot be the same as any other TMS, TMH, TMR, C, or
Note 2: The current value of TMS is not retained but is reset to the preset value if
power failure occurs or if power is turned OFF.
When the number specified by TMS is used as a contact (T000 in the above
Operand
Visual KV
KV-300
KV-10/16
KV-24/40/80
No.: 000 to 249

Preset value:
#00000 to #65535
No.: 000 to 249

Preset value:
#00000 to #65535
No.: 000 to 063

Preset value:
#00000 to #65535
No.: 000 to 119

Preset value:
#00000 to #65535
Key operations
FUN
ANB
SET
ENT
Operand
Operand
ENT
R-SRCH
(TMS No.)
(Preset value)
R-SRCH
3-69
12
TMR
Applications of TMR instruction

One-shot circuit
When input relay 0000 turns ON, output relay 0500 turns ON and remains ON for a
specified time.
#00020
T000
0000
T000
0500
2 sec.
0500
Timing diagram
ON
OFF
0000
ON
ON
2 sec.
2 sec.
0500
Coding
Line No.
Instruction
0000
LD
Operand
0000
0001
OR
0500
0002
TMR
000 #00020
0003
ANB
T000
0004
OUT
0500
Off-delay circuit
When input relay 0000 turns ON, output relay 0500 turns ON. 0500 turns OFF in a
specified time after 0000 turns OFF.
0000
0500
T000
0000
0500
#00020
T000
Timing diagram
ON
0000
OFF
0500
ON
2 sec.
Coding
Line No.
3-70
Instruction
Operand
0000
LD
0000
0001
OR
0500
0002
ANB
T000
0003
OUT
0500
0004
ANB
0000
0005
TMR
000 #00020
2 sec.
TMR

On-delay circuit
Output relay 0500 turns ON in a specified time after input relay 0000 turns ON.
When input relay 0000 turns OFF, output relay 0500 also turns OFF.
0000
#00020
T000
T000
0500
2 sec.
Timing diagram
ON
OFF
0000
ON
0500
1s
2s
Coding
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
0000
LD
0000
0001
TMR
000 #00020
0002
LD
T000
0003
OUT
0500
12
Flicker circuit
Output relay 0500 turns ON and OFF repeatedly while input relay 0000 is ON.
0000
T001
T000
#00020
T000
2 sec.
#00010
T001
1 sec.
0500
Timing diagram
ON
0000
OFF
0500
ON
ON
ON
2s 1s 2s 1s 2s 1s
Coding
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
0000
LD
0000
0001
ANB
T001
0002
TMR
000 #00020
0003
LD
T000
0004
AMR
001 #00010
0005
OUT
0500
3-71
CTR
(C)
C: Counter
#ddddd
Cxxx
nnnn
Sets a 16-bit up-counter.
Example
Reset input
Preset value
#00010
C000
0000
0500
Counter No.
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
0000
LDB
0001
0001
000 #00010 0000
0002
LD
C000
0003
OUT
0500
0001
C000
Count input
Coding
Timing diagram (C000#00010 and 0500 in the above example)

0000
(Count input)
ON
OFF
0001
(Reset input)
Current value
of C000
#00010
C000
0500
10
ON
Description
The counter performs one counting at the rising edge of clock pulse. When the
current value reaches the preset value, the coil of specified No. turns ON.
When a reset input (b [N.C.] contact) turns ON, the current counter value is reset
to "00000".
Since C is software counter which is set on the program, the response speed
depends on the scan time.
Note 1: When a reset input is provided using an a (N.O.) contact, the current
counter value is reset at power-off.
Note 2: The C number cannot be the same as any other TMS, TMH, TMR, C, or
Note 3: The current C value is stored more than two months (KV-10xx: More than
20 days) at 25C even when the KV is not in operation or is turned off.
Tips
By entering relay 2007 (which can turn the counter OFF for only the first scan time
when the operation is started) using an 'a' (N.O.) contact in series as the input relay
for resetting counter, you can reset the current C value whenever the operation is
started.
0001
3-72
#00010
C000
0000
Details of counter
Extended ladder
The counter for the KV Series supports the extended ladder method.
KV counter
0001
#00010
C005
0000
2007
The extended ladder allows you to connect contacts or output coils after the
counter in series, reducing the number of ladder program lines.
In the following example, the counter starts counting when counter input relay 0004
turns ON. When the current counter value reaches "300", output relay 0500 turns
ON.
0002
#00300
C002
0004
C002
0500
Coding
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
0000
LDB
0002
0001
002 #00300 0004
0002
CON
0003
AND
C002
0004
OUT
0500
12
"CON instruction" (p. 3-102)
For details of the extended ladder, refer to "1.5 Extended Ladder Diagrams"
(p.3-29).
Operands
Visual KV
KV-300
KV-10/16
KV-24/40/80
No.: 000 to 249

Count input:
0000 to 17915
No.: 000 to 249

Count input:
0000 to 0009,
0500 to 17915
Preset value:
#00000 to #65535
No.: 000 to 063

Count input:
0000 to 2915
No.: 000 to 119

Count input:
0000 to 6915
Preset value:
#00000 to #65535
Preset value:
#00000 to #65535
Preset value:
#00001 to #65535
Key operation
CTR
(C)
Operand
Operand
Operand
ENT
(Counter No.)
(Preset value)
(Count input)
R-SRCH
3-73
Applications of C (counter) instruction

Long-duration timer
Sets a long-duration timer by combining a timer and a counter.
Output 0500 turns ON in 1 hour.
Special utility relay
(1-second clock)
#03600
C002
2006
0500
0000
C002
Coding
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
0000
LDB
0000
0001
C
002 #03600 2006
0002
LD
C002
0003
OUT
0500
"1.3.7 Special Utility Relays" (p. 3-12)
Accumulator timer (Remains ON in case of power failure)

Coding
0001
#03600
C001
2006
1000
C001
C001
#00600
C002
1000
0001
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
Instruction
LDB
ANB
C
LD
OUT
LDB
C
Operand
0001
C001
001 #03600 2006
C001
1000
0001
002 #00600 1000
Instruction
LDB
ANB
C
LD
OUT
LDB
C
Operand
0002
C001
001 #10000 0000
C000
1000
0002
001 #65535 1000
Large capacity counter

Coding
0002
#10000
C000
0000
1000
C000
C000
#65535
C001
1000
0002
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
Multi-level setting
Sets a multi-level counter using arithmetic instructions.
#01000
CMP
2009
#09999
C002
0000
0500
#02000
CMP
2009
0501
#03000
CMP
2009
0502
0001
2002
C002
LDA
Outputs in 3 different levels according to the current counter value.

Current counter value
1000 or more 0500 turns ON.
3-74
"2.4.3 Arithmetic Instructions" (p. 3-134)

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
Instruction
LDB
C
LD
LDA
CON
MPS
CMP
CON
ANB
OUT
Operand
0002
002 #09999 0000
2002
C002
#01000
2009
0500
Line No.
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
Instruction
MRD
CMP
CON
ANB
OUT
MPP
CMP
CON
ANB
OUT
Operand
#02000
2009
0501
#03000
2009
0502
Counter multi-level setting

0001
2002 C000
LDA
#00999 2011
CMP
#01999 2011 0500
CMP
#09999
C000
0000
0500
0501
#02999 2011 0500 0501 0502

CMP
12
Outputs in 3 different levels according to the counter current value.

Current counter value
00000 to 00999 0500 turns ON.
01000 to 01999 0501 turns ON.
02000 to 02999 0502 turns ON.
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
Instruction
LDB
C
LD
LDA
CON
MPS
CMP
CON
ANB
OUT
MRD
CMP
CON
ANB
ANB
OUT
MPP
CMP
CON
ANB
ANB
ANB
OUT
Operand
0001
000 #09999 0000
2002
C000
#00999
2011
0500
#01999
2011
0500
0501
#02999
2011
0500
0501
0502
3-75
UDC
UDC: Up-Down Counter
ANB ANL
FUN 5
UDC xxx
UP
DW #ddddd
RES
Sets a 16-bit up-down-counter.
Example
UP input
UDC 000
0001
UP
DOWN input
#00009
0002
DW
RESET input
0003
RES
0500
C000
Coding
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
0000
LD
0001
0001
LD
0002
0002
LD
0003
0003
UDC
000 #00009
0004
LD
C000
0005
OUT
0500
Timing diagram
2 3
Current value of C000
Carry
Carry
ON
Time
ON
OFF
C000
ON
OFF
Input for up 0001
ON
Input for down 0002

Input for resetting
0003
OFF
ON
OFF
When UP input relay (0001) turns ON, the current value of the counter is
incremented by one. When DOWN input relay (0002) turns ON, the current value
is decremented by one.
C000 turns ON when the digit shifts (#00009 to #00000, or #00000 to #00009).
Note 1: The UDC number cannot be the same as any other TMS, TMH, TMR, C, or
Note 2: The current UDC value is stored more than two months (KV-10xx: More
than 20 days) at 25C even when the KV is not in operation or is turned off.
Operands
Visual KV
KV-300
KV-10/16
KV-24/40/80
No.: 000 to 249

Preset value:
#00000 to #65535
No.: 000 to 249

Preset value:
#00000 to #65535
No.: 000 to 063

Preset value:
#00000 to #65535
No.: 000 to 119

Preset value:
#00000 to #65535
Key operation
FUN
3-76
ANB
ANL
ENT
Operand
Operand
ENT
R-SRCH
(C No.)
(Preset value)
R-SRCH
UDC
Application of UDC instruction

Multi-level UP/DOWN counter
UP/DOWN counter which allows a count setting value up to 99,990,000.
UDC 000
0001
UP
#09999
BCD
Low-order 4 digits
0002
DW
0003
RES
C000
UDC 001
0001
UP
#09999
C000
BCD
High-order 4 digits
0002
DW
0003
RES
Up-input
0001
Down-input 0002
Coding
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
0000
LD
0001
0001
LD
0002
0002
LD
0003
0003
UDC
000 #09999
0004
LD
C000
0005
AND
0001
0006
LD
C000
0007
AND
0002
0008
LD
0003
0009
UDC
001 #09999
12
The example below outputs the high-order 4 digits of 8-digit BCD to UDC001 and
the low-order 4 digits of 8-digit BCD to UDC000.
0004
C000
LDA
TBCD
0500
STA
C001
LDA
TBCD
0600
STA
Low-order
4 digits
High-order
4 digits
3-77
DIFU / DIFD
SET RES
nnnn
DIFU
RES OR
nnnn
DIFD
DIFU: Differentiate Up
FUN 1
DIFD: Differentiate Down:
FUN 0
0
9
Detects rising edge of input signal and turns

ON specified relay for 1st scan time only.
Detects falling edge of input signal and turns
ON specified relay for 1st scan time only.
Example
1000
DIFU
0000
1001
DIFD
Coding
Line No.
Instruction
0000
LD
Operand
0000
0001
DIFU
1000
0002
DIFD
1001
Timing diagram (0000, 1000, and 1001 in the above example)

ON
0000
OFF
ON
1000
ON for 1st scan time only

ON
1001
ON for 1st scan time only
The DIFU instruction turns ON the relay specified by the operand for only the 1st
scan time at the rising edge of input signal (0000).
The DIFD instruction turns ON the relay specified by the operand for only the 1st
scan time at the falling edge of input signal (0000).
Note 1: Any DIFU/DIFD operand relay No. cannot be duplicated in a program.

Note 2: When an expanded ladder is used, the DIFU instruction in example a)
operates without any problems. However, with the DIFD instruction in example b),
output relay 0500 does not turn ON because 1000 turns ON at the next scan after
the falling edge of input relay 0000 though input relay 0000 is already OFF. In this
case, change the ladder diagram as in example c).
a) 0500 turns ON for one scan at the rising edge
of input relay 0000.
0000
1000
DIFU
1000
b) 0500 does not turn ON for one scan at

the falling edge of input relay 0000.
0500
1000
DIFD
0000
1000
0500
c) 0500 turns ON for one scan at the

falling edge of input relay 0000.
0000
1000
DIFD
1000
0500
Operands
Visual KV
KV-300
KV-10/16
KV-24/40/80
1000 to 1915
3000 to 9915
1000 to 1915
3000 to 6915
*7000 to 9915
1000 to 1915
1000 to 1915
3000 to 6915
Note that of I/O Nos.7000 to 9915, those that are not assigned to expansion or I/O
terminal module ports can be used for internal utility relays.
Key operation
FUN
3-78
SET RES ENT Operand
R-SRCH
(Relay No.)
ENT FUN RES

0
R-SRCH
OR
ENT
Operand ENT
R-SRCH
R-SRCH
(Relay No.)
DIFU / DIFD
Application of DIFU, DIFD instructions

One-shot circuit using the differentiate instruction
When input relay 0000 turns ON/OFF, output relay 0500 and 0501 turns ON oneshot (1 second).
Coding
1000
DIFU
0000
1001
DIFD
1000
0500
T001
#00010
T001
0500
1001
0501
T002
#00010
T002
0501
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
Instruction
LD
DIFU
DIFD
LD
OR
ANB
OUT
TMR
LD
OR
ANB
OUT
TMR
Operand
0000
1000
1001
1000
0500
T001
0500
001 #00010
1001
0501
T002
0501
002 #00010
Timing diagram
0000
1000
1001
ON
OFF
12
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
0500
1s
ON
0501
1s
Alternating circuit
Every time input relay 0000 turns ON, output relay 0500 turns ON and OFF alternately.
Coding
0000
1000
DIFU
1000
0500
1000
0500
0500
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
Instruction
LD
DIFU
LD
ANB
LDB
AND
ORL
OUT
Operand
0000
1000
1000
0500
1000
0500
0500
3-79
KEEP
KEEP: Keep
ORL OR
FUN 3
Turns ON specified relay when SET input

relay turns ON and enables this relay to
remain ON. And, turns OFF specified relay
when RESET input relay turns ON.
KEEP
SET
nnnn
RES
Example
KEEP
0001
SET input
SET
0500
0002
RES
RESET input
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
Instruction
LD
DIFU
DIFD
Operand
0000
1000
1001
Description
When SET input relay No. 0001 is ON and RESET input relay No. 0002 is OFF,
0500 turns ON.
When RES input (0002) is ON, output relay 0500 turns OFF.
When both 0001 and 0002 are OFF, the previous status is retained.
Note 1: When 0500 used for KEEP instruction in the above example is changed to
0500
OUT instruction (
), it forms a double coil. In such a case, priority is given to the
instruction that is entered last "Double coil" (p. 3-65)
Note 2: When both 0001 and 0002 are ON, RESET (0002) has priority over SET
(0001), causing 0500 to turn OFF.
Tips
Internal utility relay latching function
The ON/OFF status of an internal utility relay immediately before power-off can be
stored by setting the memory switch (MEMSW).
"MEMSW instruction" (p. 3-92)
If this stored utility relay is used for a latching instruction (SET or KEEP), the relay
settings can be stored while the power is off.
Stores the status of
internal utility relays
1000 through 1915.
MEMSW
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
$0004
KEEP
0001
SET
1000
0002
RES
0500
1000
Instruction
MEMSW
LD
LD
KEEP
LD
OUT
Operand
$0004
0001
0002
1000
1000
0500
Operands
Visual KV
KV-300
KV-10/16
KV-24/40/80
0500 to 1915
2009
2100 to 17915
0500 to 1915
2009
2100 to 17915
0500 to 1915
2009
2100 to 2915
0500 to 1915
2009
2100 to 6915
Key operation
FUN
3-80
ANL
ANL
ENT
Operand
ENT
R-SRCH
(Relay No.)
R-SRCH
KEEP
Application of KEEP instruction

Detection of chewing gum packs
Detects chewing gum packs over the carton using the proximity switch ES series
(0001 to 0003). If the switch detects that one or more packs of chewing gum are
missing, output relay 0500 turns ON for 1 s.
The timing clock is generated from the visible beam photoelectric switch PZ2 (0000).
Executes SET when all input relays 0000 to 0003 are ON.
Detects presence/absence of chewing gum packs at DOWN edge of 0000.
Outputs 1-s one-shot pulse from output relay 0500 when 1000 is OFF.
Reflector R-2
ES
ON
OFF
ON
ES
Gum
Gum
Gum Gum Gum
Gum Gum Gum
0000 0001 0002 0003
PZ2-61
KEEP
SET
1000
1001
12
Executes SET when all input relays

0000 to 0003 are ON.
RES
0000
1001
DIFD
1001 1000 T001
0500
#00010
T001
0500
Detects presence/absence of chewing

gum packs all Down edge of 0000.
Outputs 1-s one-shot plus from output
relay 0500 when 1000 is OFF.
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
Instruction
LD
AND
AND
AND
LD
KEEP
LD
Operand
0000
0001
0002
0003
1001
1000
0000
Line No.
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
Instruction
DIFD
LD
ANB
OR
ANB
OUT
TMR
Operand
1001
1001
1000
0500
T001
0500
001 #00010
Timing diagram
ON
0000
OFF
ON
0001
OFF
ON
0002
OFF
ON
0003
OFF
ON
0500
OFF
ON
ON
1s
3-81
SFT
SFT: Shift
ORL O R
FUN 3
SFT
D
nnnn
CLK
RES mmmm
Sets a shift register.
Example
Relay shift
operation
Data input
SFT
0001
D
1000
0002
First relay No.
CLK
Clock
1002
0003
Last relay No.
RES
RESET input
0500
1002
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
Instruction
LD
LD
LD
SFT
LD
OUT
Operand
0001
0002
0003
1000 1002
1002
0500
Timing diagram
RESET input
0003
ON
Data input
0001
ON
Clock
0002
ON
1000
1001
1002
0500
0
1
Lost
1001
0
1000
1
0001
1
A)
Lost
1002
0
1001
1
1000
1
0001
1
B)
Lost
1002
1
1001
1
1000
1
0001
1
C)
Lost
1002
1
1001
1
1000
1
0001
1
D)
ON
Lost
1002
1
1001
1
1000
0
0001
0
E)
ON
Lost
1002
1
1001
0
1000
0
0001
1
F)
Lost
1002
0
1001
0
1000
1
0001
1
G)
OFF
OFF
A
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
1002
0
ON
Description
First relay No. 1000 turns ON (OFF) when the data input relay is ON (OFF) at the
rising edge of the clock pulse.
Clock pulse A) shifts the ON status of input relay 0001 to relay 1000, and shifts
the status of other relays in sequence as shown in A) on the right.
When the data input is OFF as for clock pulse E), OFF status is shifted to relay
1000.
When the RESET input relay turns ON, all the relays (from the first one to the last
one) turn OFF.
Several SFT instructions can be used in a program.
Note: No SFT operand relay No. can be duplicated in a program.
3-82
SFT
Operands
Visual KV
KV-300
KV-10/16
KV-24/40/80
1000 to 1915
3000 to 6915
1000 to 1915
3000 to 6915
*7000 to 9915
1000 to 1915
1000 to 1915
3000 to 6915
Note that of I/O Nos. 7000 to 9915, those that are not assigned to expansion or remote I/O
unit ports can be used for internal utility relays.
Key operation
FUN
ORL
OR
ENT
Operand
Operand
ENT
R-SRCH
(Relay No.)
(Relay No.)
R-SRCH
Applications of SFT instruction

Alternating circuit
Every time input relay No. 0000 turns ON, 0500 turns alternately ON and OFF.
Coding
SFT
1000
D
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
1000
0000
CLK
1000
2003
RES
0500
1000
Instruction
LDB
LD
LD
SFT
LD
OUT
Operand
1000
0000
2003
1000 1000
1000
0500
Timing diagram
0000
ON
OFF
0500
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Reference: Alternating circuit can be configured without SFT instruction.

The following circuit does the same operation as the circuit above.
"DIFU instruction" (p. 3-78)
Coding
0000
1000
DIFU
1000
0500
1000
0500
0500
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
Instruction
LD
DIFU
LD
ANB
LDB
AND
ORL
OUT
Operand
0000
1000
1000
0500
1000
0500
0500
3-83
12
SFT
Resetting internal utility relays
When input relay No. 0000 turns ON, all internal utility relays No. 1000 through 1915
turn OFF.
SFT instruction can be substituted for RES instruction. This application can be used
to reset many relays at one time.
(All relays 3000 through 9915 can also be turned OFF at one time.)
Coding
SFT
2003
D
1000
2003
CLK
1915
0000
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
Instruction
LD
LD
LD
SFT
Operand
2003
2003
0000
1000 1915
RES
Repeat shift circuit

Turns ON every output for a second sequentially. Sets 1000 to 2008 (ON for 1st
scan only at startup) and shifts outputs from 0500 to 0504 every second at T001.
When 1005 turns ON, 1000 is set and the same sequence as above repeats.
Coding
1000
SET
Line No.
Instruction
0000
LD
2008
#00010
T001
0001
SET
1000
2008
T001
SFT
2003
D
1000
T001
CLK
1005
2003
RES
1000
1001
0501
1002
0502
1003
0503
1004
0504
1005
3-84
0500
1000
SET
Operand
0002
LDB
T001
0003
T001
#00010
0004
LD
2003
0005
LD
T001
0006
LD
2003
0007
SFT
1000 1005
0008
LD
1000
0009
OUT
0500
0010
LD
1001
0011
OUT
0501
0012
LD
1002
0013
OUT
0502
0014
LD
1003
0015
OUT
0503
0016
LD
1004
0017
OUT
0503
0018
LD
1005
0019
SET
1000
SFT

Asynchronous shift register
Turns ON input relay 0002 to reset the shift register (1000 to 1010) when the data
input to 0000 does not synchronize with the clock input to 0001.
0000
1100
DIFU
1100
1000
SET
SFT
2003
D
1000
0001
CLK
1010
0002
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
Instruction
LD
DIFU
LD
SET
LD
LD
LD
SFT
Operand
0000
1100
1100
1000
2003
0001
0002
1000 1010
RES
Timing diagram
Scan
0001
ON
OFF
0000
ON
OFF
1000
ON
OFF
1001
ON
OFF
1002
ON
OFF
12
3-85
HSP
HSP: High Speed
SET AND
FUN 1
Shortens time constant of specified input

relay to 10 s to increase input response.
HSP
nnnn
Example
Enable input
0000
HSP
0001
0001
0500
SET
0002
0501
SET
0003
0500
RES
0501
RES
Coding
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
0000
LD
0000
0001
HSP
0001
0002
LD
0001
0003
SET
0500
0004
LD
0002
0005
SET
0501
0006
LD
0003
0007
RES
0500
0008
RES
0501
Timing diagram
0000
0001
0002
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
5 ms
0501
ON
5 ms
15 ms
ON
0003
0500
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Description
When enable input 0000 turns ON, the time constant of input 0001 (specified by
HSP) changes from 10 ms to 10 s.
When enable input relay 0000 is ON and the scan time is 1 ms, and when the
ON time ( ) of input relays 0001 and 0002 is 5 ms, output relay 0500 turns ON
but 0502 does not.
"1.4.3 Constant Scan Time Mode" (p. 3-25)
Note 1: The time constant is switched by special utility relays 2609 through 2612
with the expansion units, or by the provided switches with I/O distribution module.
Note 2: The HSP instruction is used for the input to basic units only.
3-86
HSP

Note 3: The HSP instruction must be specified when the INT instruction or highspeed counter is used.
Note 4: When special utility relay 2813 and HSP instruction turn ON at the same
time, priority is given to the HSP instruction and the time constant is changed to 10
s.
Note 5: Connect a non-contact input for the HSP instruction to prevent a contact
bounce from being entered.
Details of HSP Instruction

This section describes the operation of the HSP instruction.
Input signal width
ON
Scan time
Inputdevice
Program
execution
Output device
Inputdevice
Program
execution
3)
Output device
2)
Inputdevice
1)
Output device
OFF
Scan time
Program
execution
Scan time
Even if the input signal width is shorter than the scan time, the signal can be fetched
when it turns ON during input process as in 1). However, it cannot be fetched when
it turns ON any other time than the input process as in 2).
For reliable signal reception, the input signal width must be longer than the scan
time as in 3).
Scan time < Input signal width < Normal time constant (10 ms 20%)
Switching the input time constant of expansion units
Expansion input unit
Expansion I/O unit
KV-E4X
KV-E4XT(P)
KV-E8X
KV-E4XR
KV-E16X
The input time constant of an expansion unit is initially set to 10 ms.
It can be changed to 10 s by creating a ladder program or by using the Access
Window, the LADDER BUILDER for KV programming support software, or with the
KV-P3E(01) handheld programmer.
Change the values of special utility relays 2609 to 2612.
2609
2610
2611
2612
Description
Input time constant of 1st unit. OFF: 10 ms, ON: 10 s
Input time constant of 2nd unit. OFF: 10 ms, ON: 10 s
Input time constant of 3rd unit. OFF: 10 ms, ON: 10 s
Input time constant of 4th unit. OFF: 10 ms, ON: 10 s
Operands
KV-300
KV-10
KV-16
KV-24
KV-40/80
0000 to 0009
0000 to 0005
0000 to 0009
0000 to 0015
0000 to 0107
Key operation
FUN
SET
AND
ENT
R-SRCH
Operand
(Relay No.)
ENT
R-SRCH
3-87
12
HSP
Applications of HSP Instruction

High-speed fetching of input data
When the input signal at 0000 has pulses of 5-ms interval and 2-ms scan time and
input relay 0001 is ON, fetches data from input relay 0000 at high speed and outputs
1-s one-shot pulse from output relay 0500.
Coding
HSP
0000
0001
1-s timer
#00010
T000
0000
0500
0500
T000
Turns ON
timer for 1s
when 0500
is ON.
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
Instruction
LD
HSP
LD
OR
TMR
ANB
OUT
Operand
0001
0000
0000
0500
000 #00010
T000
0500
Timing diagram
Scan
0000
ON
OFF
0001
ON
OFF
0500
ON
1s
To input a signal having pulse interval shorter than the scan time, use the interrupt instruction.
Refer to "Chapter 3 Interrupts" (p. 3-191).
When using the interrupt instruction

Turn ON for 1st
scan only at startup.
2008
EI
2813
SET
0500
T000
#00010
T000
0500
RES
Interrupt enabled
Input time constant 10 s
Initial settings
Turn ON for 1st scan only at startup.

Resets 0500 when T000 turns ON.
END
2002
INT
0000
Sets interrupt input at 0000.
0500
SET
Sets 0500 when 0000 turns ON.
RETI
ENDH
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
3-88
Instruction
LD
EI
SET
LD
T000
LD
RES
Operand
2008
2813
0500
#00010
T000
0500
Line No.
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
Instruction
END
INT
LD
SET
RET1
ENDH
Operand
0000
2002
0500
MC / MCR
MC: Master Control

MCR: Master Control
Reset
ANL LDB
MC
ANL ANB
MCR
FUN 2
FUN 2
4
5
Selects ON/OFF status of relay coils, timers,

or counters set before MCR instruction.
Used in pairs with MC instruction to end the
execution of MC instruction.
Example
0000
MC
0001
0500
0501
MCR
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
Instruction
LD
MC
LD
OUT
OUB
MCR
Operand
0000
0001
0500
0501
12
Description
When 0000 is OFF, both 0500 and 0501 do not turn ON, even if 0001 is turned
ON.
When 0000 is ON, 0500 turns ON and 0501 turns OFF as soon as 0001 is turned
ON.
Regard the function of MC-MCR instructions as "power switch" or "main switch".
When the input relay for MC is OFF, the instructions entered between MC and
MCR instructions function as follows:
Instructions
Function
OUT and OUB
Corresponding relay is OFF
TMR, TMH, and TMS
Timer is reset
C, SFT, KEEP, SET, RES, and CTH
Previous status is retained
Other instructions such as TMIN
Instruction is not executed.
Note: MC-MCR instructions cannot be used in the following configuration.

1. Nesting
2. Improper combination with STP-STE

instructions
MC
STP
xxxx
MC
MC
MCR
STE
MCR
MCR
"STP, STE instructions" (p. 3-114)
Operands
Key operation
FUN
ANL
LDB ENT
ENT
R-SRCH
R-SRCH
FUN
ANL
ANB ENT
ENT
R-SRCH
R-SRCH
3-89
MC / MCR
Details of MC-MCR Instructions

Position of MC-MCR instructions
MC-MCR instructions can be used in the following positions.
1. MC-MCR instructions can
be placed before or after
STP-STE instructions.
2. MC-MCR instructions can

be placed between STP
and STE instructions.
3. STP-STE instructions can

be placed between MC
and MCR instructions.
STP
xxxx
STP
xxxx
MC
STE
MC
STP
xxxx
MC
MCR
STE
MCR
STE
MCR
Making an input condition

The input condition for an MC instruction can be made as shown below:
0000
0001
0003
0002
MC
0500
MCR
Note: The scan time is not shortened even if the input relay of the MC instruction is
OFF.
Output relays 0500 within and outside of the MC-MCR instructions form a double
coil as shown below. "Double coil" (p. 3-65)
In this case, priority is given to the instruction that is entered last.

0003
0500
0001
MC
0002
0500
MCR
3-90
This relay is ignored.
The last relay has priority.
MC / MCR
Application of MC-MCR Instruction

Emergency stop circuit
When input relay 0000 is ON, 0500 turns ON for 1 s, then 0501 turns ON for 2 s,
and then 0502 turns ON for 3 s, repeatedly.
Once input relay 0000 turns OFF, 0500 turns ON when 0001 is ON, 0501 turns ON
when 0002 is ON, and 0502 turns ON when 0003 is ON.
Timing diagram
Scan
0000
0001
0002
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
0003
0500
0501
0502
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Coding
ON
ON
ON
0000
1000
1001
1101
RES
1102
RES
0001
0000
0002
1002
DIFU
1100
RES
1002
MC
1000
0003
1100
STG
1200
#00010
T000
T000
0004
1101
JMP
1201
#00020
T001
T001
0005
1101
STG
1102
JMP
1202
#00030
T002
T002
0006
1102
STG
1100
JMP
MCR
0007
1001
MC
0001
1203
0002
1204
0003
1205
0008
0009
0010
0011
MCR
0012
1200
0500
0013
1203
0014
1201
0501
0015
1204
0016
1202
0502
0017
1205
0018
END
0019
ENDH
0020
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023
0024
0025
0026
0027
0028
0029
0030
0031
0032
0033
0034
0035
0036
0037
0038
0039
0040
0041
0042
0043
0044
0045
0046
0047
0048
0049
0050
0051
0052
0053
0054
0055
0056
Instruction
LD
OUT
CON
OUB
LD
DIFU
CON
AND
RES
CON
RES
CON
RES
LD
MC
STG
OUT
CON
TMR
CON
AND
JMP
STG
OUT
CON
TMR
CON
AND
JMP
STG
OUT
CON
TMR
CON
AND
JMP
MCR
LD
MC
LD
OUT
LD
OUT
LD
OUT
MCR
LD
OR
OUT
LD
OR
OUT
LD
OR
OUT
END
ENDH
Operand
0000
1000
1001
0000
1002
1002
1100
1101
1102
1000
1100
1200
000 #00010
T000
1101
1101
1201
001 #00020
T001
1102
1102
1202
002 #00030
T002
1100
1001
0001
1203
0002
1204
0003
1205
1200
1203
0500
1201
1204
0501
1202
1204
0502
3-91
12
MEMSW
MEMSW:
Memory Switch
FUN
ANL ORB
MEMSW
$nnnn
Key operation
FUN
ANL
ORB
ENT
R-SRCH
Operand
ENT
R-SRCH
Operands
$0000 to $FFFF
Example
MEMSW
$3800
Coding
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
0000
MEMSW
$3800
Specify 3 of SW3 and 0 and 1 of SW4 to reset the values of DM1900 to DM1999, counter,
up-down counter, CTH, and CTC when the operation is started.
Description
Switch Nos. and functions are as follows. The switch consists of 16 bits. The function of the switch is specified by turning a certain bit ON or OFF.
2
SW4
SW3
SW2
SW1
MEMSW
$3800
3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0
0 0 1 1
1 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
SW4 SW3 SW2 SW1
Switch
Function of switch
No.
0
Cancels error when power is ON.
1
1
2
Action when "Memory error" occurs at

startup (due to data memory, counter
value, or retained content being erased).
Uses latch function of internal utility relays
1000 through 1915.
3000 through 3915.
4000 through 4915.
5000 through 5915.
6000 through 6915.
Not used.
Not used.
Clears DM0000 to DM0999 at power-on.
Clears DM1000 to DM1899 at power-on.
Switches between 24- and 16-bit comparators for CTH0.
Switches between 24- and 16-bit comparators for CTH1.
Clears values of counter, CTH, and CTC.
Write-protects program in KV PLC.
Read-protects program in KV PLC.
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
3-92
ON
Retains error.
OFF
Cancels error and
starts operation.
Loads memory Does not load

from EEPROM memory from
EEPROM
Uses latch
Doesn't use
function.
latch function.
Doesn't use
Uses latch
latch function.
function.
Uses latch
Doesn't use
function.
latch function.
Uses latch
function.
Uses latch
function.
Doesn't use
latch function.
Doesn't use
latch function.
Clears DM.
Clears DM.
24-bit
Retains DM.
Retains DM.
24-bit
16-bit
Clears values.
Write-protects
program.
Read-protects
program.
Retains values.
Doesn't writeprotect program.
Doesn't readprotect program.
16-bit
MEMSW
Note 1: When a read-protected program is transferred into the KV PLC it cannot
be read or modified from this PLC. Before read-protecting a program, be sure to
create a backup copy of the program.
Note 2: When a 24-bit high-speed counter comparator is used, the ladder program
which specifies the numerical values of a 24-bit CTC is required before starting the
high-speed counter.
Note 3: The value of MEMSW can be changed even during operation. However,
the new operation is not actually performed. The change is effective only after the
KV is turned off or stopped once and then restarted.
Details of MEMSW
Setting memory switches
Specify a hexadecimal number for each switch No.
SW4
SW3
SW2
SW1
(Switch No.)
3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0
(8)
(4)
(2)
(Example)
(1)
23
22
21
20
Hexadecimal number
0 0 0 0
0 0 1 0
0 1 1 0
1 0 0 1
MEMSW
$0269
Hexadecimal
number
Clears DM0000 to DM0999

when power is ON.
12
Retains Internal utility relay

5000 through 5999 and 6000
through 6999.
Retains all errors when power is ON.
Retains utility relays 3000 through 3999.
Tips
Description
The data entered for the memory switch is set into the KV PLC when the program is transferred to the KV PLC.
When MEMSW instruction is not entered into the program, "$0000" is set.
If you try transfer a program into the KV PLC which is write-disabled, warning
message "WRITE PROTECTED REPLACE OK?" is displayed. When executing
the transfer regardless of the message, press ENT
.
R-SRCH
To use internal utility
relays 1000 through
1915 as latch relays.
MEMSW
$0004
To clear a DM when
operation is started.
MEMSW
$0E00
To read-protect a
program.
MEMSW
$8000
To clear a counter when

operation is started.
MEMSW
$2000
To use a 24-bit highspeed counter CTH0.
MEMSW
$0800
To use a 24-bit highspeed counter CTH1.
MEMSW
$1000
3-93
END / ENDH
NOP
NOP: No Operation
ORL RES
FUN 3
When ALL CLEAR [FNC60] or HANDHELD PROGRAMMER CLEAR (P3E CLEAR)

[FNC61] is executed to delete the program, NOP appears on all lines of the deleted
program.
NOP is not written by the KV IncrediWare (DOS)/LADDER BUILDER for KV programming support software.
END: End
END
DM
ENDH: End Hi
ENDH
TM
END
Indicates end of each routine of program.
ENDH
Indicates end of entire program.
Description
END and ENDH instructions must be used at the end of a program.

A subroutine or interrupt program can be written between END and ENDH.
When not using either subroutine or interrupt programs, write ENDH immediately
after END.
2
Normal program
END
Normal program
END
Subroutine program
Interrupt program
ENDH
ENDH
Note: When a program does not have END or ENDH, "ENTER END", "ENTER
ENDH" or "LOGIC ERROR" occurs when the program is converted or transferred.
Operands
Key operation
END
DM
3-94
ENT
R-SRCH
ENDH
TM
ENT
R-SRCH

Application instructions are used for batch processing of input signals. Data is
transmitted to specified memory locations or changed into different formats. Moreover, parts of a program can be repeated or skipped with the instruction.
Instruction
Mnemonic
Reference page
W-ON: Wait ON
W-ON
3-96
W-OFF: Wait OFF
W-OFF
3-96
W-UE: Wait Up Edge
W-UE
3-98
W-DE: Wait Down Edge
W-DE
3-98
CON (FUN06)
3-102
CON: Connect
MPS: Push
MPS
3-103
MRD: Read
MRD
3-103
MPP: Pop
MPP
3-103
STG: Stage
STG (FUN44)
3-106
JMP: Jump
JMP (FUN21)
3-106
ENDS: End Stage
END (FUN14)
3-106
STP: Step
STP (FUN45)
3-114
STE: Step End
STE (FUN43)
3-114
ITVL: Interval Timer
ITVL
3-117
16-bit high-speed counter
CTH
3-204
16-bit high-speed counter comparator
CTC
3-204
CTH
3-204
16-bit high-speed counter comparator
CTC
3-204
CALL: Subroutine Call
CALL (FUN03)
3-122
SBN: Subroutine Entry
SBN (FUN38)
3-122
RET: Subroutine Return
RET (FUN33)
3-122
FOR: Repeat Start
FOR (FUN16)
3-125
NEXT: Repeat End
NEXT (FUN29)
3-125
HKEY: 16 Key input
HKEY (FUN17)
3-131
12
3-95
W-ON / W-OFF
W-ON: Wait ON
W-OFF: Wait OFF
W-ON
nnnn
ON
mmmm
W-OFF
Li
nnnn
OFF
mmmm
Turn ON second operand relay when first

operand relay contact turns ON.
Turns ON second operand relay when first
operand relay contact turns OFF.
Example
0001
ON
1000
0500
0000
1000
0003
OFF
1001
0501
0002
1001
W-ON
W-OFF
Coding
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
0000
LD
0000
0001
W-ON
0001 1000
0002
LD
1000
0003
OUT
0500
0004
LD
0002
0005
W-OFF
0003 1001
0006
LD
1001
0007
OUT
0501
Timing chart
W-ON
ON
0000
OFF
ON
0001
OFF
ON
1000
0500
ON
When input relay 0000 is ON, output relay 0500 turns ON as soon as input operand
0001 turns ON. 0500 remains ON until 0000 turns OFF.
W-OFF
ON
0002
0003
OFF
ON
OFF
1001
0501
ON
ON
When input relay 0002 is ON, output relay 0501 turns ON as soon as input operand
0003 turns OFF. 0501 remains ON until 0002 turns OFF.
3-96
W-ON / W-OFF
Description
W-ON
Input operand
0000
Same
operation
0001
ON
1000
0001
0000
1000
1000
Output operand
When input relay 0000 is ON, output operand 1000 turns ON as soon as the
contact of input operand 0001 turns ON.
W-OFF
Input operand
0002
Same
operation
0003
OFF
1001
0003
0002
1001
1001
Output operand
When input relay 0002 is ON, output operand 1001 turns ON as soon as the
contact of input operand 0003 turns OFF.
Note: Output operand relay Nos. for W-ON/W-OFF instructions cannot be duplicated in a program.
Operands
Visual KV
KV-300
KV-10/16
KV-24/40/80
nnnn:
0000 to 17915
T000 to T249
C000 to C249
CTC0 to CTC3
mmmm:
1000 to 1915
3000 to 9915
nnnn:
0000 to 0009
0500 to 17915
T000 to T249
C000 to C249
CTC0 to CTC3
mmmm:
1000 to 1915
3000 to 6915
*7000 to 9915
nnnn:
0000 to 2915
T000 to T063
C000 to C063
CTC0 to CTC3
mmmm:
1000 to 1915
nnnn:
0000 to 6915
T000 to T119
C000 to C119
CTC0 to CTC3
mmmm:
1000 to 1915
3000 to 6915
Note that of I/O Nos. 7000 to 9915, those that are not assigned to expansion or
remote I/O unit ports can be used for internal utility relays.
Key operation
W-ON
W-OFF
Li
First operand
Second operand
ENT
(nnnn)
(mmmm)
R-SRCH
3-97
12
W-UE / W-DE
W-UE: Wait Up Edge

W-DE: Wait Down Edge
W-UE
W-DE
Lo
Turns ON second operand relay at rising

edge of first operand relay contact.
Turns ON second operand relay at falling
edge of first operand relay contact.
nnnn
mmmm
nnnn
mmmm
Example
0000
0001
1000
1000
0500
0002
0003
1001
1001
0501
W-UE
W-DE
Coding
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
0000
LD
0000
0001
W-UE
0001 1000
0002
LD
1000
0003
OUT
0500
0004
LD
0002
0005
W-DE
0003 1001
0006
LD
1001
0007
OUT
0501
Timing chart
W-UE
0000
0001
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
1000
0500
When input relay 0000 is ON, output relay 0500 turns ON at rising edge of first
operand relay 0001.
As soon as input relay 0000 turns OFF, output relay 0500 turns OFF.
W-DE
ON
0002
0003
OFF
ON
OFF
1001
0501
3-98
ON
When input relay 0002 is ON, output relay 0501 turns ON at falling edge of first
operand relay 0003.
As soon as input relay 0002 turns OFF, output relay 0501 turns OFF.
W-UE / W-DE
Description
W-UE
0000
Input operand
Same
operation
0001
1000
1002
DIFU
0001
1002
0000
1000
1000
Output operand
When input relay 0000 is ON, the output operand turns ON at the rising edge of
the input operand.
W-DE
0002
Input operand
Same
operation
0003
1001
1003
DIFD
0003
1003
0002
1001
1001
Output operand
When input relay 0002 is ON, the output operand turns ON at the falling edge of
the input operand.
Note 1: If the input operand is already ON before input relay 0000 turns ON, the
output operand does not turn ON.
Note 2: The W-UE/W-DE instruction must be used in subroutine programs that are
executed every scan time (because rising and falling edges cannot be recognized).
Note 3: Output operand relay Nos. for W-UE/W-DE instructions cannot be duplicated in a program.
Operands
Visual KV
KV-300
KV-10/16
KV-24/40/80
nnnn:
0000 to 17915
T000 to T249
C000 to C249
CTC0 to CTC3
mmmm:
1000 to 1915
3000 to 9915
nnnn:
0000 to 0009
00500 to 17915
T000 to T249
C000 to C249
CTC0 to CTC3
mmmm:
1000 to 1915
3000 to 6915
*7000 to 9915
nnnn:
0000 to 6915
0000 to 2915
T000 to T063
CTC0 to CTC3
mmmm:
1000 to 1915
nnnn:
T000 to T119
C000 to C119
CTC0 to CTC3
mmmm:
1000 to 1915
3000 to 6915
Key operation
W-UE
W-DE
Lo
First operand
(nnnn)
Second operand
ENT
(mmmm)
R-SRCH
3-99
12
W-UE / W-DE
Details of W-ON and W-UE Instructions

A combination of W-ON, W-OFF, W-UE, and W-DE instructions is much more
effective when used in programs controlling sequential operation where the completion of one operational step starts the next step.
This section describes minute differences in the operation of these instructions.
Difference between W-ON and W-UE
0001
ON
1000
0001
0000
0100
1001
0500
1001
0501
Output relay 0100 turns ON when both input relays

0000 and 0001 turn ON in any order.
Output relay 1001 turns ON only when input relay
0000 turns ON before input relay 0001.
ON
0000
OFF
ON
0001
1000
0500
OFF
ON
1001
0501
ON
ON
(W-ON)
(W-UE)
2
W-ON:
Output relay 0500 turns ON when both input relays 0000 and 0001 turn
ON in any order.
W-UE:
Output relay 0501 turns ON only when input relay 0000 turns ON before
input relay 0001.
Note: An input operand relay No. for these instructions can be duplicated in a
program, but output operand relay Nos. cannot be duplicated.
As shown above, W-UE requires a certain order for turning ON relays 0000 and
0001, but W-ON does not. Therefore, W-UE is suitable for circuits to be executed at
every input; W-ON is suitable for circuits that go on to the next operation when a
certain condition is satisfied.
The operation of W-OFF and W-DE instructions are same as above by the operation
which turns relays OFF.
3-100
W-UE
Application of W-UE Instruction

Input sequence check
Output relay 0500 turns ON when input relay 0000 is ON and input 0001, 0002, and
0003 turn ON in this sequence.
Output relay 0500 turns OFF when input relay 0000 is OFF.
Coding
0000
0001
1000
1000
0002
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
0000
LD
0000
W-UE
0001 1000
1001
1001
0003
0001
0002
LD
1000
1002
0500
0003
W-UE
0002 1001
1002
0004
LD
1001
0005
W-UE
0003 1002
0006
LD
1002
0007
OUT
0500
Timing diagram
Scan
0000
ON
OFF
0001
ON
OFF
0002
ON
OFF
0003
ON
OFF
12
0500
ON
Fork lift truck IN/OUT judgement

Checks the input sequence. Output relay 0500 turns ON when input relay 0000 turns
ON and then 0001 turns ON. Output relay 0501 turns ON when input relay 0001
turns ON and then 0000 turns ON.
0000
1001
1000
0500
0001
1000
0000
1001
0501
Leave warehouse
Enter warehouse
1001
Coding
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
0000
LD
0000
0005
LD
0001
0001
W-UE
0001 1000
0006
W-UE
0000 1001
0002
CON
0007
CON
0003
AND
1000
0008
AND
1001
0004
OUT
0500
0009
OUT
0501
Timing diagram
Scan
0000
ON
OFF
0001
ON
OFF
0500
0501
ON
ON
3-101
CON
CON: Connect
RES ORB
FUN 0
Represents series connection of output

instruction with another instruction.
Example
0500
0000
0501
CON
CON
0502
0503
CON
Coding
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
0000
LD
0000
0001
OUT
0500
0002
CON
0003
OUT
0004
CON
0005
OUT
0006
CON
0007
OUT
0501
0502
0503
Description
When input relay 0000 turns ON, 0500, 0501, 0502, and 0503 turn ON.
When input relay 0000 turns OFF, 0500, 0501, 0502, and 0503 turn OFF.
The CON instruction is used to connect instructions after output instructions
when the extended ladder is used.
When the LADDER BUILDER for KV programming support software is used, the
CON instruction is automatically converted into a mnemonic and entered in the
ladder diagram by just writing a connection line.
The CON instruction does not affect the scan time.
Refer to "1.5 Extended Ladder Diagrams" (p. 3-29) for details of eetecded ladders.
Operands
Key operation
FUN
3-102
RES
ORB
ENT
ENT
R-SRCH
R-SRCH
MPS / MRD / MPP
MPS: Push
MPS
MRD: Read
MRD
MPP: Pop
MPP
ch
Stores current input and arithmetic flag

status.
Reads input and arithmetic flag status
stored with PUSH.
Reads and clears input and arithmetic flag
status stored with PUSH.
Example
0000
MPS
0001
0500
0002
0501
0003
0502
MRD
MPP
Coding
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
0000
LD
0000
0001
MPS
0002
AND
0001
0003
OUT
0500
0004
MRD
0005
AND
0002
0006
OUT
0501
0007
MPP
0008
AND
0003
0009
OUT
0502
12
Description
When input relay 0000 is ON:

0500 turns ON as soon as 0001 turns ON.
The MPS instruction is used at the start of an output branch.
The MRD instruction is used to connect an output branch.
The MPP instruction is used at the end of an output branch.
When the KV IncrediWare (DOS)/LADDER BUILDER for KV programming
support software is used, the MPS, MRD, and MPP instructions are automatically
converted into mnemonics and entered in the ladder diagram.
Note 1: Limit the number of MPS instructions to 8 or less in a circuit.

Note 2: An MPS instruction must have a corresponding MPP instruction. This
means that the same number of MPS and MPP instructions must be used in a
program. An MPS or MPP instruction without a corresponding MPP or MPS instruction results in a logic error.
Operands
Key operation
MPS
MRD
ENT
R-SRCH
MPP
ch
3-103
MPS / MRD / MPP

MPS/MRD/MPP applications
MPS, MRD, and MPP instructions are used as follows:
0002
0003
0004
0500
Start of branch
0006
MPS
0501
Connection of branch
0007
MRD
0502
Connection of branch
0008
MRD
0503
End of branch
MPP
Coding
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
Line No.
0000
LD
0002
0001
AND
0003
0002
MPS
0003
AND
0004
0004
OUT
0500
0005
MRD
0012
AND
0008
0006
AND
0013
OUT
0503
Operand
0000
0002
0500
MPS
0003
0501
MPP
0005
0502
MPS
0006
0503
0001
MPS
0004
0006
MPP
Instruction
Operand
0007
OUT
0501
0008
MRD
0009
AND
0007
0010
OUT
0502
0011
MPP
MPP
Coding
3-104
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
Line No.
Instruction
0000
LD
0000
0009
MPP
0001
MPS
0010
AND
0002
AND
0001
0011
MPS
0003
MPS
0012
AND
0005
0004
AND
0002
0013
OUT
0502
0005
OUT
0500
0014
MPP
0006
MPP
0015
AND
0006
0007
AND
0003
0016
OUT
0503
0008
OUT
0501
0004
MPS / MRD / MPP

0000
MPS
0001
MPS
0002
MPS
0003
0004
0500
MPS
0501
MPP
0502
0503
MPP
0504
MPP
MPP
Coding
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
0000
LD
0000
0001
MPS
0002
AND
0003
MPS
0004
AND
0005
MPS
0001
0002
0006
AND
0007
MPS
0008
AND
0004
0009
OUT
0500
0010
MPP
0011
OUT
0012
MPP
0013
OUT
0014
MPP
0015
OUT
0016
MPP
0017
OUT
0003
12
0501
0502
0503
0504
3-105
STG / JMP / ENDS

STG: Stage
JMP: Jump
ANL SET
nnnn
JMP
SET LDB
ENDS
FUN 2
ENDS: End Stage
nnnn
STG
LDB LDB
FUN 4
FUN 1
Executes instructions in STG block when operand relay is ON.

When transition condition relay is ON, turns OFF relay of current
stage and transfers execution to stage specified by operand.
When transition condition relay is ON, turns OFF relay
of current stage.
Example
1000
SET
2008
1)
1000
STG
2)
1001
STG
3)
1002
STG
0000
1001
JMP
0500
0001
1002
JMP
0501
0002
1001
JMP
0003
1000
JMP
Initial setting
1003
JMP
1003
STG
4)
0502
0004
ENDS
2
1) When transition condition relay 0000 is ON, transfers execution to STG1001.
2) 0500 turns ON. When transition condition relay 0001 is ON, transfers execution
to STG1002.
3) 0501 turns ON. When transition condition relay 0002 is ON, transfers execution
to STG1001 and repeats the process above.
When transition condition relay 0003 turns ON, transfers execution to STG1000
and 1003.
4) 0502 turns ON. The process finishes when transition condition relay 0004 turns
ON.
Coding
3-106
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
Line No.
Instruction
0000
LD
2008
0013
MPS
Operand
0001
SET
1000
0014
AND
0002
1001
0002
STG
1000
0015
JMP
0003
AND
0000
0016
MPP
0004
JMP
1001
0017
AND
0003
0005
STG
1001
0018
JMP
1000
0006
OUT
0500
0007
CON
0008
AND
0009
0010
0011
OUT
0012
CON
0019
JMP
1003
0020
STG
1003
0001
0021
OUT
0502
JMP
1002
0022
CON
STG
1002
0023
AND
0501
0024
ENDS
0004
STG / JMP / ENDS

Note 1: The following table shows the status of each instruction between STG and
JMP/ENDS when STG operand relay turns OFF.
Instruction
Function
Relay for OUT instruction
Turned OFF.
Relay for OUB instruction
Turned ON.
TMR, TMH, TMS,

C (counter) instructions
Reset.
SET, RES instructions
Current status is retained.
Other instructions
Not executed.
Note 2: STG/JMP/ENDS operand relay Nos. cannot be duplicated in a program.

Note 3: The STG instruction must be used in combination with the JMP or ENDS
instruction.
Note 4: The following instructions are not properly executed between STG and JMP/
ENDS instructions:
DIFU, DIFD, KEEP, UDC, SFT, FOR, NEXT, and
Differentiation type instruction (@xxx)
Operands
Visual KV
KV-300
KV-10/16
KV-24/40/80
1000 to 1915
3000 to 9915
1000 to 1915
3000 to 6915
*7000 to 9915
1000 to 1915
1000 to 1915
12
Key operation
FUN
LDB
FUN
ANL
FUN
SET
4
2
1
LDB
SET
LDB
ENT
Operand
ENT
R-SRCH
(nnnn)
R-SRCH
ENT
Operand
ENT
R-SRCH
(nnnn)
ENT
ENT
R-SRCH
R-SRCH
R-SRCH
3-107
STG
Details of STG instruction

STG instruction
The STG instruction is suitable for sequential step-by-step processing.
The whole process is divided into several operational steps, and one program is
assigned to each step.
The process to turn on several lamps sequentially can be divided into the following
five steps:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Wait until the start switch is turned ON.

Turn on lamp 1 for 1 second.
Turn on lamps 1, 2, and 3 simultaneously for 7 seconds.
These five steps are sequentially performed in order as shown in the flowchart
below.
If a ladder program is written for such sequential processing without any STG
instructions, the resulting program may be complicated and difficult to review by
others.
Sequential processing
Start
Start
SW ON?
NO
YES
Turn on lamp 1
for 1 second.
Turn on lamp 2
for 3 second.
Turn on lamp 3
for 5 second.
Turn on lamps 1, 2,
and 3 simultaneously
for 7 seconds.
I/O assignments
Assign the input and output of the Visual KV Series as follows:
1)
2)
3)
4)
Start switch: Turned on when 0000 turns ON.

Lamp 1: Lights when 0500 turns ON.
I/O assignment
Lamp 1
KV
0000
0500
Start SW
Lamp 2
0501
Lamp 3
COM
3-108
0502
COM
STG

Sequence program
Assign the relays to execute the five processes on the previous page as follows:
1
2
3
4
5
Wait until the start switch is turned ON.:

Turn on lamp 1 for 1 second.:
Turn on lamps 1, 2, and 3 simultaneously:
for 7 seconds.
Input relay 0000

Output relay 0500
Output relay 0501
Output relay 0502
Output relays 0500, 0501, and 0502
The following is the ladder diagram for the I/O assignments above, and is written
with and without STG instructions.
Without STG instruction

0000
1000
T000
1000 (0500) turns ON for 1 second

when input 0000 turns ON.
#00010
T000
1000
T000
1001
T001
1001 (0501) turns ON for 3 seconds

when T000 turns ON.
#00030
T001
1001
T001
1002
T002
1002 (0502) turns ON for 5 seconds

when T001 turns ON.
#00050
T002
1002
T002
1100
T003
1101
1100
1102
12
1100 (0500), 1101

(0501), and 1102 (0502)
turn ON for 7 seconds
when T002 turns ON.
#00070
T003
T003
1000
SET
1000
0500
The process is repeated from the

beginning when T003 turns ON.
1100
0501
1001
OR circuit is required because

double coil cannot be used.
1101
0502
1002
1102
With STG instruction

1001
SET
2008
1001
STG
0000
1002
STG
0500
#00010
T000
T000
1002
JMP
0501
#00030
T001
T001
1003
JMP
1003
STG
0502
#00050
T002
T002
1004
JMP
1004
STG
0500
0501
0502
1001 turns ON at the start of operation.
0500 turns ON for 1 second when input

0000 turns ON. Then, 1002 turns ON.
0501 turns ON for 3 seconds when
1002 turns ON. Then, 1003 turns ON.
0502 turns ON for 5 seconds when 1003
turns ON. Then, 1004 turns ON.
0500, 0501, and 0502 turn ON for 7
seconds when 1004 turns ON.
#00070
T003
T003
1001
JMP
The process is repeated from the

beginning when T003 turns ON.
3-109
STG

Process progression with Wait instruction
1000
SET
2008
0000
1100
1001
JMP
0500
1100
0000
1101
1002
JMP
0501
1101
0000
1102
1003
JMP
0502
1102
0000
1103
1004
JMP
0500
1103
0501
0502
0000
1104
1000
STG
1001
STG
1002
STG
1003
STG
1004
STG
1000
JMP
1104
Description
When using the W-UE instruction in a program with STG instructions on the previous page, you can create a program for an operation which moves to the next stage
every time when start switch 0000 turns ON (process progression).
"W-UE instruction" (p. 3-98)
Tips
Resetting STG instructions (in the above example)
Use the SFT instruction to turn OFF all STG instructions in an emergency.
SFT
2003
D
2003
1000
STG start relay
1004
STG end relay
CLK
Reset input
RES
Reset input
1000
SET
Initial setting
Enter the initial setting process depending on the program. The above example
cannot start the next operation without the initial setting.
"SFT instruction" (p. 3-82)
Note 1: The scan time is not affected by any instructions between STG and JMP/
ENDS instructions which are not executed.
Note 2: STG operand relay Nos. cannot be duplicated in a program.
Note 3: The STG instruction must be connected to the bus.
Note 4: The STG, JMP, or ENDS instruction cannot be used in subroutines.
3-110
STG
Cautions for using STG instruction

Interlock
When an STG instruction moves to another stage, the previous and next stages turn
ON simultaneously only for one scan. Provide an interlock circuit for the output
which may be dangerous when turned ON in such occasions (e.g., motor's normal/
reverse rotation).
1000
STG
0501
0500
0001
1001
JMP
1001
STG
0500
0501
0002
1002
JMP
Interlock
Double coil
A double coil can be used for an STG instruction.
1000
STG
0500
1001
STG
0501
1002
STG
0500
0001
ON
1100
0002
ON
1101
0003
ON
1102
1100
1001
JMP
1101
1002
JMP
1102
1003
JMP
Double coil
Note: When STG 1000 and 1002 turn ON simultaneously, priority is given to output
relay 0500 of STG 1002, which is entered last.
Retaining output
Use the SET instruction to retain output.
1000
STG
0500
SET
0000
1001
JMP
1001
STG
0501
SET
0001
1002
JMP
12
When no JMP is used

When no JMP instruction is used, the STG instruction does not turn OFF even if
0001 turns ON. Be sure to use JMP after STG.
1000
STG
0500
0001
0501
STG operand
When the STG operand relay remains ON, 0500 does not turn OFF even if 0001
turns ON.
0000
1000
STG
1000
SET
0500
0001
1001
JMP
Use a differentiation type instruction for the condition of the first STG instruction.
0000
1100
DIFU
1100
1000
SET
1000
STG
0500
0001
1001
JMP
3-111
STG / JMP

JMP operand
Unlike the STG operand relay, the JMP operand relay No. can be duplicated in a
program.
1000
STG
0001
0500
1001
JMP
1002
JMP
1001
STG
0002
0501
1002
JMP
DIFU/DIFD instructions in an STG block

The operand relay for an STG instruction cannot be used as the input operand relay
for a DIFU or DIFD instruction.
1000
STG
3000
DIFU
0001
0500
3000
1001
JMP
0501
Application of STG and JMP instructions

Enabling a double coil
When start SW 0000 is pressed, the following output operation is repeated:
Output relay 0500 turns ON for 1 second.
Output relays 0500 and 0501 turn ON for 2 seconds.
Output relays 0500, 0501, and 0502 turn ON for 3 seconds.
0000
1100
DIFU
1000
STG
1100
1000
SET
1000 turns ON at the rising edge of input 0000.
0500
#00010
T000
T000
1001
JMP
Output 0500 turns ON for 1 second.
1002
JMP
Outputs 0500 and 0501 turn ON for 2 seconds.
1001
STG
0500
0501
#00020
T001
T001
1002
STG
0500
0501
0502
#00030
T002
T002
1000
JMP
Outputs 0500, 0501, and 0502 turn ON for

3 seconds.
Coding
3-112
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
Line No.
Instruction
0000
LD
0000
0016
CON
0001
DIFU
1100
0002
CON
0003
AND
1100
Operand
0017
TMR
0018
CON
001 #00020
0019
AND
T001
0004
SET
1000
0020
JMP
1002
0005
STG
1000
0021
STG
1002
0006
OUT
0500
0500
0007
CON
0008
TMR
0009
CON
0010
0022
OUT
0023
CON
000 #00010
0024
OUT
0025
CON
AND
T000
0026
OUT
0011
JMP
1001
0027
CON
0012
STG
1001
0028
TMR
0013
OUT
0500
0029
CON
0014
CON
0030
AND
T002
0015
OUT
0031
JMP
1000
0501
0501
0502
002 #00030
STG / JMP

Note: The double coils in different STG instruction blocks operate properly. However, when several STG instructions turn ON simultaneously, priority is given to the
one programmed last.
Conditional branching
When input relay 0000 (start SW) turns ON, output relay 0500 turns ON. Then, as
programmed for conditional branching, output relay 0501 turns on for 1 second
when 0001 turns ON, and 0502 turns ON for 2 seconds when 0002 turns ON. After
each operation is completed, the program returns to the conditional branch and
repeats the same steps.
0000
1100
DIFU
1100
1000
SET
1000
STG
0500
0001
1001
JMP
0002
1002
JMP
1001
STG
0501
#00010
T000
T000
1000
JMP
1002
STG
0502
#00020
T001
T001
1000
JMP
Coding
Line No.
Instruction
12
Operand
0000
LD
0000
0001
DIFU
1100
0002
CON
0003
AND
1100
0004
SET
1000
0005
STG
1000
0006
OUT
0500
0007
CON
0008
MPS
0009
AND
0001
0010
JMP
1001
0011
MPP
0012
AND
0002
0013
JMP
1002
0014
STG
1001
0015
OUT
0501
0016
CON
0017
TMR
0018
CON
000 #00010
0018
AND
T000
0020
JMP
1000
0021
STG
1002
0022
OUT
0502
0023
CON
0024
TMR
0025
CON
001 #00020
0026
AND
T001
0027
JMP
1000
3-113
STP / STE
LDB ANB
LDB ORL
FUN 4
STP: Step
STE: Step End
FUN 4
5
3
Executes instructions between STP and

STE when operand relay is ON.
STP
nnnn
STE
Used with STP to make a program step.
Example
1000
0000
STP
1000
0500
0001
STE
Coding
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
0000
LD
0000
0001
OUT
1000
0002
STP
1000
0003
LD
0001
0004
OUT
0500
0005
STE
Description
When 1000 is ON, 0500 turns ON/OFF as soon as 0001 turns ON/OFF.
When 1000 is OFF, 0500 remains OFF after 0001 turns ON. When 0001 and
0500 are ON, 0500 remains ON after 0001 turns OFF.
The program step specified with

STP-STE instructions are executed when the STP operand
relay is ON. When the operand
relay is OFF, the program
execution jumps to STE instruction. (Fig 1).
STP-STE instructions can be

nested up to 8 levels deep as
shown in Fig. 2. When 1000 is
OFF, steps 1) through 3) are not
executed. Control jumps to the
STE instruction just above step
4), then step 4) is executed.
When 1000 and 1001 are ON,
steps 1) through 3) are executed
in that order. When 1000 is ON
and 1001 is OFF, steps 1), 3),
and 4) are executed in that
order, while step 2) is left unexecuted.
STP
1000
When 1000 is OFF,

A is not executed.
STE
B
STP
Fig. 1
1000
1)
STP
1001
2)
STE
When 1000 is OFF,

steps 1) through 3) are
not executed.
3)
STE
4)
Fig. 2
Note 1: STP/STE operand relay Nos. cannot be duplicated in a program.

Note 2: When an STP operand turns OFF during program execution between STP
and STE instructions, the state of the instructions between STP and STE are retained.
Note 3: The scan time is not affected by any instructions between STP and STE
which are not executed.
3-114
STP / STE
Tips
Operation when STP turns OFF
Using a timer in an STP block
When a timer is used in a program defined with an STP instruction, the operation is
as follows:
a) 1000 is reset immediately when the
timer turns ON. The STE instruction is
started with the timer remaining ON.
a)
0000
Scan
1000
SET
STP
1000
T000
0500
1000
#00050
T000
T000
1000
RES
Timer
remains
ON.
Jump
STE
b)
0000
Scan
1000
SET
STP
1000
T000
1000
RES
T000
0500
1000
#00050
T000
Timer
remains
ON.
Timer is reset.
b) 1000 is not reset immediately when the

timer turns ON but is reset at the next
scan. The timer is reset before the STE
instruction is started.
Jump
STE
Usage of STG and STP instructions

STG instruction
Use the STG instruction for process progression with branches.
1000
SET
0000
1000
STG
0500
0001
1001
JMP
0002
1002
JMP
1001
STG
0501
0003
1002
STG
0502
0004
ENDS
ENDS
STP instruction
Use the STP instruction for process progression without branches.
1000
SET
0000
STP
1000
0002
1000
RES
1001
SET
0500
0001
STE
STP
1001
0003
0004
1001
RES
1002
SET
0501
STE
3-115
12
STP / STE
Operands
Visual KV
KV-300
KV-10/16
KV-24/40/80
0000 to 17915
T000 to T249
C000 to C249
CTC0 to CTC3
0000 to 0009
0500 to 6915
*7000 to 9915
T000 to T249
C000 to C249
CTC0 to CTC3
0000 to 2915
T000 to T063
C000 to C063
CTC0 to CTC3
0000 to 6915
T000 to T119
C000 to C119
CTC0 to CTC3
Note that of I/O Nos.7000 to 9915, those that are not assigned to expansion or remote I/O
Key operation
FUN
LDB
FUN
LDB
4
4
ANB
ORL
ENT
R-SRCH
Operand
(nnnn)
ENT
ENT
R-SRCH
R-SRCH
ENT
R-SRCH
Application of STP and STE instructions

Process progression
When input relay 0000 turns ON, output relay 0500 turns ON for 2 seconds, then
output relay 0501 turns ON for 3 seconds automatically.
Coding
2
0000
1000
DIFU
1000
1001
SET
STP
1001
T000
1001
RES
T000
0500
1001
#00020
T000
T000
1002
SET
STE
STP
1002
T001
1002
RES
T001
0501
1002
#00030
T001
STE
END
ENDH
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023
0024
The double coils in different STP blocks operate properly.
3-116
Instruction
LD
DIFU
CON
AND
SET
STP
LD
RES
LDB
OUT
LD
TMR
LD
SET
STE
STP
LD
RES
LDB
OUT
LD
TMR
STE
END
ENDH
Operand
0000
1000
1000
1001
1001
T000
1001
T000
0500
1001
000 #00020
T000
1002
1002
T001
1002
T001
0501
1002
001 #00030
ITVL
ITVL
#TM
ITVL: Interval Timer
ITVL
PLS
DMnnnn
PAUSE
mmmm
RES
Example
Measures pulse-to-pulse interval or pulse

width in specified mode.
"Pulse" input
ITVL
PLS
0000
Beginning of workpiece data table

"Measurement Pause" input
First flag relay
DM0000
0001
PAUSE
1000
0002
RES
"Reset" input
Coding
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
0000
LD
0000
0001
LD
0001
0002
LD
0002
0003
ITVL
DM0000 1000
Operation in the above example

Measures pulse-to-pulse interval or pulse width for input relay 0000.
ITVL instruction has two functions:
Measures pulse-to-pulse interval (cycle) or pulse width. (Minimum unit: 10 ms)
Obtains the average of the contents of data memory.
Each input has the following functions:
PLS
Executes measurement. In data memory measurement, however, PLS input is
disabled in modes 0006 to 1999. Values are fetched only at the scan when PLS
input is ON in modes 10000 to 11999.
The measured value is written into the specified data memory (DM).
In the above example, the measured value of input relay 0000 is
written into DM0004 (DM0000 + 4 addresses).
PAUSE
Pauses the measurement when turned ON.
RES
Initializes the contents of data memory (DM) when turned ON.
In the above example, DM0004 to DM0015 are reset to "#00000".
DM0000 to DM0003 are designated as the area to write the initial setting.
Note: ITVL operand relay Nos. cannot be duplicated in a program.
Operands
Visual KV
KV-300
KV-10/16
KV-24/40/80
Data table No.:

Data table No.:
DM0000 to DM0985 DM0000 to DM1985
DM0000 to DM1984 DM0000 to DM9985
1000 to 1912
1000 to 1912
1000 to 1912
Flag relay No.:
3000 to 6912
Flag relay No.:
1000 to 1912
3000 to 9912
3000 to 9912
*7000 to 9915
* Note that of I/O Nos.7000 to 9915, those that are not assigned to expansion or remote I/O
Key operation
ITVL
#TM
First operand
Second operand
ENT
(nnnn)
(mmmm)
R-SRCH
3-117
12
ITVL
Setting procedure
The ITVL instruction reserves 16 data memories: 1 specified data memory and 15
successive data memories. It also reserves 4 relays: 1 specified relay and 3 successive relays.
Note: Do not use the 16 data memories and 4 relays specified with the ITVL instruction for any other purpose.
Data memory (DM) assignment
Set the initial setting data to the first four data memories.
Data memory
DM XX + 00
01
02
Mode
Specifies measurement mode (0 to 5).
MAX value
Presets highest value in measurement

range.
Presets lowest value in measurement
range.
Specifies number of measurements for
mean calculation (1 to 65535).
Stores current measured value.
MIN value
04
Preset No.of
measurements
Measured value
05
MAX measured value
06
MIN measured value
07
Mean
08
No.of measurements
performed*
09
Higher digits*
10
Lower digits*
11 to 12
Work memory
03
Initial
setting
is to be
specified
by user.
Stores Max. measured value.

Stores Min. measured value.
Stores mean value.
Stores number of times measurements
actually performed.
Stores higher 16 bits of accumulating
total of measurements. (#00000 to
#65535) ($0000 to $FFFF)
Stores lower 16 bits of accumulating
total of measurements. (#00000 to
#65535)($0000 to $FFFF)
Used for computing measured values, Max.
measured values, Min. measured values, mean
values, and accumulating totals. (Cannot be used)
Relay assignment
Relay
MAX error
Turns ON and remains ON for one scan time when

measured value exceeds Max preset value.
MIN error
Turns ON and remains On for one scan time when

measured value goes below Min preset value.
+2
Every
measurements
completion
Turns ON at completion of every measurement and

remains ON for one scan time.
+3
Measurements
completion for
mean calculation
Relay +0
+1
Turns ON for one scan time at completion of the

specified No. of measurements for mean value
calculation, then remains ON for one scan time.
Note 1: When 0 (zero) is specified as the number of measurements, mean value

calculation will not be performed. In this case, the number of measurements will be
accumulated until RES input turns ON, which may cause overflow.
Note 2: Data in the No. of measurements, Higher digits, and Lower digits are reset
when the No. of measurements performed reaches the preset No. of measurements.
Note 3: Once ITVL instruction is defined in MC-MCR block, the measurement
process pauses when the block is not executed.
Note 4: For programs containing subroutines, interrupts, steps, or stages, ITVL
instructions must be defined so that they are executed unconditionally for every scan
time.
3-118
ITVL

Mode setting
Write the desired mode No. into the first data memory.
Mode for pulse measurement
Pulse-to-pulse interval measurement
Pulse-to-pulse
Unit
Mode
interval
Pulse width measurement

Mode
Pulse width
Unit
10 m sec
10 m sec
100 m sec
100 m sec
1 sec
1 sec
Mode for DM measurement

Write the desired mode No. into the specified data memory.
Example
Write "#0006" to obtain the average of the contents of DM0006.
Mode No.
DM No.
Description
10000
DM0000
Measure the contents of DM0000 and obtain the

average.
10001
DM0001

average.
10005
DM0005
10006
DM0006
0007
10007
DM0007
1999
11999
DM1999
0006
2000 to 9999

average.
average.
average.

average.
12000 or more Not provided Cannot be used.
Note 1: When the mode No. is set to 10000 through 11999, values are fetched at
the scan only when the PLS input relay is ON.
Note 2: When the average of a data memory is calculated, values "32768" to
"65535" are converted into corresponding compliment numbers (-32767 to -1) .
Note 3: Some data memories after DM1000 are assigned to special functions. Be
careful when specifying data memory for the ITVL instruction.
Refer to "1.3.10 Data Memories" (p. 3-19) for data memory assignments.
3-119
12
ITVL
Application of ITVL instruction

This section describes examples of pulse interval measurement.
Pulse interval measurement
Turns ON output relay 0500 for 3 seconds when the pulse interval is not within the
range of 490 to 510 ms.
2008
#00000 DM0000
Sets mode 0 (Unit:10 ms).
LDA
STA
2008
#00051 DM0001
Sets max. setting value of measurement range to 510 ms.
LDA
STA
2008
#00049 DM0002
Sets min. setting value of measurement range to 490 ms.
LDA
STA
2008
#00010 DM0003
LDA
STA
Sets number of averaging measurements to 10.
ITVL
0000
PLS
0001
PAUSE
RES
Pauses measurement while input relay 0001 turns ON.
1000
0002
1000
Measures pulse interval when input relay 0000 turns ON.
DM0000
0500
T000
1001
#00030
T000
Resets measurement when input relay 0002 turns ON.

1000 turns ON for one scan when measured
value exceeds max. setting value (510 ms).
1001 turns ON for one scan when measured value
is below min. setting value (490 ms).
0500
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
STA
LD
Operand
2008
#00000
Line No.
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023
0024
0025
DM0000
2008
#00051
DM0001
2008
#00049
DM0002
2008
Instruction
Operand
LDA
#00010
CON
STA
DM0003
LD
0000
LD
0001
LD
0002
ITVL
DM0000 1000
LD
1000
OR
1001
OR
0500
ANB
T000
OUT
0500
TMR
000 #00030
Timing diagram
0000
ON
OFF
500ms
400ms
600ms
1000
ON
1 scan
1001
ON
1 scan
0500
ON
3 sec.
3-120
ON
3 sec.
ITVL

A/D data measurement
Turns ON output relay 0500 when the analog input from the KL-4AD to DM1600
(range: 1 to 5 V) exceeds +3 V. Turns ON output relay 0501 when the input is below
+2 V. Writes the average into DM0100.
Refer to the "KL-4AD/KL-2AD Users Manual" for data memory settings for the KL4AD.
2008
#01600 DM0000
LDA
STA
Measures contents of DM1600.
2008
#02000 DM0001
Sets max. setting value to +3 V (2000).
LDA
STA
2008
#01000 DM0002
Sets min. setting value to +2 V (1000).
LDA
STA
2008
#00100 DM0003
Sets number of averaging measurements to 100.
LDA
STA
ITVL
2003
PLS
DM0000
0001
PAUSE
Pauses measurement when input relay 0001 turns ON.

Resets measurement when input relay 0002 turns ON.
1000
0002
12
RES
1000
0500
0500 turns ON when measured value exceeds max. setting value.
0501
1001
0501 turns ON when measured value is below min. value.
1003
DM0007 DM0100
LDA
STA
Writes average into DM0100 every 100 measurement.
Coding
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
Line No.
Instruction
0000
LD
2008
0014
CON
Operand
0001
LDA
#01600
0015
STA
DM0003
0002
CON
0003
STA
0016
LD
2003
DM0000
0017
LD
0001
0004
LD
2008
0018
LD
0002
0005
LDA
#02000
0019
ITVL
DM0000 1000
0006
CON
0020
LD
1000
0007
STA
DM0001
0021
OUT
0500
0008
LD
2008
0022
LD
1001
0009
LDA
#01000
0010
CON
0011
STA
0012
LD
0013
LDA
#00100
0023
OUT
0501
0024
LD
1003
DM0002
0025
LDA
DM0007
2008
0026
STA
DM0100
3-121
CALL / SBN / RET

RES RES
CALL: Subroutine Call FUN 0 0 :
AND
SBN: Subroutine Entry FUN ORL
3
8 :
RET: Subroutine Return
ORL ORL
FUN 3
nn
CALL
SBN
nn
RET
Executes subroutine specified by operand.

Represents beginning of subroutine specified by operand.
Represents end of subroutine.
Example
00
CALL
0000
END
SBN
00
RET
ENDH
Coding
Line No.
0000
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Instruction
:
:
LD
CALL
:
END
SBN
:
RET
ENDH
Operand
:
:
0000
00
:
:
00
:
:
:
Description
When input relay 0000 turns ON, the subroutine specified by SBN00 and RET is
executed. When the subroutine ends, instructions following CALL are executed.
When the input relay is ON, the CALL instruction executes the subroutine specified by the operand.
A subroutine program must be defined between the SBN and RET instructions.
A subroutine must be defined between END and ENDH instructions.
Once a CALL instruction has been encountered, program execution transfers to
the subroutine specified by the SBN and RET instructions. Once a RET instruction has been encountered, program execution returns to the instruction immediately following the CALL instruction.
Operand
CALL
00 to 99
SBN
00 to 99
RET
Key operations
3-122
FUN
RES
ORL
AND
R-SRCH
FUN
ORL
FUN
ORL
ORL
ENT
ENT
R-SRCH
R-SRCH
0
3
3
ENT
Operand
ENT
R-SRCH
CALL / SBN / RET
Application of subroutine
Program
A)
00
CALL
2008
Normal scan
Program
B)
END
SBN
00
Subroutine program
Subroutine
RET
ENDH
When CALL00 is encountered during normal scan execution, the subroutine is

executed. At the completion of this subroutine, program execution returns to program at B) immediately following CALL00. Then, the normal scan is continued until
an END instruction is encountered.
With no CALL instruction
Program
With CALL instruction

Program
A)
A)
12
00
CALL
0000
Program
00
CALL
0000
Program
B)
Subroutine program
B)
Nesting structure of a subroutine

Subroutine instructions can be nested up to 4 levels deep.
A subroutine which is called from another subroutine should be defined before
the call.
00
CALL
0001
Program
END
SBN
01
Subroutine program
RET
SBN
00
0000
01
CALL
Call
RET
ENDH
3-123
CALL / SBN / RET

Calling a subroutine from an interrupt program
Subroutines can be called from interrupt programs.
A subroutine which is called from an interrupt program should be defined before
the call.
0500
0001
Program
END
SBN
00
Subroutine program
RET
INT
0000
0002
00
CALL
Call
RETI
ENDH
Note 1: Subroutine Nos. for SBN instructions cannot be duplicated in a program.

(It can be duplicated for CALL instructions.)
Note 2: When a subroutine is executed, the scan time is extended by the time
needed for subroutine execution.
Note 3: The following instructions cannot be used in subroutines:
STG, JMP, ENDS, INT, RETI, and MEMSW
Note 4: The following instructions can be used only in subroutines which are executed every scan time:
TMR, TMH, TMS, C, SFT, UDC, DIFU, DIFD, W-UE, W-DE, HKEY, ITVL,
and Differentiation type instruction (@xxx)
3-124
FOR / NEXT

SET ORB
ANL OR
FOR: Repeat Start
FUN 1
NEXT: Repeat End
FUN 2
6
9
FOR
nnnn
NEXT
Executes program between FOR and NEXT

by number of times specified by operand.
Represents end of repetition.
Example
2008
00
CALL
END
SBN
00
#00100
LDA
2002
TM02
STA
Specify the first DM No.(DM100)

Specify the number of DMs to be
initialized.
#TM02
2002
STA
#00000
LDA
FOR
#00050
TM02
INC
NEXT
RET
12
ENDH
Coding
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
0000
LD
0001
CALL
2008
0107
FOR
#00050
00
0108
LD
2002
0109
STA
#TM02
0099
END
0100
SBN
0110
CON
0111
INC
00
0101
LD
2002
0112
NEXT
0102
LDA
#00100
0113
RET
0103
CON
0104
STA
0105
CON
0106
LDA
TM02
:
TM02
:
:
#00000
0199
ENDH
Description
Use FOR-NEXT instructions in a subroutine program (between SBN and RET) to
initialize data memory (DM0100 through DM0149) when the operation is started.
The indirect addressing method is used to change the data memory, so the initialization is completed when the TM02 value becomes "50 + 1" between the FOR and
NEXT instructions.
"Indirect addressing" (p. 3-127)
The FOR instruction takes either of the following two types of operands: the
number of repetitions or the location (DM No.) of the data memory containing the
number of repetitions.
Define the program to be repeated between the FOR and NEXT instructions.
The FOR instruction repeats the desired sequence by the specified number of
times during each scan time.
3-125
FOR / NEXT
Tips
Note 1: The FOR-NEXT instruction pair repeats the program for a specified time
period at each scan. It usually is used in steps or subroutines.
Note 2: When a large number of loops or long programs are defined between FOR
and NEXT instructions, the processing time for one scan may become too long,
resulting in "Cycle time error". In such a case, reduce the number of loops or shorten
the ladder program.
The FOR-NEXT instruction set can be nested up to 8 levels deep. Nine or more
nested levels will result in a FOR-NEXT error.
FOR
#05
FOR
#02
FOR
#05
1) 2) 3)
NEXT
NEXT
NEXT
After repeating FOR-NEXT 3) five times, program execution transfers to the

instructions following the NEXT instruction.
FOR-NEXT 2) is repeated twice while FOR-NEXT 3) is executed once.
Thus, FOR-NEXT 2) is executed 10 times.
FOR-NEXT 1) is repeated 5 times while FOR-NEXT 2) is executed once.
Thus, FOR-NEXT 1) is executed up to 50 (5 x 2 x 5) times.
Operands
Visual KV
KV-300
KV-10/16
KV-24/40/80
#0000 to #65535 DM0000 to DM1984 #00000 to #65535 #00001 to #65535

DM0000 to DM1999 DM0000 to DM9999 DM0000 to DM0999 DM0000 to DM1999
TM02 to TM28
TM00 to TM29
TM00 to TM29
TM00 to TM29
Key operation
FUN
FUN
3-126
SET
ORB
ANL
OR
ENT
R-SRCH
Operand
ENT
ENT
R-SRCH
R-SRCH
ENT
R-SRCH
FOR / NEXT
Indirect addressing
Indirect addressing
Indirect addressing is used to so you don't have to use fixed data memories or relay
Nos. when the contents of data memory or a relay is stored in internal registers, or
when the contents of the internal memory is stored in data memory or a relay.
Method for indirect addressing
Specify the operand for instructions as "#TMxx". The contents of "TMxx" is
considered to be the specification No. (indirect addressing).
Example
When TM02 value is "0000", "#TM02" represents DM0000.
When TM02 value is "10000", "#TM02" represents 0000 (relay).
Any of "02" through "29" can be specified for "xx".

Specify the desired decimal number for "xx".
Numbers "0000" through "1999" specify DM0000 through DM1999 (data
memory).
Numbers "10000" through "27915" specify 0000 through 17915 (relay).
Example: LDA #TM15

TM15 value
Data entered into internal register
20
DM0020
11000
1000 to 1015
This is the same operation whether "LDA DM0020" or "LDA 1000" is specified. The
specified data memory or relay can be changed as desired by changing the value of
TM15.
Example: STA #TM02
TM02 value
Specified destination
00
DM0000
13000
3000 to 3015
This is the same operation whether "STA DM0000" or "STA 3000" is specified. The
specified data memory or relay can be changed as desired by changing the value of
TM02.
Range of DM and relay Nos. that can be specified by "TMxx"
TMxx value
DM/relay
0000 to 1999
DM0000 to DM1999
2000 to 9999
Cannot be used.
10000 to 27915
0000 to 17915
Instructions which can use indirect addressing:

Specify "#TMxx" as an operand relay.
LDA, @LDA, STA, @STA, CMP, @CMP, ADD, @ADD, SUB, @SUB, MUL, @MUL,
DIV, @DIV, ANDA, @ANDA, ORA, @ORA, EORA, @EORA
Note 1: "2000" to "9999" cannot be used as a TMxx value.
Note 2: If there is no data memory or relay corresponding to the number specified
with "#TMxx", special utility relay 2012 turns ON.
3-127
12
FOR / NEXT

Data memory block transfer
The contents of DM0000 are
transferred to DM0100.
DM0000
DM0099
DM0100
The block of 100 data is

transferred.
Transfer a
block of
data.
The contents of DM0099 are

DM0199
Comparison between a program with normal addressing and one with indirect
addressing.
Program with normal addressing
0000
1000
DIFU
0000
1000
DIFU
1000
DM0000 DM0100
LDA
STA
1000
00
CALL
1000
DM0001 DM0101
LDA
STA
1000
DM0002 DM0102
LDA
STA
1000
DM0003 DM0103
LDA
STA
1000
DM0098 DM0198
LDA
STA
1000
DM0099 DM0199
LDA
STA
Program steps
are reduced by
one-eighth.
No. of data
memory to be
transferred.
SBN
00
2002
2002
#00000
LDA
#TM02
LDA
TM02
STA
#TM03
STA
#00100
LDA
TM02
INC
TM03
STA
1)
FOR
#0100
2)
TM03
INC
3)
NEXT
RET
ENDH
ENDH
4)
The first No. of the source DM block is specified

(DM0000).
The first No. of the destination DM block is specified
(DM0100).
The contents of the DM indirectly addressed by
"#TM02" is transferred to the internal register.
The contents of the internal register are transferred

to the DM indirectly addressed by "#TM03".
END
END
The contents of DM0000 are transferred

to DM0100.
to DM0101.
to DM0102.

to DM0199.
3-128
Program with indirect addressing
Add "1" to both "TM02" and "TM03" to increment

the Nos. of the source and destination DMs by one.
FOR / NEXT
Description
On line 1), "TM02" is assigned to the first No. of the source 0000 and "TM03" is
assigned to the first No. of the destination 0100. This is the initial setting.
On lines 2) to 4), the contents of DM0000 to DM0099 are transferred to DM0100
to DM0199.
The ladder program on line 3) is executed 100 times in one scan.
1st operation: TM02 value: 0000, TM03 value: 0100

2002
#TM02
LDA
#TM03
STA
DM0000 is
indirectly
addressed.
DM0100 is
indirectly
addressed.
TM02
INC
Add "1" to the
current value of
"TM02".
TM03
INC
Add "1" to the
current value of
"TM03".
2nd operation: TM02 value: 00001, TM03 value: 0101

#TM02
LDA
#TM03
STA
DM0001 is
indirectly
addressed.
DM0101 is
indirectly
addressed.
TM02
INC
Add "1" to the
current value of
"TM02".
TM03
INC
Add "1" to the
current value of
"TM03".
2002
This operation is repeated.
12
100th operation: TM02 value: 0099, TM03 value: 0199

2002
#TM02
LDA
#TM03
STA
DM0099 is
indirectly
addressed.
DM0199 is
indirectly
addressed.
TM02
INC
Add "1" to the
current value
of "TM02".
TM03
INC
Add "1" to the
current value
of "TM03".
When the ladder program on line 3) is repeated 100 times, the contents of the
specified DM block are transferred.
3-129
FOR / NEXT
Application of SBN-RET and FOR-NEXT instructions

Data memory shift
Shifts the contents of the current data memory (DM) to the next DM at the rising
edge of the synchronous (timing) signal. As the number of DMs to be shifted increases, the required scan time becomes longer.
1000
0000
DIFU
Synchronous
signal
#00010 TM02
LDA
STA
Shift start DM
No. (DM0010)
is designated.
1000
#00030 TM03
LDA
STA
Shift end DM
No. (DM0030)
is designated.
00
CALL
Data is shifted from DM0010 to

DM0030.
END
SBN
00
TM03
LDA
2002
#00001
ADD
TM04
STA
TM02
SUB
TM05
STA
Shift level
TM03
DEC
2002
2002
TM04
DEC
#TM03 #TM04
LDA
STA
Indirect addressing is used
to designate DM Nos.
#00000 #TM02
LDA
STA
Shift start DM No. is cleared to
"#00000" after data is shifted.
FOR
TM05
NEXT
Program lines which execute

data shift are grouped as a
subroutine.
RET
ENDH
Coding
3-130
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
0000
LD
0000
0020
STA
TM04
0001
DIFU
1000
0021
CON
0002
CON
0003
AND
1000
0004
LDA
#00010
0005
CON
0006
STA
0007
CON
0008
LDA
0009
CON
0010
STA
TM02
#00030
TM03
0022
SUB
0023
CON
TM02
0024
STA
TM05
0025
FOR
TM05
0026
LD
2002
0027
DEC
TM03
0028
CON
0029
DEC
0030
CON
0011
CON
0012
CALL
0013
END
0033
STA
0014
SBN
00
0034
NEXT
0015
LD
2002
0035
LD
2002
0016
LDA
TM03
0036
LDA
#00000
0017
CON
0037
CON
0018
ADD
0019
CON
00
#00001
0031
LDA
0032
CON
TM04
0038
STA
0039
RET
0040
ENDH
#TM03
#TM04
#TM02
HKEY
HKEY: 16-Key Input
SET LD
FUN 1
Reads hexadecimal key data on timesharing basis and outputs these data to
special utility relays 2900 to 2915.
HKEY
nnnn
mmmm
Input relay
Example
HKEY
0000
0500
0005
Output relay
Coding
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
0000
LD
0005
0001
HKEY
0000 0500
Description
When input relay 0005 turns ON, the operand hexadecimal key data is read.
HKEY instruction employs four inputs and four outputs arranged as shown below.
Refer to "Fetching 16-key input" (p. 3-133) for the programming example.
12
24
VDC
COM
000
COM
500
002
003
502
503
Pressing two or more keys

simultaneously is invalid.
0
Pressing two or more keys

simultaneously is OK.
(With diode)
The HKEY instruction employs four input relays and four output relays from the
specified number.
Inputs are processed on a time-sharing basis, so that input processing requires 8
scan time cycles (approx. 160 msec when the scan time is 20 msec or less).
When a hexadecimal key is pressed, the HKEY instruction turns ON the corresponding special utility relay (2900 to 2915).
Relay No. 2900
Hex key
001
KV
501
2901
2902
2903
2904
2905
2906
2907
2908
2909
2910
2911
2912
2913
2914
2915
The special utility relay status indicates whether two or more keys can be
pressed simultaneously or whether a key input read operation has completed, as
shown in the following table:
Relay No.
Status
R: Reading
2814 R/W
ON: Pressing two or more keys
simultaneously is not valid.
2815 R
ON: Key input read operation has
completed.
W: Writing
Note 1: An HKEY instruction can be defined only once in a program.

Note 2: The HKEY instruction turns output relays ON/OFF every scan time. Connect
the device with transistor output.
Note 3: If the scan time is shorter than 8 ms, set the input time constant smaller
than the scan time.
3-131
HKEY

Note 4: When two or more keys are pressed simultaneously even once during the
scan while relay 2814 is ON, relays 2900 through 2915 keep the current status as
soon as relay 2815 turns ON.
Note 5: The HKEY instruction does not properly operate if the scan time is longer
than 200 ms.
Note 6: When the expansion I/O module is used as an operand, the fetch may fail
unless the scan time is fixed to 2 ms or longer.
Operands
Visual KV
KV-300
KV-10/16/24/40/80
Input relay Output relay Input relay Output relay Input relay Output relay
0000 to
0415
0500 to
0915
00000 to
00009
10000 to
10415
:
17000 to
17415
00500 to
00503
10500 to
10915
:
17500 to
17915
0000 to
0415
0500 to
0915
Key operation
FUN
SET
LD
ENT
R-SRCH
Input relay
Output relay
ENT
R-SRCH
2 Application of HKEY instruction

Changing the preset value of internal counters using a BCD digital switch
Coding
2002
0001
#09999
C000
0000
C000
0600
2900
LDA
HKEY
0104
0512
C000
STA
0005
2815
TBIN
END
ENDH
Instruction
Operand
LD
2002
ANB
0001
C
000 #09999 0000
CON
AND
C000
OUT
0600
LD
0005
HKEY
0104 0512
LD
2815
LDA
2900
CON
TBIN
CON
STA
C000
END
ENDH
As soon as 0005 turns ON, the preset value is replaced with the new preset
value specified by the digital switches.
"TBIN instruction" (p. 3-180), "LDA, STA instructions" (p. 3-140)
The digital switches are connected to the KV PLC as shown in the following
diagram: (Be sure to add the diodes at the specified points.)
The preset values range from #0000 to #9999.
The preset value is updated as soon as special utility relay 2815 turns ON.
3-132
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
HKEY
100
101
102
103
BCD Digital switch
Diode
24
VDC
COM
1
0104
COM
0512
2
0105
KV
0513
4
0106
8
0107
0514
0515
Fetching 16-key input

Writes the following 16-key input value into DM0000 as 4-digit BCD.
Pressing the [F] key clears the input value.
2008
2814
SET
2002
HKEY
0000
0500
TM06
STA
2815
2900
LDA
2010
$03FF
ANDA
TM05
CMP
2010
TM05
STA
2815
2900
LDA
2010
$03FF
ANDA
TM05
CMP
2010
TM05
STA
DM0000
LDA
#04
SLA
2815
DMX
12
TM06
STA
DM0000
STA
#00000
DW
DM0000
END
2915
ENDH
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
Instruction
LD
SET
LD
HKEY
LD
LDA
CON
ANB
ANDA
CON
CMP
CON
ANB
STA
CON
DMX
CON
STA
LD
LDA
Operand
2008
2814
2002
0000 0500
2815
2900
2010
$03FF
TM05
2010
TM05
TM06
2815
2900
Line No.
0020
0021
0022
0023
0024
0025
0026
0027
0028
0029
0030
0031
0032
0033
0034
0035
0036
0037
0038
0039
0040
Instruction
Operand
CON
AND
2010
ANDA
$03FF
CON
CMP
TM05
CON
ANB
2010
STA
TM05
CON
LDA
DM0000
CON
SLA
#04
CON
ORA
TM06
CON
STA
DM0000
LD
2815
AND
2915
DW
#0000 DM0000
END
ENDH
3-133

Arithmetic instructions handle data as integers to perform arithmetic, comparative, or
logical operations.
3-134
Instruction
Mnemonic
DW: Data Memory Write
DW
3-136
Trimmer In
TMIN (FUN50), @TMIN @(FUN50)
3-138
LDA/@LDA: Load A
LDA (FUN23), @LDA@ (FUN23)
3-140
STA/@STA: Store A
STA (FUN42), @STA@ (FUN42)
3-140
CMP/@CMP: Compare
CMP (FUN04), @CMP @(FUN04)
3-146
ADD/@ADD: Add
ADD (FUN00), @ADD @(FUN00)
3-150
SUB/@SUB: Subtract
SUB (FUN46), @SUB @(FUN46)
3-150
MUL/@MUL: Multiply
MUL (FUN28),@ MUL @(FUN28)
3-150
DIV/@DIV: Divide
DIV (FUN11), @DIV @(FUN11)
3-150
ANDA/@ANDA: And A
ANDA (FUN01), @ANDA @(FUN01)
3-159
ORA/@ORA: Or A
ORA (FUN31), @ORA @(FUN31)
3-161
EORA/@EORA: Exclusive Or A
EORA (FUN15), @EORA@ (FUN15)
3-164
SRA/@SRA: Shift Right A
SRA (FUN41), @SRA @(FUN41)
3-166
SLA/@SLA: Shift left A
SLA (FUN40), @SLA @(FUN40)
3-166
RRA/@RRA: Rotate Right A
RRA (FUN37), @RRA@ (FUN37)
3-169
RLA/@RLA: Rotate Left A
RLA (FUN35), @RLA @(FUN35)
3-169
COM/@COM: Complement
COM (FUN05), @COM @(FUN05)
3-171
INC/@INC: Increment Memory
INC (FUN19), @INC @(FUN19)
3-172
DEC/@DEC: Decrement Memory
DEC (FUN07), @DEC@ (FUN07)
3-172
MPX/@MPX: Multiplexer
MPX (FUN27), @MPX@(FUN27)
3-176
DMX/@DMX: Demultiplexer
DMX (FUN12), @DMX @(FUN12)
3-176
TBCD/@TBCD: Transfer BCD
TBCD (FUN47), @TBCD @(FUN47)
3-180
TBIN/@TBIN: Transfer BIN
TBIN (FUN48), @TBIN @(FUN48)
3-180
ASC/@ASC: ASCII Convert
ASC (FUN02), @ASC @(FUN02)
3-183
RASC/@RASC: Reverse ASCII Convert
RASC (FUN32), @RASC @(FUN32)
3-183
ROOT/@ROOT: Square Root
ROOT (FUN36), @ROOT @(FUN36)
3-185
Reference page
Internal register
KV executes all arithmetic instructions (i.e. data exchange) by using an internal
register, in order to increase the processing speed.
This section begins by describing details of the internal register.
Internal register
An internal register stores 16-digit binary data. That is, the resister uses 16 bits for
storing ON-OFF status data (1-0 status data). The internal register is required when
the KV performs arithmetic operation. Because this is not an instruction nor operand,
it is not necessary to take into consideration how the internal register functions or
operates.
Arithmetic instructions executed using internal register
(Arithmetic instructions executed as binary code.)
Data memory,
temporary
memory
Constant 3. 4.
(decimal,
hexadecimal)
Current T/C
value. 2.
Relay No.1.
Data memory accessed

in indirect addressing via
temporary memory
LDA instruction
TMIN
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
STA direction
Relay No
Preset T/C
value. 5.
Data memory,
temporary
memory
Data memory accessed

in indirect addressing via
temporary memory
MPX
DMX
TBCD
TBIN
ASC
RASC
Constant
Data memories,
temporary memories
Internal register
CMP
ADD
SUB
MUL
DIV
ANDA
ORA
EORA
SRA
SLA
RRA
RLA
COM
INC
DEC
1. ON-OFF status of the specified relay and 15 successive relays is stored into the
resister.
2. Current T/C value (decimal value = #*****) is automatically converted into a
binary value and input to the internal register.
3. Constant (decimal value = #*****, hexadecimal value = $****) is automatically
converted into a binary value and input to the internal register.
4. The range of numbers that can be specified is as follows:
Decimal #00000 to #65535
Hexadecimal $0000 to $FFFF
The constants can be entered by using #,@$ and the corresponding alphanumeric
keys.
(Pressing #,@$ once allows you to enter decimal values, and pressing twice to enter
hexadecimal values.)
5. The contents of the internal register (binary) is automatically converted into a
decimal value and (#*****) input to a timer/counter as the preset value.
Note 1: The internal structure of the internal register is the same as that of the data
memories. Although the data memories can store data when the power is being
OFF, the internal register cannot do so.
Note 2: Even for running one program, the contents of the internal register is rewritten each time when an instruction is executed.
Note 3: The internal register cannot be monitored.
3-135
12
DW
DW: Data Memory Write
DW
nnnn
DW
DMmmmm
Directly writes constant into data memory.
Example
First operand
$0018 #00050
DW
DW
DM0000 DM0001
2008
Second operand
Coding
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
0000
LD
2008
0001
DW
$0018 DM0000
0002
CON
0003
DW
#00050 DM0001
When starting operation, $0018 is written into DM0000 and #00050 into DM0001.
Values are directly written into data memories, without using the internal register.
Description
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
Operand
Data memory
Note: The contents of the internal register and the arithmetic flag do not change
even after the DW instruction is executed.
Tips
The DW instruction can be used to reset the contents of data memories.

2008
#00000 #00000
DW
DW
DM0000 DM0001
Operands
Visual KV
KV-300
KV-10/16
KV-24/40/80
nnnn:
nnnn
nnnn
nnnn
#00000 to #65535 #00000 to #65535 #00000 to #65535 #00000 to #65535
$0000 to $FFFF
$0000 to $FFFF
$0000 to $FFFF
$0000 to $FFFF
DM mmmm:
DMmmmm
DMmmmm
DMmmmm
Key operation
DW
reraly
First operand
Second operand
ENT
R-SRCH
Arithmetic flag
2009, 2010, 2011
2012
3-136
No change
No change
@xxxx
@xxxx: Differentiation
#,$ FUN
xxxx
Executes instruction only at rising edge of

input to input relay.
Example
Every-scan type instruction
Differentiation type instruction
DM0000
INC
0000
DM0000
INC
0000
Description
Arithmetic instructions have two instruction types: differentiation type and everyscan type.
The differentiation type instruction is executed only at the rising edge of input
relay 0000.
The every-scan type instruction is executed every scan time while input relay
0000 is ON.
Timing diagram
Differentiation type instruction
Every-scan type instruction
ON
OFF
0000
INC
0000
Stopped
Executed
Stopped
INC
ON
OFF
Stopped
12
Stopped
Executed only once at the rising

edge of input relay 0000.
Instructions with the DIFFERENTIATION function are as follows:

LDA, SAT, CMP, ADD, SUB, MUL, DIV, ANDA, ORA, EORA, SRA, SLA, RRA,
RLA, COM, INC, DEC, MPX, DMX, TBCD, TBIN, ASC, RASC, ROOT
Note:
0000
DM0000
INC
0000
DM0000
INC
0000
1000
DIFU
1000
DM0000
INC
In the top program, an INC instruction is

executed every scan time, incrementing
the contents of DM0000 by one, while
input relay 0000 is ON.
In the middle program, an INC instruction is executed and the contents of
DM0000 is incremented only when input
relay 0000 is turned from OFF to ON.
The bottom program uses the

every-scan type instruction which
performs the same operation as the
differentiation type instruction.
Operands
Key operation
#,$
FUN
Function No.
ENT
R-SRCH
3-137
TMIN / @TMIN
ANB RES
TMIN: Trimmer In
FUN 5
@
@TMIN: Trimmer Setting
#,$ FUN
ANB RES
n
TMIN
n
TMIN
Inputs numerical value specified by digital

trimmer of access window (0 to 65535) to
internal register.
T000 preset value can be changed with trimmer as follows (#00000 to #65535):
Inputs trimmer rotation angle of 0 to internal register.
Transfers contents of internal register to timer T000
for use as preset value.
2002
0
TMIN
0000
#00010
T000
T000
STA
T000 0500
Turns ON output 0500 when current value of
T000 reaches "#00000".
Timer T000 operates as ON-delay timer when 0000 is ON.
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
Instruction
LD
TMIN
CON
STA
LD
Operand
2002
0
T000
0000
Line No.
0005
0006
0007
0008
Instruction
TMR
CON
AND
OUT
Operand
000 #65535
T000
0500
Description
The TMIN instruction transfers the value of the KV series digital trimmer (0 to
65535) to the internal register. Additionally, if this value is transferred to a timer,
counter, relay, or data memory (by using the STA instruction), the numeric data of
the destination can be changed without modifying the program.
Internal
register
TMIN
Digital trimmer
value of access
window [0 to 65535]
Input
STA
Transfer
Numeric data
0 to 65535
Timer/counter preset
value
Relay ch No.
Data memory
Temporary memory
Destination
Note: To check the setting value of the digital trimmer with the KV-P3E(01)
handheld programmer, select the "READ TRIMMER SETTING" function (FUN73).
(Only values 0 to 9999 can be displayed.)
The @TMIN instruction is executed only once at the rising edge of the input relay.
Refer to "Chapter 3: Access Window" on page 1-79 for the functions and operation
procedures for the digital trimmer of the Access Window.
Operands
Visual KV
KV-300/24/40/80
KV-10/16
0, 1
0, 1
Key operation
FUN
@
Arithmetic flag
#,$
ANB
FUN
2009
2010
RES
ENT
R-SRCH
Operand
ENT
R-SRCH
No change
Turns ON when "0" is entered by the TMIN instruction. Turns
OFF at other times.
2011, 2012 No change
3-138
TMIN / @TMIN
Applications of TMIN (Analog timer) instruction

Changing the timer setting value
Uses the digital trimmer (TMIN0) to change the setting value of a timer (0 to 6553.5
sec.).
0
TMIN
2002
T000
STA
#00010
T000
0000
T000
0500
0500
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
Instruction
LD
TMIN
CON
STA
LD
Operand
2002
0
T000
0000
Line No.
0005
0006
0007
0008
Instruction
OR
TMR
ANB
OUT
Operand
0500
000 #00010
T000
0500
Changing setting values for multiple timers

Uses the digital trimmer (TMIN0) to change setting values for multiple timers (0 to
6553.5 sec.).
2002
0
TMIN
T000
STA
T001
STA
T002
STA
#00010
T000
0000
0500
T000
0500
#00010
T001
0001
T001
0501
0501
#00010
T002
0002
T002
0502
0502
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
Instruction
LD
TMIN
CON
STA
CON
STA
CON
STA
LD
OR
TMR
ANB
Operand
2002
0
T000
T001
T002
0000
0500
000 #00010
T000
Line No.
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
Instruction
OUT
LD
OR
TMR
ANB
OUT
LD
OR
TMR
ANB
OUT
Operand
0500
0001
0501
001 #00010
T001
0501
0002
0502
002 #00010
T002
0502
In the above example, T000, T001, and T002 have the same setting value.
3-139
12
LDA / @LDA / STA @STA

nnnn
LDA
ANL ORL
FUN 2
LDA: Load A
#,$ FUN
@LDA: Load A
@STA: Store A
LDB ORL
nnnn
STA
LDB ORL
@
#,$ FUN 4
3
nnnn
STA
FUN 4
STA: Store A
nnnn
LDA
ANL ORL
Inputs value specified by operand to internal

register.
Transfers contents of internal register to

destination specified by operand.
The LDA instruction inputs each data item to the internal register.
The STA instruction transfers the contents of the internal register to the specified
destination.
Source
T/C current
value
Decimal
Hexadecimal
T
C
Relay No.
LDA
XXXX
XX
STA
T
C
Data memory DM
Temporary memory TM
Relay No.
Relay No. XXXX
"Internal Register" (p. 3-126)
Operands
Visual KV
LDA
STA
0000 to
0500 to
17915
1915
T000 to
2100 to
T249
17915
(Current
value)
C000
T000 to
to 249
T249
(Current
(Preset
value)
value)
CTH0 to
C000
CTH1
to C249
(Preset
value)
DM0000 to CTC0 to
DM1999
CTC3
TM00 to DM0000 to
TM31
DM1999
#00000 to
TM00
#65535
to TM29
$0000 to #TM00 to
$FFFF
#TM29
#TM00 to
#TM29
KV-300
LDA
STA
0000 to
0009
0500 to
0500 to
17915
1915
KV-10/16
LDA
STA
0000 to
2915
T000 to
0500 to
T063
1915
KV-24/40/80
LDA
STA
0000 to
6915
T000 to
0500 to
T119
1915
T000 to
T249
2100 to
17915
C000 to
C063
2100 to
2915
C000 to
C119
2100 to
6915
C000 to
C249
T000 to
T249
CTH0 to
CTH1
T000 to
T063
CTH0 to
CTH1
T000 to
T119
CTH0 to
CTH1
DM0000 to
DM9999
TM00 to
TM31
#00000 to
#65535
$0000 to
$FFFF
#TM00 to
#TM29
C000 to
C249
CTC0 to
CTC3
DM0000 to
DM9999
TM00 to
TM29
#TM00 to
#TM29
DM0000 to
DM0999
TM00 to
TM31
#00000 to
#65535
$0000 to
$FFFF
#TM00 to
#TM29
C000 to
C063
CTC0 to
CTC3
DM0000 to
DM0999
TM00 to
TM29
#TM00 to
#TM29
DM0000 to
DM1999
TM00 to
TM31
#00000 to
#65535
$0000 to
$FFFF
#TM00 to
#TM29
C000 to
C119
CTC0 to
CTC3
DM0000 to
DM1999
TM00 to
TM29
#TM00 to
#TM29
Key operation
FUN
@
#,$
#,$
3-140
FUN
FUN
ANL
LDB
FUN
ORL
ANL
ENT
R-SRCH
ENT
R-SRCH
Operand
ENT
Operand
ENT
R-SRCH
R-SRCH
XXX
XXX
XXXX
XX
Relay No. XXXX 7
(Data type: operand)
(Data type: operand)
Destination
T/C preset
value
XXX
XXX
Data memory DM
3 Temporary memory
TM
Transfer
(#XXXXX)
($XXXXX)
Internal register
1 Constant
Storage
Input
Arithmetic flag
2009
2010
No change
Turns ON when the contents of the internal register is "0" after
"LDA #00000" is executed. Turns OFF at other times.
No change
Turns ON when the DM or relay indirectly addressed with #TM is
out of range.
2011
2012
Application of LDA and STA instructions

Changing the counter setting value
0000
#00100
LDA
C001
STA
0000
#00200
LDA
C001
STA
C001
0500
a)
b)
0002
#09999
C001
0001
When 0000 is ON, #00100 is transferred as C001

preset value.
When 0000 is OFF, #00200 is transferred as C001
preset value.
When C001 current value equals to its preset value,
0500 turns ON.
Coding
Line No.
Instruction
0000
LD
Operand
0000
0001
LDA
#00100
0002
CON
0003
STA
0004
LDB
0000
0005
LDA
#00200
0006
CON
0007
STA
C001
0008
LD
0002
0009
001 #09999 0001
0010
CON
0011
AND
C001
0012
OUT
0500
12
C001
Description
In step a), contents of DM00100 is transferred to C001 via the internal register for
use as the C001 preset value, when 0000 is ON.
In step b) , contents of #00200 is transferred to C001 via the internal register for
use as the C001 preset value, when 0002 is OFF.
Although the C001 preset value is #09999 in the above example, any value
except #00000 can be given because the preset value is changed to the specified value by turning ON/OFF 0000.
Note 1: If an STA instruction is executed when the current value is larger than the
preset value, the current value will be changed to the preset value.
Note 2: Do not specify "#00000" as the setting value for C001.
3-141

Transferring the current counter value to data memory (DM)
#09999
C010
0000
DM0000
STA
0001
2002
a)
C010
LDA
The C010 current value is transferred to DM0000.
Coding
Line No.
Instruction
0000
LDB
Operand
0001
0001
010 #099999 0000
0002
LD
2002
0003
LDA
C010
0004
CON
0005
STA
DM0000
Description
In step a), the C010 current value is transferred via the internal register and stored
into DM0000, throughout the operation.
Transferring the contents of data memory as a setting value for a timer
0002
DM0010
LDA
T002
STA
0002
DM0011
LDA
T002
STA
T002
0500
a)
2
b)
0003
#00010
T002
Coding
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
0000
LD
0002
0007
STA
T0002
0001
LDA
DM0010
0008
LD
0003
0002
CON
0009
TMR
002 #00010
0003
STA
T002
0010
CON
0004
LDB
0002
0011
AND
T002
0005
LDA
DM0011
0012
OUT
0500
0006
CON
Description
In step a), contents of DM0010 is transferred to T002 via the internal register for
use as the T002 preset value, when 0002 is ON.
In step b), contents of DM0011 is transferred to T002 via the internal register for
use as the T002 preset value, when 0002 is OFF.
Although the preset value of T002 is #00010 in the above example, any value
except #00000 can be given because the preset value is changed to the specified value by turning ON/OFF 0002. Once the counter value has been changed,
the changed value will be stored until it is changed again.
The setting values of timers and counters are reset to the original setting values
after the power is turned OFF once and then ON again.
Note 1: If an STA instruction is executed when the current value is larger than the
preset value, the current value will be changed to the preset value.
Note 2: Do not change the setting value of T002 to "#00000".
3-142

Outputting the input (ON/OFF status) of a basic unit directly to an expansion output unit
The ON/OFF status of a KV series basic unit is output to a KV-E16T(P) unit connected next to the basic unit.
0000
LDA
2002
0600
STA
Coding
Line No.
Instruction
0000
LD
Operand
2002
0001
LDA
0000
0002
CON
0003
STA
0600
Description
Input
(KV basic unit)
Input
Output
(KV-E16T(P))
(Internal register)
1 : ON
16-bit
0 : OFF
000
ON
0000
D0
0600
ON
00
001
ON
0001
D1
0601
ON
01
002
ON
0002
D2
0602
ON
02
003
ON
0003
D3
0603
ON
03
004
OFF
0004
D4
0604
OFF
04
005
OFF
0005
D5
0605
OFF
05
006
OFF
0006
D6
0606
OFF
06
007
OFF
0007
D7
0607
OFF
07
008
ON
0008
D8
0608
ON
08
009
ON
0009
D9
0609
ON
09
010
ON
0010
D10
0610
ON
10
011
ON
0011
D11
0611
ON
11
012
OFF
0012
D12
0612
OFF
12
013
OFF
0013
D13
0613
OFF
13
014
OFF
0014
D14
0614
OFF
14
015
OFF
0015
D15
0615
OFF
15
0000
<LDA>
0600
<STA>
12
Output
Binary number
The LDA instruction transfers the input (ON/OFF status) of the KV basic unit to
the internal register using binary numbers.
The STA instruction outputs the binary data in the internal register as the ON/
OFF status from the KV-E16T(P) (output unit).
Refer to "1.3 Device Configuration" (p. 3-5) for relay number assignments.
Note 1: When "LDA 0004" and "STA 0604" are programmed in the above example,
the LDA instruction can transfer inputs 0100 through 0103 to the internal register;
however, the STA instruction cannot output data across the channels. As a result,
the ON/OFF status of inputs 0100 through 0103 cannot be output even if they are
fetched by the LDA instruction.
Note 2: Relays 0000 through 0415 are assigned as input relays, and 0500 through
0915 are assigned as output relays.
"1.3 Device Configuration" (p. 3-5)
3-143

When a BCD (2-digit) digital switch is connected to inputs 0000 through
0007 and a toggle switch is connected to inputs 0008 through 0015
a) Use the value of the digital switch (2 digits) as the setting value of a counter
(C001).
b) The current value of the counter (C001) is output to 0500 to 0515 using BCD
output.
Coding
0008
0010
a)
0011
b)
0000
LDA
$00FF
ANDA
TBIN
C001
LDA
TBCD
0500
STA
#09999
C001
0009
C001
STA
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
Instruction
LDB
C
LD
LDA
CON
ANDA
CON
TBIN
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
TBCD
CON
STA
Operand
0008
001 #09999 0009
0010
0000
$00FF
C001
0011
C001
0500
Description
Digital switch
Counter
setting
value
Internal register
(C001)
<59>
000 ON
D0
D0
001 OFF
D1
D1
002 OFF
D2
D2
003 ON
D3
D3
004 ON
D4
D4
005 OFF
D5
D5
D6
D6
007 OFF
D7
008 OFF ON/OFF

009 ON status is
trans010 ON ferred to
011 ON internal
register.
012 OFF
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
013 OFF
D13
014 OFF
015 OFF
006 ON
Reset input
Proximity
SW input
SW input
07000
<LDA>
$00FF
<ANDA>
<TBIN>
C001
<STA>
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D14
D15
D15
Only loworder 2
digits is
used.
0
0
BCD
data is
converted
into binary
data.
0
0
0
Data is
transferred
as setting
value of
counter.
2 + 2 + 2 + 2 + 2 = 1 + 2 + 8 + 16 + 32 = 59 (Decimal
number)
In example a), the LDA instruction reads the ON/OFF status of input relays 0000
through 0015 to the internal register.
"ANDA $00FF" instruction is used to leave only the digital switch input (2 digits).
BCD data is then converted into BIN (binary) data. (BIN is used in the KV series.)
The contents of the internal register is input as the setting value of C001.
In example b), the current value of counter C001 is read and output to output
relays 0500 through 0515.
Note 1: An LDA instruction can read the current value of a counter or a timer, but
cannot read the setting value.
Note 2: An STA instruction can change the setting value of a counter or a timer, but
cannot change the current value.
3-144

Note 3: When an STA instruction is executed while the setting value of a counter or
a timer is smaller than the current value, the current value is changed to be the
setting value.
First-in first-out (FIFO)
The data once fetched is written into DM0004,
DM0003, , to DM0000 in this order. At the
unloading timing, data is fetched from
DM0004 and the contents of DM are shifted
to the next DM.
OK/NG
judgment
Data
shift
DM0000
DM0001
DM0002
DM0003
DM0004
Unloading
timing
The OK/NG judgment and unloading timings can be used in asynchronous programs.
0000
1000
DIFU
1000
OK/NG judgment
timing
$1111
DM0000
LDA
STA
"$1111" is transferred to
DM0000.
OK/NG judgment
$5555
DM0000
0001
LDA
STA
"$5555" is transferred to DM0000.
0001
2002
DM0004
LDA
$0000
CMP
2010
DM0003 DM0004
LDA
STA
$0000
LDA
DM0003
STA
2002
DM0003
LDA
$0000
CMP
2010
DM0002 DM0003
LDA
STA
$0000
LDA
DM0002
STA
2002
DM0002
LDA
$0000
CMP
2010
DM0001 DM0002
LDA
STA
$0000
LDA
DM0001
STA
2002
DM0001
LDA
$0000
CMP
2010
DM0000 DM0001
LDA
STA
$0000
LDA
DM0000
STA
0002
Unloading
timing
$0000
LDA
Contents of DM is compared with "$0000".

When two values match, contents of one
previous DM is transferred, then "$0000" is
transferred to DM.
DM0004
STA
"$0000" is transferred to DM
at unloading timing.
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023
0024
0025
0026
0027
0028
0029
0030
0031
0032
0033
0034
Instruction
LD
DIFU
CON
AND
MPS
AND
LDA
CON
STA
MPP
ANB
LDA
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
CMP
CON
AND
LDA
CON
STA
CON
LDA
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
CMP
CON
AND
LDA
CON
Operand
0000
1000
1000
0001
$1111
DM0000
0001
$5555
DM0000
2002
DM0004
$0000
2010
DM0003
DM0004
$0000
DM0003
0002
DM0003
$0000
2010
DM0002
Line No.
0035
0036
0037
0038
0039
0040
0041
0042
0043
0044
0045
0046
0047
0048
0049
0050
0051
0052
0053
0054
0055
0056
0057
0058
0059
0060
0061
0062
0063
0064
0065
0066
0067
0068
0069
Instruction
STA
CON
LDA
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
CMP
CON
AND
LDA
CON
STA
CON
LDA
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
CMP
CON
AND
LDA
CON
STA
CON
LDA
CON
STA
LD
@LDA
CON
@STA
Operand
DM0003
$0000
DM0002
2002
DM0002
$0000
2010
DM0001
DM0002
$0000
DM0001
2002
DM0001
$0000
2010
DM0000
DM0001
$0000
DM0000
0002
$0000
DM0004
3-145
12
CMP / @CMP
RES LDB
CMP: Compare
FUN 0
@CMP: Compare
#,$ FUN
RES LDB
nnnn
CMP
nnnn
CMP
Compares contents of internal register with

value specified by operand.
CMP instruction compares the contents of the internal register with the value specified by the operand, and turns ON/OFF the special utility relays (2009, 2010, 2011)
according to the result of comparison.
2009
2010
2011
(Internal register) < (Operand)
ON
OFF
OFF
(Internal register) = (Operand)
OFF
ON
OFF
(Internal register) > (Operand)
OFF
OFF
ON
Comparing the current value of the counter and CMP value

0001
2002
2002
C001
LDA
C001
LDA
#01000
CMP
#02000
CMP
2009
#09999
C001
0003
0500
2010
0501
2011
0502
2009
0503
1) (<)
2) (=)
3) (>)
4) ()
1) Output relay 0500 turns ON when the counter value is smaller than "1000" (C001
< #01000).
2) Output relay 0501 turns ON when the counter value is equal to "1000" (C001 =
#01000).
3) Output relay 0502 turns ON when the counter value is greater than "1000" (C001
> #01000).
4) Output relay 0503 turns ON when the counter value is equal to or greater than
"2000" (C001 #02000).
Coding
3-146
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
0000
LDB
0001
0001
001 #099999 0003
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
0012
OUT
0501
0013
MPP
0002
LD
2002
0014
AND
2011
0003
LDA
C001
0015
OUT
0502
0004
CON
0016
LD
2002
0005
CMP
0017
LDA
C001
0006
CON
0018
CON
0007
MPS
0019
CMP
0008
AND
2009
0020
CON
0009
OUT
0500
0010
MRD
0011
AND
#01000
2010
#02000
0021
ANB
2009
0022
OUT
0503
CMP / @CMP
Operands
Visual KV
KV-300
KV-10/16
KV-24/40/80

TM00 to TM31
TM00 to TM31
TM00 to TM31
TM00 to TM31
#00000 to #65535 #00000 to #65535 #00000 to #65535 #00000 to #65535
$0000 to $FFFF
$0000 to $FFFF
$0000 to $FFFF
$0000 to $FFFF
#TM00 to #TM29
#TM00 to #TM29
#TM00 to #TM29
#TM00 to #TM29
Key operation
FUN
@
#,$
FUN
RES
LDB
ENT
R-SRCH
Operand
ENT
R-SRCH
Arithmetic flag
2009 Turns ON when the result of the CMP operation is negative. Turns OFF at
other times.
2010 Turns ON when the result of the CMP operation is "0". Turns OFF at other
times.
2011 Turns ON when the result of the CMP operation is positive. Turns OFF at
other times.
2012 The DM or relay indirectly addressed with #TM is out of range.
12
Description
As shown in the above example, the CMP instruction is used by connecting the
special utility relay (2009 to 2011) immediately after the instruction.
The operation of the CMP instruction varies depending on the contents of the
internal register.
Note: Special utility relays 2009 to 2011 are used as arithmetic flags. The function
varies depending on the execution of other arithmetic instructions.
Tips
An operand is compared with the internal register using the following program.
DM0000 #00999
LDA
CMP
2009
When the internal register is assumed as "a" and the operand is "b" such as , the
statuses of the special utility relays are as follows:
a
LDA
2009
b
CMP
a < b,
2011
a b,
2010
a = b,
2009
a b,
2011
a>b
3-147
CMP / @CMP
Application of CMP instruction

Multi-level counter
Coding
0001
2002
C000
LDA
#00999
CMP
2011
#01999
CMP
2011
0500
#02999
CMP
2011
0500
#09999
C000
0000
0500
Line No.
0000
0001
0501
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0502
0501
Instruction
Operand
LDB
0001
C
000 #099999
0000
LD
2002
LDA
C000
CON
MPS
CMP
#00999
CON
ANB
2011
OUT
0500
MRD
CMP
#01999
CON
ANB
2011
ANB
0500
OUT
0501
MPP
CMP
#02999
CON
ANB
2011
ANB
0500
ANB
0501
OUT
0502
Description
The following outputs are provided according to the current value of the counter.
(Current value)
(Output)
0000 to 0999
0500 turns ON.
1000 to 1999
0501 turns ON.
2000 to 2999
0502 turns ON.
When comparing values with no specific range
Turns ON 0500 when the DM0000 value is smaller than the CMP value.
Turns ON 0501 when the DM0000 value is equal to the CMP value.
Turns ON 0502 when the DM0000 value is greater than the CMP value.
2002 DM0000 #01000
LDA
CMP
2009
0500
DM0000<#01000
2010
0501
DM0000=#01000
2011
0502
DM0000>#01000
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
3-148
Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
CMP
MPS
AND
OUT
Operand
2002
DM0000
#01000
2009
0500
Line No.
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
Instruction
MRD
AND
OUT
MPP
AND
OUT
Operand
2010
0501
2011
0502
CMP / @CMP
Setting the upper/lower limit
Turns ON 0500 when the C001 value is 1000 or less.
Turns ON 0501 when the C001 value is 2000 or more.
0001
2002
2002
C001
LDA
#01000
CMP
2011
C001
LDA
#02000
CMP
2009
#09999
C001
0000
0500
C001#01000
0501
C001#02000
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
Instruction
Operand
LDB
0001
C
001 #09999 0000
LD
2002
LDA
C001
CON
CMP
#01000
CON
ANB
2011
Line No.
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
Instruction
OUT
LD
LDA
CON
CMP
CON
ANB
OUT
Operand
0500
2002
C001
#02000
2009
0501
Changing the CMP setting value

Compares the current value of counter C000 with the CMP setting value. The setting
value of the CMP instruction is specified with the digital trimmer (TMIN0). The
following example changes the setting value to the range from "0" through "100".
The upper limit of the digital trimmer is set to "100".
0500 turns ON when the current value of C000 is smaller than the CMP setting
value.
0501 turns ON when the current value of C000 is equal to or greater than the CMP
setting value.
2002
0
DM0000
STA Sets range of TMIN from 0 to 100.
TMIN
0001
#09999
C000
00000
2009 0500
2002
C000 DM0000
LDA
CMP
2009
0501
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
Instruction
LD
TMIN
CON
ADD
CON
MUL
CON
DIV
CON
STA
LDB
Operand
2002
0
#00001
#00004
#00010
DM0000
0001
Line No.
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
Instruction
Operand
C
000 #09999 0000
LD
02002
LDA
C000
CON
CMP
DM0000
MPS
AND
2009
OUT
0500
MPP
ANB
2009
OUT
0501
3-149
12
ADD / @ADD / SUB / @SUB / MUL / @MUL / DIV / @DIV
RES RES
ADD: Add
FUN 0
@
@ADD: Add
#,$ FUN
RES RES
LDB ORB
SUB: Subtract
FUN 4
@
@SUB: Subtract
#,$ FUN
LDB ORB
ANL AND
MUL: Multiply
FUN 2
@
@MUL: Multiply
#,$ FUN
ANL AND
SET SET
DIV: Divide
FUN 1
@
@DIV: Divide
#,$ FUN
SET SET
nnnn
ADD
Adds value specified by operand to contents of

internal register, and inputs result back to same
internal register.
nnnn
ADD
:
:
nnnn
SUB
nnnn
SUB
nnnn
MUL
nnnn
MUL
nnnn
DIV
nnnn
DIV
Subtracts value specified by operand from

contents of internal register, and inputs results
Multiplies contents of internal register by value
specified by operand, and inputs result back to
same register.
Divides contents of internal register by value
specified by operand, and inputs result back to
same register.
MUL
DIV
Decimal
(#XXXXX)
Hexadecimal
($XXXX)
DM0000 to DM1999
TM00 to TM31
#TM00 to #TM29
Arithmetic operation
Internal register
SUB
Data memories
Operand
Internal register
ADD
Constants
ADD, SUB, MUL, and DIV allow arithmetic instructions between the contents of
internal register and the value specified by the operand.
Result
Note: Arithmetic instructions use binary numbers (BIN). Therefore, the contents of
the internal register used for the arithmetic instruction must be BIN data. Use the
TBIN instruction to convert BCD data into BIN data.
Operands
Visual KV
KV-300
KV-10/16
KV-24/40/80

TM00 to TM31
TM00 to TM31
TM00 to TM31
TM00 to TM31
#00000 to #65535 #00000 to #65535 #00000 to #65535 #00000 to #65535
$0000 to $FFFF
$0000 to $FFFF
$0000 to $FFFF
$0000 to $FFFF
#TM00 to #TM29
#TM00 to #TM29
#TM00 to #TM29
#TM00 to #TM29
Key operation
FUN
@
#,$
FUN
FUN
#,$
FUN
FUN
#,$
FUN
FUN
#,$
3-150
FUN
RES
LDB
ANL
SET
RES
ORB
AND
SET
ENT
R-SRCH
ENT
R-SRCH
ENT
R-SRCH
ENT
R-SRCH
Operand
ENT
Operand
ENT
Operand
ENT
Operand
ENT
R-SRCH
R-SRCH
R-SRCH
R-SRCH
ADD / @ADD
ADD (Addition)
DM0000 #00100 DM0001
LDA
ADD
STA
2002
Coding
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
0000
LD
2002
0001
LDA
DM0000
0002
CON
0003
ADD
0004
CON
0005
STA
#00100
DM0001
Description
The ADD instruction adds the operand value to the contents of the internal
register and inputs the result back to the internal register.
In the above example, "#00100" is added to the contents of DM0000 and the
result is stored in DM0001.
When the contents of DM0000 is "#00100", for example, "#00200" is stored in
DM0001.
DM0000 (#00100) + #00100 DM0001(#00200)
Note 1: An overflow occurs when the operation result exceeds 16 bits ($FFFF,
#65535). In such a case, only the data of the low-order 16 bits is input back to the
internal register. For example, when the contents of the internal register is "$FFFF"
and the operand is "$0001", the result will overflow.
Note 2: When an overflow occurs, special utility relay 2009 turns ON.
Example:
Internal register
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 = $FFFF
Operand + 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 = $0002
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 = $0001
Overflow 1
Special
utility relay
2009
Input back internal register
Result
Tips
Solution when operation result overflows 16 bits
2002
DM0000 DM0001
LDA
ADD
2009
DM0002 #00000 DM0003

STA
LDA
STA
2009
DM0002 #00001 DM0003

STA
LDA
STA
DM0000 + DM0001 = DM0003 (High-order 16 bits), DM0002 (Low-order 16 bits)

DM0000 and DM0001 must be 16 bits or less.
Arithmetic flag
2009
2010
2011
2012
Turns ON when the result of an ADD operation exceeds the range of 16 bits
($FFFF). Turns OFF at other times.
Turns ON when the contents of the internal register is "0" after an ADD
operation. Turns OFF at other times.
No change
The DM or relay indirectly addressed with #TM is out of range.
3-151
12
ADD / @ADD
Application of ADD instruction

Total count
Writes the total count of counters C001 to C003 into DM0100. The total count must
be within #65535.
0000
#09999 C001
LDA
C001
0001
0000
#09999 C002
LDA
C002
0002
0000
#09999 C003
LDA
C003
0003
2002 DM0001 DM0002 DM0003
LDA
ADD
ADD
DM0001
STA
Writes C001 current value into DM0001.
DM0002
STA
DM0003
STA
DM0100
STA
Writes total count (DM0001 + DM0002 +

DM0003) into DM100.
Coding
3-152
Line No.
Instruction
0000
LDB
0001
0001
010 #099999 0000
0002
CON
0003
LDA
0004
CON
Operand
C001
0005
STA
0006
LDB
DM0001
0000
0007
002 #099999 0002
0008
CON
0009
LDA
0010
CON
C002
0011
STA
DM0002
0012
LDB
0000
0013
003 #099999 0003
0014
CON
0015
LDA
0016
CON
0017
STA
0018
LD
2002
0019
LDA
DM0001
0020
CON
0021
ADD
0022
CON
0023
ADD
0024
CON
0025
STA
C003
DM0003
DM0002
DM0003
DM0100
SUB / @SUB
SUB (Subtraction)
2002
DM0000 #00100 DM0001

LDA
SUB
STA
Coding
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
0000
LD
2002
0001
LDA
DM0000
0002
CON
0003
SUB
0004
CON
0005
STA
#00100
DM0001
Description
The SUB instruction subtracts the operand value from the contents of the internal
register and inputs the result back into the internal register.
In the above example, "#00100" is subtracted from the contents of DM0000 and
the result is stored in DM0001.
DM0001.
DM0000 (#00150) #00100 DM0001 (#00050)
Note 1: When the operation result is a negative value (-), the 2's complement value
is also stored in the internal register.
Special utility relay 2009 turns ON.
Internal register
Operand -
Underflow 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 = $0001
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 = $FFFF
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 = $0002
2's complement is stored.
2009
Note 2: To convert the complement into an antilogarithm, add the following operation:
Inverted bit of complement + 1 = Antilogarithm
Tips
Solution when operation result is a negative value
2002
DM0000 DM0001
LDA
SUB
2009
2009
COM
DM0000 - DM0001 =
#0001
ADD
DM0002
STA
(Stores positive value)
DM0003
STA
(Stores negative value)
Positive value
DM0002
Negative value
DM0003
Absolute value
is stored.
When DM0000 is "#10" and DM0001 is "#30", "#20" is stored in DM0003.
Arithmetic flag
2009
2010
2011
2012
Turns ON when the result of a SUB operation is negative. Turns OFF at

other times.
Turns ON when the contents of the internal register is "0" after a SUB
operation. Turns OFF at other times.
Turns ON when the result of a SUB operation is positive. Turns OFF at other
times.
3-153
12
SUB / @SUB
Application of SUB instruction

Comparing absolute values
Compares the DM0000 value to the DM0001 value and turns ON 0500 when the
difference between the two absolute values is greater than 5.
2002
DM0000 DM0001
LDA
SUB
2009
#0005
CMP
2009
1000
2009
DM0001 DM0000 #00005

CMP
LDA
SUB
2009
1001
0500
1000
1001
Coding
3-154
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
0000
LD
2002
0001
LDA
DM0000
0002
CON
0003
SUB
0004
MPS
DM0001
0005
ANB
2009
0006
CMP
#00005
0007
CON
0008
ANB
2009
0009
OUT
1000
0010
MPP
0011
AND
2009
0012
LDA
DM0001
0013
CON
0014
SUB
0015
CON
0016
CMP
0017
CON
DM0000
#00005
0018
ANB
2009
0019
OUT
1001
0020
LD
1000
0021
OR
1001
0022
OUT
0500
MUL / @MUL
MUL (Multiplication)
DM0000 #00100 DM0001
LDA
MUL
STA
2002
Coding
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
0000
LD
2002
0001
LDA
DM0000
0002
CON
0003
MUL
0004
CON
0005
STA
#00100
DM0001
Description
The MUL instruction multiplies the contents of the internal register by the operand value and inputs the result back to the internal register.
In the above example, the contents of DM0000 are multiplied by "#00100" and
the result is stored in DM0001.
DM0001.
DM0000 (#00200) x #00100DM0001 (#20000)
Note 1: An overflow occurs when the operation result exceeds 16 bits (#65535). In
such a case, only the data of the low-order 16 bits are stored in the internal register,
and the overflow data of the high-order 16 bits is stored in TM00. (The data of the
high-order 16 bits is always stored in TM00.)
Note 2: When an overflow occurs, special utility relay 2009 turns ON.
Internal register F F F F
Operand
0 0 0 2
Hexadecimal number
0 0 0 1 F F F F
(TM00) (Internal register)
Tips
Solution when operation result overflows 16 bits
2002
DM0000 DM0001 DM0002

LDA
MUL
STA
TM00
LDA
DM0003
STA
DM0000 x DM0001 = DM0003 (High-order 16 bits) DM0002 (Low-order 16 bits)

The operation result must be 32 bits or less.
Arithmetic flag
2009
2010
2011
2012
Turns ON when the result of a MUL operation exceeds 16 bits. Turns OFF at
other times.
Turns ON when all 32 bits are "0" after a MUL operation. Turns OFF at other
times.
No change
3-155
12
MUL / @MUL / DIV / @DIV
Application of MUL instruction

Multiplying the counter current value by the DM value
Multiplies the counter current value by the DM0000 value and writes the high-order
16 bits of the product into DM0101 and low-order 16 bits of the product into
DM0100.
0001
C001
LDA
2002
DM0000 DM0100
MUL
STA
TM00
LDA
#09999
C001
0000
DM0101
STA
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
Instruction
LDB
C
LD
LDA
CON
MUL
CON
STA
CON
LDA
CON
STA
Operand
0001
001 #099999 0000
2002
C001
DM0000
DM0100
TM00
DM0101
DIV (Division)
DM0001
LDA
2002
TM00
STA
High-order
DM0000 #00100 DM0002

LDA
DIV
STA
Low-order
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
3-156
Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
STA
CON
LDA
CON
DIV
CON
STA
CON
LDA
CON
STA
CON
LDA
CON
STA
Operand
2002
DM0001
TM00
DM0000
#00100
DM0002
TM00
DM0003
TM01
DM0004
Low-order
TM00
LDA
DM0003
STA
High-order
TM01
LDA
DM0004
STA
Remainder
DIV / @DIV
Arithmetic flag
2009
2010
2011
2012
No change
Turns ON when all 32 bits are "0" after a DIV operation. Turns OFF at other
times.
No change
Turns ON when the divisor of a DIV operation is "0" or the DM or relay
indirectly addressed with #TM is out of range.
The 32-bit value (binary) consisting of the higher 16 bits from TM00 and lower 16
bits from the internal register is divided by the value specified by the operand.
The higher 16 bits of the result is input back to TM00 and lower 16 bits to the
same internal register. The remainder is stored in TM01.
Description
TM00
Internal register
High-order 16 bits
Low-order 16 bits
TM00
Internal register
High-order 16 bits
Low-order 16 bits
Operand
TM01
Remainder (16 bits)
Quotient
Example
DM0001
12
#00100
DM0000
High-order 16 bits Low-order 16 bits
DM0003
DM0002
DM0004
Remainder (16 bits)
High-order 16 bits Low-order 16 bits

Quotient
Note 1: When data of 16 bits or less is divided by the operand value, the contents of
TM00 must be cleared (set to "#00000") before the DIV operation.
Note 2: If the contents of TM00 are not cleared, the data stored in TM00 is also
used for the operation.
Tips
Solution when data of 16 bits or less is divided
02002
#00000
LDA
TM00
STA
DM0000 DM0001 DM0002

LDA
DIV
STA
TM01
LDA
DM0003
STA
TM00 DM0000 = TM00 DM0002 DM0003

High-order
16 bits
Low-order
16 bits
High-order
16 bits
Low-order
16 bits
Remainder
Quotient
3-157
DIV / @DIV
Application of DIV instruction

Total count average
Outputs the average of 3 counter values in 4-digit BCD.
(C001 + C002 + C003) 3 BCD output value
The BCD value is output to 500 to 515.
0000
0000
0000
2002
C001
#09999
LDA
C001
0001
C002
#09999
LDA
C002
0002
C003
#09999
LDA
C003
0003
DM0001 DM0002
LDA
ADD
2002
2002
#00003
DIV
DM0001
STA
Writes the C001 current value into DM0001.
DM0002
STA
DM0003
STA
DM0003
ADD
#00000
LDA
TM00
STA
TBCD
0500
STA
(DM0001+DM0002+DM0003)
3 Output to 0500 to 0515 in 4-digit BCD.
Coding
3-158
Line No.
Instruction
0000
LDB
0000
0001
001 #099999 0001
0002
CON
0003
LDA
0004
CON
Operand
C001
0005
STA
DM0001
0006
LDB
0000
0007
002 #099999 0002
0008
CON
0009
LDA
0010
CON
0011
STA
0012
LDB
0000
0013
003 #099999 0003
0014
CON
C002
DM0002
0015
LDA
0016
CON
C003
0017
STA
0018
LD
2002
0019
LDA
DM0001
0020
CON
0021
ADD
0022
CON
0023
ADD
DM0003
DM0002
DM0003
0024
LD
2002
0025
DIV
#0003
0026
CON
0027
TBCD
0028
CON
0029
STA
500
ANDA / @ANDA
ANDA:
AND A
@ANDA: (Logical product)
RES SET
FUN 0
#,$ FUN
RES SET
nnnn
ANDA
nnnn
ANDA
ANDs contents of internal register and

value specified by operand for each of
16 bits, and inputs result back to same
register.
Example
0000
DM0000
LDA
$00FF
ANDA
DM0001
STA
(DM0000) ^ ($00FF) = (DM0001)

Logical product
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
ANDA
CON
STA
Operand
0000
DM0000
$00FF
DM0001
Description
The contents of DM0000 are transferred to the internal register when input relay
0000 is ON.
The contents of the internal register (DM0000) and the value specified by the
operand ($00FF) are ANDed for each bit and the result (logical product) is input
back to the same register.
When the operation result is "0", special utility relay 2010 turns ON.
The contents of the internal register are transferred to DM0001.
The following shows the case when DM0000 is "$F0F0".
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
Contents of DM0000
are transferred to the
internal register.
DM0000 ($F0F0)
DM0000
LDA
1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
Internal
($F0F0)
register
AND
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
$00FF
ANDA
These values are ANDed for

each bit to obtain logical product.
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
The result is transferred

to DM0001.
Operand ($F0F0)
Internal ($F0F0)
register
AND (Logical product)

truth table
(Result)
Internal
register
1
1
0
0
Operand
Internal
register
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
Only when both bits of the

internal register and the
operand are "1", will the logical
product be "1".
DM0001
STA
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
DM0001 ($00F0)
Operands
Visual KV
KV-300
KV-10/16
KV-24/40/80
0000 to 17915
0000 to 17915
0000 to 2915
0000 to 6915
TM00 to TM31
TM00 to TM31
TM00 to TM31
TM00 to TM31
#00000 to #65535 #00000 to #65535 #00000 to #65535 #00000 to #65535
$0000 to $FFFF
$0000 to $FFFF
$0000 to $FFFF
$0000 to $FFFF
#TM00 to #TM29
#TM00 to #TM29
#TM00 to #TM29
#TM00 to #TM29
Key operation
FUN
@
#,$
FUN
RES
SET
ENT
R-SRCH
Operand
ENT
R-SRCH
3-159
12
ANDA / @ANDA
Arithmetic flag
2009
2010
2011
2012
No change
Turns ON when the internal register is "0" after an ANDA operation.
Turns OFF at other times.
No change
Tips
Solution when connecting one-digit data of a BCD digital switch to inputs 0100
to 0103, while ignoring other inputs
Only one-digit data of the BCD digital switch is transferred as the setting value of the
fetching counter (C004).
Other inputs (0104 to 0115) are ignored.
#00300
C004
0005
C004
STA
0004
2002
0100
LDA
$000F
ANDA
TBIN
Application of ANDA instruction

Fetch input data separately
Sets the low-order 2 digits of the BCD digital switch (7000 to 7007) to counter C000
and the high-order 2 digits (7008 to 7015) to timer T001.
2
2002
2002
7000
LDA
$00FF
ANDA
TBIN
C000
STA
7000
LDA
$FF00
ANDA
#08
SRA
TBIN
T001
STA
#09999
C000
0000
#09999
T001
0001
0001
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
3-160
Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
ANDA
CON
TBIN
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
ANDA
CON
SRA
CON
TBIN
CON
STA
LDB
C
LDB
T
Operand
2002
7000
$00FF
C000
2002
7000
$FF00
#08
T001
0001
000 #09999 0000
0001
001 #09999
Converts data of 7000 to 7007 to BIN and

writes it into C000.
Shifts data to right by 8 bits, converts it to BIN,
and writes it into T001.
Sets C000.
Sets T001.
ORA / @ORA
ORL SET
FUN 3
ORA:
Or A
@ORA: (Logical sum)
Example
#,$ FUN
0000
DM0000
LDA
ORL SET
$00FF
ORA
nnnn
ORA
nnnn
ORA
ORs contents of internal register and value

specified by operand for each of 16 bits,
and inputs result back to same register.
DM0001
STA
(DM0000) U ($00FF) = (DM0001)

Logical sum
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
ORA
CON
STA
Operand
0000
DM0000
$00FF
DM0001
Description
The contents of DM0000 are transferred to the internal register when input relay
0000 is ON.
operand ($00FF) are ORed for each bit and the result (logical sum) is input back
to the same register.
The contents of the internal register are transferred to DM0001.
1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
Contents of DM0000 are
transferred to the internal
register.
DM000 ($F0F0)
DM0000
LDA
1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
Internal
($F0F0)
register
OR
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
$00FF
ORA
These values are ORed for

each bit to obtain logical sum.
1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
The result is transferred
to DM0001.
Operand ($00FF)
Internal
($F0FF)
register
OR (Logical sum)
truth table
Internal
register
1
1
0
0
Operand
1
0
1
0
(Result)
Internal
register
1
1
1
0
Only when both bits of the

operand are "0", will the logical
sum be "0".
DM0001
STA
1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Operands
Visual KV
KV-300
KV-10/16
KV-24/40/80
0000 to 17915
0000 to 0009
0000 to 2915
0000 to 6915
DM0000 to DM1999
0500 to 17915
DM0000 to DM0999 DM0000 to DM1999
TM00 to TM31
DM0000 to DM9999
TM00 to TM31
TM00 to TM31
#00000 to #65535
TM00 to TM31
#00000 to #65535 #00000 to #65535
$0000 to $FFFF
#00000 to #65535
$0000 to $FFFF
$0000 to $FFFF
#TM00 to #TM29
$0000 to $FFFF
#TM00 to #TM29
#TM00 to #TM29
#TM00 to #TM29
Key operation
FUN
@
#,$
FUN
ORL
SET
ENT
R-SRCH
Operand
ENT
R-SRCH
3-161
12
ORA / @ORA
Arithmetic flag
2009
2010
2011
2012
No change
Turns ON when the internal register is "0" after an ORA operation. Turns
OFF at other times.
No change
Tips
Solution when connecting two-digit data of a BCD digital switch (inputs 0100
to 0103 for the first digit and 0200 to 0203 for the second digit) separately
Fetches the two-digit data of the BCD digital switch, which are separated into the
first digit (0100 to 0103) and the second digit (0200 to 0203), and transfers the
values as the setting value of a counter (C004).
0004
#00300
C004
0005
2002
0100
LDA
$000F
ANDA
DM0000
STA
0200
LDA
$000F
ANDA
#04
SLA
DM0000
ORA
TBIN
C004
STA
2
Application of ORA instruction
Output of BCD 2-digit data
Converts the current value of counter C000 to BCD and sends 2 digits of BCD data
to output relays 0500 to 0507.
However, retain ON/OFF of 0508 to 0515 which are loaded.
0000
2002
0500
LDA
2002
2002
#00099
C000
0001
$FF00 DM0000
ANDA
STA
C000
LDA
TBCD
DM0000
ORA
0500
STA
$00FF
ANDA
Sets C000.
Writes data of 0008 to 0015 into DM0000.

Converts the current value of C000 to BCD and retains
the low-order 2 digits of BCD in the internal register.
ORs the data in the internal register and the DM0000
data and sends the ORed data to 0500 to 0515.
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
3-162
Instruction
Operand
LDB
0000
C
001 #00099 0001
Line No.
0009
0010
Instruction
LDA
CON
Operand
C000
0002
LD
2002
0011
TBCD
0003
LDA
0500
0012
CON
0013
ANDA
$00FF
$FF00
0014
LD
2002
DM0000
0004
CON
0005
ANDA
0006
CON
0015
ORA
0007
STA
DM0000
0016
CON
0008
LD
2002
0017
STA
0500
ORA / @ORA
Separate input of 2-digit BCD
Fetches only 2 digits of the BCD digital switch (0000 to 0003 for the 1st digit, 0100
to 0103 for the 2nd digit) and sets it as the counter value.
0000
0000
LDA
#00099
C000
0001
$000F DM0000
STA
ANDA
2002
0100
LDA
$000F
ANDA
2002
#04
SLA
DM0000
ORA
2002
Sets C001.

Writes data of 8000 to 8003 into internal register.
TBIN
C001
STA
ORs content of internal register which is shifted

to left by four bits and data of 7000 to 7003,
converts ORed data into BIN, and write it into
C001.
Coding
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
0000
LDB
0001
0001
001 #00099 0001
0002
LD
2002
0003
LDA
0000
0004
CON
0005
ANDA
0006
CON
0007
STA
$000F
0008
LD
2002
0009
LDA
0100
0010
CON
0011
ANDA
$000F
0012
LD
2002
0013
SLA
#04
0014
CON
0015
ORA
0016
CON
0017
TBIN
0018
CON
0019
STA
12
DM0000
DM0000
C001
3-163
EORA / @EORA
EORA: Exclusive Or A
@EORA: (Exclusive
logical sum)
SET ANB
FUN 1
@
#,$ FUN
SET ANB
nnnn
EORA
nnnn
EORA
EXCLUSIVE ORs contents of internal

register and operand for each of 16 bits,
and inputs result back to same register.
Example
0000
DM0000
LDA
$00FF
EORA
DM0001
STA
(DM0000) U ($00FF) = (DM0001)
Exclusive
logical sum
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
EORA
CON
STA
Operand
0000
DM0000
$00FF
DM0001
Description
The contents of DM0000 is transferred to the internal register when input relay
0000 is ON.
operand ($00FF) are EORed (exclusive OR) for each bit and the result is input
back to the same register.
The contents of the internal register is transferred to DM0001.
1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 DM0000 ($F0F0)
Contents of DM0000 are

transferred to the internal
register.
DM0000
LDA
Internal
1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 register ($F0F0)
EORA
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Operand ($00FF)
$00FF
EORA
These values are EORed for each

bit to obtain exclusive OR value.
Internal
1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 register ($F00F)
The result is transferred to DM0001.
EOR (Exclusive OR)

truth table
Internal
register
1
1
0
0
Operand
1
0
1
0
Only when the bits of the

operand have different values,
will the exclusive logical sum
be "1".
DM0001
STA
1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
DM0000 ($F00F)
Operands
Visual KV
KV-300
KV-10/16
KV-24/40/80
0000 to 17915
00000 to 0009
0000 to 2915
0000 to 6915
DM0000 to DM1999
0500 to 17915
DM0000 to DM0999 DM0000 to DM1999
TM00 to TM31
DM0000 to DM9999
TM00 to TM31
TM00 to TM31
#00000 to #65535
TM00 to TM31
#00000 to #65535 #00000 to #65535
$0000 to $FFFF
#00000 to #65535
$0000 to $FFFF
$0000 to $FFFF
#TM00 to #TM29
$0000 to $FFFF
#TM00 to #TM29
#TM00 to #TM29
#TM00 to #TM29
Key operation
FUN
@
#,$
3-164
FUN
SET
ANB
ENT
R-SRCH
Operand
ENT
R-SRCH
(Result)
Internal
register
0
1
1
0
EORA / @EORA
Arithmetic flag
2009 No change
2010 Turns ON when the internal register is "0" after an EORA operation. Turns
OFF at other times.
2011 No change
2012 The DM or relay indirectly addressed with #TM is out of range.
Tips
Turning output 0500 ON when inputs 0000 through 0015 have the same value as a
constant ($0F0F)
When the values match, special internal relay 2010 turns ON and output relay 0500
turns ON.
In this example, the constant is "$0F0F", or "0000 1111 0000 1111". Therefore,
output relay 0500 turns ON when input relays 0000 through 0003 and 0008 through
0011 are ON.
0000
LDA
2002
$0F0F
EORA
2010
0500
Application of EORA instruction

Judgment of matching data
Turns ON 0500 when the ON/OFF statuses of input relays 0100 to 0107 match the
DM0000 setting value.
2008
$00AA
LDA
DM0000
STA
2002
0100
LDA
$00FF
ANDA
DM0000
EORA
2010
0500
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
Operand
2008
$00AA
DM0000
2002
0100
Line No.
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
Instruction
ANDA
CON
EORA
CON
AND
OUT
Operand
$00FF
DM0000
2010
0500
$BBBB 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0100 to 0115

ANDA
$00FF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Operand
$00BB 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 Internal register

EORA
$00AA 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 DM0000
$0011
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 Internal register
When 2010 is ON, the two values match.

When 2010 is OFF, the two values do not match.
2010 is OFF. When the

value of internal register is 0000, 2010 turns ON.
Judges match between the operand and the
data of 0100 to 0107.
3-165
12
SRA / @SRA / SLA / @SLA

LDB SET
FUN 4
SRA: Shift Right A

@SRA: Shift Right A
SLA: Shift Left A
@SLA: Shift Left A
#,$ FUN
LDB SET
#dd
SRA
#dd
SRA
#dd
SLA
LDB RES
:
LDB RES :
FUN 4
0
FUN 4
@
#,$
Moves contents of internal register

serially right by value specified by operand.
Moves contents of internal register

serially left by value specified by operand.
#dd
SLA
Example
0000
DM0000
LDA
#05
SRA
DM0001
STA
0001
DM0010
LDA
#10
SLA
DM0011
STA
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
SRA
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
SLA
CON
STA
Operand
0000
DM0000
#05
DM0001
0001
DM0010
#10
DM0011
Operands
#01 to #16
Key operation
FUN
@
#,$
#,$
FUN
FUN
LDB
LDB
FUN
SET
RES
ENT
R-SRCH
ENT
R-SRCH
Operand
ENT
Operand
ENT
R-SRCH
R-SRCH
Arithmetic flag
2009
2010
2011
2012
3-166
Turns ON when "1" enters 2009 after an SRA/SLA operation. Turns OFF at
other times.
Turns ON when the internal register is "0" after an SRA/SLA operation.
No change
No change

Description
Operations using the SRA instruction
When input relay 0000 is ON, the contents of DM0000 are transferred to the internal
register and shifted serially right by the operand value (5). The operation result is
written into DM0001. The contents of D0 are shifted to carry bit 2009.
In the above example, the contents shift to the right by the operand value (5) every
scan time while input relay 0000 is ON.
Use @SRA, a differentiation type instruction, to execute the instruction only once
when input relay 0000 turns ON.
Carry
2009
1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0
Carry
2009
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1
Operation using the SLA instruction

register and shifted serially left by the operand value (10). The operation result is
written into DM0011. The contents of D15 are shifted to carry bit 2009.
In the above example, the contents shift to the left by the operand value (10) every
scan time while input relay 0001 is ON.
Use @SLA, a differentiation type instruction, to execute the instruction only once
Carry
2009
1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0
Carry
2009
1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Note: Special utility relay 2009 may turn ON in accordance with the operation
results; however, it changes immediately when another operation is executed.
3-167
12

Application of SRA/SLA instructions

Fetching four-digit data of the BCD digital switch (inputs 0004 through 0011
for low-order 2 digits and 0100 through 0107 for high-order 2 digits) to
transfer them as a counter setting value
2002
0000
LDA
$0FF0
ANDA
#04
SRA
DM0000
STA
0100
LDA
$00FF
ANDA
#08
SLA
DM0000
ORA
C004
STA
#09999
C004
0000
0001
Separate input of BCD

Fetches only 2 digits of the BCD digital switch (0112 to 0115 for the 1st digit, 0000 to
0003 for the 2nd digit) and sets it as the counter value.
0001
0100
LDA
#00099
C001
0000
$F000
ANDA
2002
#12
SRA
DM0000
STA
2002
0000
LDA
$000F
ANDA
#04
SLA
DM0000
ORA
TBIN
C001
STA
2002
2002
2002
Sets C001.
Sends the data of 0112 to 0115 to internal register.

Shifts the value of internal register to right by 12 bits and writes it
into DM0000.
Sends the data of 0000 to 0003 to internal register.
Shifts the data of internal register to left by 4 bits, ORs the internal
register data and the data of DM0000, and sends the ORed data to
the internal register.
Converts the data of internal register to BIN data and writes it into
C001.
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
3-168
Instruction
LD
C
LD
LDA
CON
ANDA
LD
SRA
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
ANDA
LD
SLA
CON
ORA
LD
TBIN
CON
STA
Operand
0001
001 #00099 0000
2002
0100
$F000
2002
#12
DM0000
2002
0000
$000F
2002
#04
DM0000
2002
C001
RRA / @RRA / RLA / @RLA

ORL LD
RRA: Rotate Right A
FUN 3
@
@RRA: Rotate Right A
#,$ FUN
ORL LD
ORL ANB
RLA: Rotate Left A
FUN 3
@
@RLA: Rotate Left A
#,$ FUN
ORL ANB
#dd
RRA
#dd
RRA
#dd
RLA
#dd
RLA
Rotates contents of internal register and

carry (2009) clockwise by operand value.
Rotates contents of internal register and
carry (2009) counterclockwise by operand
value.
Example
0000
DM0000
LDA
#01
RRA
DM0001
STA
0001
DM0010
LDA
#04
RLA
DM0011
STA
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
RRA
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
RLA
CON
STA
Operand
0000
DM0000
#01
DM0001
0001
DM0010
12
#04
DM0011
Operands
#01 to #16
Key operation
FUN
@
#,$
FUN
FUN
#,$
FUN
ORL
ORL
LD
ANB
ENT
R-SRCH
ENT
R-SRCH
Operand
ENT
Operand
ENT
R-SRCH
R-SRCH
Arithmetic flag
2009
Turns ON when "1" enters 2009 after an RRA/RLA operation. Turns

OFF at other times.
2010
Turns ON when the internal register is "0" after an RRA/RLA operation.
Description
Operation when using the RRA instruction
register. The contents of the internal register and carry (2009) are rotated clockwise
by the operand value.
In the above example, the contents are rotated clockwise every scan time while
input relay 0000 is ON.
3-169

Use @RRA, a differentiation type instruction, to execute the instruction only once
Carry
2009
1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0
Carry
2009
0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0
Operation using the RLA instruction

register. The contents of the internal register and carry (2009) are rotated counterclockwise by the operand value.
In the example above, the contents are rotated counterclockwise every scan time
while input relay 0001 is ON.
Use @RLA, a differentiation type instruction, to execute the instruction only once
Carry
2009
1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0
Carry
2009
1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0
Note: Special utility relay 2009 may turn ON in accordance with the operation
results; however, it changes immediately when another operation is executed.
Application of RRA/RLA instructions

Error input count
Writes the number of error detection sensors, which are connected to input relays
(0000 to 0015) and turn ON, into DM0000.
2002
0000
LDA
FOR
#00016
2002
#01
RRA
2009
Writes the data of 0000 to 0015 into internal register.

Executes FOR-NEXT instruction 16 times.
TM10
INC
Shifts the data including carry (2009) to right, and

increments TM10 by 1 when 2009 is ON.
NEXT
2002
TM10
LDA
DM0000 #00000
LDA
STA
TM10
STA
Writes the TM10 data into DM0000, and then writes

#00000 to TM10.
Coding
3-170
Line No.
0000
0001
Instruction
LD
LDA
Operand
2002
0000
Line No.
0009
0010
Instruction
LD
LDA
0002
FOR
#00016
0011
CON
0003
LD
02002
0012
STA
0004
RRA
#01
0005
CON
0006
AND
0007
INC
0008
NEXT
0013
CON
0014
LDA
2009
0015
CON
TM10
0016
STA
Operand
2002
TM10
DM0000
#00000
TM10
COM / @COM
COM: Complement
@COM: (Bit inversion)
RES ANB
FUN 0
RES ANB
@
#,$ FUN 0
5
COM
COM
Inverts contents of each bit in internal

register.
Example
DM0000
LDA
0000
COM
DM0001
STA
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
Instruction
LD
@LDA
CON
@COM
CON
@STA
Operand
0000
DM0000
DM0001
Description
Each time input relay 0000 turns from OFF to ON, the contents of DM0000 are
transferred to the internal register. The COM instruction inverts the status of each
bit and transfers the result to DM0001.
Special utility relay 2010 turns ON when the result is "0".
The following shows the case when DM0000 is "$5F5F".
DM0000
0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 = $5F5F
COM instruction
Bit inversion
DM0001
1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 = $A0A0
Note:
0000
DM0000
LDA
COM
DM0001
STA
When an every-scan type COM instruction is used, the status of bits are inverted
every scan time while input relay 0000 is ON.
Use @COM, a differentiation type instruction, to execute the instruction only once
when input relay 0000 turns ON, as shown in the example.
Operands
Key operation
FUN
@
#,$
FUN
RES
ANB
ENT
ENT
R-SRCH
R-SRCH
Arithmetic flag
2009
2010
2011
2012
No change
Turns ON when the internal register is "0" after a COM operation. Turns
OFF at other times.
No change
No change
3-171
12
INC / @INC / DEC / @DEC

INC: Increment Memory

@INC: Increment Memory
DEC: Decrement Memory
nnnn
INC
SET OR
@
#,$ FUN 1
9
nnnn
INC
RES LD
nnnn
DEC
nnnn
DEC
FUN 0
@DEC: Decrement Memory

Example
SET OR
FUN 1
#,$ FUN
RES LD
Adds 1 to contents of data memory

Subtracts 1 from contents of data
memory specified by operand.
DM0000
INC
0000
DM0001
DEC
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
Instruction
LD
@INC
@DEC
Operand
0000
DM0000
DM0001
Description
Operation using the @INC instruction
Every time input relay 0000 turns ON, "1" is added to the contents of the data
memory specified by the operand. The result is then input back to the same data
memory. (In the above example, "1" is added to the contents of DM0000. DM0000 +
1 DM0000) When the data memory specified by the operand is "#65535", the
result of the addition is "#00000" so that special utility relay 2009 turns ON.
@ INC instruction
0 0
1 0
Contents of data memory specified by operand
0 0
0 1
1 is added.
0 0
1 1
Operation using the @DEC instruction

Every time input relay 0000 turns ON, "1" is subtracted from the contents of the data
memory specified by the operand. The result is then input back to the same data
memory. (In the above example, "1" is subtracted from the contents of DM0001.
DM0001 - 1 DM0001) When the data memory specified by the operand is
"#00001", the result of the subtraction is "#00000" so that special utility relay 2010
turns ON.
When the specified data memory is "00000", the result of the subtraction is "#65535
($FFFF)" so that special utility relay 2009 turns ON.
@ DEC instruction
0 0
1 1
0 0
0 1
1 is subtracted.
0 0
1 0
Operands
Visual KV
KV-300
KV-10/16
KV-24/40/80

TM00 to TM29
TM00 to TM29
TM00 to TM29
TM00 to TM29
3-172

Key operation
FUN
@
FUN
#,$
FUN
@
FUN
#,$
SET
OR
RES
LD
ENT
R-SRCH
ENT
R-SRCH
Operand
ENT
Operand
ENT
R-SRCH
R-SRCH
Arithmetic flag
2009
Turns ON when the result is "0" after an INC operation, or when the
result is "$FFFF (#65535)" after DEC operation. Turns OFF at other
times.
2010
Turns ON when the internal register is "0" after an INC or DEC operation. Turns OFF at other times.
Note: When an every-scan type INC/DEC instruction is used, INC (+1) or DEC (-1)
instruction is executed every scan time while input relay 0000 is ON.
Use a differentiation type instruction (@INC or @DEC) to execute the instruction
only once when input relay 0000 turns ON, as shown in the example.
0000
DM0000
INC
DM0000
INC
0000
12
Tips
When using DM0000 as an UP/DOWN counter
Performs an UP count (addition) when input relay 0000 turns ON.
Performs a DOWN count (subtraction) when input relay 0001 turns ON.
0000
DM0000
INC
0001
DM0000
DEC
Applications of INC/DEC instructions

UP/DOWN count
Performs an UP count when input relay 0000 turns ON.
Performs a DOWN count when input relay 0001 turns ON.
Writes the count value into DM0000.
Reset input relay is 0005.
2008
#00000 DM0000
LDA
STA
0000
DM0000
INC
0001
DM0000
DEC
0005
#00000
DW
DM0000
Sets #00000 to DM0000 at startup.

Increments DM0000 by 1 at UP edge
Decrements DM0000 by 1 at UP edge
Clears DM0000 to #00000 when 0005
turns ON.
Coding
Line No.
0000
Instruction
LD
Operand
2008
Line No.
0005
Instruction
@INC
Operand
DM0000
0001
LDA
#00000
0006
LD
0001
0002
CON
0007
@DEC
DM0000
0003
STA
DM0000
0008
LD
0005
0004
LD
0000
0009
DW
#00000 DM0000
3-173

Total count 1
Writes the total count of 4 lines (0000 to 0003) into DM0000.
2008
#00000 DM0000
LDA
STA
DM0000
INC
Increments DM0000 by 1 at UP edge of input relay 0000.
0001
DM0000
INC
0002
DM0000
INC
DM0000
INC
0000
0003
0005
#00000
DW
DM0000
Clears DM0000 to #00000 when 0005 turns ON.
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
STA
LD
@INC
LD
@INC
LD
@INC
LD
@INC
LD
DW
Operand
2008
#00000
DM0000
0000
DM0000
0001
DM0000
0002
DM0000
0003
DM0000
0005
#00000 DM0000
Total count 2
Counts the number of boxes transferred on 5 production lines. Produces output
when the number becomes 100 or more.
0000
DM0000
INC
0001
DM0000
INC
0002
DM0000
INC
0003
DM0000
INC
0004
DM0000
INC
0005
$0000
DW
DM0000
2002 DM0000 #00100 2009 0500
LDA
CMP
3-174
Increments DM0000 by 1 at UP edge of

input relay 0000.
input relay 0001.
input relay 0002.
input relay 0003.
input relay 0004.
Clears DM0000 when input relay 0005
turns ON.
Turns output relay 0500 ON when value
of DM0000 is 100 or more.

Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
Instruction
LD
@INC
LD
@INC
LD
@INC
LD
@INC
LD
@INC
LD
Operand
0000
DM0000
0001
DM0000
0002
DM0000
0003
DM0000
0004
DM0000
0005
Line No.
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
Instruction
Operand
DW
#00000 DM0000
LD
2002
LDA
DM0000
CON
CMP
#00100
CON
ANB
2009
OUT
0500
END
ENDH
Programming technique
Two kinds of instructions can be used for the counting operation: a C (counter)
instruction and an INC instruction with data memory.
The following examples show how to program the total count with each instruction.
Programming with the C instruction
0005
2002
#09999 C001
C001
LDA
0000
#09999 C002
C002
LDA
0001
#09999 C003
C003
LDA
0002
#09999 C004
C004
LDA
0003
#09999 C005
C005
LDA
0004
DM0001 DM0002 DM0003 DM0004 DM0005
LDA
ADD
ADD
ADD
ADD
Programming with the INC instruction

with data memory
DM0001
STA
0000
DM0000
INC
DM0002
STA
0001
DM0000
INC
DM0003
STA
0002
DM0000
INC
DM0004
STA
0003
DM0000
INC
DM0005
STA
0004
DM0000
INC
DM0000
STA
0005
$0000
DW
DM0000
12
As the example of the INC instruction shows, using different instructions sometimes
simplifies the program even for the same control.
Simpler programming reduces the time for debugging.
It is convenient to use the CMP instruction for comparator outputs.
OR instruction
Compare the following two programs.
With program 1), input relays 0000 through 0004 are individually counted even when
they turn ON simultaneously.
With program 2), when some input relays 0000 through 0004 turn ON simultaneously, duplicated inputs are ignored.
Use the appropriate program according to your application.
0000
DM0000
INC
0000
0001
DM0000
INC
0001
0002
DM0000
INC
0002
0003
DM0000
INC
0003
0004
DM0000
INC
0004
1)
DM0000
INC
2)
3-175
MPX / @MPX / DMX / @DMX
MPX:
ANL LD
Multiplexer
FUN 2
@
@MPX: (4-to-16 decoder),

DMX:
Demultiplexer
#,$ FUN
ANL LD
SET ANL
FUN 1
@DMX: (16-to-4 encoder)
#,$ FUN
SET ANL
#n
MPX
#n
MPX
DMX
DMX
Converts 4-bit data of internal

register into 16-bit data. The 4-bit
data to be converted is specified as
operand.
Converts position of most significant bit with 1 in internal register
into 4-bit data.
Example
0000
0000
LDA
#1
MPX
1000
STA
0001
0100
LDA
DMX
DM0000
STA
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
MPX
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
DMX
CON
STA
Operand
0000
0000
#1
1000
0001
0100
DM0000
Operands
#0 to #3
Key operation
FUN
@
#,$
FUN
FUN
#,$
FUN
SET
RES
OR
LD
ENT
R-SRCH
ENT
R-SRCH
Operand
ENT
Operand
ENT
R-SRCH
R-SRCH
Arithmetic flag
2009, 2010, 2011 No change
2012
Turns ON when no bit is ON after a DMX operation (the result is
"0"). Turns OFF at other times.
3-176
Description
Operation with the MPX instruction
When input relay 0000 is ON, the ON/OFF status of input relays 0000 through 0015
is transferred to the internal register. The section of the internal register specified by
the operand (input relays 0004 through 007: 4 bits) is converted into a hexadecimal
number (0 to F). Only the bit at the position specified by the hexadecimal number is
set to "1" and other bits are set to "0". The resulting ON/OFF status is input back to
the internal register, and then output to inputs 1000 to 1015.
In the example, when the value specified by inputs 0004 to 0007 are converted into
"A", internal relay 1010 turns ON.
#3
#2
#1
Operand
#0
Internal register
1 0 1 0
No. represented by the section of the

internal register specified by operand
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Internal register
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Operation with the DMX instruction

When input relay 0001 is ON, the ON/OFF status of input relays 0100 through 0115
is sent to the internal register. Within the 16-bit data of the internal register, the
number corresponding to the position of the most significant bit with "1" (0 to F) is
converted into 4-bit data and input back to the internal register. The contents of the
internal register are then transferred to DM0000.
In the example, when input relay 0114 turns ON, "E" is input to DM0000.
Most significant bit with "1"
0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Enter the number of the most

significant bit with "1".
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0
0 to F
The value is converted into a hexadecimal number.
The DMX instruction is disabled when all bits in the internal register are OFF. In
such a case, special utility relay 2012 turns ON.
Application of MPX and DMX instructions

MPX instruction
Connect the one-digit data of a BIN digital switch to input relays 0004 through 0007.
Connect output relays 0500 through 0515 to lamps 0 to 15.
An operator turns on the lamp corresponding to the digital switch using binary
numbers.
2002
0000
LDA
#1
MPX
0500
STA
When the digital switch shows "8", output 0508 turns ON, therefore, lamp 8 lights.
3-177
12

DMX instruction
Connect sensors 0 to 15 to input relays 0000 through 0015.
Connect output relays 0500 through 0503 to the one-digit data of a BIN indicator.
The sensors which are currently ON are shown by the BIN indicator.
* Assume that several sensors do not turn on simultaneously.
2002
0000
LDA
0500
STA
DMX
When sensor 8 is ON, the indicator shows "8".

Output of error input No. in BCD
Outputs the error sensor No. from input relay 0000 to 0015 to output relays 0500 to
0507 in 2-digit BCD.
2002
0000
LDA
DMX
TBCD
$00FF
ANDA
2002
Converts the most significant bit of 16-bit data (0000 to

0015) to 4-bit BIN data and sends it to internal register.
0500
STA
Converts internal register data to BCD data, executes an

ANDA instruction, and outputs the data to 0500 to 0507.
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
DMX
LD
TBCD
CON
ANDA
CON
STA
Operand
2002
0000
2002
$00FF
0500
Display of 7-segment LED

Displays the current value of counter C007 to the 7-segment LED.
Outputs from 0600 to 0615.
7-segment configuration
a
c
d
3-178
a : 0600
d : 0603
g : 0606
b : 0601
c : 0604
c : 0607
f : 0605

Converts the counter value to 16-bit
data using the MPX instruction.
Auto-reset
counter
C000
#00009
C000
0000
C000
LDA
#0
MPX
1000
STA
Sends internal register data to

output relays starting from 0600.
1000
1001
1002
1003
1004
1005
1006
1007
1008
1009
$003F
LDA
0600
STA
$0006
LDA
0600
STA
$005B
LDA
0600
STA
$004F
LDA
0600
STA
$0066
LDA
0600
STA
$006D
LDA
0600
STA
$007D
LDA
0600
STA
$0007
LDA
0600
STA
$007F
LDA
0600
STA
$006F
LDA
0600
STA
7-segment display
12
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023
Instruction
Operand
LDB
C000
C
000 #00009 0000
CON
LDA
C000
CON
MPX
#0
CON
STA
1000
LD
1000
LDA
$003F
CON
STA
0600
LD
1001
LDA
$0006
CON
STA
0600
LD
1002
LDA
$005B
CON
STA
0600
LD
1003
LDA
$004F
CON
STA
0600
Line No.
0024
0025
0026
0027
0028
0029
0030
0031
0032
0033
0034
0035
0036
0037
0038
0039
0040
0041
0042
0043
0044
0045
0046
0047
Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
STA
Operand
1004
$0066
0600
1005
$006D
0600
1006
$007D
0600
1007
$0007
0600
1008
$007F
0600
1009
$006F
0600
3-179
TBCD / @TBCD / TBIN / @TBIN
LDB LD
TBCD: Transfer BCD
FUN 4
@TBCD: Transfer BCD
LDB LD
LDB AND
TBIN: Transfer BIN
FUN 4
@
@TBIN: Transfer BIN
Example
#,$ FUN
#,$ FUN
0000
0001
LDB AND
TBCD
TBCD
TBIN
TBIN
DM0000
LDA
TBCD
DM0001
STA
DM0010
LDA
TBIN
DM0011
STA
Converts contents of internal register

(16-bit binary) into 4-digit BCD data.
Converts contents of internal register

(4-bit binary) into 16-digit BCD data.
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
@TBCD
CON
@STA
LD
LDA
CON
@TBIN
CON
@STA
Operand
0000
DM0000
DM0001
0001
DM0010
DM0011
Operands
Key operation
FUN
@
#,$
#,$
FUN
FUN
LDB
LDB
FUN
LD
AND
ENT
ENT
R-SRCH
R-SRCH
ENT
ENT
R-SRCH
R-SRCH
Arithmetic flag
2009, 2010, 2011 No change
2012
Turns ON when the contents of the internal register are greater
than "$270F (#09999)" before TBCD operation, or when the
contents of the internal register are not BCD data before the
TBIN operation (In these cases, the TBCD or TBIN instruction
will not be executed.). Turns OFF at other times.
3-180
Description
Operation using the TBCD instruction
When input relay 0000 turns ON, the contents of DM0000 are transferred to the
internal register. The contents of the internal register (16-bit binary data) are converted into 4-digit BCD data, which is input back to the internal register, and then
216
20
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0
Data is converted into BCD of "0" through "9999".

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0
8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
103
(0)
102
(0)
101
(2)
100
(4)
Operation using the TBIN instruction

internal register. The contents of the internal register (4-digit BCD data) are converted into 16-bit binary data, which is input back to the internal register, and then
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
102
103
101
100
8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
12
0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Data is converted into binary number of "0" through "9999".

0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
Note 1: The TBCD instruction can only convert data up to "#09999". When the
conversion of data of "#10000" or greater is attempted, special utility relay 2012
turns ON and the conversion is disabled.
Note 2: When the data in the internal register is not BCD data, special utility relay
2012 turns ON and the TBIN instruction is disabled.
Applications of TBCD instruction

Output of 4-digit BCD data
Outputs the current value of counter C001 to 0700 to 0715 in 4-digit BCD data.
0001
2002
C001
LDA
TBCD
#09999
C001
0000
0700
STA
Sets C001.
Converts current value of C001 into BCD data,
and outputs it to 0700 to 0715.
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
Instruction
LDB
C
LD
LDA
CON
TBCD
CON
STA
Operand
0001
001 #00009 0000
2002
C001
0700
3-181

Outputs the calculated product of DM0000 x DM0001 (0 to 99999999) in BCD of 8
digits at maximum as below:
High-order 4-digit BCD data To 0600 to 0615
Low-order 4-digit BCD data To 0500 to 0515
DM0000 x DM0001 =
Internal register
TM00
High-order 4 digits Low-order 4 digits
Internal register
TM00
TM00
#10000
... TM01
Internal register
High-order 4 digits
Low-order 4 digits
Remainder
Display
0600 to 0615
High-order 4 digits
2002
0500 to 0515
Low-order 4 digits
DM0000 DM0001 #10000 DM0101

LDA
MUL
DIV
STA
DM0101
LDA
TBCD
TM01
LDA
0500
STA
TBCD
0600
STA
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
MUL
CON
DIV
CON
STA
CON
LDA
Operand
2002
DM0000
DM0001
#10000
DM0101
TM01
Line No.
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
Instruction
CON
TBCD
CON
STA
CON
LDA
CON
TBCD
CON
STA
Operand
0500
DM0101
0600
Application of TBIN instruction

Input of 4-digit BCD data
Sets 4 digits of the BCD digital switch (0400 to 0415) as the counter C001 value.
2002
0400
LDA
TBIN
C001
STA
#09999
C001
0000
0001
Converts data of 0400 to 0415 to BIN data and writes

into C001.
Sets C001
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
3-182
Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
TBIN
CON
STA
LDB
C
Operand
2002
0400
C001
0001
001 #09999 0000
ASC / @ASC / RASC / @RASC
RES ANL
ASC: ASCII Convert

@ASC: ASCII Convert
RASC: Reverse ASCII Convert
@RASC: Reverse ASCII Convert
Example
ASC
RES ANL
@
#,$ FUN 0
2
ASC
ORL ANL
RASC
RASC
FUN 0
FUN 3
@
#,$ FUN
0000
0001
ORL ANL
DM0000
LDA
ASC
DM0001
STA
DM0010
LDA
RASC
DM0011
STA
Converts contents of lower order byte

of internal register into 2-digit ASCII
code.
Converts 2-digit ASCII into byte data
representing 2-digit hex number.
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
@ASC
CON
@STA
LD
LDA
CON
@RASC
CON
@STA
Operand
0000
DM0000
DM0001
0001
DM0010
12
DM0011
Operands
Key operation
FUN
@
#,$
FUN
FUN
#,$
FUN
RES
ORL
ANL
ANL
ENT
ENT
R-SRCH
R-SRCH
ENT
ENT
R-SRCH
R-SRCH
Arithmetic flag
2009, 2010, 2011 No change
2012
Turns ON when the high- and low-order 8-bit value is not within
the range of "$30" to "$39" and "$41" to "$46", respectively,
before the RASC instruction is executed (In this case, the RASC
instruction will not be executed.). Turns OFF at other times.
3-183
ASC / @ASC / RASC / @RASC
Description
Operation using the ASC instruction
internal register. The contents of the internal register (low-order 8-bit, 2-digit numerical value) are converted into 2-digit ASCII code. This 2-digit code is input back to the
internal register, and then transferred to DM0001.
1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1
Operation using the RASC instruction

internal register. The contents of the internal register (2-digit ASCII code) is converted into a low-order 8-bit, 2-digit numeric value. This 2-digit numeric value is input
back to the internal register, then transferred to DM0011..
0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1
3
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0
The value is converted only when the high- and low-order 8-bit value of the internal
register is within the range of "$30" to "$39" and "$41" to "$46", respectively, before
the conversion. (When either of the high- or low-order 8-bit value is not within the
range, the conversion is disabled. In this case, special utility relay 2012 turns ON.)
Example of conversion between hex and ASCII numbers
Hex number
3-184
Bit configuration
Code
Bit configuration
$30
$31
$32
$33
$34
$35
$36
$37
$38
$39
$41
$42
$43
$44
$45
$46
ROOT / @ROOT
ROOT: Square Root
ORL ORB
FUN 3
@ROOT: Square Root
#,$ FUN
ORL ORB
ROOT
ROOT
Takes square root of 32-bit data (TM00:

higher order byte, internal register: lower
order byte), and inputs result back to same
register.
Example
0000 DM0001
LDA
TM00
STA
DM0000
LDA
ROOT
DM0100
STA
Coding
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
0000
LD
0000
0001
LDA
DM0001
0002
CON
0003
STA
0004
CON
0005
LDA
0006
CON
0007
ROOT
0008
CON
0009
STA
TM00
DM0000
DM0100
12
Description
The ROOT instruction takes the square root of 32-bit data (binary number) of
which the high-order 16 bits are contained in DM0001 and low-order 16 bits are
contained in DM0000, and then input the result to DM0100.
The figures to the right the decimal point of the obtained square root are omitted,
and the result is input back to the same register.
When the result is 0, special utility relay No. 2010 turns ON.
The ROOT instruction takes the square root of a 32-bit numerical value. In this
case, the high-order 16 bits are contained in TM00, and the low-order 16 bits are
contained in the internal register.
TM00
Internal register
Higher order 16 bits
Lower order 16 bits
Internal register
Operands
Key operation
FUN
@
#,$
FUN
ORL
ORB
ENT
ENT
R-SRCH
R-SRCH
3-185
Change in status of special utility relays (arithmetic flags) by arithmetic

instructions (1/3)
Instruction
DATA
MEMORY
WRITE
3-136
DW
Operand
A<0
2009
A=0
2010
A>0
2011
Error
2012
$,# constant
Relay No.
LOAD A
LDA
Timer/counter No.
3-140
[FUN23]
Data memory No.
$,# constant
# TM
STORE A
3-140
COMPARE
3-146
ADD
3-150
Mnemonic
SUBTRACT
3-150
MULTIPLY
3-150
DIVIDE
3-150
AND A
3-159
Relay No.
STA
Timer/counter No.
[FUN42]
Data memory No.
# TM
Data memory No.
$,# constant
# TM
CMP
[FUN04]
ADD
[FUN00]
SUB
[FUN46]
MUL
[FUN28]
DIV
[FUN11]
ANDA
[FUN01]
Data memory No.
$,# constant
# TM
Data memory No.
$,# constant
# TM
Data memory No.
$,# constant
# TM
Data memory No.
$,# constant
# TM
H9
Data memory No.
$,# constant
# TM
: No change in arithmetic flag

Refer to the description of each instruction for details of the operating conditions of the flag.
3-186

instructions (2/3)
Instruction
OR A
3-161
EXCLUSIVE
OR A
3-164
SHIFT
RIGHT A
3-166
SHIFT
LEFT A
3-166
ROTATE
RIGHT A
3-169
ROTATE
LEFT A
3-169
COMPLEMENT
3-171
INCREMENT
MEMORY
3-172
DECREMENT
MEMORY
3-172
MULTIPLEXER
3-176
DEMULTIPLEXER
3-176
TRANSFER
BCD
3-180
TRANSFER
BIN
3-180
ASCII
CONVERT
3-183
REVERSE
ASCII
CONVERT
3-183
SQUARE
ROOT
3-185
TRIMMER
SETTING
3-138
Mnemonic
ORA
[FUN31]
EORA
[FUN15]
SRA
[FUN41]
SLA
[FUN40]
RRA
[FUN37]
RLA
[FUN40]
Operand
A<0
2009
A=0
2010
A>0
2011
Error
2012
Data memory No.
$,# constant
# TM
Data memory No.
$,# constant
# TM
Number of shifts
Number of shift
Number of rotations
Number of rotations
COM
[FUN05]
INC
[FUN19]
DEC
[FUN07]
MPX
[FUN27]
DMX
[FUN12]
TBCD
[FUN47]
TBIN
[FUN48]
ASC
[FUN02]
RASC
[FUN32]
ROOT
[FUN36]
TMIN
[FUN50]
12
Data memory No.
Data memory No.
Digit No.
: No change in arithmetic flag

Refer to the description of each instruction for details of the operating conditions of the flag.
3-187

instructions (3/3)
1 When the result of COMPARE is negative, the relay turns ON. When the result is
not negative, the relay remains OFF.
2 When the result of COMPARE is "0", the relay turns ON. When the result is not
"0", the relay remains OFF.
3 When the result of COMPARE is positive, the relay turns ON. When the result is
not positive, the relay remains OFF.
4 When the result of the arithmetic operation exceeds the 16-bit range ($FFFF),
the relay turns ON. When the result is within the 16-bit range, the relay remains
OFF.
5 When, as a result of the arithmetic operation, the data in the internal register is
"0", the relay turns ON. When the data is not "0", the relay remains OFF.
6 When the result of the arithmetic operation is negative, the relay turns ON.
When the result is not negative, the relay remains OFF.
7 When the result of the arithmetic operation is positive, the relay turns ON.
When the result is not positive, the relay remains OFF.
8 When, as a result of the arithmetic operation, all of the 32 bits are "0", the relay
turns ON. When any of them is not "0", the relay remains OFF.
9 When the divisor is "0", in the division, the relay turns ON. In this case, DIVIDE is
not executed.
0 When, as a result of SHIFT or ROTATE, "1" is entered into 2009, it turns ON.
When "1" is not entered, it remains OFF.
A When as a result of INCREMENT MEMORY, the data of the data memory is "0",
the relay turns ON. When the data is not "0", the relay remains OFF.
B When as a result of DECREMENT MEMORY, the data of the data memory
EXCEEDS 16 BIT RANGE ($FFFF), the relay turns ON. When the data is within
the 16-bit range, the relay remains OFF.
C When there is no "ON" bit in the internal register at execution of
DEMULTIPLEXER, the relay turns ON. (In this case, "0" is entered in the internal
register.) When there is a "ON" bit(s), the relay remains OFF.
D When the data in the internal register exceeds $270F (#09999) at execution of
TRANSFER BCD, the relay turns ON. (In this case, TRANSFER BCD is not
executed.) When the data does not exceed $270F, the relay remains OFF.
E When the data in the internal register is not BCD data at execution of TRANSFER BIN, the relay turns ON. (In this case, TRANSFER BIN is not executed.)
When the data is BCD, the relay remains OFF.
F When the higher-order byte or lower-order byte in the internal register is respectively not within the range of $30 through $39, or the range of $41 through $46 at
execution of REVERSE ASCII CONVERT, the relay turns ON. (In this case,
REVERSE ASCII CONVERT is not executed.)
When the value is within the range, the relay remains OFF.
G When the input value for TRIMMER SETTING is "0", the relay turns ON.
When the value is not "0", the relay remains OFF.
H During indirect addressing, there is no data memory or relay by the number
specified by "TMxx".
I When the result of the arithmetic operation exceeds the 16-bit range, the relay
turns ON. When the result is within the 16-bit range, the relay remains OFF.
3-188
2.5 Programming Notes

This section describes important points and precautions for creating ladder programs.
Circuits that must be modified

1. The circuit shown below left cannot be programmed. Modify it as shown on the
right.
A
0500
0500
E
C
A
C
2. Output is disabled in 0500 in the circuit shown below left. By modifying it as

shown on the right, output of one scan only is disabled.
A
1000
1000
0500
0500
1000
1000
12
3. If the same coil is used in two positions, the latter position has priority and the
coil in the former position is ignored.
A
0500
0500
0500
right.
A
0500
0500
right.
A
C
0500
D
E
0500
A
0501
0501
3-189
Programming precautions
1. A coil output or timer/counter cannot be connected directly from a bus. When an
output coil or a timer/counter is required, insert a 'b' contact of an unused internal
utility relay, a 'b' contact of an unused special utility relay, or a special utility relay
2002 (always ON) as a dummy.
0500
0500
2002
#0010
T000
#0010
T000
2. A contact cannot be connected to an output line.

A
0500
3. Make sure that every contact/coil is located on a path from a bus to an output
line. Make sure that there are no unconnected portions.
A
B
C
0500
4. Make sure that illegal short-circuits are not generated in parallel connections.
0500
A
5. Circuits including output coils cannot be connected in parallel.

A
0501
0500
However, parallel connection is enabled when each circuit in parallel connection

is connected to an output line.
A
B
D
0500
0501
6 . When the following program is entered with the programming support software
and sent to the KV, and then read from the KV with the software, reading is
disabled due to a "Reverse Compilation Error".
When a return is included in parallel connection in a ladder program, a
decompilation (reverse compilation) error is generated as shown below.
To prevent this error, change the ladder diagram to eliminate the return, or
separate the parallel connection.
3-190
Visual KV
Series
Chapter 3
Interrupts
The interrupt processing function executes an interrupt program when an external
input or request from the high-speed counter comparator (interrupt factor) is encountered during KV operation.
This chapter describes the types of interrupt factors as well as inputs and outputs
encountered during interrupt processing.
For KV-10/80 Series, see Chapter 6.
3.1
Interrupt Instructions ...................................................................... 3-192
3.2
Interrupt Processing ....................................................................... 3-194
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
Interrupt Processing ...............................................................................

Types of Interrupts .................................................................................
Interrupt Priority ......................................................................................
Interrupt Program ...................................................................................
3-194
3-195
3-196
3-196
3.3
Direct Input/Output .......................................................................... 3-197
3.3.1
3.3.2
Direct Input ............................................................................................. 3-197

Direct Output .......................................................................................... 3-197
3.4
Applications of Interrupt Programs ............................................ 3-198
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.3
3.4.4
Interrupt with a Signal Converter ............................................................

Interrupt with a High-speed Counter ......................................................
Measuring the ON Time of High-speed Pulses ......................................
Measuring the Period in which a Target Passes between
Two Points .............................................................................................
3-198
3-199
3-200
3-201
3.1 Interrupt Instructions

Visual KV
Series
This section describes the INT, RETI, DI, and EI instructions used for interrupt
processing.
INT: Interrupt
FUN
ANL RES
INT
nnnn
RETI: Return Interrupt
ORL LDB
RETI
FUN
Executes interrupt between INT and RETI

instructions at rising or falling edge of input
Represents termination of interrupts.
Example
Coding for normal input
a)
0000
Normal
input
0000
#00020
T000
0500
T000
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0500
(Input ON time: 10 ms min.)
Instruction
LD
OR
TMR
ANB
OUT
Operand
0000
0500
00 #00020
T000
0500
Coding for interrupt input
b)
Interrupt
input
2008
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
EI
0000
2002
HSP
0000
1000
#00020
T000
0500
T0
1000
(RES)
END
INT
0000
2002
1000
RETI
Instruction
LD
EI
LD
HSP
LD
OR
TMR
OUT
LD
RES
END
INT
LD
OUT
RETI
ENDH
Operand
2008
2002
0000
1000
0500
000 #00020
0500
T0
1000
0000
2002
1000
ENDH
(Input ON time: 10 s min.)
Description
Example a) shows a normal input and is used when input relay 0000 turns ON
longer than the input time constant (10 ms).
Example b) is used when input relay 0000 turns ON shorter than the scan time.
Operands
0000 to 0003
CTC0 to CTC3
Key operation
3-192
FUN
ANL
FUN
ORL
2
3
Chapter 3 Interrupts
RES
LDB
ENT
R-SRCH
Operand
ENT
ENT
R-SRCH
R-SRCH
ENT
R-SRCH
DI: Interrupt Disabled
FUN
RES AND
DI
Disables execution of interrupt.
EI: Interrupt Enabled
FUN
SET ORL
EI
Enables execution of interrupt.
8
3
Visual KV
Series
Example
1000
EI
1000
DI
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0021
0022
Instruction
LD
EI
LDB
DI
Operand
0000
1000
Description
When 1000 is ON, execution of interrupt is enabled.

When 1000 is OFF, execution of interrupt is disabled.
Interrupts are enabled between EI instruction and DI instruction.
Once an EI instruction is executed, an interrupt is enabled until a DI instruction is
executed.
Any interrupt is disabled when the Visual KV Series starts operation.
The DI instruction disables execution of an interrupt. Use this instruction to
temporarily disable an interrupt.
The EI instruction enables execution of an interrupt. Use this instruction to
release an interrupt that was disabled by a DI instruction.
To execute another interrupt during execution of the previous interrupt, include EI
instruction in this first interrupt. EI-DI instruction set can be nested to four levels.
Note 1: When any interrupt occurs between DI and EI instructions (interrupt disabled
period), the disabled interrupt is stored (to 8 levels max.). The stored interrupt is
executed as soon as an EI instruction is executed.
Note 2: If an INT CTC instruction is stored before a RES CTC instruction is executed, the stored INT CTC is deleted.
Operands
Key operation
FUN
RES
AND
FUN
SET
ORL
0
1
ENT
ENT
R-SRCH
R-SRCH
3-193
13
3.2 Interrupt Processing

Visual KV
Series
This section describes interrupt processing.
3.2.1 Interrupt Processing

Outline
Normally, a PLC processes a ladder sequence program by repeating the steps of
input processing, program execution, and output processing. Therefore, signals
which are shorter than the scan time cannot be received.
When the interrupt processing function is used, a process can be executed at the
instant of the interrupt, independent of the scan time.
When any interrupt occurs, the Visual KV series suspends the currently executed
program and executes the interrupt program in accordance with the interrupt factor.
When the interrupt program completes, the Visual KV resumes execution of the
suspended program.
For more about scan time, refer to "1.1.2 Scan Time" (p. 3-3).
Input
processing
Direct input *
Interrupt input
Scan
time
Program
execution
(0000 to 0015)
Interrupt
processing
Return to the next

line of the interrupt.
Direct output
Output
processing
(0500 to 0503)
Direct input/output
The direct input/output functions are used during interrupt processing. Direct input
allows the KV PLC to fetch the input status of input relays 0000 through 0015 (KV10xx: 0000-0005, KV-16xx: 0000-0009) during execution of the interrupt program.
Direct output allows the Visual KV PLC to output the ON/OFF status of output relays
0500 through 0503 during execution of the interrupt program.
No special setting is required to use the direct input/output functions. The functions
can be used only by using the devices assigned for direct input/output within the
interrupt program.
Executing interrupts
The INT (Interrupt) instruction is used to execute an interrupt. Since an interrupt is
disabled at the start of operation, it is necessary to execute an EI (Interrupt enable)
instruction before using the INT instruction. In addition, the input time constant
should be set shorter by using the HSP instruction (to 10 s) or by specifying the
desired value in DM1940 and turning ON special utility relay 2813.
For more about the input time constant, refer to "1.4.1 Input Time Constant Change Function" (p. 323).
2002
2008
EI
3-194
#00000
DW
DM1940
2813
SET
EI
or
2002
HSP
0000
3.2.2 Types of Interrupts
Interrupt by an external input

This interrupt is executed by input relays 0000 through 0003. Use the special utility
relay to specify the polarity of the interrupt factor to a rising or falling edge.
Visual KV
Series
Interrupts can be divided into two types: an interrupt by an external input, and an
interrupt by the high-speed counter comparator. This section describes both of these
interrupt types.
Interrupt by the high-speed counter comparator

This interrupt is executed when the current value of the high-speed counter (CTH)
matches the preset value of the high-speed counter comparator (CTC).
Polarity setting for interrupts by an external input

Turn ON the appropriate special utility relay to specify the interrupt factor to a rising
or falling edge.
The interrupt polarity can be changed as follows by setting special utility relays
2402/2403 (INT0), 2404/2405 (INT1), 2410/2411 (INT2), and 2412/2413 (INT3).
Interrupt
type
INT0
Relay
No.
2402
Status
Relay
No.
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
2403
ON
INT1
INT2
INT3
2404
2410
2412
Interrupt occurs at falling edge.

Interrupt occurs at both rising and falling edges.
OFF
OFF
2405
Interrupt occurs at rising edge.
ON
ON
OFF
Description
ON
OFF
13
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
2411
OFF

ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
2413
ON
OFF
ON
CAUTION
Status
ON
ON
Use SET-RES instructions to turn the special utility relays ON/OFF.
Input capture
Each external interrupt factor is provided with the input capture function. This is a
function which writes the value of the high-speed counter into the data memory
when an interrupt occurs. Without any particular settings, the value of the highspeed counter is automatically transferred to DM1928 through DM1935 when an
interrupt occurs.
External interrupt factor
Description
Occurrence of INT0
Value of CTH0 is written to DM1928 (low-order bits)

and DM1929 (high-order bits)
Occurrence of INT1

Occurrence of INT2

Occurrence of INT3

3-195
CAUTION
Use SET-RES instructions to turn the special utility relays ON/OFF.

The input capture function stores the high-order bit data only when the 24bit high-speed counter is used. The data is undefined when the 16-bit highspeed counter is used.
Visual KV
Series
"4.4.1 24-bit High-speed Counter" (p. 3-221)
Timing of the input capture execution depends on the input polarity setting
specified with special utility relays 2402 through 2405 and 2410 through
2413.
3.2.3 Interrupt Priority

When many interrupts occur sequentially, priority is given to the interrupt which
occurs earlier.
When two or more interrupts occur simultaneously, priority is given in the order of
0000, 0001, 0002, 0003, CTC2, CTC3, CTC0, and CTC1.
Note 1: While one interrupt is being executed, other interrupts are disabled. (Multilevel interrupts are possible by placing an EI instruction within an interrupt routine.)
Note 2: When other interrupts occur during execution of an interrupt, other interrupts
are stored up to 8 levels deep. The stored interrupts are executed after completion
of the previous interrupt, according to the priority order. However, an interrupt which
uses the same device as a previous interrupt cannot be stored.
3.2.4 Interrupt Program

The interrupt program is a program which is executed by an interrupt. It is necessary
to execute an EI (Interrupt enabled) instruction before executing an interrupt program.
To temporarily disable an interrupt, execute a DI (Interrupt disabled) instruction.
When an interrupt is disabled, subsequent interrupts are not executed but stored
until the next EI instruction.
"EI instruction", "DI instruction" (p. 3-193)
Example of an interrupt program

2008
EI
HSP
0000
An interrupt program is not executed unless an EI instruction is executed.

Set the input time constant shorter by using the HSP instruction
(to 10 s) or by turning ON special utility relay 2813.
END
INT
0000
Write the interrupt program between the END and ENDH

instructions.
RETI
ENDH
Note 1: To shorten the input time constant, use the HSP instruction (to 10 s) or
specify the desired value in DM1940 and turn ON special utility relay 2813.
Note 2: For more about the input time constant, refer to "1.4.1 Input Time Constant
Change Function" (p. 3-23).
Note 3: Use SET-RES instructions instead of OUT-OUTB instructions within interrupt programs.
The following instructions cannot be used within interrupt programs:
TMR, TMH, TMS, DIFU, DIFD, W-ON, W-OFF, W-UE, W-DE, STG, JMP, ENDS,
HKEY, ITVL, @xxxx (differentiation type instructions), C, UDC, SFT
3-196
3.3 Direct Input/Output
3.3 Direct Input/Output

3.3.1 Direct Input
The direct input function is used during interrupt processing. Direct input allows the
KV PLC to fetch the input status of the input relays during execution of the interrupt
program.
Visual KV
Series
This section describes direct input and output.
Direct input is available only with input relays 0000 through 0015 (KV-10xx: 00000005, KV-16xx: 0000-0009). (KV-300: 0000-0005)
The input time constant must be set to 10 s by using the HSP instruction or by
turning ON special utility relay 2813.
The direct input data is effective only within the interrupt program so that the
internal utility relay must be provided.
2008
EI
2002
HSP
0000
HSP
0005
1000
0500
END
INT
0000
0005
13
1000
SET
RETI
ENDH
3.3.2 Direct Output

Direct output allows the Visual KV PLC to output the ON/OFF status of output relays
during execution of the interrupt program. Direct output is available only with output
relays 0500 through 0503.
Direct output is not affected by the scan time.

2008
EI
2002
HSP
0000
HSP
0001
END
INT
0000
2002
0500
SET
RETI
INT
0001
2002
0501
SET
RETI
ENDH
3-197
3.4 Applications of Interrupt Programs

Visual KV
Series
This section presents program examples of interrupt processing.
3.4.1 Interrupt with a Signal Converter

Outline
Converts the short pulses which are input by interrupt processing into pulses of a
constant width and then outputs them.
Scan
Input 0000
ON
OFF
ON
Output 0500
ON
ON
ON
1 sec.
1 sec.
1 sec.
OFF
Ladder diagram
Converts the short pulses input from input relay 0000 into pulses of 1-second ON
width and then outputs them from output relay 0500.
Output relay 0500 turns ON for 1 second from the rising edge of input relay 0000.
2008
EI
0001
0002
HSP
0000
2002
0500
0003
#00010
T000
T0000
0500
RES
END
When power is turned on, an EI

instruction enables interrupts.
Sets the input time constant of
input 0000 to 10 s.
Turns ON output 0500 for 1
second and then turns it OFF.
0004
INT
0002
0005
2002
0006
0500
SET
RETI
0007
ENDH
0008
3-198
When input 0000 turns

ON, output 0500 turns ON.
3.4.2 Interrupt with a High-speed Counter
Visual KV
Series
Outline
Uses the input value of a high-speed counter from one input relay and the ON/OFF
status of another input relay to control the ON/OFF status of an output relay.
Scan
Input 0004
ON
OFF
Input 0000
ON
OFF
Output 0500
ON
OFF
ON
Example: Filling control for medicine (tablets)
Visual KV
Sensor
13
Ladder diagram
Output relay 0500 turns ON when the input value of the high-speed counter from
input relay 0004 reaches "10000".
Output relay 0500 turns OFF when input relay 0000 turns ON.
0001
0002
0003
2008
EI
2002
2002
0000
0010
CTH0
0004
0500
RES
INT
CTC0
0007
0009
HSP
0004
When power is turned on, an EI

Sets automatic reset of CTH0.
Resets current value of CTH0.
Sets an input time constant of
input 0004 to 10 s.
Specifies CTH0 as the highspeed counter for input 0004 and
sets "10000" as the preset value
of CTC0.
Turns OFF output 0500 when
input 0000 turns ON.
END
0006
0008
CTH0
RES
# 10000
CTC0
0004
0005
2103
SET
2002
0500
SET
Executes an interrupt when the

input value of CTH0 reaches
"10000". Turns ON output 0500.
RETI
ENDH
3-199
3.4.3 Measuring the ON Time of High-speed Pulses
Visual KV
Series
Outline
Measures the pulse width of the pulse input to an input relay.
ON
Sensor input 0000
OFF
Pulse width (s)
Example: Measurement of workpiece length
Sensor
Visual KV
Ladder diagram
Special utility relay 2100 is turned ON to measure the pulse width using 1-s
units.
The values when input relay 0000 is ON is written into temporary data memory
TM02, and the values when input relay 0000 is OFF is written into data memory
DM1912. The pulse width can be obtained by subtracting the value of TM02 from
the value of DM1912.
The obtained value is written into data memory DM0000 (Unit: s).
2008
0001
EI
2002
HSP
0000
2002
CTH0
2100
0002
0003
When power is turned ON, an EI

Sets an input time constant of
input 0000 to 10 s.
CTH0 counts pulses with a 1-s
internal clock.
END
0004
INT
0000
0005
2403
0006
2403
0007
DM1928
LDA
TM02
STA
DM1928
LDA
TM02
SUB
KEEP
SET
2403
DM0000
STA
RES
RETI
0008
ENDH
0009
3-200
Turns ON input 0000 to execute an

interrupt.
First, an interrupt is executed at the
rising edge of input 0000. The
current value of CTH0 stored in
DM1928 is written to TM02. Turns
ON special utility relay 2403 to
change the interrupt polarity to the
falling edge.
Next, an interrupt is executed at the
falling edge of input 0000. The
value stored in TM02 is subtracted
from the current value of CTH0
stored in DM1928, and the
obtained ON width of input 0000 is
written to DM0000. Turns OFF
special utility relay 2403 to change
the interrupt polarity to the rising
edge.
3.4.4 Measuring the Period in which a Target Passes between

Two Points
Sensor 1 input 0002
ON
OFF
Sensor 2 input 0003
ON
OFF
Visual KV
Series
Outline
Measures the period in which two input relays turn ON.
Passing time (s)
Example: Measurement of tact time
Visual KV
Sensor 1
Sensor 2
Ladder diagram
Measures the time from when input relay 0002 turns ON until input relay 0003
turn ON.
The measured value is written to data memory DM0000 (Unit: s).
2008
EI
2410
RES
2411
RES
2412
RES
2413
RES
0001
2002
0002
HSP
0002
0003
HSP
0003
2002
0004
CTH1
2200
When power is turned on, an

EI instruction enables interrupts. Sets the interrupt polarity
of inputs 0002 and 0003 to the
rising edge.
Sets the input time constant of
inputs 0002 and 0003 to 10 s.
CTH1 counts the pulses using

a 1-s internal clock.
END
0005
INT
0002
0006
RETI
0007
INT
0003
0008
2002
0009
DM1934 DM1932 DM0000

LDA
SUB
STA
RETI
0010
ENDH
0011
When INT2 is executed, the

current value of CTH1 is
automatically transferred to
DM1932 and DM1933 (Input
capture).
When INT3 is executed, the
current value of CTH1 is
automatically transferred to
DM1934 and DM1935 (Input
capture).
Subtracts the input capture
value of INT2 from that of INT3
to obtain the time it takes for
the target to pass between two
points and then writes it to
DM0000.
3-201
13
Visual KV
Series
3-202
Visual KV
Series
Chapter 4
High-speed Counters
This chapter describes high-speed counters and high-speed counter comparators,
which allow high-speed pulse measurement and pulse output, independent of the
scan time.
4.1
High-speed Counter Instructions ................................................ 3-204
4.2
Outline of High-speed Counters .................................................. 3-206
4.2.1
4.2.2
High-speed Counters and High-speed Counter Comparators ............... 3-206

Internal Clock for High-speed Counters ................................................. 3-210
4.3
Setting and Operation of High-speed Counters ...................... 3-211
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.3
4.3.4
4.3.5
4.3.6
4.3.7
Reading the Current Value of the High-speed Counter .........................

Preset Value of the High-speed Counter Comparator ...........................
Comparator Output ................................................................................
Count Input Method ................................................................................
Resetting the High-speed Counter .........................................................
Differences with the CTH Instruction between the
Conventional and Visual KV Series .......................................................
Applications of High-speed Counters .....................................................
4.4
Expanded Functions of High-speed Counters ......................... 3-221
4.4.1
4.4.2
4.4.3
4.4.4
4.4.5
24-bit High-speed Counter ..................................................................... 3-221

Changing the Current Value of a 24-bit High-speed Counter ................ 3-223
Application Example of 24-bit High-speed Counter (single-phase input) 3-224
Ring Counter Function ........................................................................... 3-225
Applications of Ring Counters ................................................................ 3-226
4.5
Special Functions Using High-speed Counters ...................... 3-228
4.5.1
4.5.2
4.5.3
4.5.4
4.5.5
4.5.6
Specified Frequency Pulse Output Function ..........................................

Applications of the Specified Frequency Pulse Output ..........................
Frequency Counter Function ..................................................................
Applications of Frequency Counters ......................................................
Cam Switch Function .............................................................................
Application of the Cam Switch ...............................................................
4.6
Direct Clock Pulse Output ............................................................. 3-237
4.6.1
4.6.2
Outline of Direct Clock Pulse Output ...................................................... 3-237

Pulse Output Setting with the High-speed Counter Comparator ............ 3-238
4.7
Examples of Direct Clock Pulse Output .................................... 3-242
4.7.1
4.7.2
4.7.3
4.7.4
Example of Outputting a Pulse with 1:1 ON/OFF Ratio .........................

Example of Outputting a Pulse with Variable ON/OFF Ratio .................
Example of Stopping the Pulse Output at a Specified Pulse Count .......
Application of Direct Clock Pulse Output (Ramp-up/down control) ........
3-211
3-211
3-211
3-212
3-214
3-216
3-217
3-228
3-229
3-231
3-232
3-233
3-236
3-242
3-245
3-249
3-251
4.1 High-speed Counter Instructions

Visual KV
Series
This section describes the CTH0, CTH1, and CTC instructions, which are used for
high-speed counters.
CTH0: 16-Bit Highspeed counter
CTH
RES
CTH0
nnnn
CTH1: 16-Bit Highspeed counter
CTH
SET
CTH1
nnnn
CTC: High-speed
counter comparator
CTC
#ddddd
CTCn
16-bit (0 to 65535) up/down counters for

clock pulses with a 30-kHz input 1.
response frequency.
Can be changed to 24-bit (0 to 16777215)
counters with the MEMSW instruction. 2.
Enables 30 kHz, two-phase input through
two channels.1.
Hardware-based comparator between the
preset value and current value of the
high-speed counter.
The current value can be changed to a
preset value by external input.
1. KV-300/Visual KV only
2. Visual KV only
Example
2008
1)
2008
0000
HSP
0004
2103
SET
Input-enable relay
CTH0
RES
2)
CTH0
0004
3)
#60000
CTC0
0500
SET
CTC0
4)
0500
5)
Count input
#00030
T000
T000
CTC0
RES
0500
RES
Coding
3-204
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
0000
LD
2008
0009
LD
CTC0
0001
HSP
0004
0010
SET
0500
0002
LD
2008
0011
LD
0500
0003
SET
2103
000 #00030
0004
CON
0005
RES
CTH0
0012
TMR
0013
AND
T000
0014
RES
CTC0
0006
LD
0000
0015
CON
0007
CTH0
0004
0016
RES
0008
CTC0
#6000
Chapter 4 High-speed Counters
0500
CTH0:
0004
2100 to 2102
CTH1:
0005
0500
2200 to 2202
CTC0 to 3:
Preset value
#00001 to #65535
Visual KV
Series
Operands
Key operation
RES
CTH
Clock input
SET
ENT
R-SRCH
CTC
Operand
Preset
value
ENT
R-SRCH
Description
1) Initializes the setting when power is turned on.
The HSP instruction sets the input time constant of input relay 0004 to 10 s.
The current value of CTH0 is reset as soon as it matches the preset value of
CTC0 when special utility relay 2103 is ON.
2) The counting is disabled when input relay 0000 is OFF. Counting starts (at 0004)
3) Sets "60000" as the preset value of the high-speed counter comparator.
4) When the current value of CTH0 reaches "60000", output relay 0500 turns ON
and the current value is reset.
5) Turns OFF both CTC0 and 0500 for three seconds after output relay 0500 turns
ON.
Tips
Unlike software-based counters, the high-speed counter is a hardware-based,
program-independent counter. It achieves an input response frequency of 30 kHz
without being affected by the scan time.
Input relays 0004 and 0005 can independently count the pulses with a 30 kHz
input response frequency.
Two-phase encoder input can be captured through two channels (30 kHz).
CTH0 uses input from relay 0004 as phase A input and input from relay 0006 as
phase B input (KV-10xx: 0000). CTH1 uses input from 0005 as phase A input
and input from 0007 as phase B input (KV-10xx: 0001).
Note: When phase differential input is used, pulses with a maximum frequency of 30
kHz can be counted, provided the pulses have a duty ratio of 1:1 (50%) and phase
difference of 90. Inputting pulses with an irregular duty ratio or phase difference will
decrease the allowable input frequency.
3-205
14
4.2 Outline of High-speed Counters

Visual KV
Series
This section describes the outline and specifications for high-speed counters and
high-speed counter comparators featured with the Visual KV Series.
4.2.1
High-speed Counters and High-speed Counter Comparators

The high-speed counter is a hardware-based counter that can count high-speed
pulses that cannot be counted by counters written in main routines (C or UDC).
(Pulses with a maximum frequency of 30 kHz can be counted.). *
High-speed counter comparators are hardware-based comparators that compare
their preset value with the current value of one of the a high-speed counters.
Both counters and comparators perform processing with hardware rather than
software programs, enabling high-speed performance independent of the scan time.
Structure of high-speed counters and high-speed counter comparators

The Visual KV PLC has two high-speed counters, each equipped with two highspeed counter comparators and dedicated internal clocks.
Block diagram of high-speed counters
0008 (RESET) 2.
Internal clocks*
2100 (1.0 s)
2101 (10.0 s)
2102 (100.0 s)
16-bit high-speed
counter
CTH0
Input capture device
DM1928, DM1929(INT0)
DM1930, DM1931(INT1)
2103 to 2114
Control circuit
Phase A 0004
Phase B(0006)
External input
0004/0006
Internal clocks*
2200 (1.0 s)
2201 (10.0 s)
2202 (100.0s)
high-speed
counter
comparator
high-speed
counter
comparator
CTC0
CTC1
16-bit high-speed
counter
CTH1
(0007)
0005/0007
Input capture device
DM1932, DM1933(INT2)
DM1934, DM1935(INT3)
2203 to 2214
Control circuit
0500
External input
INT CTC0
INT CTC1
0501
Internal connection
for external clock
Phase A
Phase B 0005
0500
high-speed
counter
comparator
high-speed
counter
comparator
CTC2
CTC3
INT CTC2
INT CTC3
0009 (RESET) 2.
1. With the KV-10xx, the external input relay for CTH0 is 0004 (phase A)/0000
(phase B), and for CTH1 is 0005 (phase A)/0001 (phase B).
2. With the KV-10xx, the preset input relay for CTH0 is 0002, and for CTH1 is 0003.
For KV-10/80 user's
Max. response frequency: 10 kHz
* 2100 0.8 s
2101 6.4 s
2102 102.4 s
2200 0.4 s
2201 0.8 s
2202 3.2 s
3-206

List of special utility relays for high-speed counter CTH0
2104
2105
2106
2107
2108
2109
2110
2111
2112
2113
2114
Function
Automatically clears CTH0 when comparator CTC0 turns ON.
Disables/enables direct output from 0500 when comparator CTC0
turns ON.
Turns OFF direct output from 0500 when comparator CTC0 turns ON.
Turns ON direct output from 0500 when comparator CTC0 turns ON.
Reverses ON/OFF status of output from 0500 each time comparator
CTC0 turns ON.
turns ON.
CTC1 turns ON.
Selects multiplication mode for CTH0.
OFF/OFF: No multiplication (1 pulse) ON/OFF: x2 OFF/ON: x4
ON/ON: 2 pulses
ON: Yes OFF: No

ON: Disable
OFF: Enable
ON: Yes OFF: No
ON: Yes OFF: No
Visual KV
Series
Relay
No.
2100*
2101*
2102*
2103
ON: Yes OFF: No

ON: Disable
OFF: Enable
ON: Yes OFF: No
ON: Yes OFF: No
ON: Yes OFF: No
ON: Yes OFF: No
* Read-only relay.
Multiplication
mode
2113
2114
No multiplication
(1 pulse)
OFF
OFF
x2
x4
2 pulses
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
List of special utility relays for high-speed counter CTH1

Relay
No.
2200*
2201*
2202*
2203
2204
2205
2206
2207
2208
2209
2210
2211
14
Function
turns ON.
CTC2 turns ON.
turns ON.
CTC3 turns ON.
ON: Yes OFF: No

ON: Disable
OFF: Enable
ON: Yes OFF: No
ON: Yes OFF: No
ON: Yes OFF: No
ON: Disable
OFF: Enable
ON: Yes OFF: No
ON: Yes OFF: No
ON: Yes OFF: No
2212
ON: Yes OFF: No
2213 Selects multiplication mode for CTH1.
2214 OFF/OFF: No multiplication (1 pulse) ON/OFF: x2 OFF/ON: x4 ON/ON: 2 pulses
* Read-only relay.
Multiplication
mode
2213
2214
No multiplication
(1 pulse)
OFF
OFF
x2
x4
2 pulses
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
3-207

Other special utility relays
Visual KV
Series
Relay
Function
No.
2400 Changes current value of CTH0 to preset value by external signal
2401 OFF/OFF: Not used ON/OFF: At rising edge OFF/ON: At falling edge ON/ON: Level
2406 Sets CTH0 as ring counter. ON: Yes OFF: No
2407
Ignores phase B input when no multiplication mode is used for CTH0.

ON: Ignore phase B input and always count up. OFF: Use phase B input as usual.
2408 Changes current value of CTH1 to preset value by external signal

2409 OFF/OFF: Not used ON/OFF: At rising edge OFF/ON: At falling edge ON/ON: Level
2414 Sets CTH1 as ring counter. ON: Yes OFF: No
2415
Ignores phase B input when no multiplication mode is used for CTH1.

ON: Ignore phase B input and always count up. OFF: Use phase B input as usual.
Data memory
DM No.
DM1900/DM1901
DM1902/DM1903
DM1904/DM1905
DM1906/DM1907
DM1908/DM1909
DM1910/DM1911
DM1912/DM1913
DM1914/DM1915
DM1916/DM1917
DM1918/DM1919
DM1920/DM1921
DM1922/DM1923
DM1924/DM1925
DM1926/DM1927
Description
Current value of 24-bit CTH0 (low-order bits/high-order bits) is read.
Current value of 24-bit CTH1 (low-order bits/high-order bits) is read.
Current value of 24-bit CTC0 (low-order bits/high-order bits) is read.
Current value of 24-bit CTH0 (low-order bits/high-order bits) is written.
Current value of 24-bit CTH1 (low-order bits/high-order bits) is written.
Preset value of 24-bit CTC0 (low-order bits/high-order bits) is written.
Preset value of CTH0 (low-order bits/high-order bits) is written.
Preset value of CTH1 (low-order bits/high-order bits) is written.
4
Note 1: As with the internal register, the contents of data memory are stored as 16bit binary data.
Note 2: The contents of data memory are stored even when the Visual KV is turned
off or "ALL DATA MEMORY CLEAR" is executed. It is stored more than 20 days
with the KV-10xx, and more than two months with other models.
Specifications of high-speed counters
The high-speed counter is a hardware-based up/down counter that counts from 0

to 65535 with an auto-reset function.
The following operands can be specified for count inputs.

High-speed counter
3-208
Operand
CTH0
2100 to 2102, 0004
CTH1
2200 to 2202, 0005, 0500
Measurement range
#00000 to 65535
High-speed counters CTH0 and CTH1 store current values only.
When input relays 0004 and 0005 are selected as operands, they can be used as
high-speed counters with a response frequency of 30 kHz.
When special utility relays 2100 through 2102 and 2200 through 2202 are selected as operands, the high-speed counters can be used as high-speed timers.
When relay 0500 is selected as an operand for CTH1, CTH1 can count the clock
pulses produced by CTH0.
CTH0 and CTH1 can be used as 24-bit high-speed counters when the MEMSW
instruction is set.
"MEMSW instruction" (p. 3-92), "4.4.1 24-bit High-speed Counter" (p. 3-221), "4.3.4 Count Input
Method" (p. 3-212), "When using comparator output from other counters as count input" (p. 3-213).
Note 1: CTH instructions cannot be duplicated in a program. A maximum of two

counters, CTH0 and CTH1, can be used in one program.
Note 2: The operands for a high-speed counter cannot be changed during program
execution.
Note 3: When using a high-speed counter with external inputs, the input time constant must be set to 10 s with the HSP instruction or with special utility relay 2813.
(Pulses with a maximum frequency of 30 kHz can be counted.)
Note 4: When using input 0004 as an operand, use input 0006 (KV-10xx: 0000) for
phase B input. Therefore, do not use input 0006 (KV-10xx: 0000) other than for the
high-speed counter.
Note 5: When selecting no multiplication mode, and you do not want to use input
0006 (KV-10xx: 0000) as phase B input, turn ON special utility relay 2407.
Note 6: When using input 0005 as an operand, use input 0007 (KV-10xx: 0001) for
phase B input. Therefore, do not use input 0007 (KV-10xx: 0000) other than for the
high-speed counter.
Note 7: When selecting no multiplication mode, and you do not want to use input
0007 (KV-10xx: 0001) as phase B input, turn ON special utility relay 2415.
Note 8: When using the high-speed counter internal connection relay 0500, only
single-phase input is available. In this case, external input relays 0005 and 0007 for
CTH1 can be used as normal input relays.
Note 9: When using phase differential input, pulses with a maximum frequency of 30
Note 10: The current value of the high-speed counter is stored with a built-in,
electrical double-layer capacitor for more than two months at 25C (KV-10xx: more
than 20 days). The value can also be stored in EEPROM.
"3.5 System Mode" (p.1-94).
High-speed counter comparators
The high-speed counter comparator (CTC) compares its preset value with the
value of the high-speed counter (CTH).
The CTC contact turns ON when the current value of the CTH matches the
preset value of the CTC.
Among CTC contacts, the ON/OFF status of output relays 0500 and 0501 can be
changed with hardware (direct output) or can be used to execute an interrupt. Set
special utility relays (2103 to 2112, 2203 to 2212) to change the ON/OFF status
of output relays 0500 and 0501.
The following table shows the relationship between the high-speed counters and
high-speed counter comparators.
High-speed
counter
CTH0
CTH1
High-speed counter
comparator
CTC0, CTC1
CTC2, CTC3
Preset value
range
#1 to 65535
Direct
output
0500
0501
Interrupts
INT CTC0, INT CTC1
INT CTC2, INT CTC3
Note 1: Once the high-speed counter comparator turns ON, it remains ON until a
RES instruction is encountered.
Note 2: When a high-speed counter comparator is used as an interrupt, the interrupt
is executed as soon as the current value of the high-speed counter reaches the
preset value of the comparator. At the same time, the contact for the high-speed
counter comparator automatically turns OFF.
Note 3: CTC2 or CTC3 cannot be used as comparators for CTH0; CTC0 or CTC1
cannot be used as comparators for CTH1.
Note 4: Do not specify "#00000" as the preset value for CTC0 through CTC3.
3-209
Visual KV
Series
14
4.2.2 Internal Clock for High-speed Counters
Visual KV
Series
Each high-speed counter (CTH) is equipped with a dedicated internal clock.

To use the internal clock, specify the appropriate relay No. as an operand for the
CTH instruction.
The internal clock or external pulses cannot be changed during program execution.
Each clock has the following count period:
High-speed counter
Relay No.
CTH0
2100
2101
2102
High-speed counter internal clock error

Absolute error: 200 ppm
Temperature coefficient: 00
Relative error between CTH0 and CTH1: 0
3-210
CTH1
2200
2201
2202
Period
1.0 s
10.0 s
100.0 s
4.3 Setting and Operation of High-speed Counters
The high-speed counters and high-speed counter comparators operate using data
specified with special utility relays.
4.3.1 Reading the Current Value of the High-speed Counter
Visual KV
Series
4.3 Setting and Operation of High-speed

Counters
The current value of a high-speed counter is normally written as 16-bit data (0 to

65535).
The range of the current value for high-speed counters is as follows:
High-speed counter
CTH0
CTH1
Current value
0 to 65535
Refer to "4.4.1 24-bit High-speed Counter" (p. 3-221) when using the 24-bit high-speed counter.
4.3.2 Preset Value of the High-speed Counter Comparator

The preset value of a high-speed counter comparator is written as 16-bit data (0 to
65535).
The relationship between high-speed counters and high-speed counter comparators
is as follows:
High-speed counter
CTH0
CTH1
High-speed counter
comparator
CTC0
CTC1
CTC2
CTC3
14
Refer to "4.4.1 24-bit High-speed Counter" (p. 3-221) when using the 24-bit high-speed counter.
4.3.3 Comparator Output

The high-speed counter comparator provides the comparator output function, which
turns ON outputs as soon as the comparator turns ON, without being affected by the
scan time.
Comparator output is controlled by setting special utility relays. The relationships
among the high-speed counters, high-speed counter comparators, and special utility
relays are as follows:
High-speed
counter
CTH0
CTH1
High-speed
counter
comparator
CTC0
CTC1
CTC2
CTC3
Special utility
relay
2104
2108
2204
2208
Setting of special utility relay

Turns output relay 0500 ON/OFF.
OFF: Yes ON: No

OFF: Yes ON: No
OFF: Yes ON: No
OFF: Yes ON: No
3-211
4.3.4 Count Input Method

Select the input source for the high-speed counter.
Visual KV
Series
When using an internal clock as input

Three types of internal clocks are provided: 1 s, 10 s, and 100 s.
Set the desired internal clock with a special utility relay.
When using external inputs as count inputs

Set special utility relays as follows:
CTH0
Operation mode
CTH1
2113
2114
2407
2213
2214
2415
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
x2
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
x4
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
2-pulse method
(Phase A: count up, phase B: count down)
ON
ON
ON
ON
0500 (CTH1) input
No multiplication
(single-phase
input)
With direction judgement

(Count up when phase B input
0006 [0007] is OFF, count down
when ON)
Without direction judgement
(Always count up by ignoring
phase B input 0006 [0007])
Phase differential
input
Operation mode
The counting method can be selected from the following when external inputs are
used.
The ring counter function is available for each counting method.
For more about the ring counter, refer to "4.4.4 Ring Counter Function" (p. 3-225).
Types of operation modes

No multiplication mode (single-phase input)
Counts up at the rising edge of phase A while phase B is OFF.
Counts down at the rising edge of phase A while phase B is ON.
With direction judgement (Special utility relay 2407: OFF)

(Phase A)
0004
(Phase B)
0006
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
(Counter value)
CTH0
Without direction judgement (Special utility relay 2407: ON)

(Phase A)
0004
(Phase B)
0006
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
(Counter value)
CTH0
Phase B input can be ignored by turning ON special utility relay 2407 (for CTH0) or
2415 (for CTH1).
3-212

Double (x2) mode:
(Phase B)
0006
ON
OFF
Visual KV
Series
(Phase A)
0004
Counts up/down based on the phase difference

between two-phase pulse inputs (phase A and
phase B).
ON
OFF
(Counter value)
CTH0
0
Quadruple (x4) mode:
(Phase A)
0004
(Phase B)
0006
Counts up/down based on the phase difference

between two-phase pulse inputs (phase A and
phase B).
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
(Counter value)
CTH0
0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
2-pulse method mode: Counts up at the rising edge of phase A and

counts down at the rising edge of phase B.
(Phase A)
0004
(Phase B)
0006
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
(Counter value)
CTH0
Count up: Rising edge of phase A

Count down: Rising edge of phase B
Note 1: Use SET-RES instructions to set the special utility relays.

Note 2: When using phase differential input, pulses with a maximum frequency of 30
When using comparator output from other counters as count input
When relay 0500 is specified as the operand for CTH1, the pulses produced by
CTH0 can be directly output from 0500 to CTH1.
In this case, input relays 0005 (phase A) and 0007 (phase B) for CTH1 can be used
as normal input relays.
ON
0500
OFF
(Counter value)
CTH1
3-213
14
Visual KV
Series
4.3.5 Resetting the High-speed Counter

Reset is an operation used to set the current value of a high-speed counter to "0".
Four types of reset operations are available: reset with input-enable relay, reset with
external input, reset automatically after counting up, and reset with the RES CTH
instruction.
Automatic reset after counting up

Resets the counter value as soon as the preset value matches the current value
(CTC = CTH).
This reset operation is independent of the scan time.
High-speed
counter
High-speed
counter
comparator
Relay No.
Operation
CTC0
2103
CTC1
2112
When special utility relays 2103 and 2112 are

turned ON, the current CTH0 value is reset as
soon as it matches the CTC0 or CTC1 preset
value.
CTC2
2203
CTC3
2212
CTH0
CTH1
When special utility relays 2203 and 2212 are

turned ON, the current CTH1 value is reset as
soon as it matches the CTC2 or CTC3 preset
value.
Note: Do not specify the same values for CTC0 and 1 (2 and 3) to automatically
reset the counter with both comparators.
Scan
CTH
CTH = CTC
CTH is reset when CTH value equals CTC value.
Reset with the RES CTH instruction

Resets the counter by writing a RES CTH instruction to the program.
This reset operation is dependent on the scan time.
Scan
CTH
Execution of RES CTH instruction
CTH is reset by the output process of the scan which executes the RES CTH
instruction.
Reset with the input-enable relay

Resets the counter at execution of CTH instruction during the scan after the inputenable relay is turned OFF.
This reset operation is dependent on the scan time.
Scan
Input-enable relay
for CTH instruction
CTH
Execution of CTH instruction
3-214
CTH is reset at execution of the CTH instruction during the scan after the inputenable relay turns OFF.
Resets the counter at the instant the external reset input relay turns ON.
The external reset is assigned to input relay 0008 (KV-10xx: 0002) for CTH0, and
input relay 0009 (KV-10xx: 0003) for CTH1.
The timing of the reset can be changed by setting relays 2400 and 2401 (for CTH0)
or 2408 and 2409 (for CTH1) as follows.
This reset operation is independent of the scan time.
High-speed
counter
CTH0
Relay No.
Status
2400
Relay No.
2408
Operation
OFF
OFF
Disables external reset operation.
ON
OFF
Resets counter at rising edge of input

0008 (KV-10xx: 0002).
ON
Resets counter at falling edge of input

0008 (KV-10xx: 0002).
ON
ON
Resets counter when input 0008

(KV-10xx: 0002) is ON.
OFF
OFF
Disables external reset operation.
OFF
Resets counter at rising edge of input

0009 (KV-10xx: 0003).
ON
Resets counter at falling edge of input

0009 (KV-10xx: 0003).
ON
Resets counter when input 0009

(KV-10xx: 0003) is ON.
OFF
2401
ON
CTH1
Status
OFF
2409
ON
Visual KV
Series
Reset with external input
Scan
External
reset input
CTH
14
CTH is reset at the instant the external reset input relay turns ON.
Preset function
The current value of CTH can be changed to any desired value by using the external
reset function of input relays 0008 (KV-10xx: 0002) (for CTH0) or 0009 (KV-10xx:
0003) (for CTH1) specified with special utility relays 2400 and 2401 (for CTH0) or
2408 and 2409 (for CTH1). (The external reset function sets the value to "0".)
Write the desired value of the preset input into the following data memories:
DM No.
Description
DM1924 (low-order bits), DM1925 (high-order bits)
Preset value for CTH0
DM1926 (low-order bits), DM1927 (high-order bits)
Preset value for CTH1
Use the STA or DW instruction to write data to the data memory.

Note 1: The preset function is available only with the external reset input. The CTH
value is reset to "0" with other resetting methods.
Note 2: Use the SET, RES instruction pair to set the special utility relays.
Note 3: When 16-bit high-speed counter is used, write the preset values into
DM1924 and DM1926 only.
3-215
4.3.6 Differences with the CTH Instruction between the

Conventional and Visual KV Series
Visual KV
Series
The Visual KV Series has some different high-speed counter operations from the
conventional KV Series [KV-10/16/24/80R(W)/T(W)].
Input-enable relay
0001
Input-enable relay
CTH0
0004
Count input
With the conventional KV Series, the current value of the high-speed counter is
reset when the CTH instruction is executed while the input-enable relay is OFF.
However, the counter continues counting until the end of the scan time. As a
result, when the input-enable relay starts counting again, the counter may already be incremented by the length of the scan time.
With the Visual KV Series, the current value of the high-speed counter is reset at
the falling edge of the input-enable relay, so that the counter does not continue
counting.
High-speed counter (CTH)

The conventional KV Series includes high-speed counter CTH0, which is an 8-bit
counter. The period of the internal clock is different from that in the new KV
Series.
The Visual KV Series allows you to reset a high-speed counter with external
inputs. Its high-speed counter CTH0 is a 16-bit counter (can also be used as 24bit counter).
With the Visual KV Series, when using the high-speed counter, the input time
constant must be set shorter by using the HSP instruction or by turning ON
special utility relay 2813.
Phase differential input

The Visual KV Series allows phase differential input for the high-speed counter.
Response frequency
The Visual KV Series provides a response frequency of 30 kHz.
High-speed counter comparator
The high-speed counter comparator turns ON the contact when its preset value
matches the current value of the high-speed counter. Consequently, the contact
may turn ON during the scan time.
Be careful when using the contact for one comparator in several points in a
program.
A portion of the special utility relay assignment is different from that of the conventional KV Series.
3-216
4.3.7 Applications of High-speed Counters

Uses two encoders to input phase differential signals to input relays 0004 and 0006,
and 0005 and 0007. Turns ON output relay 0500 if the count value of 0005 and 0007
is greater than that of 0004 and 0006 when 0004 and 0006 count "60000".
2008
EI
2113
SET
2114
RES
2213
SET
2214
RES
2002
CTH0
RES
HSP
0004
Initial setting
SET 2113
Setting for CTH0
RES 2114
SET 2213 Setting for CTH1
RES 2214
Visual KV
Series
Comparing encoder values
HSP
0005
HSP
0006
HSP
0007
0000
CTH0
0004
#60000
CTC0
CTH1
0005
END
Sets input time constant of inputs 0004,

0005, 0006, and 0007 to 10 s.
Phase differential input to inputs 0004 and

0006
Specifies preset value of CTC0 to "#60000".
Phase differential input to inputs 0005 and
0007
INT
CTC0
2002
CTH1
LDA
#60000
CMP
2009
0500
RES
2009
0500
SET
CTH0
RES
2002
CTH1
RES
Compares current value of CTH1 with

"#60000". Turns ON 0500 when value is
greater than "#60000". Turns OFF 0500
when value is smaller.
RETI
ENDH
Setting multi-level high-speed counters

Sets the preset value of the high-speed counter comparator for the high-speed
counter for input relay 0005 as follows:
#01000 DM0000
#02000 DM0001
#03000 DM0002
When the current counter value reaches one of the preset values, the respective
output turns ON as follows:
DM0000 0500 turns ON.
2008
#01000
LDA
DM0000
STA
#02000
LDA
DM0001
STA
#03000
LDA
DM0002
STA
2002
HSP
0005
0001
CTH1
0005
2002
CTH1
LDA
DM0000
CMP
2009
0500
DM0001
CMP
2009
0501
DM0002
CMP
2009
0502
3-217
14

Cording
Visual KV
Series
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
STA
CON
LDA
CON
STA
CON
LDA
CON
STA
LD
HSP
LDB
Operand
2008
#01000
DM0000
#02000
DM0001
#03000
DM0002
2002
0005
0001
Line No.
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023
0024
0025
0026
0027
0028
0029
Instruction
CTH1
LD
LDA
MPS
CMP
ANB
OUT
MRD
CMP
ANB
OUT
MPP
CMP
ANB
OUT
Operand
0005
2002
CTH1
DM0000
2009
0500
DM001
2009
0501
DM0002
2009
0502
Clearing the current value of the high-speed counter

Counts pulses at input relay 0005. When the current value reaches the preset value
"60000", clears the current value of high-speed counter CTH1 and turns ON output
relay 0502 for 3 seconds.
Cording
2203
SET
2008
2002
4
2002
CTC2
3-218
0502
#00030
T001
T001
CTH1
RES
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
0000
LD
2008
HSP
0005
0001
SET
2203
0002
CON
CTH1
0005
0003
RES
0004
LD
2002
#60000
CTC2
0005
HSP
0005
CTC2
RES
CTH
0006
LD
2002
0007
CTH1
0005
0008
CTC2
#60000
0009
LD
CTC2
0010
OUT
0502
0011
CON
0012
TMR
0013
CON
0015
AND
T001
0016
RES
CTC2
001 #00030
Inputs phase differential signals from input relays 0004 and 0006 and counts
pulses at CTH0.
The count value is written to DM0000.
When the current value of CTH0 reaches "60000", clears the value, turns ON
output 0500, and stops counting at CTH0.
Input relay 0008 is used as an external reset.
2008
EI
2103
SET
2113
SET
2114
RES
2400
SET
2401
RES
CTH0
RES
Initial setting
Visual KV
Series
Phase differential input
HSP
0004
2002
HSP
0006
HSP
0008
CTH0
0004
0500
#60000
CTC0
2002
CTH0
LDA
DM0000
STA
END
INT
CTC0
2002
0500
SET
RETI
ENDH
Cording
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
Instruction
LD
EI
CON
SET
CON
SET
CON
RES
CON
SET
CON
RES
CON
RES
LD
HSP
Operand
2008
2103
2113
2114
2400
2401
CTH0
2002
0004
Line No.
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023
0024
0025
0026
0027
0028
0029
0030
Instruction
HSP
HSP
LDB
CTH
CTC
LD
LDA
CON
STA
END
INT
LD
SET
RETI
ENDH
Operand
0006
0008
0500
0 0004
0 #60000
2002
CTH0
DM0000
CTC0
2002
0500
Initial setting
Turn ON 2013 to reset the current value of CTH0 when CTC0 turns ON.
Turn ON 2113 and turn OFF 2114 to set the high-speed counter to double (x2)
multiplication mode.
Turn ON 2400 and turn OFF 2401 to enable the external reset.
The counter is reset at the rising edge of input 0008.

Note : External reset input 0008 is set with hardware. Programming is not necessary
except for setting the external reset enable relays (2400 to ON and 2401 to OFF).
3-219
14
Fetching counts from encoder
Visual KV
Series
Uses the double (x2) multiplication mode to fetch phase differential input from the
encoder.
The fetched data is output as BCD data. Phase differential input: 0004, 0006 BCD
output: 0600 to 0615 (4 digits)
2008
2103
SET
2113
SET
2114
RES
CTH0
RES
2400
SET
Initial setting
HSP
0004
2002
HSP
0006
HSP
0008
CTH0
0004
0000
2002 #00000 TM00
LDA
STA
CTH0 #00002
LDA
DIV TBCD
0600
STA
END
ENDH
Cording
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
0 0004
0000
LD
2008
0015
CTH
0001
SET
2103
0016
LD
2002
0002
CON
0017
LDA
#0000
0018
CON
0019
STA
0003
SET
0004
CON
0005
RES
0006
CON
0007
RES
0008
CON
0009
SET
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
2113
2114
CTH0
0020
CON
0021
LDA
0022
CON
0023
DIV
2400
0024
CON
LD
2002
0025
TBCD
HSP
0004
0026
CON
HSP
0006
0027
STA
HSP
0008
0028
END
LD
0000
0029
ENDH
TM00
CTH0
#00002
0600
Initial setting
Turn ON 2013 to reset the current value of CTH0 when CTC0 turns ON.
Turn ON 2113 and turn OFF 2114 to set the high-speed counter to double (x2)
Turn ON 2400 to enable the external reset.
The counter is reset at the rising edge of input 0008.

Note : The external reset input 0008 is set with hardware. Programming is not
necessary except for setting the external reset enable relay (2400 to ON).
3-220
4.4 Expanded Functions of High-speed Counters
This section describes the 24-bit high-speed counter and ring counter functions.
4.4.1 24-bit High-speed Counter

Normally, the high-speed counter operates with 16 bits. You can operate the counter
with 24 bits (0 to 16777215) using special utility relays.
Set the 24-bit operation with the MEMSW instruction.
Visual KV
Series
4.4 Extended Functions of High-speed

Counters Visual KV Series Only
"MEMSW instruction" (p. 3-92)
MEMSW instruction: SW3

No.
Function of switch
ON
OFF
Setting 24-bit/16-bit counter

comparator for CTH0
24-bit
16-bit
MEMSW instruction: SW4

No.
Function of switch
ON
OFF
Setting 24-bit/16-bit counter

comparator for CTH1
24-bit
16-bit
The following data memories are used for 24-bit operation.

Read areas
DM No.
Description
DM No.
14
Description
DM1900
Low-order bits of current

CTH0 value
DM1906
Low-order bits of preset

CTC1 value
DM1901
High-order bits of current

CTH0 value
DM1907
High-order bits of preset

CTC1 value
DM1902

CTH1 value
DM1908

CTC2 value
DM1903

CTH1 value
DM1909

CTC2 value
DM1904
Low-order bits of preset CTC0

value
DM1910

CTC3 value
DM1905

CTC0 value
DM1911

CTC3 value
Write areas
DM No.
Description
DM No.
Description
DM1912

CTH0 value
DM1918

CTC1 value
DM1913

CTH0 value
DM1919

CTC1 value
DM1914

CTH1 value
DM1920

CTC2 value
DM1915

CTH1 value
DM1921

CTC2 value
DM1916

CTC0 value
DM1922

CTC3 value
DM1917

CTC0 value
DM1923

CTC3 value
3-221

The high-speed counter and high-speed counter comparator update the contents of
the read area of data memory each scan time.
At the start of an interrupt routine, the current value is updated. The contents of the
write area of data memory is updated with the data write operation.
Visual KV
Series
"Setting the 24-bit high-speed counter comparator" (below) and "4.4.2 Changing the Current Value of
a 24-bit High-speed Counter" (p. 3-223)
Note 1: Use the SET, RES instruction pair to set the special utility relays.
Note 2: The 16-bit/24-bit high-speed counter setting with the MEMSW instruction is
effective when the Visual KV is in RUN mode.
You must change the program to change between 16-bit and 24-bit settings.
Setting the 24-bit high-speed counter comparator

To specify the preset value for the 24-bit high-speed counter comparator, write the
value into the write area DM1916 to DM1923 and execute the STA and CTC instructions to specify or change the preset value.
When the setting or change is properly performed, the CTC read areas DM1904
through DM1911 are updated with the new values after one scan.
Changing the preset value
Change the preset value for the 24-bit high-speed counter comparator using the
Access Window, programming support software, handheld programmer, or operator
panel with the following procedure.
1. Write the desired preset value into data memory.
Write the desired preset value to the CTC preset value write areas DM1916
through DM1923.
2. Change the preset value of CTC. (See the notes on the next page.)
With the Access Window
Call CTC in device mode and change the value.
With the "KV IncrediWare (DOS)" programming support software

Change the preset value of CTC with the "Edit Device CTC" [F2] option.
With the "LADDER BUILDER for KV" programming support software

Change the preset value of CTC in the dialog box.
With the KV-P3E(01) handheld programmer

Change the preset value of CTC with the "TIMER COUNTER SETTING
CHANGE" function.
For more about detailed operation, refer to "Chapter 3 Access Window" (p. 1-79), "Chapter 6
Handheld Programmer" (p. 1-195) and "Chapter 2 Instructions" (p. 3-33).
Note 1: When the preset value of a 24-bit CTC is changed with an instruction such
as STA CTC0, the value entered as an operand is ignored but the value written in
DM1916 through DM1923 is referred to and used as the preset value.
Note 2: Be sure to write the desired value to the write area of the high-speed
counter comparator preset value (DM1916 through DM1923) before executing the
change operation (e.g., STA instruction).
3-222
Change the current value of the 24-bit high-speed counter with the Access Window,
programming support software, handheld programmer, or operator panel with the
following procedure.
1. Write the desired current value into data memory.
Write the desired current value to the CTH current value write areas DM1912
through DM1915.
Visual KV
Series
4.4.2 Changing the Current Value of a 24-bit High-speed

Counter
2. Change the current value of CTH. (See notes below.)

With the Access Window
Call CTH in device mode and change the value.
With the "KV IncrediWare (DOS)" programming support software

Change the preset value of CTH with the "Edit Device CTH" [F2] option.
With the "LADDER BUILDER for KV" programming support software

Change the preset value of CTH in the dialog box.
With the KV-P3E(01) handheld programmer

Change the preset value of CTH with the "TIMER COUNTER CURRENT VALUE
CHANGE" function.
For more about detailed operation, refer to "Chapter 3 Access Window" (p.1-79), "Chapter 6
Handheld Programmer" (p.1-195) and "Chapter 2 Instructions" (p.3-33).
Note 1: The current value of the high-speed counter cannot be changed in the
ladder program.
Note 2: DM1900 to DM1923, the data memories for 24-bit high-speed counters, can
be used only when a 24-bit high-speed counter is specified with the MEMSW instruction.
3-223
14
4.4.3 Application Example of 24-bit High-speed Counter

(single-phase input)
Visual KV
Series
The following is a ladder program using a 24-bit high-speed counter and high-speed
counter comparator with a preset value of "1000000".
MEMSW
$0800
0001
0002
0003
0004
2008
2002
#00015 DM1917 #16960 DM1916

LDA
STA
LDA
STA
High-order 16 bits of
high-speed counter
comparator
CTH0
RES
2)
HSP
0004
3)
CTH0
0004
4)
#65535
CTC0
5)
DM1901 DM0001 DM1900 DM0000

STA
LDA
STA
LDA
6)
Low-order 16 bits of
high-speed counter
comparator
CTC0
STA
Writes preset value of
high-speed counter
comparator
2002
0005
0006
2002
0007
High-order 16 bits of
current value of highspeed counter
Low-order 16 bits of
current value of highspeed counter
0008
END
ENDH
1) Sets CTH0 as the 24-bit high-speed counter with the MEWSW instruction. (Turn
on 3 of SW3.)
2) When power is turned on, writes the preset value "1000000" of the high-speed
counter comparator (CTC0) and sets the value with the STA CTC0 instruction.
3) Sets the input time constant of input relay 0004 to 10 s.

4) Counts pulses at input relay 0004 with high-speed counter CTH0.
5) Defines a dummy high-speed counter comparator.
6) Reads the current value of CTH0 into data memory DM0000 (low-order bits) and
DM0001 (high-order bits) each scan time.
3-224
1)
4.4.4 Ring Counter Function
Visual KV
Series
Normally, the counter reads "#65535 ($FFFF)" by counting down from "0" by one.
The ring counter function is an additional function of the automatic clear function. It
reads "preset value - 1" when it counts down from "0" by one.
Operation of the ring counter function
Normal counter
0
65535
Ring counter
0
CTC1 -1
65535
( CTC3 -1)
Not used
Setting procedure
When setting the ring counter, use CTC1 for CTH0 and CTC3 for CTH1.
Set the upper limit (preset value) to CTC1 or CTC3 and turn ON special utility
relay 2406 (for CTH0) or 2414 (for CTH1). The ring counter is set to read "CTC1/
CTC3 preset value - 1" when it counts down from "0" by one.
To use the ring counter for both counting up/down operations, turn ON special
utility relay 2112 (for CTH0) or 2212 (for CTH1).
High-speed counter
High-speed counter comparator
When CTH0 is used
Set "upper limit value + 1" to CTC1. Turn ON 2406.
When CTH1 is used
Set "upper limit value + 1" to CTC3. Turn ON 2414.
14
Note 1: Use the SET-RES instruction pair to set the special utility relays.
Note 2: The flag or the count-up interrupt for each CTC is effective in counting up
operations, but is disabled in counting down operations.
Example: When CTC = 100
Count
up
Count
down
Turns ON.
CTC
Does not turn ON.
CTH
0
97
98
99
99
98
97
3-225
4.4.5 Applications of Ring Counters

When using a 16-bit high-speed counter
Visual KV
Series
The following is a ladder program that uses the ring counter of a 16-bit high-speed
counter with the preset value of "10000".
0001
0002
9999
2008
EI
2113
SET
2114
RES
2406
SET
Sets ring
Sets high-speed counter in
counter.
double (x2) multiplication mode.
2002
2112
SET
0004
HSP
0006
2002
0005
0006
0500
#00010
T000
T000
CTH0
0004
3)
#10000
CTC1
4)
0500
RES
5)
INT
CTC1
0008
0009
2)
END
0007
1)
Automatic reset
of high-speed
HSP
counter
0003
0004
CTH0
RES
2002
0010
0011
0500
SET
6)
RETI
ENDH
1) When the power is turned on, an EI instruction enables interrupts. Sets highspeed counter CTH0 in double (x2) multiplication mode, CTH0 as a ring counter,
and the high-speed counter automatic reset function at counting up. Resets the
high-speed counter.
2) Sets the input time constant for input relays 0004 and 0006 to 10 s.
3) Counts 2-phase pulses of input relays 0004 and 0006 at CTH0.
4) Sets the preset value of high-speed counter comparator CTC1 to "10000".
5) Output relay 0500 turns ON for 1 second and then turns OFF.
6) When CTC1 turns ON, an interrupt is executed. Output relay 0500 turns ON.
3-226
When using a 24-bit high-speed counter
Visual KV
Series
The following is a ladder program that uses the ring counter of a 24-bit high-speed
counter with the preset value of "100000".
99999
MEMSW
$0800
0001
0002
2008
EI
2114
RES
2406
SET
Sets high-speed
counter in double (x2)
Sets ring
counter.
CTH0
RES
2112
SET
High-order 16
bits of highspeed counter
comparator
2002
2)
Automatic reset of
high-speed counter
#00001 DM1919 #34464 DM1918

LDA
STA
LDA
STA
0003
0004
2113
SET
1)
Low-order 16
bits of highspeed counter
comparator
CTC1
STA
3)
Writes preset
value of highspeed counter
comparator.
HSP
0004
4)
HSP
0006
0005
0006
2002
0007
0008
0500
#00010
T000
T000
5)
#65535
CTC1
6)
0500
RES
7)
END
0009
INT
CTC1
0010
0011
CTH0
0004
0500
SET
2002
8)
RETI
0012
ENDH
0013
1) Sets CTH0 as a 24-bit high-speed counter using the MEMSW instruction (Turn
on 3 of SW3.).
2) When the power is turned on, an EI instruction enables interrupts. Sets highspeed counter CTH0 in double (x2) multiplication mode, CTH0 as a ring counter,
and high-speed counter automatic reset function at counting up. Resets the highspeed counter.
3) Writes the preset value "100000" of high-speed counter comparator (CTC1) for
the 24-bit high-speed counter (CTH0). Sets the preset value with the STA CTC0
instruction.
4) Sets the input time constant for input relays 0004 and 0006 to 10 s.
5) Counts 2-phase pulses of input relays 0004 and 0006 at CTH0.
6) Describes a dummy high-speed counter comparator.
7) Output relay 0500 turns ON for 1 second and then turns OFF.
8) When CTC1 turns ON, an interrupt is executed. Output relay 0500 turns ON.
3-227
14
4.5 Special Functions Using High-speed Counters
Visual KV
Series
4.5 Special Functions Using High-speed

Counters Visual KV Series Only
This section describes the specified frequency pulse output function, frequency
counter function, and cam switch function.
4.5.1 Specified Frequency Pulse Output Function

With high-speed counter CTH1, output pulses from output relay 0501 with the
frequency (Hz) specified in data memory DM1936. To activate this function, write the
desired value into DM1936 and turn ON special utility relay 2306.
The internal clock of the high-speed counter is automatically set to 1 s. Pulses with
duty ratio of 1:1 are output at the preset frequency obtained with the calculation
"1,000,000/2/Output frequency".
The KV performs the following operations after each scan time during the specified
frequency pulse output function.
Stops pulse output when special utility relay 2306 is turned OFF.
Sets the preset value so that pulses are output at the frequency specified with
the DM. (Pulse duty ratio: fixed to 50%)
Starts pulse output.
Pulse duty
Pulse duty is the ratio of the pulse widths between ON time and OFF time. A pulse
duty of 50% means that the pulse widths between ON time and OFF time are the
same, as follows.
ON
OFF
The ratio between ON and OFF time is 1:1.
Device used for specified frequency pulse output

Relay No.
Description
2306
Use specified frequency pulse output. ON: Yes, OFF: No Function

is forced OFF when error relay 2307 turns ON.
2307
Error flag for specified frequency pulse output function.

Turns ON when contents of DM1936 is other than 16 to 50000.
Data memory
DM No.
DM1936
3-228
Description
Preset value for specified frequency pulse output is written.
Setting method
Set the desired output frequency (Hz) into DM1936. The available range is 16 Hz
to 50 kHz (16 to 50000).
Pulses are output when special utility relay 2306 is ON. The output is stopped
when the relay is turned OFF.
If an unacceptable frequency is specified, special utility relay 2307 (error relay)
turns ON. Special utility relay 2306 is turned OFF and pulse output is stopped.
Note 1: The available minimum frequency specified in DM1936 is 16 Hz.
Note 2: The output is stopped when a value of 15 or less is specified in DM1936.
Note 3: Starts and stops of pulse output or frequency changes are executed after
each scan.
Note 4: It takes a maximum of 200 s from when the output command is issued until
pulses are output.
Note 5: CTH1 and special utility relays 2200 through 2215 cannot be used when the
specified frequency pulse output function is used.
Visual KV
Series
4.5.2 Applications of the Specified Frequency Pulse Output

Program using a digital trimmer
The following ladder program illustrates how to use a digital trimmer to output pulses
at a desired frequency (16 Hz to 10 kHz).
Pulse output is stopped when the value of the digital trimmer decreases to 15 or
less.
0001
0002
0003
2008
2002
2306
SET
#10000 DM1938
LDA
STA
0
TMIN
1)
DM1936
2)
STA
0500
2307
3)
END
0004
ENDH
0005
1) Sets the upper limit of the digital trimmer to "10000" and turns ON special utility
relay 2306 to start the specified frequency pulse output.
2) Sets the input value of the digital trimmer as the output frequency value.
3) Output relay 0500 turns ON when a setting error occurs.
3-229
14
Visual KV
Series
Program for speed control

The following ladder program illustrates speed control using the specified frequency
pulse output function.
Control is started when input relay 0000 turns ON. The operation is slowed down
and then stopped when input relay 0001 turns ON.
By specifying the speed (Hz) in data memory DM0000, the program controls the
speed with a start-up speed of 16 Hz and an acceleration speed of 100 Hz/100 ms.
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0000
1000
DIFU
1000
0001
1001
DIFU
1001
1101
1100
T000
#00016 DM0000 DM1936

LDA
STA
CMP
2306
RES
1100
RES
DM1936 DM0000
LDA
CMP
2009
2011
1100
SET
1)
1101
SET
2)
1101
RES
3)
#00100
T
S 000
4)
00
CALL
5)
01
CALL
0500
2307
0008
END
0009
SBN
00
0010
2002
DM0000 DM1936 #00100

LDA
SUB
CMP
2011
TM02
STA
DM1936
LDA
TM02
ADD
7)
DM1936
STA
RET
0012
SBN
01
0013
0014
6)
DM1936 #00100 DM1936

LDA
ADD
STA
2011
0011
2010
2306
SET
T000
0006
0007
#00016 DM1936
LDA
STA
2002
DM1936 DM0000 #00100

LDA
SUB
CMP
0015
0016
0017
2011
2011
TM02
STA
DM1936
LDA
TM02
SUB
8)
DM1936
STA
DM1936 #00100 DM1936

LDA
SUB
STA
RET
ENDH
1) Sets "16" as the preset speed at the rising edge of input relay 0000. Turns ON
special utility relay 2306 to start the specified frequency pulse output. Then, turns
ON the operating flag.
2) Turns ON slow-down-stop flag 1101 at the rising edge of input 0001.
3) When the slow-down-stop flag turns ON, sets the preset speed to "16". When the
output frequency reaches "16", turns OFF the operation start flag, operating flag,
and slow-down-stop flag.
4) Activates a 100-ms flicker circuit while the operating flag turns ON.
5) Compares the current speed and preset speed every 100 ms. Executes subroutine 0 when the preset speed is faster, and executes subroutine 1 when the
preset speed is slower.
6) Output relay 0500 turns ON when a setting error occurs.
7) Acceleration process. When the current speed is slower than the preset speed by
less than "100", the speed is accelerated by the difference. When the difference
is "100" or more, the speed is accelerated by "100".
8) Deceleration process. When the current speed is faster than the preset speed by
less than "100", the speed is decelerated by the difference. When the difference
is "100" or more, the speed is decelerated by "100".
3-230
High-speed counter CTH0 is used. Write the interval (ms) of frequency measurement into data memory DM1404 and turn ON special utility relay 2305. The measurement result (Hz) is written into DM1405.
Input relay 0004 is for pulse input (single-phase input). Input relay 0006 (phase B
input) is ignored.
Devices used with the frequency counter
Relay No.
2305
Visual KV
Series
4.5.3 Frequency Counter Function
Description
Use frequency counter. ON: Yes, OFF: No
Data memory
DM No.
Description
DM1404
Measurement cycle (ms) of frequency counter [1 to 1000]
DM1405
Result of frequency count (Hz) of frequency counter
Operation flow
1. Set the high-speed counter with external input. Use the END instruction and
measure how much time has elapsed since the last measurement in units of 10
s. After each scan, pulses are counted within the time specified with the data
memory. The frequency is calculated from the count value and written into data
memory.
2. When the time specified with DM1404 elapses from the last measurement, the
current value of CTH0 is fetched and divided by the elapsed time (Unit: 10 s).
The frequency is obtained with the following calculation.
Frequency (Hz) = (100,000 x Pulse count)/Elapsed time (Unit: 10 s)
3. The calculation result (Hz) is written into DM1405.
Setting method
1. Specify the counting period for the frequency counter (the interval of frequency
measurement [Unit: ms]) in data memory DM1404.
2. The preset value must be greater than the scan time. When a value smaller than
the scan time is specified, the frequency is measured each scan time.
Note 1: To use the frequency counter function, set the input time constant to 10 s
with the HSP instruction or the special utility relay. (A maximum frequency of 30 kHz
can be measured.).
Note 2: The counting start/stop or measurement result is updated after each scan.
Therefore, the counting period includes some scan time errors for the time specified
with DM1404. Set the counting period so that overflow does not occur at CTH.
Note 3: Specify the counting period so that the number of pulse inputs in one period
is between 2 and 65535, inclusive.
Note 4: Measurement may fail when the pulse period is 5000 ms or more.
Note 5: The frequency counter cannot be used when CTH0 is used in the ladder
program.
Note 6: Special utility relays concerning CTH0, CTC0/1, and the cam switch cannot
be used.
Note 7: CTH0 and the cam switch function cannot be used when the frequency
counter is used.
3-231
14
4.5.4 Applications of Frequency Counters
Visual KV
Series
Program for basic operation of the frequency counter

Stores the frequency of pulses at input relay 0004 to DM0000 every second (1000
ms). (Unit: Hz)
0001
0002
0003
2008
#01000 DM1404
LDA
STA
2002
2002
2305
SET
1)
HSP
0004
2)
DM1405 DM0000
3)
LDA
STA
END
0004
ENDH
0005
1) Sets the counting period to "1000 ms (1 second)" and turns ON special utility
relay 2305 to start the frequency counter function.
2) Sets the input time constant for input relay 0004 to 10 s.
3) Stores the measured frequency (Hz) into data memory DM0000.
Program for synchronous control
The following ladder program illustrates synchronous control using the frequency
counter and pulse output functions.
Measures the frequency of pulses at input relay 0004 every 100 ms and outputs
pulses of the same frequency from output relay 0501.
4
0001
0002
0003
0004
2008
2002
2002
2307
0005
0006
#00100 DM1404
LDA
STA
2305
SET
2306
SET
1)
HSP
0004
2)
DM1405 DM1936
LDA
STA 3)
0500
4)
END
ENDH
1) Sets the counting period to "100 ms" and turns ON special utility relays 2305 and
2306 to start the frequency counter and the specified frequency pulse output
functions.
3) Uses the measured frequency (Hz) as the preset value for the output frequency
(Hz).
4) Turns on output relay 0500 when an error occurs in the setting of the specified
frequency pulse output.
3-232
4.5.5 Cam Switch Function
Visual KV
Series
The cam switch function has two modes: cam switch mode, which simulates cam
operation; and multi-step comparator mode, which compares the value written in
DM1401 with multiple values.
Devices used with the cam switch function
Relay No.
2314
2315
2715
Description
Start relay
Error relay
In-operation relay
The preset value in the data memory is registered at the rising edge of the start
relay. When the preset value is changed, turn OFF special utility relay 2314 once
and then turn it ON again to register the new value.
Timing diagram of cam switch function
Start relay
2314
In-operation
relay
2715
Cam switch
Stopped
function

Executed
Stopped
Operation with the ladder program.

Operation automatically executed by the Visual KV.
Description: When start relay 2314 is turned ON, the Visual KV automatically turns OFF
start relay 2314 and turns ON in-operation relay 2715 to activate the cam
switch function.
When in-operation relay 2715 is turned OFF, the cam switch function is
stopped.

:
Cam switch mode

Simulates a cam operation.
Connect an encoder to CTH0 to count pulses in double multiplication mode.
CTH0 uses input relays 0004 (phase A), 0006 (phase B) (KV-10xx: 0000), and 0008
(phase Z) (KV-10xx: 0002).
Relays are turned ON/OFF when the pulse count reaches the specified angle.
The cam switch function controls a maximum of 32 successive relays. Specify relay
Nos. with the data memory (DM1400). Each relay is turned ON/OFF once every
rotation. To turn relays ON/OFF several times in one rotation, use the OR instruction
in the ladder program.
Devices used in cam switch mode
Data memory
DM No.
Description
DM1400
Stores initial address of output relays (Values other than 1900

through 2900 whose last two digits are 00.).
DM1402
Twice the pulse numbers for one rotation of the device connected to
CTH0 (1 to 65534)
DM1406/DM1407
DM1408/ DM1409
Angle at which first output relay turns ON/OFF (Unit: 0.1 deg.)
(0 to 65534)
Angle at which second relay turns ON/OFF (Unit: 0.1 deg.)
(0 to 65534)
DM1468/DM1469
DM1470
Angle at which 32nd relay turns ON/OFF (Unit: 0.1 deg.)

(0 to 65534)
Reserved for system use
3-233
14
Multi-step comparator mode
Visual KV
Series
Even a single phase incoder can be used by changing a part of the cam switch
function.
To activate the multi-step comparator mode, write the value to be compared into
data memory DM1401 to replace the CTH0 value. This value determines the resolution. If 360 is written in DM1401, and 60 is written in DM1406, the 1st relay is turned
ON at 60/360 i.e. 60.
Devices used in multi-step comparator mode
Data memory
DM No.
Description
DM1400
Stores initial address of output relays (Values other than 1900

through 2900 whose last two digits are 00.).
DM1401
Value to be compared (0 to 65534)
DM1402
Enter "65535" to use multi-stage comparator mode.
DM1406/DM1407
Preset value at which first output relay turns ON/OFF (0 to 65534)
DM1408/ DM1409
Preset value at which second relay turns ON/OFF (0 to 65534)
DM1468/DM1469
DM1470
Preset value at which 32nd relay turns ON/OFF (0 to 65534)

Reserved for system use
Setting method
In cam switch mode
1. Write the initial number of output relays to be used into DM1400.
Be sure to write the initial relay number of each channel.
Example
0500, 0600: Acceptable, 0501, 0610: Unacceptable
2. Write the number of pulses in two pulse-periods of the encoder connected to

CTH0 into DM1402. (Twice the number of pulses for one rotation.)
3. Specify the angle at which the first relay turns ON (Unit: 0.1 deg.) into
DM1406. Use units of 0.1 deg. to specify the preset angle for the cam switch
mode. (Write the value of [Desired angle x 10] into data memory.)
4. Specify the angle at which the first relay turns OFF (Unit: 0.1 deg.) into
DM1407.
5. Specify the angle at which the second relay turns ON (Unit: 0.1 deg.) into
DM1408.
6. Specify the angle at which the second relay turns OFF (Unit: 0.1 deg.) into
DM1409.
7. Repeat steps 3 through 6 as many times as the number of relays to be used (32
relays max.).
8. Turn ON special utility relay 2314.
This relay automatically turns OFF when the cam switch function is activated.
9. Turn OFF special utility relay 2715 to stop the operation.
In multi-step comparator mode
1. Write the initial number of output relays to be used into DM1400.
Be sure to write the initial relay number of each channel.
Example
0500, 0600: Acceptable, 0501, 0610: Unacceptable
2. Write the value to be compared into DM1401, and write "65535" into DM1402.
3. Specify the preset value at which the first relay turns ON into DM1406.
4. Specify the preset value at which the first relay turns OFF into DM1407.
3-234

5. Specify the preset value at which the second relay turns ON into DM1408.
6. Specify the preset value at which the second relay turns OFF into DM1409.
8. Turn ON special utility relay 2314.

This relay automatically turns OFF when the cam switch function is activated.
9. Turn OFF special utility relay 2715 to stop the operation.
Note 1: When the cam switch function is used, 32 relays from the relay No. specified with DM1400 is occupied for the function regardless of whether they are used or
not. As a result, these relays cannot be used for any other purpose.
Note 2: To use the cam switch mode, set the input time constant to 10 s with the
HSP instruction or the special utility relay. (A maximum frequency of 30 kHz can be
measured.)
Note 3: When any improper value is set in data memory, the setting error occurs
and special utility relay 2315 turns ON.
Note 4: CTH0 and the frequency counter function cannot be used while the cam
switch function is being used.
Note 5: The cam switch function cannot be used when CTH0 is used in the ladder
program.
Note 6: Special utility relays concerning CHT0, CTC0/1, and the frequency counter
function cannot be used.
Note 7: The scan time is extended by a maximum of 16 ms when the cam switch
function is activated.
Note 8: The in-operation relay of the cam switch function (2715) remains ON even
when the mode is changed or the power is turned OFF.
Note 9: Use the END instruction to change relays or turn them ON/OFF.
Note 10: When the encoder is ON in cam switch mode while the KV is OFF, the
count may be shifted for the time between the start-up and phase Z input.
Note 11: The encoder count is stopped in cam switch mode while the Visual KV is
OFF. (While the Visual KV is ON, the count is continued even in PROGRAM mode.)
Note 12: When a value of 360 or more is specified as the preset angle for the cam
switch function, the value is converted into one within the range of 0 to 360 before
the control.
Example: When 500 is specified, it is converted to 140.
3-235
Visual KV
Series
7. Repeat steps 3 through 6 as many times as the number of relays to be used (32
relays max.).
14
4.5.6 Application of the Cam Switch (Cam Switch Mode)
Visual KV
Series
The following ladder program illustrates the basic setting of the cam switch function.
Connect the encoder with a resolution of 360 pulses.
Use output relays 0600 through 0603.
Output relay 0600: Turns ON within the range 30 to 90
0001
2008
0002
0003
2002
#00600 DM1400 #00720 DM1402

LDA
STA
LDA
STA
#00300 #00900 #00450 #00800 #00700 #01500 #01200 #02700
DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DM1406 DM1407 DM1408 DM1409 DM1410 DM1411 DM1412 DM1413
HSP
0004
2)
3)
0004
HSP
0006
4)
0005
HSP
0008
5)
0006
0007
0000
0001
1000
DIFU
1000
1001
DIFU
1001
2314
SET
6)
2715
RES
7)
END
0008
ENDH
0009
1)
1) Sets "0600", which is the initial number of relays used for the cam switch function, to
DM1400 and sets twice the number of pulses for one encoder rotation (360 x 2 = 720) to
DM1402.
2) Specifies the preset angles at which output relays 0600 through 0603 turn ON/OFF.
6) The cam switch operation starts when input relay 0000 turns ON.
7) The cam switch operation stops when input relay 0001 turns ON.
3600
(360)
30 DM1406
45 DM1408
70 DM1410
80 DM1409
270
DM1413
90 DM1407
120 DM1412
150 DM1412
Timing Diagram
DM1406
1st relay 0600
ON
OFF
DM1407
DM1408
DM1409
2nd relay 0601 ON

OFF
3rd relay 0602 ON
OFF
DM1410
DM1412
4th relay 0603 ON

OFF
0
3-236
DM1411
90
DM1413
180
270
360
Rotation ()
4.6 Direct Clock Pulse Output
Visual KV Series Only
4.6.1 Outline of Direct Clock Pulse Output

Using the high-speed counter (CTH) and high-speed counter comparator (CTC), the
KV PLC can output clock pulses directly through output relays 0500 and/or 0501
without any delays caused by the scan time.
Visual KV
Series
This section describes the outline and setting method for direct clock pulse output.
The period (frequency) and width of the pulses are determined by the period of the
internal clock used for the high-speed counter (CTH) and high-speed counter comparator (CTC).
The period of the clock pulse (frequency) can be changed with the program within
the following ranges.
Output
Internal clock
0500
0501
Range of pulse period (Frequency)
2100 (1.0 s)
20 s (50 kHz) to 65.5 ms (15 Hz)
2101 (10.0 s)
20 s (50 kHz) to 655.3 ms (1.5 Hz)
2102 (100.0 s)
200 s (5 kHz) to 6553.5 ms (0.15 Hz)
2200 (1.0 s)
20 s (50 kHz) to 65.5 ms (15 Hz)
2201 (10.0 s)
20 s (50 kHz) to 655.3 ms (1.5 Hz)
2202 (100.0 s)
200 s (5 kHz) to 6553.5 ms (0.15 Hz)
Pulses of the internal clock are counted with the high-speed counter (CTH). When
the number of current pulses reaches the preset value of the high-speed counter
comparator (CTC), the ON/OFF status of output relays 0500 and/or 0501 is toggled
to output direct clock pulses.
Count value
CTC
ON
ON
Note 1: The operation of output relays 0500 and 0501 are determined by setting the
special utility relays.
Note 2: For more about setting special utility relays, refer to "4.2 Outline of Highspeed Counters" on page 3-206.
Note 3: The ON/OFF status when the direct clock pulse output is started is the
same as when the last direct clock pulse output is stopped. (Initial status: OFF)
Note 4: Output relays 0500 and 0501 cannot be used in a normal program during
direct clock pulse output.
3-237
14
4.6.2 Pulse Output Setting with the High-speed Counter

Comparator
Visual KV
Series
Changing the pulse period and width

By using two high-speed counter comparators, you can change only the pulse width
while keeping the pulse period constant, or change only the pulse period while
keeping the pulse width constant.
The following examples illustrate how the pulse width and period can be selected
with the high-speed counter comparator.
ON-OFF ratio of 1:1
ON/OFF status is set by special utility relays.
ON
OFF
Pulse width
Pulse period
Pulse width (s) = CTC0 preset value x internal clock (s)

Pulse period (s) = CTC0 preset value x 2 x internal clock (s)
Use the following calculation to obtain the pulse period from the frequency:
Pulse period (s) = 1,000,000/Frequency (Hz)
Example:
To output 10-kHz pulses

Pulse period = 1,000,000 10,000 = 100 s
Preset value for CTC0 = 10 2 1 = 50
Variable pulse width

The period and width of the pulse can be changed by changing the preset values of
CTC0 and CTC1.
ON
OFF
Pulse
width
Pulse period
Pulse width (s) = CTC1 preset value x internal clock (s)

Pulse period (s) = CTC0 preset value x internal clock (s)
Change CTC1 preset value to change the pulse width.

Change CTC0 preset value to change the pulse period.
Note: The pulse width determined above is the pulse width produced inside the
Visual KV PLC. In reality, the output pulse width may vary depending on the response delay of the output circuit and the load connected to this circuit. Be sure to
determine the pulse width after monitoring the actual output waveform with an
oscilloscope. (Monitor the pulses of variable pulse width.)
3-238
Calculating the pulse period and comparator preset value
Pulse period
Pulse period (s) = 1,000,000 Frequency (Hz)
CTC preset value for pulses with 1:1 ON/OFF ratio (using one comparator)
CTC preset value = Pulse period (s) Internal clock (s) 2
Visual KV
Series
The Visual KV PLC can output a maximum clock pulse of 50 kHz.

Use the following calculations to obtain the pulse period and preset value of the
high-speed counter comparator used to output the clock pulse.
ON
Pulse
width
OFF
Pulse period
CTC preset value for pulses with variable pulse width

CTC preset value for pulse width = Pulse width (s) Internal clock (s)
CTC preset value for pulse period = Pulse period (s) Internal clock (s)
ON
OFF
Pulse
width
Pulse period
Range of CTC preset value with the internal clock

Special utility relay (internal clock)
Period
Range of CTC preset value
2100
2200
1.0 s
10 to 65535
2101
2201
10.0 s
1 to 65535
2102
2202
100.0 s
1 to 65535
Note 1: Set the CTC preset value to 10 or more when the operands for the highspeed counter (CTH) is 2100 and 2200. The clock pulse output may be improper
when the preset value is set to less than 10.
Note 2: The pulse width may vary depending on the load connected to the circuit.
Be sure to determine the pulse width after monitoring actual output waveform with
an oscilloscope.
Note 3: When CTC0 and CTC1, or CTC2 and CTC3, are used to output the clock
pulse, do not specify the same value for the preset values of CTC0 and CTC1, or of
CTC2 and CTC3.
Operation with special utility relays

Operation with special utility relays for high-speed counter CTH0
The following table shows the ON/OFF status of output relay 0500 which can be
changed by setting special utility relays (2103 through 2112) at the start of operation, or by changing them during clock pulse output.
You can set desired values for the pulse period and pulse width, and can enable or
disable the direct output.
Operation of output relay 0500 when special utility relays are ON/OFF
3-239
14
Visual KV
Series
High-speed
counter
comparator
CTC0
CTC1
Special
utility
relay
Operation when CTH0 (current value)

reaches CTC (preset value)
2103
Automatically clears current value of

CTH0
ON: Yes
OFF: No
2104
Disables/enables control of 0500.
ON:
Disable
OFF:
Enable
2105
Turns OFF direct output through 0500.
ON: Yes
OFF: No
2106
Turns ON direct output through 0500.
ON: Yes
OFF: No
2107
Reverses ON/OFF status of 0500.
ON: Yes
OFF: No
2108
ON:
Disable
OFF:
Enable
2109
Turns OFF direct output through 0500.
ON: Yes
OFF: No
211
Turns ON direct output through 0500.
ON: Yes
OFF: No
2111
Reverses ON/OFF status of 0500.
ON: Yes
OFF: No
2112
Automatically clears current value of

CTH0
ON: Yes
OFF: No
Setting the special utility relay

The special utility relay must be set to output the clock pulse. Set the relays in the
following manner.
Only one relay for each group can be turned ON from relays 2104 through 2107
and 2108 through 2111.
Use the SET-RES pair or STA instruction to turn relays 2103 through 2112 ON/
OFF.
Turning OFF relays 2104 or 2108 enables control of output relay 0500.
To change the pulse width, be sure to first turn ON relays 2103 or 2112 to automatically clear the current value of CTH0. You cannot change the pulse period
unless you turn ON relays 2103 or 2112.
Turning ON/OFF relay 2105 stops/outputs the clock pulse.
Note: If two or more relays of special utility relays 2104 through 2107 or 2108
through 2111 are turned ON, priority is given to the relay with the smaller number.
Operation of output 0500 by setting special utility relays
Outputting a pulse with 1:1 ON/OFF ratio
Outputting a pulse with variable pulse width

Special utility relay settings

2103 ON
2108 OFF
2103 ON
2108 OFF
2104 OFF
2109 OFF
2104 OFF
2109 ON
2105 OFF
2110 OFF
2105 OFF
2110 OFF
2106 OFF
2111 OFF
2106 ON
2111 OFF
2107 ON
2112 OFF
2107 OFF
2112 OFF
Count value
Count value
CTC0
CTC1
CTC0
ON
3-240
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Operation with special utility relays for high-speed counter CTH1

The following table shows the ON/OFF status of output relay 0501 which can be
changed by setting special utility relays (2203 through 2212) at the start of operation, or by changing them during clock pulse output.
You can set desired values for the pulse period and pulse width, and can enable or
disable the direct output.
Operation of output relay 0501 when special utility relays are ON/OFF
High-speed
counter
comparator
Special
utility relay
CTC2
2203
Automatically clears current value

of CTH1
ON: Yes
OFF: No
2204
ON:
Disable
OFF:
Enable
2205
Turns OFF direct output through

ON: Yes
0501.
Turns ON direct output through
ON: Yes
0501.
Reverses ON/OFF status of 0501. ON: Yes
ON:
Disables/enables control of 0501. D
isable
Turns OFF direct output through
ON: Yes
0501.
Turns ON direct output through
ON: Yes
0501.
Reverses ON/OFF status of 0501. ON: Yes
Automatically clears current value ON: Yes
of CTH1
2206
2207
2208
2209
CTC3
Operation when CTH0 (current value)

reaches CTC (preset value)
2210
2211
2212
OFF: No
OFF: No
OFF: No
OFF:
Enable
OFF: No
OFF: No
OFF: No
OFF: No
Setting the special utility relay

The special utility relay must be set to output the clock pulse. Set the relays in the
following manner.
Only one relay for each group can be turned ON from relays 2204 through 2207
Use the SET-RES pair or STA instruction to turn relays 2203 through 2212 ON/
OFF.
Turning OFF relays 2204 or 2208 enables control of output relay 0501.
To change the pulse width, be sure to first turn ON relays 2203 or 2212 to automatically clear the current value of CTH1. You cannot change the pulse period
unless you turn ON relays 2203 or 2212.
Turning ON/OFF relay 2205 stops/outputs the clock pulse.
Note: If two or more relays of special utility relays 2204 through 2207 or 2208
through 2211 are turned ON, priority is given to the relay with the smaller number.
Operation of output 0501 by setting special utility relays
Outputting a pulse with 1:1 ON/OFF ratio
2203 ON
2208 ON
2204 OFF
2205 OFF
Outputting a pulse with variable pulse width

2203 ON
2208 OFF
2209 OFF
2204 OFF
2209 ON
2210 OFF
2205 OFF
2210 OFF
2206 OFF
2211 OFF
2206 ON
2211 OFF
2207 ON
2212 OFF
2207 OFF
2212 OFF
Count value
Count value
CTC2
CTC2
CTC3
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Visual KV
Series
ON
3-241
14
4.7 Examples of Direct Clock Pulse Output

Visual KV
Series
This section describes programming examples of the direct clock pulse output.
4.7.1 Example of Outputting a Pulse with 1:1 ON/OFF Ratio

To output a clock pulse of 1 ms (1 kHz)-period from output relay 0500
This section describes a programming example that will output a clock pulse with 1:1
ON/OFF ratio from output relay 0500 by using the high-speed counter (CTH0) and
high-speed counter comparator (CTC0).
Special utility relay setting
Set the special utility relay (2103 through 2112) according to the following table.
When outputting a pulse with 1:1 ON/OFF ratio, you can simplify the program by
using the reverse (toggle) output (2107: ON).
Relay No.
Setting
2103
ON
2104
OFF
2105
OFF
2106
OFF
2107
ON
Internal clock and CTC0 preset value

Specify the internal clock and calculate the preset value of CTC0 for the clock.
CTC0 preset value = Pulse period (s) Internal clock (s) 2
Obtain the preset value of CTC0 by substituting 1 ms for the pulse period and 10 s
for the internal clock (special utility relay 2101).
In this case, the preset value of CTC0 is "50".
Refer to the following table for the preset value of CTC0 with other internal clocks.
Internal clock
CTC0 preset value
2100
1.0 s
500
2101
10.0 s
50
2102
100.0 s
Example
Count value
0001
2008
2103
SET
2104
RES
2105
RES
3-242
2107
SET
CTH0
RES
0002
CTH0
2101
0003
#00050
CTC0
2002
2106
RES
CTC0
ON
ON
Sets the pulse output from output relay 0500 with special utility relays 2104 through 2107.
In this example, turns OFF 2104 to enable direct output from 0500 and turns ON 2107 to
reverse the output each time the CTH0 value reaches the CTC0 value.
Turns ON 2103 to set CTH0 to be cleared when its value reaches the CTC0 value.
With this setting, the operation which clears the CTH0 current value when it reaches the
CTC0 preset value is repeated.
The RES CTH0 instruction resets the CTH0 current value when operation starts. This
ensures that the first clock pulse is output at the proper pulse width.
Turn ON the input enable relay for CTH0 all the time when CTH0 is used to output the
clock pulse.

Cording
Instruction
LD
SET
CON
RES
CON
RES
CON
RES
Operand
2008
2103
2104
2105
Line No.
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
Instruction
CON
SET
CON
RES
LD
CTH
CTC
Operand
2107
CTH0
2002
0 2101
0 #00050
Visual KV
Series
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
2106
Note :When the input enable relay for the high-speed counter is used to start/stop
the clock pulse, the response is delayed by a maximum of one scan when output
starts. Moreover, if the response is delayed by one scan when output stops, the
clock pulse stops but the output may remain ON.
Tips
Use special utility relay 2105 to control (enable/disable) the clock pulse output by
external inputs.
Use the SET-RES pair or KEEP instruction to turn special utility relay 2105 ON/
OFF.
With this setting, the clock pulse is always turned OFF when it starts as well as
stops.
When either of the following programs is added to the example on the previous
page, the clock pulse is output from 0500 only when 0000 is ON.
When SET-RES instructions are used
When KEEP instruction is used
0000
2105
SET
0000
0000
2105
RES
0000
KEEP
SET
2105
RES
To output a clock pulse of 1 ms (1 kHz)-period from output relay 0501

This section describes a programming example that will output a clock pulse with 1:1
ON/OFF ratio from output relay 0501 by using the high-speed counter (CTH1) and
high-speed counter comparator (CTC2).
When outputting a pulse with 1:1 ON/OFF ratio, you can simplify the program by
using the reverse (toggle) output (2207: ON).
Relay No.
Setting
2203
ON
2204
OFF
2205
OFF
2206
OFF
2207
ON
Internal clock and CTC2 preset value

Specify the internal clock and calculate the preset value of CTC2 for the clock.
CTC2 preset value = Pulse period (s) Internal clock (s) 2
Obtain the preset value of CTC2 by substituting 1 ms for the pulse period and 10 s
for the internal clock (special utility relay 2201).
In this case, the preset value of CTC2 is "50".
Refer to the following table for the CTC2 preset value with other internal clocks.
3-243
14
Visual KV
Series

Internal clock
CTC2 preset value
2200
1.0 s
500
2201
10.0 s
50
2202
100.0 s
Example
Count value
0001
2008
2203
SET
2204
RES
2205
RES
2206
RES
2207
SET
CTH1
RES
0002
CTH1
2201
0003
#00050
CTC2
2002
CTC2
ON
ON
Sets the pulse output from output relay 0501 with special utility relays 2204 through 2207.
In this example, turns OFF 2204 to enable direct output from 0501 and turns ON 2207 to
reverse the output each time the CTH1 value reaches the CTC2 value.
Turns ON 2203 to set CTH1 to be cleared when its value reaches the CTC2 value.
With this setting, the operation which clears the CTH1 current value when it reaches the
CTC2 preset value is repeated.
The RES CTH1 instruction resets the CTH1 current value when operation starts. This
clock pulse.
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
Instruction
LD
SET
CON
RES
CON
RES
CON
RES
Operand
2008
2203
2204
2205
Line No.
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
Instruction
CON
SET
CON
RES
LD
CTH
CTC
Operand
2207
CTH1
2002
1 2201
2 #00050
2206
starts. Moreover, if the response is delayed by one scan when output stops, the
clock pulse stops but the output may remain ON.
Tips
external inputs.
OFF.
stops.
3-244
0000
2205
SET
0000
0000
2205
RES
0000
KEEP
SET
2205
RES
4.7.2 Example of Outputting a Pulse with Variable ON/OFF

Ratio
This section describes a programming example that will output a clock pulse with
variable ON/OFF ratio from output relay 0500 by using the high-speed counter
(CTH0) and high-speed counter comparator (CTC0 and CTC1).
Relay No.
Setting
Relay No.
Setting
2103
ON
2108
OFF
2104
OFF
2109
ON
2105
OFF
2110
OFF
2106
ON
2111
OFF
2107
OFF
2112
OFF
Visual KV
Series
To output a clock pulse of 500 s (2 kHz)-period and 200 s-width from output relay 0500
Internal clock and CTC0/CTC1 preset values

Specify the internal clock and calculate the preset values of CTC0 and CTC1 for the
clock.
CTC1 preset value = Pulse width (s) Internal clock (s)
CTC0 preset value = Pulse period (s) Internal clock (s)
Obtain the preset values of CTC0 and CTC1 by substituting 200 s for the pulse
width, 500 s for the pulse period, and 10 s for the internal clock (special utility
relay 2101).
In this case, the preset value of CTC1 is "20", and that of CTC0 is "50".
Refer to the following table for the CTC preset values with other internal clocks.
Internal clock
CTC0 preset value
CTC1 preset value
2100
1.0 s
500
200
2101
10.0 s
50
20
2102
100.0s
Example
Count value
0001
2008
0002
2103
SET
2104
RES
2105
RES
2106
SET
2107
RES
2108
RES
2109
SET
2110
RES
2111
RES
CTH0
RES
0003
CTH0
2101
0004
#00050
CTC0
0005
#00020
CTC1
2002
CTC0
CTC1
ON
ON
ON
ON
Sets the pulse output from output relay 0500 with special utility relays 2104 through 2107
In this example, turns OFF 2104 to enable direct output from 0500. Turns ON 2106 to turn
ON the output from 0500 when the CTH0 value reaches the CTC0 value, and turns ON
2109 to turn OFF the output when the CTH0 value reaches the CTC1 value.
Turns ON 2103 to set CTH0 to be cleared when its value reaches the CTC0 value. This
clock pulse.
3-245
14
Visual KV
Series
Coding
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
Line No.
Instruction
0000
LD
2008
0013
CON
0001
MPS
0002
SET
0003
CON
0004
RES
0005
CON
0006
RES
0007
CON
0008
RES
0009
CON
0010
RES
0011
MPP
0012
RES
2103
2104
2105
2106
2107
0014
SET
0015
CON
0016
RES
0017
CON
0018
RES
0019
CON
0020
RES
Operand
2109
2110
2111
CTH0
0021
LD
2002
0022
CTH
0 2101
0023
CTC
0 #00050
0024
CTC
1 #00020
2108
Note 1: When the input enable relay for the high-speed counter is used to start/stop
starts. The response is also delayed by a maximum of one scan when output stops.
Note 2: Refer to the following "Tips" to start and stop the clock pulse.
Tips
external inputs.
OFF.
stops.
When either of the following program is added to the example on the previous
3-246
0000
2105
SET
0000
0000
2105
RES
0000
KEEP
SET
2105
RES
You can change the period (frequency) of the clock pulse by changing the CTC0
preset value using the LDA and STA instructions.
To change the period of the clock pulse, refer to "4.3.4 Count Input Method" (p.3212).

To output a clock pulse of 500 s (2 kHz)-period and 200 s-width from output relay 0501

Relay No.
Setting
Relay No.
Setting
2203
ON
2208
ON
2204
OFF
2209
OFF
2205
OFF
2210
OFF
2206
ON
2211
OFF
2207
OFF
2212
OFF
Visual KV
Series
This section describes a programming example that will output a clock pulse with
variable ON/OFF ratio from output relay 0501 by using the high-speed counter
(CTH1) and high-speed counter comparator (CTC2 and CTC3).
Internal clock and CTC2/CTC3 preset values

Specify the internal clock and calculate the preset values of CTC2 and CTC3 for the
clock.
CTC2 preset value = Pulse width (s) Internal clock (s)
CTC3 preset value = Pulse period (s) Internal clock (s)
Obtain the preset values of CTC2 and CTC3 by substituting 200 s for the pulse
width, 500 s for the pulse period, and 10 s for the internal clock (special utility
relay 2201).
In this case, the preset value of CTC3 is "20", and that of CTC2 is "50".
Refer to the following table for the CTC preset values with other internal clocks.
Internal clock
CTC2 preset value
CTC3 preset value
2200
1.0 s
500
200
2201
10.0 s
50
20
2202
100.0 s
Example
Count value
0001
2008
2208
RES
0002
2203
SET
2204
RES
2206
SET
2207
RES
2209
SET
2210
RES
2211
RES
CTH1
RES
0003
CTH1
2201
0004
#00050
CTC2
0005
#00020
CTC3
2002
CTC2
CTC3
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON the output from 0501 when the CTH1 value reaches the CTC2 value and turns ON
clock pulse.
3-247
14

Coding
Visual KV
Series
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
Instruction
LD
MPS
SET
CON
RES
CON
SET
CON
RES
MPP
RES
CON
Operand
2008
2203
2204
2205
2207
2208
Line No.
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
Instruction
SET
CON
RES
CON
RES
CON
RES
LD
CTH
CTC
CTC
Operand
2209
2210
2211
CTH1
2002
1 2201
2 #00050
3 #00020
starts. The response is also delayed by a maximum of one scan when the output
stops.
Tips
external inputs.
OFF.
stops.
3-248
0000
2205
SET
0000
0000
2205
RES
0000
KEEP
SET
2205
RES
You can change the period (frequency) of the clock pulse by changing CTC2
preset value using LDA and STA instructions.
To change the period of the clock pulse, refer to "4.3.4 Count Input Method" on
page 3-212.
This section describes a programming example that will output a clock pulse of 500
s (2 kHz)-period and 200 s-width from output relay 0500 and then stop it after
10000 pulses are output.
Special utility relay, internal clock, and CTC settings
Set the special utility relay according to the following table.
Relay No.
2103
2104
2105
2106
2107
Setting
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
Relay No.
2108
2109
2110
2111
2112
Visual KV
Series
4.7.3 Example of Stopping the Pulse Output at a Specified

Pulse Count
Setting
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Specify the internal clock and CTC0/CTC1 preset values according to the following
table.
2100
2101
2102
Internal clock
1.0 s
10.0 s
100.0 s
CTC0 preset value

500
50
5
CTC1 preset value

200
20
2
Example
2103
SET
2104
RES
2105
SET
2106
SET
2107
RES
0002
2108
RES
2109
SET
2110
RES
2111
RES
CTH0
RES
0003
2203
SET
#00000
DW
DM1940
2813
SET
CTH1
RES
1000
DIFU
1000
0001
2008
EI
0000
0004
0005
CTH0
2101
0006
#00050
CTC0
0007
#00020
CTC1
2002
0008
CTH1
0500
0009
#10000
CTC2
2002
14
2105
RES
END
0010
INT
CTC2
0011
2002
0012
2105
SET
RETI
0013
ENDH
0014
ON the output from 0500 when the CTH0 value reaches the CTC0 value and turns ON
Uses an EI instruction to enable interrupts.
The interrupt program (INT CTC2) stops the clock pulse when the CTH1 current value
reaches the CTC2 preset value (when 10000 pulses are output).
forces the operation to repeat by the specified pulses (10000).
Relay 2813 must be turned ON when counting pulses with CTH1.
3-249
Visual KV
Series
The input enable relay for CTH0 must be ON all the time when CTH0 is used to output the
clock pulse.
The input enable relay for CTH1 must be ON all the time when CTH1 is used to count the
clock pulse.
Specifies the internal clock (2101) as the clock input for CTH0. Specifies 0500 as the
clock input for CTH1. With this setting, CTH0 is used to output the clock pulse, and CTH1
is used to count the clock pulse.
Specifies the number of clock pulses to the CTC2 preset value.
The clock pulse output starts when input 0000 is turned ON.
To restart the clock pulse output after it stops, turn ON input 0000 again.
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023
Instruction
LD
EI
CON
MPS
SET
CON
RES
CON
SET
CON
SET
CON
RES
MRD
RES
CON
SET
CON
RES
CON
RES
CON
RES
MPP
Operand
2008
Line No.
0024
0025
0026
0027
0028
0029
0030
0031
0032
0033
0034
0035
0036
0037
0038
0039
0040
0041
0042
0043
0044
0045
0046
0047
0048
2103
2104
2105
2106
2107
2108
2109
2110
2111
CTH0
Instruction
Operand
SET
2203
CON
DW
#00000 DM1940
CON
SET
2813
CON
RES
CTH1
LD
0000
DIFU
1000
CON
AND
1000
RES
2105
LD
2002
CTH
0 2101
CTC
0 #00050
CTC
1 #00020
LD
2002
CTH
1 0500
CTC
2 #10000
END
INT
CTC2
LD
2002
SET
2105
RET1
ENDH
Tips
Special utility relays 2103 through 2111 can be turned ON/OFF by using the LDA
and STA instructions instead of the SET-RES instructions.
The example program below can be changed as follows by using the LDA and STA
instructions. The number of lines and steps can be reduced.
2008
EI
2103
SET
2104
RES
2105
SET
2106
SET
2107
RES
2108
RES
2109
SET
2110
RES
2111
RES
CTH0
RES
2203
SET
2813
SET
CTH1
RES
$0268
LDA
2008
EI
2100
STA
CTH0
RES
2203
SET
2813
SET
CTH1
RES
LDA $0268
When LDA $0268 is executed, the value specified by the operand is written into
the internal register as follows.
[0]
Internal register
[2]
0
[6]
1
[8]
1
When STA 2100 is executed, the value in the internal register is assigned to
special utility relays 2100 through 2115.
xx 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
Special utility
relay 21xx
3-250
Sta
rt
Re
ou vers
tpu e
t
Em
sto erge
p
nc
The following ramp-up/down control is available by setting four parameters (DM0000

to DM0003)
Visual KV
Series
4.7.4 Application of Direct Clock Pulse Output

(Ramp-up/down control)
24 VDC
Stepping motor driver
Twisted-pair cable
COM
0001
+
CW (Pulse)
+
CCW (Rotation
0003
0002
0000
KV
COM
direction)
0502
0500
0501
0503
5 VDC
FG
Setting parameters
DM0000: fH [Hz] (Running frequency)
DM0001: fL [Hz] (Start-up frequency)
DM0002: Acceleration rate [Hz/10 ms]
DM0003: No. of pulses for positioning
Stepping motor
Specify values in the range from 153 Hz to

50000 Hz. The fH value must be greater
than the fL value.
(fH - fL) / (Acceleration time / 10 ms)
Must be 65534 pulses or less.
Note 1: A smaller acceleration rate allows smoother control but extends the acceleration time.
Note 2: Be sure to turn OFF input 0007 (phase B input).
Operation
In the example on the next page, each parameter is set as follows:
DM0000: 8000 [Hz]
DM0001: 700 [Hz]
DM0002: 400 [Hz/10 ms]
DM0003: 4000 pulses
When start switch 0000 is pressed, ramp-up/down control is performed as shown
below. Control is stopped when the pulse count reaches "4000".
Pressing the start switch restarts the operation. The operation is reversed while
reverse switch 0001 is ON.
Connection example
The above diagram shows a connection example between the KV PLC and a
stepping motor driver.
Refer to the instruction manual for your stepping motor driver for details.
Set the pulse input method of the stepping motor driver to "1-pulse input method".
Frequency (Hz)
H
(DM0000)
Total pulses
for positioning
(DM0003)
Acceleration
rate
(DM0002)
L
(DM0001)
0
10ms
(Acceleration
change period)
Acceleration
time
Time (ms)
Constant
speed time
Deceleration
time
3-251
14

Example
Specifies high-speed
counters and comparators
0001
0002
2002
Visual KV
Series
0003
#00010
CTC1
#65535
CTC0
CTH0
2100
#65535
CTC2
#65535
CTC3
CTH1
0500
0004
#08000 #00700 #00400 #04000

DW
DW
DW
DW
DM0000 DM0001 DM0002 DM0003
0005
Starts positioning
2008
0003
0000
0006
1001
DIFU
1001
2100
STA
01
CALL
2813
SET
2105
SET
$0268
LDA
CTH1 counts the number of

clock pulses.
CTC0:Pulse period
CTC1: Pulse width
CTC2:Frequency change point
CTC3:Total No. of pulses for positioning
Sets parameters (DM0000 to

DM0003).
0007
0008
CTC0 generates a clock pulse.
1200
SET
CTH1
RES
CTH0
RES
EI
2105
RES
0502
0001
0009
Sets reverse output.
Emergency stop
0010
0003
2105
SET
0011
Sets emergency stop.
END
0012
Calculation routine for

CTC0, CTC2, and DM0011
0013
SBN
02
0014
0015
#01000
LDA
#10000 DM0012 #00005

MUL
DIV
ADD
#00010
DIV
0016
#00010
LDA
#10000 DM0010 #00005

MUL
DIV
ADD
#00010 DM0011
DIV
ADD
2002
CTC0
STA
DM0010
STA
CTC2
STA
DM0011
STA
RET
0017
Initialization routine
0018
SBN
01
0019
2002
0020
DM0003
LDA
CTC3
STA
Specifies the CTC0 preset value.

CTC0 preset value =
1 DM0012 x 103 x 103
Specifies the CTC2 preset

value.
DM0010: Pulse period T (s)
DM0011: No. of accumulated pulses
DM0012: Current frequency (Hz)
1200: Acceleration flag
02
CALL
#00002 DM0004 DM0001 DM0012 #00000

DIV
STA
LDA
STA
DW
DM0011
RET
0021
Triangle drive check routine
0022
SBN
03
0023
2002
0024
DM0012 #00100 DM0011 DM0004

LDA
DIV
ADD
CMP
RET
0025
Interrupt routine for

acceleration/deceleration
0026
INT
CTC2
0027
Acceleration process
0028
1200
0029
DM0012 DM0002 DM0012 DM0000

LDA
ADD
STA
CMP
2011
03
CALL
2011
02
CALL
2011
1201
0030
2011
0031
DM0003 DM0011
LDA
SUB
1201
1200
RES
2011
02
CALL
2011
02
CALL
0032
CTC2
STA
DM0011
STA
Deceleration process
0033
1200
0034
DM0012 DM0002 DM0012 DM0001

LDA
SUB
STA
CMP
0035
#65535
LDA
CTC2
STA
RETI
0036
Interrupt for pulse stop
0037
INT
CTC3
0038
2002
0039
2105
SET
RETI
0040
ENDH
0041
3-252
Acceleration ratio is added to the

current frequency to change it each
time CTC2 turns ON while
acceleration flag 1200 is ON.
Acceleration stops when the
current frequency reaches fH. Sets
No. of pulses for the deceleration
point.
Acceleration ratio is subtracted

from the current frequency to
change it each time CTC2 turns
ON while acceleration flag 1200 is
ON. Deceleration stops when the
current frequency reaches fL. The
setting is initialized.
Clock pulse output is stopped when
the No. of pulses equals the CTC3
preset value.
Visual KV
Series
Chapter 5
Positioning Control
Visual KV Series Only
This chapter describes ramp-up/down control of stepping motors and servo motors.
5.1
Outline of Positioning Control ..................................................... 3-254
5.1.1
Ramp-up/down Control .......................................................................... 3-254
5.2
Parameter Setting and Operating Procedures ......................... 3-255
5.2.1
5.2.2
Parameter Setting Procedure ................................................................. 3-255

Operating Procedure .............................................................................. 3-257
5.3
Examples of Using the Positioning Control Function ........... 3-258
5.3.1
5.3.2
5.3.3
Connection Example .............................................................................. 3-258

Tips ........................................................................................................ 3-258
Application Examples of the Positioning Control Function ..................... 3-259
5.1 Outline of Positioning Control
5.1 Outline of Positioning Control

Visual KV
Series
This section describes the outline of positioning control.
5.1.1 Ramp-up/down Control

The Visual KV Series can directly output clock pulses not affected by the scan time
to output relay 0502.
If the frequency, the number of output pulses, and the acceleration time of the clock
pulses have been preliminarily set to data memories, the Visual KV Series automatically performs ramp-up/down control.
The ramp-up/down control output function offers ramp-up/down timing charts of the
startup frequency, operating frequency, acceleration time, and deceleration time as
shown below.
The output frequency can be set within the range of 200 to 50,000 Hz.
Number of output
pulses (pulses)
Frequency (Hz)
DM1485 and DM1484

Upper digit
Lower digit
Operating
frequency
DM1481
Startup
frequency
DM1480
Acceleration
time DM1482
Deceleration
time DM1482
Time (ms)
By using the ramp-up/down control output function, ramp-up/down control of stepping motors and AC servo motors (pulse input types) is possible.
Clock pulse
Rotation direction
0502
NEW KV
Lo: CW
Hi: CCW
Stepping motor
Servo motor
0503
Motor driver
3-254
Chapter 5 Positioning Control
5.2 Parameter Setting and Operating Procedures
This section describes the parameter setting and operating procedures for positioning control.
5.2.1 Parameter Setting Procedure
Visual KV
Series
5.2 Parameter Setting and Operating

Procedures
Preliminarily set each parameter for positioning control to a corresponding data

memory. To operate, special utility relays must be set.
For more about special utility relays, refer to "5.2.2 Operating Procedure" (p. 3-257).
The table below shows the relationship between parameters and data memories.
Data memories for ramp-up/down control
Data memory
DM1480
DM1481
DM1482
DM1484
DM1485
DM1486
Setting contents
Setting range
Ramp-up/down control startup

frequency (Hz)
Ramp-up/down control operating
frequency (Hz)
Ramp-up/down control
acceleration/deceleration time
(ms)
Number of output pulses
(lower 16 bits)
Number of output pulses
(upper 16 bits)
200 to 50,000
200 to 50,000
(value larger than startup frequency)
0 to 4000
0 to 65,535
(2 or more when DM1485 is 0)
0 to 65,535
When an error occurs, a corresponding error code 11 to 17 is stored.
Set value error code
Note: When pulse output is started, the scan time is extended by 10 ms maximum
(if the acceleration/deceleration time is set to 4 s).
Set value error code (DM1486)

If there is an error in the preset parameters when starting operation, a corresponding
error code (11 to 17) is automatically written to DM1486.
Code
Description
Countermeasures
11
Startup frequency value is smaller than

allowable setting range.
Operating frequency value is smaller
than allowable setting range.
Operating (or startup) frequency value is
larger than allowable setting range.
Startup frequency value is larger than
operating frequency value.
Set starting frequency within setting

range (200 to 50,000).
Set operating frequency within setting
range (200 to 50,000).
Set operating (or startup) frequency
within setting range (200 to 50,000).
Set them appropriately so that startup
frequency is smaller than operating
frequency.
Set acceleration/deceleration time within
setting range (0 to 4,000).
Contact our sales office.
12
13
14
15
16
17
Acceleration/deceleration time is larger

than allowable setting range.
System error
Number of pulses output within
acceleration/deceleration time is too
small.
Set number of output pulses to 2 or

more.
Startup frequency (Hz) (DM1480)

Set the frequency (speed) of the motor at startup in positioning control so that motor
rotations start up smoothly.
At the set frequency, the Visual KV Series will output clock pulses.
3-255
15
Operating frequency (Hz) (DM1481)

Set the frequency (speed) of the motor during operation in positioning control.
At the set frequency, the Visual KV Series will output clock pulses.
Visual KV
Series
Note: If the startup frequency is the same as the operating frequency, the timing
chart becomes as shown below.
Operating (startup)
frequency
0
In this case, the acceleration/deceleration time is ignored.
Acceleration/deceleration time (ms) (DM1482)

Set the time to accelerate from the starting frequency to the operating frequency
after operation is started.
When operation is stopped, the deceleration time is equivalent to the acceleration
time.
In the set time, the Visual KV Series varies the clock pulse frequency from the
startup frequency to the operating frequency (in the case of acceleration time).
The clock pulse frequency change cycle within the acceleration time is fixed to 5 ms.
Operating frequency
Startup frequency
5ms
Acceleration/deceleration time
Number of output pulses (DM1484 and DM1485)

Set the angle of rotation (movement quantity) in positioning control as the number of
pulses. The Visual KV Series outputs as many clock pulses as the set value.
If the number of output pulses is larger than 65,535, divide it into the upper 16-bit
value and the lower 16-bit value using the following equation.
The minimum value is 2, and maximum value is 4,294,967,295.
(Number of output pulses) 65,536 = A (answer) . . . B (remainder)
A = Number of output pulses (upper 16-bit) DM1485
B = Number of output pulses (upper 16-bit) DM1484
Note 1: When the set number of pulses is too small and the target value cannot be
achieved, triangular control is performed as shown below.
Operating frequency
Startup frequency
0
Note 2: The current value of pulse output cannot be obtained.
3-256
In positioning control, operation is started up, stopped normally, and stopped in

emergencies by the ON/OFF status of special utility relays.
The table below shows the relationship between operations and the special utility
relays used.
Special utility
relay No.
R/W* Function
2308
Stop
2309
R
W
Run
RESET
2310
Start
Description
Performs deceleration at rising edge, then stops
operation.
Remains ON while pulses are output.
Stops operation immediately when being reset in an
interrupt program.
Starts up operation at rising edge.
Visual KV
Series
5.2.2 Operating Procedure
* R: Read W: Write
Operation chart
DM1481
DM1480
DM1485
DM1484
0
DM1482
2310
(START)
2309
(RUN)
2308
(STOP)
DM1480: Startup frequency (Hz)

DM1481: Operating frequency (Hz)
DM1482: Acceleration time (ms)
DM1485: Number of output pulses (upper 16 bits)
DM1484: Number of output pulses (lower 16 bits)
DM1482
When relay 2310 turns ON, clock pulses are

output (detection at rising edge).
While clock pulses are output, relay 2309
remains ON. While clock pulses are not
output, relay 2309 remains OFF.
When relay 2308 turns ON, clock pulses are
decelerated and stopped (detection at rising
edge).
Note 1: If there is no error in the parameter setting when special utility relay 2310
turns ON at startup of the clock pulses, special utility relay 2309 turns ON and clock
pulses are output.
Note 2: If there is an error in the parameter setting, special utility relay 2309 does
not turn ON but a corresponding error code is written to DM1486.
Confirm the error code, and change the erroneously set parameter.
Note 3: By setting special utility relay 2309 to OFF in an interrupt program, clock
pulses can be immediately stopped.
Note 4: Rising of special utility relay 2310, falling of special utility relay 2309, and
rising of special utility relay 2308 are performed by end processing and RETI.
(Special utility relay 2309 turns ON at that time.)
Note 5: It takes a maximum of 10 ms from when special utility relay 2310 turns ON
until pulses are output.
Note 6: Even if special utility relay 2310 is set to ON while special utility relay 2308
or 2309 is ON, it is ignored.
Note 7: When pulse output has finished, special utility relay 2309 is immediately set
to OFF (without regard to the scan time).
3-257
15
5.3 Examples of Using the Positioning Control Function
Visual KV
Series
5.3 Examples of Using the Positioning

Control Function
This section describes examples of connecting a stepping motor driver and performing ramp-up/down control using the positioning control function of the Visual KV
Series.
5.3.1 Connection Example
Em
24 VDC
erg
enc
ys
Sto
top
p
Sta
rt
Connect the Visual KV Series and stepping motor driver as shown below.
This example is only for reference. For details, refer to the instruction manual for the
stepping motor driver.
Set the pulse input type of the stepping motor driver to "1 pulse input type".
Twisted pair cable

COM
0001
0000
0002
Visual KV
COM
+
CW (pulse)
+
CCW
(rotation
direction)
R0502
R0503
5 VDC*
FG
Stepping motor
When using a 24 VDC power supply, be sure to use the outputs with current limiting
resistors (R500, R501, and R502) or use the normal outputs with external current limiting
resistors.
5.3.2 Tips
When using a servo motor, also refer to the connection example above. However,
I/O control dedicated to a servo motor such as servo ON is also required.
3-258
5.3.3
Application Examples of the Positioning Control

Function
When start switch 0000 is set to ON, output 0502 starts to output 100,000 pulses
with a startup frequency of 500 Hz, operating frequency of 10 kHz, and acceleration/
deceleration time of 3 seconds.
When input 0001 is set to ON, pulse output is decelerated and stopped.
When input 0002 is set to ON, pulse output is immediately stopped.
Visual KV
Series
Ladder example of ramp-up/down control
Speed (Hz)
1000
500
100000
Coordinate (pulses)
Program example
2008
EI
0001
2002
HSP
0002
0002
0000
0003
0001
#00500 #10000 #03000 #00001 #34464

DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DM1480 DM1481 DM1482 DM1485 DM1484
2310
2308
0004
Permit interrupts when operation is

started (so that emergency stop
operations are available).
Set the input time constant of input
0002 to 10 s.
Set each parameter, and start pulse
output at the same time.
Decelerate and stop pulse output.
END
0005
INT
0002
0006
2002
0007
Perform emergency stop processing

by using an interrupt program.
2309
RES
RETI
0008
ENDH
0009
3-259
15
Ladder example of the jog operation

The jog operation is performed.
Speed (Hz)
CCW direction
Visual KV
Series
CW direction
1000
500
Coordinate (pulses)
Input 0000
(CW direction)
Input 0001
(CCW direction)
While input 0000 is ON, the machine continues to move in the CW direction.
When input 0000 turns OFF, the machine decelerates and stops.
While input 0001 is ON, the machine continues to move in the CCW direction.
When input 0001 turns OFF, the machine decelerates and stops.
Program example
0000
0001
2309
0503
SET
1000
DIFU
0001
0000
2309
0503
RES
1001
DIFU
0001
0002
1000
0003
#00500 #02000 #01000 #65535 #65535

DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DM1480 DM1481 DM1482 DM1485 DM1484
2310
1001
0004
0000
0001
0005
1100
DIFU
1100
2308
END
0006
ENDH
0007
3-260
A palletizing operation is automatically performed.

The machine moves to a target coordinate, then returns to the start position. Next,
the machine moves to a position further away than the target coordinate, then again
returns to the start position. Such an operation is realized using repetitious and
return movements. This type of operation is suitable for, for example, a job where
workpieces to be supplied are located in one position and a moving body picks up
the workpieces and positions them little by little at a certain interval.
Visual KV
Series
Ladder example of automatic operation (palletizing operation)
Speed (Hz)
5000
500
Point 3: 14,000
Coordinate (pulses)
Point 2: 12,000
Point 1: 10,000
500
5000
When start signal 0000 is set to ON, a moving body moves to point 1, returns to the
start position, moves to point 2, and then returns to the start position again. Afterwards, the moving body moves to point 3, then returns to the start position, output
05000 remains ON for 3 seconds, and then the operation is finished.
Program example
0001 Ladder for automatic operation

0002 Point 1: 10,000
Point 2: 12,000
0000
0003
Point 3: 14,000
#00500 #05000 #03000 #00000
DW
DW
DW
DW
DM1480 DM1481 DM1482 DM1485
1000
SET
#10000
DW
DM1484
1200
1001
JMP
1201
1002
JMP
1202
1003
JMP
1203
1004
JMP
1204
1005
JMP
2310
1006
JMP
0004 Moves to point 1.

0005
0503
SET
1000
STG
2310
2309
15
1200
0006 Returns from point 1.

0007
1001
STG
2309
1100
0503
RES
2310
1100
2309
1201

0009
1002
STG
2309
1101
0503
SET
1101
#12000
DW
DM1484
2310
2309
1202
0010 Returns from point 2

0011
1003
STG
2309
1102
0503
RES
2310
1102
2309
1203

0013
1004
STG
2309
1103
0503
SET
1103
#14000
DW
DM1484
2310
2309
1204
0014 Returns from point 3.

0015
1005
STG
2309
1104
0503
RES
1104
0016 When operation has completed, output 500 remains ON for 3 seconds.
0017
1006
STG
2309
1105
0500
#00030
T000
T000
ENDS
1105
END
0018
ENDH
0019
3-261
Ladder example of a return to the zero point

A return to the zero point is performed.
Visual KV
Series
Range detected by
zero point sensor
Start
Low speed
Forced stop
Deceleration
and stop
High-speed
When start signal 0000 turns ON, the machine moves at a high speed in the CCW
direction. When the zero point sensor turns ON, the machine decelerates, moves at
a low speed in the CW direction, then stops in the position at which the zero point
sensor turns OFF (at the end of the CW direction).
Program example
0001
Return to zero point
0002
Zero point sensor: 0003 Start signal: 0000 Pulse output: 0502
Rotation direction: 0503
0003 Initial setting

2008
EI
0004
2002
HSP
0003
0005
0006
Moves at high speed in the CCW direction.

0000
0007
1000
DIFU
1000
0008
2309
#00500 #10000 #00500 #00000 #65535

DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DM1480 DM1481 DM1482 DM1485 DM1484
2413
RES
1005
SET
0503
RES
0009 When the zero point sensor turns ON, moves at low speed in the CW direction.
1006
2309
2308
RES
1005
2309
1007
DIFU
0010
0011
#00200 #10200 #00500 #00000 #65535

DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DM1480 DM1481 DM1482 DM1485 DM1484
1007
2413
SET
0503
SET
2310
1006
0012
END
0013
0014
Detects the rising/falling edge of the zero point sensor (003), stops, and
then changes direction.
INT
0003
0015
1006
0016
1005
0017
2308
SET
2309
RES
1006
RES
1006
SET
1005
RES
RETI
0018
ENDH
0019
3-262
Ladder example of an automatic operation (continuous operation with wait status)

In automatic operation, wait status is realized at each point.
10000
7000
5000
500
0
250000
320000
Wait
Wait
460000
Coordinate
(pulses)
Visual KV
Series
Speed (Hz)
When start signal 0000 turns ON, the machine moves to point 1 and stops there. At
the rising edge of wait status reset switch 1, the machine automatically moves to
point 2 and stops there. At the rising edge of waiting status reset switch 1, the
machine automatically moves to point 3. When the machine reaches point 3, output
0500 remains ON for 3 seconds and the operation is finished.
Program example
0001
Ladder for automatic operation (continuous operation with wait status)
0002
Start signal: 0000 Pulse output: 0508 Rotation direction: 0503
0003
Wait reset switch: 0001
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0000
#00500
DW
DM1480
Moves to point 1 at speed of 10 kHz.

Moving quantity: 250,000 pulses
0503
SET
1000
STG
1001
STG
2309
1400
1400
0001
Acceleration/deceleration time: 1 second
#01000 #01000 #00003 #53392

DW
DW
DW
DW
DM1481 DM1482 DM1485 DM1484

1000
SET
2310
2309
1300
1001
JMP
1300
1301
15
1301
0009
0503
SET
0010
0011
0012
#05000 #01000 #00001 #04464

DW
DW
DW
DW
DM1481 DM1482 DM1485 DM1484

1002
STG
2309
1401
1401
0001
2310
2309
1302
1002
JMP
1302
1303
1303
0013
0503
SET
0014
0015
0016
#07000 #01000 #00002 #08928

DW
DW
DW
DW
DM1481 DM1482 DM1485 DM1484
2310
2309
1304
1003
JMP
1304

When operation has completed, output 500 remains ON for 3 seconds.
1003
STG
2309
1305
0500
#00030
T000
T000
ENDS
1305
0017
0018
END
ENDH
3-263
Ladder example of a pulse motor application circuit
Visual KV
Series
This is a program example which offers control using both automatic and manual
operations.
In automatic operation, when input 000 is set to ON, the following operation is
performed.
Speed (Hz)
8000
2000
300
0
15000
17500
Coordinate
(pulses)
15000
In manual operation, the machine moves forward while input 0008 is ON, and moves
backward while input 0009 is ON. When input 0007 is set to ON, the machine
returns to the zero point.
Output 0502 outputs pulses. The rotation direction is changed by an ON/OFF of
0503.
This machine is equipped with a zero-point sensor (0002), a forward limit switch
(0006), and a backward limit switch (0004).
Program example
Pulse motor application circuit (with zero point sensor, forward
limit switch, and backward limit switch)
0002 Specifications
0001
0003
Pulse output: 0502

Rotation direction: 0503
Forward limit switch: 0006
Backward limit switch: 0004
0004 Manual switch: Forward = 0008, backward = 0009
Zero point switch:
0005 0007
0006
0007 Automatic operation start: 0000
2008
0008
1200
RES
EI
2002
0009
HSP
0000
0010
HSP
0002
Resets interrupt permission & zero point detection flag.

0011 Manual switch (0008: Forward, 0009: Backward)
0008
0009
2309
0503
RES
0006
1100
DIFU
0008
0009
2309
0503
SET
0004
1101
DIFU
0012
0013
1100
#00600 #04000 #00100 #00001 #00000

DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DM1480 DM1481 DM1482 DM1485 DM1484
0014
1103
DIFU
1101
0015
0008
0009
0016
3-264
1105
DIFU
Set the startup frequency,

operating frequency, and
acceleration/deceleration
time for manual operation.
Startup frequency: 600 Hz
Operating frequency: 4 kHz
Acceleration/
deceleration: 100 ms
Number of output pulses:
65,536
Return to zero point
0015
0016 Limit switch
0007
1205
DIFU
0017
0018 Move forward.
1205
0503
SET
0019
0020
#00300 #03000 #00250 #00000 #03500

DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DM1480 DM1481 DM1482 DM1485 DM1484
1300
DIFU
1200
SET
Trigger end of forward movement

1200
0021
2309
ON
1201
1201
2309
OFF
1202
1202
1203
DIFU
1203
0503
RES
#00500 #00500 #00000 #00000 #65535

DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DM1480 DM1481 DM1482 DM1485 DM1484
1301
DIFU
1200
RES
0024 Start up motor.

1300
0006
1301
0004
Startup frequency: 300 Hz

Acceleration time: 250 ms
3,500
Settings for backward

movement
0022 While moving backward at low speed, return to zero point.

0023
In a zero-point-return
operation, the machine
moves forward once, and
then backward. When the
zero point limit switch
(0002) turns ON, the
machine stops.
Settings for forward
movement
Visual KV
Series
2310
0025
0026
Drive frequency: 500 Hz

Operating frequency: 500 Hz
65,535
Give instructions to start up

and decelerate/stop the
motor.
1103
0027
1506
2308
0028
0029 Decelerate and stop (in manual/automatic operation).
0006
0009
0004
0008
2308
0030
0031
1105
0032
Automatic operation
0033
0034 Trigger for stage instruction
2308
0036
15
1400
SET
2008
0035
1408
DIFU
1408
1401
RES
1402
RES
1403
RES
1400
SET
0037 Automatic start (while 0000 is ON)

0038
1400
STG
0000
2308
2309
1401
JMP
0039 When motor operation has finished, moves stage forward.

0040
1401
STG
0041
1402
STG
0042
1403
STG
1407
RES
1405
RES
1406
RES
#00010
T001
#00005
T002
#00005
T003
T001
T002
T003
1500
DIFU
1501
DIFU
1502
DIFU
2309
1405
1402
JMP
1405
2309
1406
1403
JMP
1406
2309
1407
1400
JMP
Create each operation

program using the STG
instruction, and let each
program be executed in
turn.
1407
3-265

Set parameters for automatic operation.
0043 Set automatic operation parameters.

1500
0503
SET
1501
0503
SET
1502
0503
RES
0044
Visual KV
Series
0045
0046
#00300
DW
DM1480
#00300
DW
DM1480
#00300
DW
DM1480
#08000
DW
DM1481
#02000
DW
DM1481
#15000
DW
DM1481
#00150
DW
DM1482
#00250
DW
DM1482
#00250
DW
DM1482
#00000
DW
DM1485
#00000
DW
DM1485
#00000
DW
DM1485
#15000
DW
DM1484
#02500
DW
DM1484
#17500
DW
DM1484
1503
DIFU
1504
DIFU
1505
DIFU
0047 Start up motor.

1503
1506
0048
1504
0049
1505
0050
1. Startup frequency: 300 Hz

15,000
25000
17,500
END
0051
0052 Interrupt for instantaneous stop (to return to zero point)
INT
0002
0053
1200
0008
0009
0000
0054
2309
RES
RETI
0055
ENDH
0056
3-266
Stop pulse output at the

zero point by using an
interrupt program.
Interrupts, High-speed Counters,

Positioning Control KV-300, KV-10/80 Series Only
This chapter describes ramp-up/down control of stepping motors and servo motors.
6.1
Interrupt Instructions .............................................................. 3-268
6.1.1
6.1.2
Description of Interrupts ......................................................................... 3-268

Interrupt Instructions .............................................................................. 3-271
6.2
Direct Clock Pulse ................................................................... 3-276
6.2.1
Output of Direct Clock Pulse .................................................................. 3-276
6.3
Positioning Control ................................................................. 3-296
6.3.1
Positioning Control (Ramp-up/down Control) ......................................... 3-296
KV-10/80
KV-300
Chapter 6
6.1
Interrupt Instructions
6.1.1 Description of Interrupts

Input processing for routine program and interrupt routine
KV-10/80
KV-300
Input processing
pt
Scan time
rru
Processing of
direct inputs
te
f in
no
tio
era
Routine program
execution
Output processing
n
Ge
(00000 to 00005)
Interrupt routine
execution
Re
tu
at rns
the to
po sus
int pe
of nd
su ed
sp pr
en og
sio ram
n.
Processing of
direct outputs
(00500 to 00503)
Fig. 1
Routine program flow is shown by the thick arrow on the left of Fig.1. In this case,
input signals can be received only during input processing.
Although input time constant can be made shorter by using HSP or by turning ON
special utility relay 2813, input signals can be received only if they are longer than
the duration of one scan time.
When an interrupt initiation input turns ON, the currently running program is suspended to immediately execute the interrupt routine.
During execution of interrupt routine, input signals shorter than one scan time can be
received by the PLC.
Note: To execute INT (interrupt initiation instruction), execute EI first to enable

interrupt, then use HSP (time constant: 25 s) or turn ON special utility relay 2813
(time constant: 10 s) to reduce the input time constant.
2008
EI
2813
SET
2002
EI
or
2002
HSP
0000
Types of interrupt
High speed counter comparators
CTC0, CTC1, CTC2, CTC3
Input relays
0000, 0001, 0002, 0003
(rising/falling edge selectable)
Interrupt by CTC can be generated when the CTC preset value and CTH current
value are equal.
A signal received through any of inputs 0000 to 0003 can generate an interrupt.
3-268
Chapter 6 Interrupts, High-speed Counters, Positioning Control
Interrupt priority
If two or more interrupts are generated at different timings, interrupt routines are
executed in the order that interrupts are generated.
If two or more interrupts are generated simultaneously, interrupt routines are
executed according to the priority shown below.
CTC0 > CTC1 > CTC2 > CTC3 > 0000 > 0001 > 0002 > 0003
Note that the above priority differs from that for other KV PLCs (KV-10/16/24/40/
80).
The priority is: 0000 > 0001 > 0002 > 0003 > CTC2 > CTC3 > CTC0 > CTC1.
KV-10/80
Note 1: During execution of one interrupt routine, execution of other interrupt routines is inhibited. (One interrupt routine can be executed inside another interrupt
routine by inserting EI.)
Note 2: If other interrupts are generated during execution of one interrupt routine,
the routines of these interrupts are executed after completion of the first interrupt
routine in the order that they are generated. Note that generation of up to 8 levels of
interrupt nesting or up to 8 individual interrupts can be stored during execution of
interrupt routine. However, generation of an interrupt is ignored if generation of the
same interrupt has already been stored.
KV-300
Interrupt routine
2008
EI
2813
SET
END
INT
XXXXX
RETI
ENDH
16
Execute EI to enable interrupt.

Be sure to insert INT between END and ENDH.
Be sure to shorten the input time constant by using HSP or by turning ON special
utility relay 2813.
Instructions that cannot be used in the INT-RETI block

TMR, TMH, TMS, DIFU, DIFD, W-ON, W-OFF, W-UE, W-DE, STG, JMP, ENDS,
HKEY, ITVL, @xxxx (instruction), C, UDC, SFT
3-269
Direct output
2008
EI
2813
SET
END
INT
0000
2002
0500
( SET )
KV-300
RETI
KV-10/80
INT
0001
2002
0500
( SET )
ENDH
Direct output is enabled only through output relays 0500, 0501, 0502, and 0503.
This function allows ON/OFF status of any of output relays 0500, 0501, 0502, and
0503 to be output during execution of interrupt routine.
This function allows immediate ON/OFF status output without delay caused by scan
time.
Note: Be sure to turn ON special utility relay 2813 to shorten the input time constant.
Direct input
2008
1000
2813
SET
0500
END
INT
0000
0005
1000
RETI
ENDH
Direct input is enabled only through input relays 0000 to 0005.

This function allows ON/OFF status of any of input relays 0000 to 0005 to be input
during execution of interrupt routine.
Note 1: Be sure to turn ON special utility relay 2813 to shorten the input time
constant.
Note 2: Input status read using direct input function is valid only in the interrupt
routine. Be sure to insert an internal utility relay after the direct input relay.
3-270
DI / EI

DI: Interrupt Disabled
FNC
RES AND
0
8
DI
Disables execution of interrupt.
EI: Interrupt Enabled
ORL
FNC SET
1
3
EI
Enables execution of interrupt.
Key operations
AND
8
FNC
SET
1
ORL
3
ENT
R-SRCH
ENT
R-SRCH
KV-10/80
RES
0
KV-300
FNC
Operand
Example
1000
EI
1000
DI
Coding
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
0000
LD
1000
0001
EI
0021
LDB
0022
DI
1000
16
Description
When 1000 is ON, execution of interrupt is enabled. When 1000 is OFF, execution
of interrupt is disabled. Interrupts are enabled between EI instruction and DI instruction.
Therefore, once EI is executed, interrupt is enabled until it is disabled by DI.
With the KV, any interrupt is disabled when the operation is started.
DI instruction disables execution of interrupt. Use this instruction to temporarily
disable interrupt.
EI instruction enables the execution of interrupt. Use this instruction to release
interrupt disabled by DI instruction.
During execution of an interrupt, any other interrupt is disabled.To execute another
interrupt during execution of the previous interrupt, include EI instruction in this first
interrupt. Interrupts can be nested up to 8 levels by executing EI in each interrupt
routine.
Note 1: Generation of up to 8 levels of interrupt nesting or up to 8 individual interrupts can be stored while interrupt is disabled. These interrupts are executed after EI
has been executed.
Note 2: Generation of INT CTC is erased from the storage when RES CTC is
executed.
3-271
INT / RETI
INT: Interrupt
RETI: Return Interrupt
RES
FNC ANL
2
0
LDB
FNC ORL
3
4
INT
nnnn
RETI
Executes interrupt between INT and RETI

instructions at rising edge of input specified
by operand. When 0003 is specified by
operand, the rising or falling edge can be
selected for execution of interrupts.
Represents termination of interrupts.
KV-10/80
KV-300
Key Operations
FNC
ANL
2
RES
0
ENT
R-SRCH
FNC
ORL
3
LDB
4
ENT
R-SRCH
Operand
ENT
R-SRCH
ENT
R-SRCH
Operand
0000 to 0003
CTC0 to CTC3
Example 1
Input pulse width shorter than one scan time (eg. one-shot circuit)
(a)
0000
Input for
routine
program
0500
#00020
T000
T000
0500
0000
(Input remains ON for 1 ms or more.)
(b)
2008
Input for
interrupt
routine
2813
SET
EI
1000
#00020
T000
0000
0500
T000
0500
END
INT
0000
1000
2002
RETI
ENDH
(Input remains ON for 10 s or more.)
Program (a) can be used when input 0000 remains ON longer than the input time constant (8
to 12 ms).
Program (b) is used when input 0000 remains ON shorter than one scan time.
Routine program coding
3-272
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
0000
LD
0000
0001
OR
0500
0002
TMR
000 #00020
0003
ANB
T000
0004
OUT
0500
INT / RETI
Interrupt routine coding
Operand
2008
Line No.
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
2813
1000
0500
000 #00020
T000
Instruction
OUT
END
INT
LD
OUT
RETI
ENDH
Operand
0500
0000
2002
1000
Example 2
Features of INT0003
Upon generation of interrupt by INT0003, the CTH1 current value is automatically
transferred to TM30.
Interrupt generated by any of INT0000 to INT0002 is executed at the rising edge of
the input signal. Interrupt generated by INT0003 can be executed either at the rising
or falling edge of the input signal.
Relay No.
ON
OFF
2206
Executes interrupts at falling edge of

input pulse to 0003.
Executes interrupts at rising edge of

input pulse to 0003.
KV-10/80
Instruction
LD
EI
CON
SET
LD
OR
TMR
ANB
KV-300
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
In the example program below, pulse width of input 0003 is measured.

2206(OFF)
ON
0003
OFF
2008
2206(ON)
1
Pulse width
EI
$0000
LDA
2200
STA
DM0000
STA
2002
CTH1
2200
END
INT
0003
3
2206
2206
TM30
LDA
TM02
STA
TM30
LDA
TM02 DM0000
SUB
STA
KEEP
SET
2206
(a)
RES
(b)
RETI
ENDH
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
Instruction
LD
EI
CON
LDA
CON
STA
CON
STA
LD
CTH
END
INT
LDB
LDA
Operand
2008
$0000
2200
DM0000
2002
1 2200
0003
2206
TM30
Line No.
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023
0024
0025
0026
Instruction
CON
STA
CON
LD
LDA
CON
SUB
CON
STA
CON
KEEP
RETI
ENDH
Operand
TM02
2206
TM30
TM02
DM0000
2206
3-273
16
INT / RETI
KV-10/80
KV-300
Initial setting
When the operation is started, EI instruction enables interrupts.
Special utility relays No. 2200 through 2215 are turned OFF. Turning OFF 2203
disables CTC2 from resetting the CTH1 current value to 0.
Turning OFF 2206 allows interrupt to be generated at the rising edge of INT0003.
The value of DM0000 is reset to "0".
Turning ON special utility relay 2813 changes the input time constant to 10 s.
1.0-s internal clock pulses are counted using CTH1.
INT instruction with 0003 as the operand allows interrupts to be executed.
When interrupt is generated for the first time, 2206 is OFF. Therefore, program in
rung (a) is executed. Then, KEEP turns 2206 ON.
When interrupt is generated for the second time, 2206 is ON. Therefore, program
in rung (b) is executed to calculate the following:
(TM30 at 2nd execution) - (TM30 at 1st execution) = pulse width (unit: 1.0 s)
The result is stored in DM0000.
Example 3
Interrupt by CTC
Pulses input to 0005 are counted. 0501 is turned ON when the number of pulses
reaches 5,000.
2008
1
EI
2203
SET
CTH1
RES
#05000
CTC2
2813
SET
2002
CTH1
0005
0000
0501
RES
END
INT
CTC2
4
2002
0501
SET
RETI
ENDH
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
3-274
Instruction
LD
EI
CON
SET
CON
RES
CON
CTC
CON
SET
Operand
2008
2203
CTH1
2 #05000
2813
Line No.
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
Instruction
LD
CTH
LD
RES
END
INT
LD
SET
RETI
ENDH
Operand
2002
1 0005
0000
0501
CTC2
2002
0501
INT / RETI
Turning ON special utility relay 2203 allows CTC2 to reset the CTH1 current
value to 0.
The CTH1 current value is reset to 0.
The CTC2 preset value is set to 5000.
Turning ON special utility relay 2813 changes the input time constant to 10 s.
Pulses input to 0005 are counted using CTH1.
When input 0000 turns ON, output 0501 is reset.
INT CTC2 is used to execute the interrupt. (Interrupt routine is executed when
the CTH1 current value and CTC2 preset value are equal.)
Immediate output to 0501 is performed.
KV-10/80
KV-300
Initial setting
When the operation is started, EI instruction enables interrupts.
Note 1: When the interrupt is executed, the contact of CTC2 is automatically reset.
Note 2: The operand used for INT instruction is not allowed for use with other INT
instructions.
16
3-275
6.2 High-speed Counters
6.2
Direct Clock Pulse
6.2.1 Output of Direct Clock Pulse

Outline of High-Speed Counters
Basic Architecture
KV-10/80
KV-300
The KV-300 CPU has two 16-bit (CTH0, CTH1) double-phase counter, each
equipped with two high-speed counter comparators (CTC0, 1, 2, 3). These counters
can be used as a stepping motor controller or are used to measure pulse width.
Block diagram of high-speed counters
0008 (RESET)
Phase A 0004
Phase B (0006)
Internal clocks
2100(1.0 s)
2101(10.0 s)
2102(100.0 s)
External pulse
0004/0006
Phase A 0005
Phase B (0007)
Internal clocks
2200(1.0 s)
2201(10.0 s)
2202(100.0 s)
External pulse
0005/0007
0500

(2103 to 2115)
16-bit
high-speed counter
CTH0
Control circuit
High-speed
counter comparator
CTC0, CTC1
16-bit highspeed counter
CTH1
0500
INT CTC0
INT CTC1
TM30

(2203 to 2215)
Control circuit
High-speed
counter comparator
CTC2, CTC3
0501
INT CTC2
INT CTC3
0009 (RESET)
Lists of special utility relays for high-speed counters

Utility relays for high-speed counter CTH0
3-276
2100
Internal clock (1.0 s) for CTH0
2101
2102
2103
When comparator CTC0 is ON, automatically clears CTH0.

1: Yes 0: No
2104
Direct output to 0500

1: Disable 0: Enable
2105
Turns OFF output to 0500.

1: Yes 0: No
2106
Turns ON output to 0500.

1: Yes 0: No
2107
Reverses output (toggle) to 0500.

1: Yes 0: No
2108

2109

1: Yes 0: No
2110

1: Yes 0: No
2111
Reverses output to 0500 (toggle).

1: Yes 0: No
2112

1: Yes 0: No
2113
Uses CTH0 in magnification mode.

1: Yes 0: No
2114
Selection of magnification mode for CTH0

1: x 4 0: x 2
2115
Enables external reset for CTH0.

1: Yes 0: No
Direct output level to 0500 through comparator

CTC1 (any one of these is ON)


Utility relays for high-speed counter CTH1
2201
2202
2203

1: Yes 0: No
2204
Direct output to 0501 through comparator CTC2

1: Enable 0: Disable
2205
Direct output level to 0501 through comparator CTC2

1: ON 0: OFF
2206
Selection of INT3 edge

0: UP edge 1: DOWN edge
2207
Reverse output (toggle) level

1: ON 0: OFF
2208

2209

1: Yes 0: No
2210

1: Yes 0: No
2211
Reverses output (toggle) to 0501.

1: Yes 0: No
2212

1: Yes 0: No
2213
Uses CTH1 in magnification mode.

1: Yes 0: No
2214
Selection of magnification mode for CTH1

1: x 4 0: x 2
2215
Enables external reset for CTH1.

1: Yes 0: No
KV-10/80
KV-300
2200

For KV-10/80 users

1. KV-10/80 has one 8-bit (CTH0) and one 16-bit (CTH1) single phase counter.
2. Internal clocks are as follows:
2100
0.8 s
2200
0.4 s
2101
6.4 s
2201
0.8 s
2102
102.4 s
2202
3.2 s
3. Special utility relays of 2112, 2113, 2114, 2115, 2212, 2213, 2214, and 2215
are not available.
3-277
16

High-speed counter and counter comparators
High-speed counter (CTH1)
CTH1 is a 16-bit hardware counter that counts from 0 to 65535.
KV-10/80
KV-300
You can specify the operands listed in the table below as the count input.
You can specify one operand from the table below.
Operand cannot be modified externally during execution of the program.
When the external pulse (0004, 0005) is selected, CTH1 is used as a High-speed
counter with a response frequency of 30 kHz.*
When one of the internal clocks (2100 to 2102, 2200 to 2202) is selected, CTH1
is used as a High-speed timer.
When the external pulse 0500 is selected as input to CTH1, CTH1 can count
direct clock pulses generated by CTH0.
High-speed counter
CTH0
CTH1
Operand
2100
2101
2102
0004
2200
2201
2202
0005
0500
Countable range
0 to 65535
* KV-10/80: 10 kHz
High-speed counter comparator (CTC)
High-speed counter comparators (CTC) is used only for High-speed counters (CTH).
When the current value of CTH reaches the preset value of one of the comparators
(CTC), the comparator turns ON.
At the contact of High-speed counter comparator (CTC), the level of output (0500,
0501) can be changed (directly output) through hardware or an interrupt can be
generated. To change the level of output 0500 and 0501, set the desired value (ON/
OFF) to special utility relays 2103 to 2112, 2203 to 2205, and 2207 to 2212.
The High-speed counters correspond to the High-speed counter comparators as
shown in the table below.
High-speed
counter
High-speed
counter
comparator
Range of
setting value
Output
CTC0
0 TO 65535
0500
CTH0
CTC1
CTH1
Interrupt
INT CTC0
INT CTC1
CTC2
0501
CTC3
INT CTC2
INT CTC3
Internal Clocks for CTH0 and CTH1
3-278
Each High-speed counter (CTH) has its own internal clock.

The desired clock can be selected by specifying the relay No. as operand for
CTH instruction.
You cannot change the internal clock or external pulse during execution of the
program.
Each clock has the following period:
High-speed counter
CTH0
CTH1
Relay No.
2100
2200
1.0 s
2101
2201
10.0 s
2102
2202
100.0 s
Period
CAUTION
You cannot change operands of the high-speed counters (CTH) during

execution of the program. The input time constant of the high-speed
counters is usually set to 25 ms. (The HSP instruction is not required.)
High-speed pulses can be counted at up to 30 kHz through external inputs

(0004 to 0007) by turning ON special utility relay 2813. (Internal pulses can
be counted at up to 50 kHz by turning ON 2813.)*
* KV-10/80 : 10 kHz
KV-10/80
The KV PLC can output clock pulses through 0500 and/or 0501 without any delays
caused by scan time. (Through CPU only)
Direct clock pulses, used with the high-speed counters, are applicable for various
types of production control such as for controlling target positions at desired speed.
To perform ramp-up/down control, see "Controlling stepping motors" in Chapter 5.
A setting of the clock pulse cycle (frequency) can be changed by the program within
the allowable range as shown in the table below.
KV-300
Outline of Pulse Output
Outline of pulse output

Output
Internal clock
0500
2100
20 s (50 kHz) to 65.5 ms (15 Hz)
2101
20 s (50 kHz) to 655.3 ms (1.5 Hz)
0501
Range of pulse cycle (frequency)
2102
200 s (5 kHz) to 6553.5 ms (0.1 Hz)
2200
20 s (50 kHz) to 65.5 ms (15 Hz)
2201
20 s (50 kHz) to 655.3 ms (1.5 Hz)
2202
200 s (5 kHz) to 6553.5 ms (0.1 Hz)
Direct clock pulses are output through 0500 and/or 0501 according to the settings on
the special utility relays when the number of internal clock pulses counted by the
high-speed counter reaches the preset value of the comparator.
Output example
16
CTH current value (count value)

CTC preset value
0500
0501
ON
OFF
CAUTION
ON/OFF of output relay 0500/0501 depends on the setting of the special utility
relay. Refer to page 3-281.
For KV-10/80 users

Model
Output
Range of pulse cycle
KV-10, 16, 24, 40
500
500 ms to 52.2 ms
(2 kHz to 19 Hz)
501
666 ms to 419.4 ms
(1.5 kHz to 2.4 Hz)
500
50 ms to 52.2 ms
(20 kHz to 19 Hz)
501
666 ms to 419.4 ms
(1.5 kHz to 2.4 Hz)
KV-80
3-279
Pulse period and width

Period and width of the pulse is determined by the period of the internal clock (CTH)
used and the preset value of the comparator (CTC).
When two counter comparators are used, only the pulse width can be changed while
a constant period is maintained.
The following examples illustrate how pulse width and period can be selected:
KV-300
ON/OFF ratio of 1:1

Pulse width (ms) = CTC0 preset value x internal clock (ms)
Pulse period (ms) = CTC0 preset value x 2 x internal clock (ms)
KV-10/80
ON/OFF ratio of pulse is 1:1.

Change CTC0 preset value to change the pulse width and period.
ON/OFF status is set special utility relays
ON
OFF
Pulse
width
Pulse period

Pulse width (ms) = CTC1 preset value x internal clock (ms)
Pulse period (ms) = CTC0 preset value x internal clock (ms)
Change CTC1 preset value to change the pulse width.

Change CTC0 preset value to change the pulse period.
ON/ OFF status is set by special utility relays
ON
OFF
Pulse
width
Pulse period
CAUTION
The pulse width determined as above is used to pulses generated from the
KV-300 CPU.
Pulses are output through the output circuit. The pulse width varies depending on the response delay from the output circuit and influence of the connected load. Before setting the pulse width, you should measure the actual
waveform using an oscilloscope. (Use pulses with variable pulse width.)
3-280
To obtain the pulse cycle from frequency, use the following expression:
Pulse cycle (s) = 1000 Frequency (kHz)
Special utility relay settings and output statuses

16-bit high-speed counter (CTH0) and special utility relays (2103 to 2112)
By setting the special utility relays 2104 to 2112 at startup or changing these relays
during generation of clock pulse, you can select ON/OFF of output relay 0500 as
listed below.
These special utility relays also allow you to set the pulse cycle and pulse width
and enable or disable the direct output.
Pulse status at CTH0 (current value) = CTC (preset value)
Relay No.
CTC0
2103
Automatically clears current value of CTH0.
2104
Disables output to 0500.
2105
Outputs OFF to 0500
2106
Outputs ON to 0500.
CTC1
CAUTION
Pulse status at ON.
KV-10/80
KV-300
Comparator No.
2107
Inverts output to 0500.
2112
2108
2109
Outputs OFF to 0500
2110
Outputs ON to 0500.
2111
Special utility relay must be ON when clock pulse is generated.
Only one of relays 2104 to 2107 and one of relays 2108 to 2111 can be
turned ON. When two or more of the relays among each group are ON,
priority is given to the relay with the smallest No.
Turning OFF special utility relays 2104 and 2108 enable direct output.
Because these relays are factory-set to ON, be sure to set them to OFF.
ON/OFF status of special utility relays 2104 to 2112 is set using SET and
RES instructions or STA instruction.
Be sure to turn the special utility relay 2103 or 2112 ON to change the
pulse width. Turn ON 2103 or 2112 to change the pulse cycle.
Turn OFF 2105 to start clock pulse output. Turn ON 2105 to stop pulse
output.
When special utility relays 2104 and 2108 are turned ON while the direct
clock pulses are being output, the status of the output relay 0500 is output
and the pulses will be stopped.
Timing diagram of 0500 with special utility relay settings

ON-OFF ratio of 1:1
Settings of special utility relays
2103
ON
2112
OFF
2103
ON
2112
OFF
2104
OFF
2108
OFF
2104
OFF
2108
OFF
2105
OFF
2109
OFF
2105
OFF
2109
ON
2106
OFF
2110
OFF
2106
ON
2110
OFF
2107
ON
2111
OFF
2107
OFF
2111
OFF
CTH0 value
CTH0 value
CTC0
CTC0
CTC1
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
3-281
16

16-bit high-speed counter (CTH1) and special utility relays (2203 to 2205,
2208 to 2212)
By setting the special utility relays 2204 to 2205 and 2208 to 2212 at startup or
changing these relays during generation of clock pulse, you can select ON/OFF of
output relay 0501 as listed below.
These special utility relays also allow you to set the pulse cycle
KV-10/80
KV-300
Pulse status at CTH1 (current value) = CTC (preset value)

Comparator No.
Relay No.
CTC2
2203
2204
2205
Outputs OFF to 0501
CTC3
CAUTION
Pulse status at ON.
2207
2212
2208
2209
Outputs OFF to 0501
2210
Outputs ON to 0501.
2211
Special utility relay must be ON when clock pulse is generated.
Only one of relays 2208 to 2211 can be turned ON. When two or more of the
relays among each group are ON, priority is given to the relay with the
smallest No.
Turning ON special utility relay 2204 and turning OFF special utility relay
2208 enable direct output.
ON/OFF status of special utility relays 2204 to 2212 is set using SET and
RES instructions or STA instruction.
Be sure to turn the special utility relay 2203 or 2212 ON to change the pulse
width.
Turn ON 2203 or 2212 to change the pulse cycle.

Turn OFF 2205 to start clock pulse output. Turn ON 2205 to stop pulse
output.
When special utility relays 2204 and 2208 are turned ON while the direct
clock pulses are being output, the status of the output relay 0501 which is
used in the program is output and the pulses will be stopped.
Timing diagram of 0501 with special utility relay settings

ON-OFF ratio of 1:1
2203
ON
2212
OFF
2203
ON
2212
OFF
2204
ON
2208
OFF
2204
ON
2208
OFF
2205
OFF
2209
OFF
2205
ON
2209
ON
2206
OFF
2210
OFF
2206
OFF
2210
OFF
2207
ON
2211
OFF
2207
OFF
2211
OFF
CTH1 value
3-282
CTH1 value
CTC2
CTC2
CTC3
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Calculating the pulse cycle and comparator setting value

The KV-300 CPU supports clock pulse output at maximum frequency of 50 kHz.
Obtain the pulse cycle for clock pulse output and comparator setting value from the
following expressions:
Pulse cycle
Pulse cycle (s) = 1000 Frequency (kHz)
For pulse with 1:1 ON/OFF ratio (using one comparator)
CTC setting value = Pulse cycle (s) Internal clock (s) 2
ON
KV-300
OFF
KV-10/80
Pulse
width
Pulse cycle
For pulse with variable pulse width (using two comparators)

CTC setting value for pulse width = Pulse width (s) Internal clock (s)
CTC setting value for pulse cycle = Pulse cycle (s) Internal clock (s)
ON
OFF
Pulse
width
Pulse cycle
Range of CTC setting based on internal clock

Special utility relay (Internal clock)
CAUTION
Cycle
* CTC setting range

10 to 65535
2100
2200
1.0 s
2101
2201
10.0 s
1 to 65535
2102
2202
100.0 s
1 to 65535
When setting 2100 or 2200 for the operand of High-speed counter CTH, set
10 or greater value to CTC. Otherwise, clock pulse is not correctly output.
The pulse width varies depending on the influence of the connected load.
Before setting the pulse width, you should measure the actual waveform
using an oscilloscope.
When generating clock pulse using CTC0 and CTC1, or CTC2 and CTC3,
do not set the same value to CTC0 and CTC1, or CTC2 and CTC3. If setting
the same value, clock pulse is output at the double clock cycle.
* Refer to page 3-276.
3-283
16
Examples of Pulse Output

The following sample explains how to program the pulse output.
Example of clock pulse with 1:1 ON/OFF ratio

When outputting clock pulse with cycle 1 ms (1 kHz) from 0500
This program example shows how to output clock pulse with 1:1 ON/OFF ratio from
0500, through High-speed counter CTH0 and High-speed counter comparator
CTC0.
KV-10/80
KV-300
Setting special utility relays

Special utility relays 2103 to 2112 are set as shown on the right table.
The program can be simplified using reverse output (toggle) for pulse with 1:1 ON/
OFF ratio.
Relay No.
Setting
Relay No.
Setting
2103
ON
2112
OFF
2104
OFF
2108
OFF
2105
OFF
2109
OFF
2106
OFF
2110
OFF
2107
ON
2111
OFF
Values set to the internal clock and CTC0

After the internal clock is determined, the CTC0 setting value is calculated from the
following expression.
CTC0 setting value = Pulse cycle (s) Internal clock (s) 2
Assign 1 ms to pulse cycle and 10 s (2101: special utility relay) to internal clock
and calculate the CTC0 setting value.
The calculated result is "50".
CTC0 values calculated based on other internal clocks are listed below for your
reference.
Internal clock*
CTC0 value
1.0 s
500
2101
10.0 s
50
2102
100.0 s
2100
Programming example
2008
0001
2103
2104
2105
2106
2107
CTH0
SET
RES
RES
RES
SET
RES
2002
0002
0003
3-284
CTH0
2101
#00050
CTC0
CTH0 value
CTC0
ON
OFF
The status of output 0500 is set by turning ON one of the relays 2104 to 2107 at
the beginning of the program. In Example, output of direct clock pulses to 0500 is
enabled, and the status of output 0500 is inverted each time CTH0 = CTC0.
Turns ON special utility relay 2103 and specifies to clear CTH0 using CTC0. The
program repeats clearing the CTH0 current value with the value set to CTC0.
Resetting the current value of CTH0 at the beginning of the program allows direct
clock pulses of specified width to be output starting from the 1st pulse.
Input relay which enables CTH0 remains ON during clock pulse output.

Coding
CAUTION
Instruction
Operand
0000
LD
2008
0001
SET
2103
0002
CON
RES
0004
CON
0005
RES
0006
CON
0007
RES
0008
CON
0009
SET
0010
CON
0011
RES
2104
2105
2106
KV-10/80
0003
KV-300
Line No.
2107
CTH0
0012
LD
2002
0013
CTH
0 2101
0014
CTC
0 #00050
When start/stop of clock pulse is controlled by the input relay which enables/
disables the high-speed counter, response relay of up to 1 scan is generated
at start. Also, the same response relay is generated at stop, which may stop
clock pulse output while the output relay is still ON.
This controls clock pulse so that it always starts and stops when 2105 turns OFF.
Turn ON/OFF special utility relay 2105 as required to enable or disable output of
direct clock pulses using one of the external clocks. Use SET and RES instructions
together or only KEEP instruction to turn ON/OFF this relay.
The diagram below can be added to the sample diagram so that direct clock pulses
are output through 0500 only when 0000 is ON.
SET/RES Instructions
KEEP Instructions
0000
2105
SET
0000
0000
2105
RES
0000
16
KEEP
SET
2105
RES
When outputting clock pulse with cycle 1 ms (1 kHz) from 0501

This program example shows how to output clock pulse with 1:1 ON/OFF ratio from
0501, through high-speed counter CTH1 and high-speed counter comparator CTC2.
The program can be simplified using reverse output (toggle) for pulse with 1:1 ON/
OFF ratio.
Relay No.
Setting
Relay No.
Setting
2203
ON
2212
OFF
2204
OFF
2208
OFF
2205
OFF
2209
OFF
2206
OFF
2210
OFF
2207
ON
2211
OFF
3-285

Values set to the internal clock and CTC2
After the internal clock is determined, the CTC2 setting value is calculated from the
following expression.
CTC2 setting value = Pulse cycle (s) Internal clock (s) 2
Assign 1 ms to pulse cycle and 10 s (2201: special utility relay) to internal clock
and calculate the CTC2 setting value.
The calculated result is "50".
CTC2 values calculated based on other internal clocks are listed below for your
reference.
KV-10/80
KV-300
Internal clock*
CTC0 value
2200
1.0 s
500
2201
10.0 s
50
2202
100.0 s
Programming example
2008
0001
2203
2204
2205
2207
CTH1
SET
SET
RES
SET
RES
CTC2
CTH1
2201
#00050
CTC2
ON
OFF
2002
0002
0003
CTH1 value
The status of output 0501 is set by turning ON one of the relays 2204 to 2207 at
the beginning of the program. In Example, output of direct clock pulses to 0501 is
enabled, and the status of output 0501 is inverted each time CTH1 = CTC2.
Resetting the current value of CTH1 at the beginning of the program allows direct
clock pulses of specified width to be output starting from the 1st pulse.
Coding
Line No.
3-286
Instruction
Operand
0000
LD
2008
0001
SET
2203
0002
CON
0003
SET
0004
CON
0005
RES
0006
CON
0007
SET
0008
CON
0009
RES
2204
2205
2207
CTH1
0010
LD
2002
0011
CTH
1 2201
0012
CTC
2 #00050
CAUTION
KEEP Instructions
2204
SET
0000
0000
2204
RES
0000
KV-10/80
0000
KV-300
KEEP
SET
2204
RES
Example of clock pulse with variable ON/OFF ratio

When outputting clock pulse with cycle 500 s (2 kHz) and pulse width
200 s from 0500
This program example shows how to output clock pulse varies ON/OFF ratio from
0500, through high-speed counter CTH0 and high-speed counter comparator
CTC0 and CTC1.
Special utility relays 2103 to 2112 are set as shown in the table below.
Relay No.
Setting
Relay No.
Setting
2103
ON
2112
OFF
2104
OFF
2108
OFF
2105
OFF
2109
ON
2106
ON
2110
OFF
2107
OFF
2111
OFF
16
Values set to the internal clock, CTC0 and CTC1

After the internal clock is determined, the CTC0 and CTC1 setting value is calculated from the following expression.
CTC1 setting value = Pulse width (s) Internal clock (s)
CTC0 setting value = Pulse cycle (s) Internal clock (s)
Assign 200 s to pulse width, 500 s to pulse cycle and 10 s (2101: special utility
relay) to internal clock and calculate the CTC0 and CTC1 setting value.
The calculated results of CTC1 and CTC0 are "20" and "50", respectively.
Values calculated based on other internal clocks are listed below for your reference.
Internal clock*
CTC0 value
CTC1 value
2100
1.0 s
500
200
2101
10.0 s
50
20
2102
100.0 s
3-287

Programming example
2008
0001
2103
SET
2104
RES
2105
RES
2106
SET
2107
RES
0002
2108
RES
2109
SET
2110
RES
2111
RES
CTH0
RES
2002
CTH0
2101
#00050
CTC0
#00020
CTC1
0003
0004
0005
ON
OFF
The status of output 0500 is set by turning ON one of the relays 2104 to 2107
and 2108 to 2111 at the beginning of the program. In Example, output of direct
clock pulses to 0500 is enabled, and the status of output 0500 is turned ON at
CTC0 and is turned OFF at CTC1.
KV-10/80
KV-300
CTH0 value
CTC0
CTC1
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
CAUTION
Instruction
LD
MPS
SET
CON
RES
CON
RES
CON
SET
CON
RES
MPP
RES
Operand
2008
2103
2104
2105
2106
2107
Line No.
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023
0024
Instruction
CON
SET
CON
RES
CON
RES
CON
RES
LD
CTH
CTC
CTC
Operand
2109
2110
2111
CTH0
2002
0 2101
0 #00050
1 #00020
2108
KEEP Instructions
0000
2105
SET
0000
0000
2105
RES
0000
KEEP
SET
2105
RES
By overwriting the setting value of high-speed counter comparator CTC0 using the
LDA and STA instructions, you can change the clock pulse cycle (frequency).
Refer to "Example of pulse output "on page 3-293.
3-288

When outputting clock pulse with cycle 500 s (2 kHz) and pulse width 200
s from 0501
This program example shows how to output clock pulse with variable ON/OFF ratio
from 0501, through High-speed counter CTH1 and High-speed counter comparator
CTC2 and CTC3.
Setting
Relay No.
Setting
2203
ON
2212
OFF
2204
ON
2208
OFF
2205
ON
2209
ON
2206
OFF
2210
OFF
2207
OFF
2211
OFF
KV-10/80
KV-300
Relay No.
Values set to the internal clock and CTC2 and CTC3

After the internal clock is determined, the CTC2 and CTC3 setting value is calculated from the following expression.
CTC3 setting value = Pulse width (s) Internal clock (s)
CTC2 setting value = Pulse cycle (s) Internal clock (s)
Assign 200 s to pulse width, 500 s to pulse cycle and 10 s (2201: special utility
relay) to internal clock and calculate the CTC2 and CTC3 setting value.
The calculated results of CTC3 and CTC2 are "20" and "50", respectively.
Values calculated based on other internal clocks are listed below for your reference.
Internal clock*
CTC2 value
CTC3 value
2100
1.0 s
500
200
2101
10.0 s
50
20
2102
100.0 s
*Refer to page 3-276.
Programming example
2008
0001
2208
RES
0002
2002
0003
0004
0005
16
2203
SET
2204
SET
2205
SET
2207
RES
2209
SET
2210
RES
2211
RES
CTH1
RES
CTC2
CTC3
CTH1
2201
#00050
CTC2
#00020
CTC3
ON
OFF
CTH1 value
The status of output 0501 is set by turning ON one of the relays 2204 to 2207
and 2208 to 2211 at the beginning of the program. In Example, output of direct
clock pulses to 0501 is enabled, and the status of output 0501 is turned ON at
CTC2 and is turned OFF at CTC3.
Turns ON special utility relay 2203 and specifies to clear CTH1 using CTC2.
The program repeats clearing the CTH1 current value with the value set to
CTC2.
3-289

Coding
KV-10/80
KV-300
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
CAUTION
Instruction
LD
MPS
SET
CON
SET
CON
SET
CON
RES
MPP
RES
CON
Operand
2008
Line No.
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
2203
2204
2205
2207
2208
Instruction
SET
CON
RES
CON
RES
CON
RES
LD
CTH
CTC
CTC
Operand
2209
2210
2211
CTH1
2002
1 2201
2 #00050
3 #00020
This controls the clock pulse so that it always starts and stops when 2205 turns
OFF.
KEEP Instructions
0000
2204
SET
0000
0000
2204
RES
0000
KEEP
SET
2204
RES
6
By overwriting the setting value of high-speed counter comparator CTC2 using the
LDA and STA instructions, you can change the clock pulse cycle (frequency).
Example of stopping clock pulse after reaching the specified output pulse count
The following example stops clock pulse having the pulse width of 200 s which is
output from 0500 at cycle of 500 s (2 kHz) after reaching the pulse count value of
10000.
Setting special utility relay, internal clock, and CTC
Settings of the special utility relays, internal clock, CTC0, and CTC1 are listed
below.
Relay No.
Setting
Relay No.
Setting
2103
ON
2112
OFF
2104
OFF
2108
OFF
2105
OFF
2109
ON
2106
ON
2110
OFF
2107
OFF
2111
OFF
Internal clock*
CTC0 value
CTC1 value
1.0 s
500
200
2101
10.0 s
50
20
2102
100.0 s
2100
3-290
*Refer to page 3-276.

Programming example
0002
0003
0000
0004
2002
0005
0006
0007
2002
0008
0009
2002
0014
2108
RES
2203
SET
2109
SET
2813
SET
2105
SET
2106
SET
2107
RES
2110
2111
RES
RES
CTH1
RES
1000
1000
DIFU
CTH0
RES
2105
RES
CTH0
2101
#00050
CTC0
#00020
CTC1
CTH1
0500
#10000
CTC2
INT
CTC2
0011
0013
2104
RES
END
0010
0012
2103
SET
KV-10/80
EI
KV-300
2008
0001
2105
SET
RET1
ENDH
Sets pulse output to 0500 using special utility relays 2104 to 2107 and 2108 to
2111.
The example on the left sets special utility relays to enable direct output to 0500
(2104: OFF), and turn 0500 output ON at CTC0 (2106: ON) and OFF at CTC1
(2109: ON).
Turns ON special utility relay 2103 to clear CTH0 using CTC0. This allows output
with correct clock pulse width starting from the 1st pulse.
Enables interrupt using the EI instruction.

Stops clock pulse using interrupt program (INT CTC2) when the current value of
High-speed counter CTH1 reaches the setting value of high-speed counter
comparator CTC2 (when 10000 pulses are output).
Turns ON special utility relay 2203 to clear CTH1 using CTC2. This allows
program to operate repeatedly at the specified pulse count (10000 pulses).
Always turns ON 2813 when counting pulses using high-speed counter CTH1.
Input relay which enables CTH1 remains ON during clock pulse counting.
Specifies internal clock (2101) for clock input of high-speed counter CTH0.
Specifies 0500 for clock input of high-speed counter CTH1. Then, CTH0 is used
for clock pulse output and CTH1 is used for clock pulse counting.
Sets the clock pulse count using the setting value of high-speed counter comparator CTC2.
Turns ON input relay 0000 to start clock pulse output.

To restart clock pulse output after once stopped, turns ON input relay 0000
again.
3-291
16
KV-10/80
KV-300
Coding
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
0000
LD
2008
0024
SET
2203
0001
EI
0025
CON
0002
CON
0026
SET
0003
MPS
0027
CON
0004
SET
0028
RES
0005
CON
0006
RES
0007
CON
0008
SET
0009
CON
0010
SET
0011
CON
0012
RES
0013
MRD
0014
RES
0015
CON
0016
SET
0017
CON
0018
RES
0019
CON
0020
RES
0021
CON
0022
RES
0023
MPP
2103
2104
2105
2106
2107
2108
2109
2110
2111
CTH0
2813
CTH1
0029
LD
0000
0030
DIFU
1000
0031
CON
0032
AND
1000
0033
RES
2105
0034
LD
2002
0035
CTH
0 2101
0036
CTC
0 #00050
0037
CTC
1 #00020
0038
LD
2002
0039
CTH
1 0500
0040
CTC
2 #10000
0041
END
0042
INT
CTC2
0043
LD
2002
2105
0044
SET
0045
RETI
0046
ENDH
Special utility relays 2103 to 2111 can be set to turn ON or OFF using LDA and STA
instructions as well as SET and RES instructions. Example below illustrates how
one program can be made shorter using LDA and STA instructions.
2008
EI
2103
SET
2104
RES
2105
SET
2106
SET
2107
RES
2108
RES
2203
SET
2109
SET
2813
SET
2110
RES
CTH1
RES
2111
RES
CTH0
RES
2008
$0268 $2100
LDA
STA
EI
2203
SET
CTH0
RES
2813
SET
CTH1
RES
LDA $0268
When LDA $0268 is executed, the following data is input to the internal register.
[0]
Internal
register
[2]
[6]
[8]
Internal register
When STA 2100 is executed, the data in the internal register is assigned to 16
special utility relays starting from 2100 to 2115.
Special utility
relays 21**
15
0
14
0
13
0
12
0
11
0
10
0
09
08
07
0
06
1
05
1
04
0
Thus, 2103, 2105, 2106, and 2109 are ON.
3-292
03
1
02
0
01
0
00
0
Example of pulse output (Ramp-up/down control)

The following example performs ramp-up/down control as shown below by setting 4
parameters (DM0000 to DM0003).
KV-10/80
24 VDC
KV-300
rt
Sta
KV-300
Re
ve
rs
Connection example
The following chart shows an operation example when the KV-300 CPU is connected to the stepping motor driver. See the stepping motor driver instruction
manual for details.
Set the pulse input mode of the stepping motor driver to "1 pulse input mode".
+
Twisted pair cable
COM 1
0000 11
0001 2
0500
0501
0502
0503
COM
7
8
9
10
20
CW (pulse)
CCW
(rotating
direction)
Stepping motor
24 VDC
FG
Frequency (Hz)
fH
(DM0000)
Positioning
pulse total
count
(DM0003)
Acceleration
rate
(DM0002)
fL
(DM0001)
0
10 ms
Acceleration
change time
Acceleration time
Time (ms)
Constant
rate time
Deceleration time
Setting parameters
DM0000: fH [Hz] (Run frequency) 153 Hz to 50000 Hz fH must be greater than
fL.
DM0001: fH [Hz] (Start frequency)
DM0002: Acceleration rate [Hz/10 ms] (fH-fL) (Acceleration time 10 ms)
DM0003: Positioning pulse count 65534 pulses max.
CAUTION
Although smoother trapezoidal control can be obtained by setting a smaller

acceleration rate, the acceleration time is extended.
Be sure to turn OFF input relay 0007 (phase B input).
Operation
This program sets the parameters as below:
DM0000 = 8000 [Hz], DM0001 = 700 [Hz], DM0002 = 400 [Hz/10 ms], DM0003 =
4000 pulses
The program performs trapezoidal control as shown above when start switch 0000 is
pressed, and stops control when pulse count reaches 4000.
The program restarts operation by re-pressing the start switch. It performs reverse
operation while reverse switch 0001 is ON.
3-293
16

Programming exmaple
0001
INITIAL SETUP FOR HIGH-SPEED COUNTER/COMPARATOR

2002
0002
#00010
CTC1
#65535
CTC0
CTH0
2100
0003
#65535
CTC2
#65535
CTC3
CTH1
0500
2008
0004
KV-10/80
KV-300
0005
#00700
DW
DM0001
#08000
DW
DM0000
#00400
DW
DM0002
2813 2105
(SET ) (SET )
#04000
DW
DM0003
STARTS POSITIONING
0003
0000
1001
DIFU
0006
Generates clock pulse through highspeed counter CTH0.

Counts clock pulese through highspeed counter CTH1.
CTC0: Pulse cycle
CTC1: Pulse width
CTC2: Frequency change point
CTC3: Positioning pulse total
count
1001
Sets parameters (DM0000 to

DM0003).
0007
$0268
LDA
0008
2100
STA
01
CALL
1200 CTH1 CTH0

(SET ) (RES ) (RES )
EI
0001
0502
( )
0009
0010
2105
(RES )
Reverse output
EMERGENCY STOP
0003
2105
(SET)
0011
END
0012
0013
CTC0,CTC2,DM0011, CALCULATION SUBROUTINE

SBN
02
0014
2002
0015
#01000
LDA
#10000
MUL
DM0012
DIV
#00005
ADD
#00010
DIV
CTC0
STA
DM0010
STA
0016
#00010
LDA
#10000
MUL
DM0010
DIV
#00005
ADD
#00010
DIV
DM0011
ADD
CTC2
STA
DM0011
STA
RET
0017
0018
Emergency stop
Sets CTC0.
Setting value of CTC0 =
1 DM0012 x 103 x 103 6.4
Sets CTC2.
DM0010: Pulse cycle T (s) x 10
DM0011: Accumulated pulse count
DM0012: Current frequency f [Hz]
1200: Acceleration flag
INITIALIZING SUBROUTINE
SBN
01
0019
2002
0020
DM0003
LDA
CTC3
STA
#00002
DIV
DM0004 DM0001 DM0012

STA
LDA
STA
#00000
DW
DM0011
02
CALL
RET
0021
0022
RAMP UP/DOWN CHECK ROUTINE

SBN
03
0023
2002
0024
3-294
DM0012
LDA
#00100
DIV
DM0011 DM0004
ADD
CMP
RET
0025
INTERRUPT ROUTINE FOR SPEED-UP/SLOW-DOWN
INT
CTC2
0027
SPEED-UP
1200
0029
DM0012 DM0002 DM0012 DM0000

LDA
ADD
STA
CMP
2011
03
CALL
2011
02
CALL
2011
1201
( )
0030
2011 DM0003 DM0011
LDA
SUB
0031
1201
0032
0033
CTC2
STA
DM0011
STA
1200
(RES )
SPEED-UP
1200
0034
DM0012 DM0002 DM0012 DM0001

LDA
SUB
STA
CMP
0035
2011
02
CALL
2011
02
CALL
#65535
LDA
CTC2
STA
RETI
0036
0037
Subtracts the acceleration rate from

the current frequency to change
frequency whenever CTC2 turns
OFF. When the current frequency
reaches fL, stops deceleration and
initializes the settings.
INTERRUPT FOR PULSE STOP

INT
CTC3
0038
2002
0039
Adds the acceleration rate to the

current frequency to change
frequency whenever CTC2 turns
ON. When the current frequency
reaches fH, stops acceleration and
sets the deceleration pulse count.
KV-10/80
0028
KV-300
0026
2105
(SET )
When pulse count of clock pulses

equals the setting value of CTC3,
stops clock pulse output.
RETI
0040
ENDH
0041
16
3-295
6.3 Positioning Control

6.3.1 Positioning Control (Ramp-up/down Control)
Outline of positioning control
KV-10/80
KV-300
The KV-300 CPU outputs clock pulses, independent of scan time, directly through
output relay 0500 or 0501. When the clock pulse frequency, output pulse count, and
acceleration/deceleration time are set to the data memory addresses in advance,
the KV-300 CPU automatically performs ramp-up/down control. Output frequency
can be set within the range of 153 Hz to 50000 Hz.
Frequency (Hz)
Operation
Start
Output pulse count
Deceleration time
Acceleration time
Time (ms)
With this function, ramp-up/down control over stepper motors and AC servo motors
(pulse input type) becomes possible.
The following section describes setting and application of positioning control
parameters.
Clock pulse
6
0500
0501
Rotation direction
Lo : CW
Hi : CCW
0502
0503
KV-300
3-296
Stepping motor
/servo motor
Motor driver
Setting and application of parameters

This section describes how to set and apply parameters for positioning control.
Setting parameters
Set the parameters to the assigned data memory addresses. To operate the
positioning control function, the special utility relays must be set. Refer to page 3-299.
The following table shows the parameters and assigned DM Nos.
Parameter
Allowable setting range

Code 11 to 17 or FFFF (-1)
is entered when error occurs
X-axis
DM9408
0500 Start frequency (Hz)
153 to 50000
(0500)
DM9409
0500 Run frequency (Hz)
153 to 50000
DM9410
0500 Acceleration/deceleration
time (ms)
0 to 4096
DM9411
0500 Output pulse count

(high-order 16 bits)
0 to 65535
DM9412

(low-order 16 bits)
0 to 65535
Y-axis
DM9413
0501 Start frequency (Hz)
153 to 50000
(0501)
DM9414
0501 Run frequency (Hz)
153 to 50000
DM9415
0501 Acceleration/deceleration
time (ms)
0 to 4096
DM9416

0 to 65535
DM9417

(low-order 16 bits)
0 to 65535
KV-10/80
KV-300
DMNo.
DM9407
Note: Refer to the following expression to determine the output pulse count.
Output pulse count < (65535 x pulse change cycle [ms]) (1000 x run frequency
[Hz])
Pulse change cycle (t)
The pulse change cycle is the cycle in which the output clock pulse frequency is
changed for acceleration or deceleration. The pulse change cycle is obtained from
one of the following expressions, whichever produces the smaller solution. However,
when the start pulse is less than 500 Hz, the pulse change cycle becomes 14 ms or
more.
Pulse change cycle (t) [ms] = (acceleration time [ms] + 199) 200 x 4
or
Pulse change cycle (t) [ms] = 1000 (run frequency [Hz] 1000)
Run
Start
Acceleration/ deceleration time
3-297
16

Automatically writes an error code (11 to 17) into DM9407 when a parameter setting
error is found at startup.
KV-10/80
KV-300
Code
Error description
Corrective action
11
Start frequency is below allowable

range.
Adjust start frequency to within allowable range (153 to 50000).
12
Run frequency is below allowable

range.
Adjust run frequency to within allowable range (153 to 50000).
13
Run/start frequency exceeds allowable range.
Adjust run/start frequency to within

allowable range (153 to 50000).
14
Start frequency is greater than run

frequency.
Reduce start frequency to less than

run frequency.
15
Acceleration/deceleration time
exceeds allowable range.
Adjust acceleration/deceleration time

to within allowable range (0 to 4096).
16
Too many pulses are output during

acceleration/deceleration time.
Change the parameters.
17
Too few pulses are output during

acceleration/deceleration time.
Set 2 or more as value for output

pulse count.
Other calculation error
Change the parameters.
FFFF
Corrective action for error code 16

Error code 16 is issued when the output pulse count during acceleration/deceleration time exceeds other values calculated from the preset parameters.
To recover from the error, the following corrective actions are available.
Change the run frequency and/ or the acceleration/ deceleration time according
to the following expression.
65535
Run frequency
x Pulse change cycle x 65535
1000
Corrective action for error code FFFF (-1)

Reduce run frequency and start frequency.
Reduce accelleration/ deccelleration time.
Start frequency (Hz)

Sets a start frequency (speed) to start the motor rotation smoothly during positioning
control.
The KV-300 CPU outputs clock pulses at the specified frequency.
Run frequency (Hz)
Sets the motor frequency (speed) during positioning control. The KV-300 CPU
outputs clock pulses at the specified frequency.
Note: When the start frequency equals the run frequency, the system operates as
shown in the following chart.
Preset frequency
0
Here, the acceleration/deceleration time is ignored. The output count should be less
than 65535.
3-298
Output pulse count

Sets the positioning control rotation angle (moving distance) with the pulse count.
The KV-300 CPU outputs as many clock pulses as specified. If the output pulse
count is greater than 65535, set the pulse count separately for high-order 16 bits
and low-order 16 bits based on the following expressions.
KV-10/80
Pulse change cycle (t) ms = (acceleration time ms + 199) 200 x 4

or
Pulse change cycle (t) ms = 1000 (run frequency Hz 1000)
KV-300
Acceleration/deceleration time (ms)

Sets the time required when the start frequency accelerates to the run frequency at
startup. In the same manner, sets the deceleration time required at stop. The KV300 CPU controls the clock pulse frequency from the start frequency to the run
frequency within the specified time. The pulse change cycle within the acceleration
time is obtained from one of the following expressions, whichever produces the
smaller solution. However, the pulse change cycle when the start pulse is less than
500 Hz becomes 14 ms or more.
(Output pulse count) 65536 = A (solution) B (remainder)

A = Output pulse count (high-order 16 bits)
B = Output pulse count (low-order 16 bits)
Note: When the specified output pulse count is insufficient and does not reach the
target value, the KV-300 CPU performs triangular control.
Run frequency
Start frequency
0
The current pulse output value cannot be checked.
Procedure
When the positioning control function is used, the KV-300 CPU controls start, stop,
and emergency stop by turning ON/OFF the utility relays. The table below shows the
operations and assigned utility relays.
Relay No.
R/W
Function
Description
0500
0501
2308
2311
STOP
Decelerates at rising (UP) edge and stops.
2309
2312
R
W
RUN
RESET
Turns ON during pulse output.

Immediately stops when turning ON during
interrupt program.
2310
2313
START
Starts at rising (UP) edge.
3-299
16

Operation chart (when 0500 is used)
DM9409
DM9408
DM9411
DM9412
DM9410
DM9410
When 2310 turns ON, clock pulse is output.

(rising [UP] edge is detected.)
2309 is ON during clock pulse output. When
pulse output is stopped, 2309 turns OFF.
When turning ON 2308, clock pulse
decelerates and stops (rising [UP] edge is
detected.)
2310
(START)
KV-10/80
KV-300
DM9408: Start frequency (Hz)

DM9409: Run frequency (Hz)
DM9410: Acceleration time (ms)
DM9411: Output pulse count
DM9412: Output pulse count
(low-order 16 bits)
2309
(RUN)
2308
(STOP)
Note 1: When special utility relay 2310 (2313) is turned ON at start of clock pulse,
2309 (2312) turns ON and the clock pulse is output, assuming parameter settings
are correct.
Note 2: If a parameter setting for the X-axis or Y-axis is incorrect, 2309 (2312) does
not turn ON and an error code is written into DM9407. Check the error code and
adjust the parameter setting.
Note 3: By resetting 2309 (2312) within the interrupt program, you can stop the
clock pulse immediately. You must reset 2309 within the interrupt program; otherwise, the clock pulse is not stopped.
Note 4: Because the clock pulse is output under software control, the pulse width is
extended by 10 s to 20 s in the pulse change cycle. Test the clock pulse output on
the KV-300 system before using it in practical applications.
Examples of stepping motor control
24 VDC
Sta
rt
Em
erg
enc
ys
Sto
top
p
Connection example
The following reference example shows how to connect the KV-300 CPU to a
stepping motor driver. Refer to the stepping motor driver instruction manual for
details.
Set the pulse input mode for the stepping motor driver to "Pulse input mode 1".
+
KV-300
Twisted pair cable

COM
0000
0001
0002
1
11
2
12
0500
0501
0502
0503
COM
7
8
9
10
20
+ CW (pulse)
+ CCW
(rotation
direction)
Stepping motor
24 VDC
+
FG
3-300
Ramp-up/down control
When start switch 0002 is turned ON, 0500 outputs 100000 pulses under the
following conditions: start frequency 1 kHz, run frequency 5 kHz, and acceleration/
deceleration time 3 s.
Turn ON 0001 to decelerate and stop pulse output. When 0000 is turned ON, pulse
output is immediately stopped.
0002
0001
#01000 #05000 #03000 #00001 #34464 2310

DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DM9408 DM9409 DM9410 DM9411 DM9412 2308
0003
Sets parameters and simultaneously

starts pulse.
Decelerates and stops pulse.
END
0004
INT
0000
0005
2002
2309
RES
0006
Executes emergency stop sequence with

interrupt progaram.
KV-10/80
EI
0002
Enables interrupt when starting operation.

This is required to allow emergency stop
operation.
KV-300
2008
0001
RET1
0007
ENDH
0008
Application example of stepping motor control

Assume a program that can be controlled both automatically and manually.
In automatic mode, the system runs as shown in the chart below after 0000 is turned
ON.
8000
2000
300
0
15000
17500
16
15000
In manual mode, the system goes forward while 0008 is ON and rearward while
0009 is ON. It returns to the origin when 0007 turns ON.
A pulse is output from 0500. Reverse the rotation direction by turning ON/OFF 0502.
The system is equipped with an origin sensor (0002), forward end limit (0006), and
rearward end limit (0004).
3-301
KV-10/80
KV-300
Program example
0001
STEPPING MOTOR CONTROL PROGRAM (ORIGIN, FORWARD, REVERSE LIMITS)
0002
SPECIFICATION
0003
PULUSE OUT==500 FOR/REV=502 ORIGIN=0002 FOR/END=0006 FOR/END=0004
0004
MANUAL SW: FORWARD=0008 REVERSE=0009 ORIGIN SW=0007
0005
AUTO OPERATION START=0000
0006
0007
ENABLES INTERRUPT & RESETS ORIGIN POSITIONING FRAG

2008
0008
0009
1200
(RES)
< EI >
MANUAL SWITCHES: FORWARD=0008 REVERSE=0009

0008
0009
2309
0502
(SET)
0006
1100
DIFU
0009
0008
2309
0502
(RES)
0004
1101
DIFU
0010
0011
1100
#00600 #04000 #00100

< DW > < DW > < DW >
DM9408 DM9409 DM9410
0012
#00001 #00000
< DW > < DW >
DM9411 DM9412
Sets start frequency, run frequency,

and acceleration/deceleration time.
Start frequency: 600 Hz
Run frequency: 4 kHz
Acceleration/deceleration time:
100 ms
Output pulse count: 65536
1103
DIFU
1101
0013
0008
0009
1105
DIFU
0014
0015
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ORIGIN * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
0016
LIMIT SWITCHES
0007
1205
DIFU
0017
6
0018
FORWARD IN ADVANCE
0502
(SET)
1205
0019
0020
#00000 #03500
< DW > < DW >
DM9411 DM9412
1300
DIFU
1200
(SET)
#00001 #00000
< DW > < DW >
DM9411 DM9412
1301
DIFU
1200
(RES)
For forward operation, the following

parameters are set:
Start frequency: 300 Hz,
Run frequency: 3 kHz,
Acceleration/decekeratuib time: 250 ms,
Output pulse count: 3500.
For rearward operation, the following
parameters are set:
Start frequency: 50 Hz
Run frequency: 500 Hz
Acceleration/deceleration time: 0 ms
STOP FORWARDING
1200
0021
0022
#00300 #03000 #00250

< DW > < DW > < DW >
DM9408 DM9409 DM9410
To return to the origin, first goes

forward and then rearward. Stops
when origin limit (0002) turns ON.
2309
ON
1201
1201
2309
OFF
1202
1202
1203
DIFU
POSITIONING ORIGIN WHILE REVERSING SLOWLY

1203
0023
3-302
0502
(RES)
#00500 #05000 #00000

< DW > < DW > < DW >
DM9408 DM9409 DM9410

0024
STARTS MOTOR
1300
0006
1301
0004
2310
( )
0025
Instructs motor start and acceleration/

deceleration stop.
0026
1103
0027
1506
2308
0028
SLOW DOWN & STOP (MANUAL/AUTO)

0009
0004
0008
2308
( )
KV-10/80
0006
0030
KV-300
0029
0031
1105
0032
0033
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * AUTO OPERATION CH0 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
0034
STAGE INSTRUCTION START

1400
(SET)
2008
0035
2308
0036
0037
0038
0039
1401
(RES)
1408
1408
DIFU
1402
(RES)
1403
(RES)
1400
(SET)
AUTO START (OPERATES DURING 0000 IS TURNED ON)

1400
STG
0000
1401
JMP
MOVES TO NEXT STAGE AFTER MOTOR STOPS

1407
(RES)
#00010
T001
T001
0040
1401
STG
1500
DIFU
1405
(RES)
#00005
T002
T002
0041
1402
STG
1501
DIFU
1406
(RES)
#00005
T003
T003
0042
1403
STG
1502
DIFU
2309
1405
1402
JMP
1405
2309
1406
1403
JMP
1406
2309
1407
1400
JMP
1407
0043
AUTO OPERATION PARAMETER SET

1500
0502
(SET)
#00300 #08000 #00150

< DW > < DW > < DW >
DM9408 DM9409 DM9410
#00000 #15000
< DW > < DW >
DM9411 DM9412
1503
DIFU
1501
0502
(SET)
#00300 #02000 #00250

< DW > < DW > < DW >
DM9408 DM9409 DM9410
#00000 #02500
< DW > < DW >
DM9411 DM9412
1504
DIFU
1502
0502
(RES)
#00300 #15000 #00250

< DW > < DW > < DW >
DM9408 DM9409 DM9410
#00000 #17500
< DW > < DW >
DM9411 DM9412
1505
DIFU
0044
0045
0046
0047
Creates each of the operation programs

with the STG instruction and makes the
programs ready in the specified order.
Sets the parameters for automatic mode.
(1) Start frequency: 300 Hz
Stops pulse at the origin with the interrupt
program.
STARTS MOTOR
1506
( )
1503
0048
1504
0049
1505
0050
END
0051
0052
INTERRUPT FOR EMERGENCY STOP (POSITIONING ORIGIN)

INT
0002
0053
1200
0054
0008
0009
0000
2309
( RES )
RETI
0055
ENDH
0056
3-303
16
KV-10/80
KV-300
3-304
Chapter 7
The KV Series can be connected to an external device with an RS-232C interface
to establish communication.
This chapter describes communications specifications, how to connect the KV
Series to external devices, and how to perform communication.
7.1
Communications Specifications ............................................ 3-306
7.1.1
7.1.2
7.1.3
Communications Specification ............................................................... 3-306

Connection with the KV Unit .................................................................. 3-306
Connecting the KV-300 CPU to a Personal Computer .......................... 3-307
7.2
Serial Communication ............................................................. 3-308
7.2.1
7.2.2
7.2.3
7.2.4
7.2.5
7.2.6
7.2.7
Command Transmission Procedure ....................................................... 3-308

Format of Commands/Responses ......................................................... 3-309
Communication Command/Response List ............................................. 3-310
Setting Communication Commands and Responses to Commands ..... 3-311
Other Response Codes .......................................................................... 3-315
Error Code List ....................................................................................... 3-316
Example Program .................................................................................. 3-317
7.3
Loading Text Data .................................................................... 3-318
7.3.1
7.3.2
7.3.3
Receiving Text Data ............................................................................... 3-318

Transmitting Text Data ........................................................................... 3-319
Sample Program .................................................................................... 3-320
7.4
ASCII Code List ........................................................................ 3-321
7.1 Communications Specifications

This section describes the specifications for the RS-232C interface and the connection between the KV and external devices.
7.1.1 Communications Specification

The communications specification of the KV is summarized in the table. Set the
communications parameters of the personal computer by referring to the table.
Communications parameters
Duplex
Full
Synchronization
Start/stop
Data format
ASCII
Baud rate
9,600 bps
Data length
8 bits
Parity check
Even
Stop bit length
1 bit
Delimiter
CR
Note 1: Be sure to specify the same communication parameters for the KV and any
external devices to be connected. Communication will fail if different parameters are
used.
Note 2: Refer to the instruction manual supplied with each device when setting
communications parameters on the device.
7.1.2 Connection with the KV Unit

Use the special connection cable (Straight cable: OP-26487, Reverse cable: OP96607) and a 25-pin D-sub connector (OP-26485) to connect the KV to the RS-232C
connector of the external device.
Communication port B
Communication port A
External device with RS-232C connector
KV
Note: The KV-10xx and KV-10/80 Series include only communication port A.
Wiring diagram
The following is the wiring diagram for the RS-232C cable. Be sure to use the
special connection cable to connect the KV with each device.
Device designated as modem
KV
SD
RD
SG
3
5
4
Connection
cable
(Reverse:
OP-96607)
Pin assignment for

the KV
3-306
Chapter 7 Serial Communication
2
3
7
4
5
6
20
SD
RD
SG
RS
CS
DR
ER
25-pin D-sub
connector
(OP-26485)
Device designated
as terminal
KV
SD
RD
SG
3
5
4
Connection
cable
(Straight:
OP-26487)
2
3
7
4
5
6
20
SD
RD
SG
RS
CS
DR
ER
25-pin D-sub
connector
(OP-26485)
7.1.3 Connecting the KV-300 CPU to a Personal Computer

Connect the KV-300 CPU to the RS-232C port of the personal computer with the
supplied connecting cable (OP-226486/OP-26487).
9-pin D-SUB female

connector: OP-26487
Connecting cable
Standard cable:OP-26486
Personal computer with an

RS-232C port
KV-300
Recommended pin assignments for the RS-232C communication cable are shown
below. When connecting the KV-300 CPU, use only the connecting cable supplied.
SD
RD
23
45
SG
KV-300
3
5
DCE
2
3
4
5
6
20
7
SD
RD
RS
CS
DR
ER
SG
SD
RD
KV-300
3
5
SG
DTE
2
3
4
5
6
20
7
SD
RD
RS
CS
DR
ER
SG
Pin assignments for

the KV-300 CPU
Standard cable (OP-26486 + OP-26487)

SD
RD
3
5
SG
Modular
Connector
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9-pin D-sub connector
17
3-307
7.2 Serial Communication

When the KV is connected to a personal computer, the current value or preset value
of timers/counters or contents of data memories in the KV can be loaded to and
modified on the computer.
7.2.1 Command Transmission Procedure

Commands are transmitted from a personal computer to the KV base unit as follows:
Transmits a break signal
Initialize the communication buffer and

baud rate setting of the KV.
Transmits communications
start command (CR)
Start communications with the KV.
Transmits a command
Transmit a command which instructs the

KV to perform the required operation.
Receiving a response
Receive and check the response to the

transmitted command.
Transmits communications
end command (CQ)
End communications with the KV.
Transmitting a break signal

A break signal is used to initialize the communication buffer and baud rate setting of
the KV. It is necessary to transmit a break signal of 100 ms or longer to the KV
before starting communication. Another break signal is unnecessary once the
communication is established.
A break signal must have the waveform shown below.
+V
100 ms or longer
SD
-V
10 ms or longer
Note 1: For the first serial communication with a personal computer after the KVP3E(01) handheld programmer is connected to the KV, or after the "KV IncrediWare
(DOS)" or "LADDER BUILDER for KV" programming support software is evoked, be
sure to transmit a break signal. A break signal is unnecessary at other times.
Note 2: If you cannot transmit a break signal, turn OFF the KV once to initialize the
communication program. After that, restart communication between the KV and the
personal computer.
Note 3: Be sure to stop the communication for 10 ms or longer after transmitting a
break signal.
3-308

Command/response format
"Command" and "response" in communications between the KV and a personal
computer are defined as follows:
Command: Message transmitted from personal computer to KV
Response: Answer to the command (message from KV to personal computer)
When a personal computer transmits a command to the KV Series basic unit, the KV
sends back a response to the personal computer.
When creating a program to control the KV using a personal computer, create it so
that the response is checked before the next command is transmitted.
7.2.2 Format of Commands/Responses

The formats of commands and responses are as follows:
Command format
Use the following format to transmit commands from the personal computer to the
KV. [CR] is a delimiter. The KV ignores [LF] and recognizes the next character after
[LF] as the next command.
Or
Command
Command
R
R
L
F
Response format
The KV sends back a response to the received command in the following format.
When creating a program using a personal computer, create it so that the personal
computer can process the response in this format.
Response
L
F
17
3-309
7.2.3 Communication Command/Response List

The following list shows the commands and responses used in serial communication. "_" in the list represents a space.
Function
Command
Response
Starts communication.
CR
CC
Ends communication.
CQ
CF
Changes mode.
Mn
OK
Description
n= 0: PROGRAM mode
1: RUN mode
Clears error.
ER
OK
Checks PLC error.
?E
dd
dd= Error code (00: No error)
f= 0: PROGRAM mode
1: RUN mode
Checks current PLC mode.
?M
Counter
RD_Cnnn
High-speed
counter CTH
RD_CTHn
High-speed
counter
RD_CTCn
comparator CTC
Reads
Timer
RD_Tnnn
Digital trimmer
RD_AT
f= 0: Contact OFF, 1: Contact ON

dddddd= 00000 to 65535 (in decimal)
(Current value) (Preset value) n/nnn= Counter No.
f, ddddd, ddddd
f= 0: Contact OFF 1: Contact ON

(Current value) (Preset value) nnn= Timer No.
f, ddddd, ddddd
ddddd_ddddd_00000_00000
(Trimmer 0) (Trimmer 1)
Relay contact
RD_nnnnn
Data memory
RD_DMnnnn
Temporary data
RD_TMnn
memory
Writes
Counter current
value
WR_Cnnn_ddddd
Timer current
value
WR_Tnnn_ddddd
CTH current
value
WR_CTHn_ddddd
Counter preset
value 2.
WS_Cnnn_ddddd
Timer preset
value 2.
WS_Tnnn_ddddd
CTC preset
value 2.
WS_CTCn_ddddd
Data memory
WR_DMnnnn_ddddd
Temporary data
WR_TMnn_ddddd
memory
Relay
Forces ON

Reads preset values of trimmer 0 and 1.
f= 0: Contact OFF, 1: Contact ON
ddddd

nnnn= DM No.
OK
n/nnn= Timer/counter
No. dddddd= 00000 to 65535 (in decimal)
OK
n/nnn= Timer/counter
No. dddddd= 00000 to 65535 (in decimal)
OK

nn,nnnn= DM No.
OK
nnnn= Relay No.

nnn= Timer/counter No.
OK
nnnn= Relay No.

nnn= Timer/counter No.
n= CTC No.
ST_nnnnn
Counter contact ST_Cnnn

Timer contact
ST_Tnnn
Relay
RS_nnnnn
Counter contact RS_Cnnn

Forces OFF
Timer contact
RS_Tnnn
High-speed
counter
RS_CTCn
comparator CTC
contact
Note 1: Temporary data memories TM28, TM30, and TM31 are read-only. Values cannot be written into
these memories. However, these memories can be used when special functions are not used.
Note 2: Visual KV Series: When the preset values of timers and counters are changed using "WS", the
ladder program in EEPROM is updated the next time the KV is turned on.
KV-300, 10/80 Series: The "WS" command changes the content of the program stored in the
PLCs EEPROM.
Contact Keyence if you need to change it frequently.
3-310
7.2.4 Setting Communication Commands and Responses to

Commands
This section describes the command settings and responses when a command is
properly processed.
"_" represents a space.
Refer to "7.2.5 Other Response Codes" (p. 3-315) for responses under abnormal
conditions.
Communications start command
Transmit a communications start command to start communication with the KV.
Other commands can be transmitted after the proper response is sent back from the
KV.
Note: Other commands cannot be used unless a [CR] (communications start)
command is transmitted first.
Starts communications between the KV and a personal computer.
Command: CR
Response: CC
Communications end command
Ends communications between the KV and a personal computer.
Command: CQ
Response: CF
Mode change command
Selects the mode between PROGRAM and RUN.
Command: Mn
[n=0; PROGRAM mode, n=1; RUN mode]
Response: OK
Error clear command
Clears error messages on KV.
Command: ER
Response: OK
17
Checking KV PLC error

Checks errors or faults in the KV. The description of the error is indicated with the
error code.
"7.2.6 Error Code List" (p. 3-316).
Command: ?E
Response: dd
Error code (2- or 3-digit number)
Checking current mode
The KV responds with 0 or 1 indicating a current mode.
Command: ?M
Response: f
0: PROGRAM mode 1: RUN mode
3-311

Reading counter
Reads the contact ON/OFF status, or the current and preset values of the specified
counter/up-down counter.
Command: RD_Cnnn
Counter No.
Response: f,ddddd,ddddd
[Preset value of the counter (00000 to 65535: in
decimal)]
[Current value of the counter (00000 to 65535: in
decimal)]
0: Contact is OFF., 1: Contact is ON.
Reading high-speed counter CTH
high-speed counter CTH.
Command: RD_CTHn
High-speed counter No. (0 or 1)
Preset value of CTH (00000 to 65535: in decimal)
Current value of CTH (00000 to 65535: in decimal)
Reading high-speed counter comparator CTC
high-speed counter comparator CTC.
Command: RD_CTCn
High-speed counter comparator No.
Preset value of CTC (00000 to 65535: in decimal)
Current value of CTC (00000 to 65535: in decimal)
Reading timer
timer.
Command: RD_Tnnn
Timer No.
Preset value of timer (00000 to 65535: in decimal)
Current value of timer (00000 to 65535: in decimal)
Reading digital trimmer

Reads the preset values of the digital trimmers.
Command: RD_AT
Response: ddddd_ddddd_00000_00000
Value of trimmer 1 (00000 to 65535: in decimal)
Value of trimmer 0 (00000 to 65535: in decimal)
Reading relay contact
Reads the contact ON/OFF status of the specified relay.
Command: RD_nnnn
Relay No.
Response: f
3-312

Reading DM
Reads the contents of the specified data memory.
Command: RD_DMnnnn
Data memory No.
Response: ddddd
Data in the specified data memory. (00000 to
65535: in decimal)
Reading TM
Reads the contents of the specified temporary data memory.
Command: RD_TMnn
Temporary data memory No. (00 to 31)
Response: ddddd
Data in the specified temporary data memory.
(00000 to 65535: in decimal)
Writing current value of counter
Changes the current value of the specified counter or up-down counter.
Command: WR_Cnn_ddddd
New current value (00000 to 65535: in decimal)
Counter No.
Response: OK
Writing current value of timer
Changes the current value of the specified timer.
Command: WR_Tnnn_ddddd
Timer No.
Response: OK
Writing current value of high-speed counter CTH
Changes the current value of the specified high-speed counter CTH.
Command: WR_CTHn_ddddd
High-speed counter No.
Response: OK
Writing preset value of counter
Changes the preset value of the specified counter or up-down counter.
Command: WS_Cnnn_ddddd
New preset value (00000 to 65535: in decimal)
Counter No.
Response: OK
Note: Executing this command changes the program in the KV. The program in EEPROM is
automatically updated the next time the KV is turned ON.
Writing preset value of timer

Changes the preset value of the specified timer.
Command: WS_Tnnn_ddddd
Timer No.
Response: OK
Note: Visual KV Series: Executing this command changes the program in the KV. The
program in EEPROM is automatically updated the next time the KV
is turned ON.
KV-300, 10/80 Series: The "WS" command changes the content of the program
stored in the PLCs EEPROM.
Contact Keyence if you need to change it frequently.
3-313
17

Writing preset value of high-speed counter comparator CTC
Changes the preset value of the specified high-speed counter comparator CTC.
Command: WS_CTCn_ddddd
Response: OK
Writing into DM
Writes data into the specified data memory.
Command: WR_DMnnnn_ddddd
Data memory No.
Response: OK
Writing into TM
Writes data into the specified temporary data memory. TM30 and TM31 are readonly memories, so values cannot be written to them.
Command: WR_TMnn_ddddd
Temporary data memory No. (00 to 29)
Response: OK
Forcing relay ON
Forces the contact of the specified relay to ON.
Command: ST_nnnnn
Relay No.
Response: OK
Forcing counter contact ON
Forces the contact of the specified counter to ON.
Command: ST_Cnnn
Counter No.
Response: OK
Forcing timer contact ON
Forces the contact of the specified timer to ON.
Command: ST_Tnnn
Timer No.
Response: OK
Forcing relay OFF

Forces the contact of the specified relay to OFF.
Command: RS_nnnnn
Relay No.
Response: OK
Forcing counter contact OFF
Forces the contact of the specified counter to OFF.
Command: RS_Cnnn
Counter No.
Response: OK
Forcing timer contact OFF
Forces the contact of the specified timer to OFF.
Command: RS_Tnnn
Timer No.
Response: OK
3-314

Forcing CTC contact OFF
Forces the contact of the specified high-speed counter comparator to OFF.
Command: RS_CTCn
Response: OK
Note 1: Input relays cannot be forced ON/OFF. (Except when special utility relay
2301 is ON.)
Note 2: "_" in commands and responses represents a space.
7.2.5 Other Response Codes

If the command from a computer is an unspecified one, or an error occurs in the KV,
the KV sends back an appropriate response code for the status.
Response
code
E0
E1
Description
Relay No.
error
Command
error
Cause
Remedy
Undefined relay, counter,

timer, DM, CTH, or CTC
number was specified.
Specify a number that is

defined in the KV being
used.
Counter, timer, CTH, or

CTC number, unused in a
program was specified.
Check a program, and

specify a number used in
the program.
Undefined command was

transmitted.
Check a command.
Incorrect command was

specified.
Command other than "CR"
was transmitted before the
communications path was
established.
Transmit "CR" to start

communications, and then
transmit a command.
E2
When the KV has no program Register a program into the

Program
KV.
unregistered stored, "M1" was transmitted
Check a program and
or reading of timer/counter
specify the number used in
content was attempted.
the program.
E3
Base unit
fault
Hardware error was detected

in a KV base unit.
Turn off the power for the KV,

and then turn it on again. If
the cause of the error is not
removed, the KV may be
faulty. Contact your nearest
KEYENCE office.
E4
Writeprotected
Attempt was made to change

the preset value of a counter,
timer, or CTC in a writeprotected program.
Write-enable the program,

and change the preset value.
E5
Base unit
error
"M1" was transmitted before

cleaning an error message
from the KV.
Clear the error message from

the KV, and remove the cause
of the error.
3-315
17
7.2.6 Error Code List

When a "Checking KV PLC error" command (?E) is transmitted, the KV sends back
the error code. The following list shows the description, cause, and remedy for each
error code.
Error code
Description
Cause
Remedy
00
No error
10
CALL nest error
Subroutines are nested to four levels

or more.
11
FOR nest error
12
INT nest error
FOR/NEXT instructions are nested to Check the program while paying

eight levels or more.
particular attention to usage of
subroutines and the INT instruction,
Five levels or more of interrupts
and restore the program accordingly.
occurred simultaneously.
13
MPS nest error
20
Memory error
MPS/MPP instructions are nested to

eight levels or more.
Content in RAM was erased. All data Turn the KV off once and turn it on.
in data memory and current values of Register data from the beginning.
counters in the KV were cleared.
Scan time exceeds 300 ms.
30
Scan timer error
40
NO PROGRAM
50
SND/RTN failure
51
Division by zero
52
Address error
53
Invalid instruction
54
Watchdog timer error
Check the program again.

Be sure that there is no excessive
repetition using the FOR/NEXT loop.
Be sure that an interrupt is not
executed at a higher rate.
Attempt was made to operate a KV

base unit which has no programs
stored.
Write a program into KV.
Hardware error was detected in a KV Turn off the power for the KV, and
base unit.
then turn it on again. If the cause of
the error is not removed, the KV may
be faulty. Contact your nearest
KEYENCE office.
3-316
These errors may occur when a

program is executed.
7.2.7 Example Program

Typical program for communications between the KV and a personal computer (For
IBM PC-AT & compatible computers using BASIC)
Language Microsoft BASIC Version 7.0
*****I/OAddress (RS-232C Port-1)*****

Port-1&H3F*
Port-2&H2F*
PortCtrl%=&H3FBCOM1
Port1Modem%=&H3FCMODEMCtrl
PortBpsLow%=&H3F8BitrateLow
PortBpsHigh%=&H3F9BitrateHigh
*****ControlCode*****
Port1CtrlCode1%=&H5BBreak&8bitEven1Stopbit
Port1CtrlCode2%=&H1B8bitEven1Stopbit
Note: No parity check is specified due to the
*****InitializesRS-232C*****
limitations of the version of BASIC being used.
OPEN"COM1:9600,N,8,1"FORRANDOMAS#1'
*****RS-232CPortInit*****
OUTPortCtrl %,Port1CtrlCode1%Start transmitting a break signal
SLEEP1wait 1 sec.
OUTPortCtrl%,Port1CtrlCode2%Ends transmitting a break signal
-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-******DebugPrint*****
status=INP(&H3FE):PRINT"ModemStatus1";status
status=INP(&H3FD):PRINT"LineStatus1";status
*****SelfInit.*****
linectrl=INP(PortCtrl%)ReadLine-Control-Register
linectrl=linectrlOR&H80'
OUTPortCtrl%,linectrlDLAB=ON
OUTPortBpsLow%,12SetBitRate(9600BPS)
OUTPortBpsHigh%,0'
linectrl=linectrlAND&H7FDLAB=OFF
OUTPortCtrl%,linectrl
*****CtrlLine*****
OUTPort1Modem%,&HBRTS,DTRON !!
*****DebugPrint*****
status=INP(&H3FE):PRINT"ModemStatus2";status
status=INP(&H3FD):PRINT"LineStatus2";status
-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-**********************************************************
*****Transmitting a command/receiving a response*****
*********************************************************
a$=""
WHILEa $>"END"
PRINT"Command>>":
INPUTa$
PRINT#1,a $
b$=""
LINEINPUT#1,b$
PRINT"RsP[";b$;"]"
PRINT
WEND
PRINT"GoodBy!!"
CLOSE#1
END
Change value in "SLEEP" timer according to your personal computers clock

frequency so that value I exceeds 100 ms.
Set the baud rate of your personal computer to 9600 bits/s.
Enter END to terminate programming.
Note 1: MS-DOS executable files (KVCOM.EXE) and BASIC source code files
(KVCOM.BAS) are included in the KV Incrediware (DOS) Software (KV-H4E,
version 2.00 or higher).
Note 2: Type in "KVCOM" and press ENTER to call the MS-DOS command line.
3-317
17
7.3 Loading Text Data

The KV can be connected to equipment having an RS-232C port to load consecutive
text data (less than 100 bytes) as a batch into its data memories.
Loaded data can be modified and incorporated into a program.
7.3.1 Receiving Text Data

The KV can write up to 100 bytes of text data sandwiched between STX and ETX,
into internal data memories (DM1000 to DM1099 with communication port A,
DM1200 to DM1299 with communication port B), one byte per data memory in
ASCII code.
Communications data format
Note that each text data must include STX (02H) in the 1st byte followed by the text
(100 bytes max.) and end with ETX (03H) in the last byte as shown below.
1st byte
Last byte
Text data (less than 100 bytes)
STX
ETX
Internal data memory

The KV writes received text data into its data memories (DM1000 to DM1099 with
communication port A, DM1200 to 1299 with communication port B), one byte per
data memory in ASCII code.
Dat a
memory
NEW PO RT A
KV
PO RT B
KV- 300
KV- 10/ 80
Dat a No.
DM1000
DM1001 DM1002 DM1003 to DM1098 DM1099
DM1200
DM1201 DM1202 DM1203 to DM1298 DM1299
DM9200
DM9201 DM9202 DM9203 to DM9298 DM9299
Byte count Data 1
Data 2
Data 3 to Data 98
Data 99
The KV writes "00" into the high-order 8 bits and text data in ASCII code into the
low-order 8 bits of the data memory.
7
Byte count of data
Received data
STX Data 1 Data 2 Data 3
Data memory
1st DM
(Byte count of data)
Data 99 ETX
3rd DM
2nd DM
100th DM
4th DM
15
Bits in
data memory
00
High-order 8 bits (00)
Low-order 8 bits (ASCII code)
Note: The KV-10xx includes only communication port A.

Special utility relay operation
Three special utility relays assigned for each channel turn on for one scan to
indicate that text data has been received or that data reception has failed.
3-318

Relay No.
( PO RT A)
Relay No.
( PO RT B)
Relay No.
( KV- 300/ 10/ 80)
Descript ion
2801
2806
2804
Turns ON for one scan when text data

has been received.
2802
2807
2805

has been received while 2801 is ON,
or when 2803 is ON.
2803
2808
2806

reception has failed.
Note 1: Be sure to transmit a break signal for the first serial communication with a
personal computer after the KV-P3E(01) handheld programmer is connected to the
KV, or after the "KV IncrediWare (DOS)" or "LADDER BUILDER for KV" programming support software is evoked.
A break signal initializes the communication setting for the KV. If you cannot transmit
a break signal, turn the KV OFF once to initialize the communication setting. The KV
will not receive text data unless its communication setting has been initialized.
Note 2: If [ETX] exists at some point in the text data, the KV writes the data before
[ETX] into the data memory. The data after [ETX] is not written.
Note 3: If KV receives text data while special utility relay 2804 (2809)*1 is ON, the
received data is not written into the data memory. In this case, special utility relay
2802 (2807)*2 turns ON for one scan.
Note 4: When parity errors or other errors occur during text data reception, the
received data is not written into the data memory. In this case, special utility relays
2802 (2807) and 2803 (2808)*3 turn ON for one scan.
Note 5: The KV-10xx includes only communication port A.
*1: 2804 with KV-300/10/80 *2: 2805 with KV-300/10/80 *3: 2806 with KV-300/10/80
7.3.2 Transmitting Text Data

The KV transmits text data written into its data memories (DM1100 to DM1199 for
communication port A, DM1300 to DM1399 for communication port B), one byte per
data memory in ASCII code.
Transmission data format and internal data memories
When transmitting data from the KV, write the data into the data memory in the
following format.
PO RT A
DM1100
DM1101
DM1102
DM1103 to DM1198 DM1199
Dat a
PO R T B
memory
K V- 3 0 0 /
10/ 80
DM1300
DM1301
DM1302
DM1303 to DM1398 DM1399
DM9300
DM9301
DM9302
DM9303 to DM9398 DM9399
Dat a No.
Byte count
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3 to Data 98
Data 99
The KV writes "00" into the high-order 8 bits and text data in ASCII code into the
low-order 8 bits of the data memory.
Low-order 8 bits (ASCII code)
High-order 8 bits (00)

15
00
Data memory bits
Data memory
1st DM
(Byte count of data)
Transmitted data
2nd DM
Data 1 Data 2 Data 3
3rd DM
4th DM
100th DM
Data 99
Note: The KV-10xx includes only communication port A.
3-319
17

Special utility relay operation
Two special utility relays are assigned for each channel for data transmission. Text
data or a break signal is transmitted when the respective relay is turned ON/OFF.
Relay No.
(Port A)
Relay No.
(Port B)
Relay No.
(KV-300/10/80)
2804
2809
2807
Starts/stops transmitting text data.

ON: Start, OFF: Stop
2800
2805
2803
Starts/stops transmitting break signal.

ON: Start, OFF: Stop
Description
Note 1: Be sure to transmit a break signal for the first serial communication with a
personal computer after the KV-P3E(01) handheld programmer is connected to the
KV, or after the "KV IncrediWare (DOS)" or "LADDER BUILDER for KV" programming support software is evoked.
A break signal initializes the communication setting for the KV. If you cannot transmit
a break signal, turn the KV OFF once to initialize the communication setting.
The KV will not transmit/receive text data unless its communication setting has been
initialized.
Note 2: Turn ON special utility relay 2804 (2809) (SET 2804 [2809])*1 to transmit text
data. Special utility relay 2804 (2809)*1 remains ON during text data transmission,
and automatically turns OFF when the transmission completes.
To forcefully stop the text data transmission, turn OFF special utility relay 2804
(2809) (RES 2804 [2809])*1.
Note 3: A break signal is transmitted while special utility relay 2808*2 is turned ON.
Use the SET-RES instruction pair or OUT-OUB instruction pair to control a break
signal. The communication program of the destination KV is initialized after a break
signal has been transmitted.
*1: 2807 with KV-300/10/80 *2: 2803 with KV-300/10/80
7.3.3 Sample Program

The following is the sample program to transmit/receive text data using communication port A on the KV basic unit.
Data to be transmitted: KEYENCE
Transmission header: STX
Transmission delimiter: ETX
Length of received data: Fixed to 7 bytes
0001
Sends break signal (1 sec.).

2008
2800
T000
0002
One scan ON
2800
#00010
T000
0003
Break signal
0004
0005
Transmits text data ("STX KEYENCE ETX").

1001
0000
DIFU
Transmission
start relay
0006
1001
#00009 $0002
$004B
$0045
$0059
$0045
DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DW
DM1100 DM1101 DM1102 DM1103 DM1104 DM1105
No. of
STX
K
E
Y
E
transmitted
data
0007
0008
0009
Receives text data.
Transmits text data when

input relay 0000 turns ON.
2804
$004E
$0043
$0045
$0003
SET
DW
DW
DW
DW
DM1106 DM1107 DM1108 DM1109 Transmission
N
C
E
ETX
relay
DM1000 DM1001 DM1002 DM1003 DM1004 DM1005 DM1006 DM1007

2801
LDA
LDA
LDA
LDA
LDA
LDA
LDA
LDA
Reception relay
No. of
Received Received Received Received Received Received Received data
received
data.
data
data
data
data
data
data
0500
2803
T001
0010
Reception error
0500
0011
#00030
T001
END
0012
ENDH
0013
3-320
When power is turned ON,

transmits a break signal for
one second during the first
scan.
Receives text data.

Turns ON output relay 0500
for 3 seconds when
reception error occurs.
7.4 ASCII Code List
7.4 ASCII Code List

The following are the ASCII code characters used for data transmission.
High-order 4 bits
0
1
2
3
4
Low-order 4 bits
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
17
E
F
Characters in the shaded area can be used for data transmission with the KV.
[STX], [ETX], [LF], and [CR] are used as data delimiters.
Only use characters in the shaded area because the other characters are used for
control purposes.
3-321
7.4 ASCII Code List
3-322
Chapter 8
This chapter describes the typical programming examples for KV-300, KV-10/80
Series. These programs can be used for Visual KV Series. However, pay attention
to the I/O addressing compatibility before use.
8.1
List ....................................................................................................... 3-324
8.2
Details ................................................................................................. 3-326
8.2.1
Reference Program Examples ............................................................... 3-326
8.1 List
8.1 List
Instruction
Program title
TMR, TMH, TMS [Timers]
One-shot circuit
3-326
Off-delay circuit
3-326
C [Counter]
3-327
Flicker circuit
3-327
Accumulator timer
3-327
3-328
3-328
3-328
DIFU, DIFD
One-shot circuit
3-329
KEEP
Detection of packs on conveyor
3-329
SFT
Alternating circuit
3-330
3-331
Asynchronous shift register
3-331
3-332
HSP
3-332
MC-MCR
3-333
W-UE
3-334
3-334
Enabling double coil
3-335
3-335
STP-STE
Process progression
3-336
ITVL
3-336
Fetching data from KV-AN6
3-337
High-speed counter multi-level setting
3-338
CTH [High-speed counter]
High-speed counter current value clear
3-339
Input of phase differential signal
3-339
SBN [Sub-routine]
DM shift
3-340
FOR-NEXT
Transfer of a block of DM data
3-341
HKEY
3-342
TMIN [Analog timer]
Changing timer setting value
3-343
Changing setting values of multiple timers
3-343
3-343
3-345
LDA/STA
CMP
ADD
3-345
Comparing values with no specific range
3-345
3-345
3-346
Multi-level comparator
3-346
Adding BCD and BIN(binary) values
3-347
Total count
3-348
SUB
Comparison of absolute values
3-348
MUL
Multiplying the counter current value by DM value
3-349
DIV
Total count average
3-349
ANDA
BCD (1-digit) input
3-350
Fetches input data separately
3-350
3-351
3-351
ORA
3-324
On-delay circuit
Multi-level Up/Down counter
STG-JMP
Reference
Page
Chapter 8 Programming Examples
8.1 List
Instruction
Program title
EORA
Judgement of matcing data
3-352
SRA/SLA
3-352
RRA/RLA
Error input count
3-353
INC/DEC
Reference
Page
Total count
3-353
Up/Down count
3-354
MPX
3-355
DMX
3-356
TBCD
3-356
3-356
3-357
TBIN
18
3-325
8.2 Details
8.2
Details
8.2.1 Reference Program Examples

Basic Instructions
Applications of TMR, TMH, and TMS Instructions Refer to p. 3-67 to p. 3-71.
One-shot circuit
When input relay 0000 turns ON, output relay 0500 turns ON and remains ON for a
specified time.
Timing diagram
0000
0500
2s
2s
Ladder diagram
Coding
2-s timer
0000
#00020
T000
0500
T000
00500
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
Instruction
LD
OR
TMR
ANB
OUT
Operand
0000
0500
000#00020
T000
0500
Off-delay circuit
When input relay 0000 turns ON, output relay 0500 turns ON. 0500 turns OFF in a
specified time after 0000 turns OFF.
Timing diagram
0000
0500
2s
Ladder diagram
0000
0500
Coding
0500
T000
00000
#00020
T000
2-s timer
3-326
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
Instruction
LD
OR
ANB
OUT
ANB
TMR
Operand
0000
0500
T000
0500
0000
000 #00020
8.2 Details
On-delay circuit
Output relay 0500 turns ON in a specified time after input relay 0000 turns ON.
When input relay 0000 turns OFF, output relay 0500 also turns OFF.
Timing diagram
0000
0500
2s
1s
Ladder diagram
Coding
2-s timer
0000
#00020
T000
T000
0500
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
Instruction
LD
TMR
LD
OUT
Operand
0000
000 #00020
T000
0500
Flicker circuit
Output relay 0500 turns ON and OFF repeatedly while input relay 0000 is ON.
Timing diagram
0500
1s
1s
0000
2s
2s
Ladder diagram
0000
T001
Coding
2-s timer
1-s timer
T000
Line No.
#00020
T000
#00010
T001
0500
Instruction
Operand
0000
LD
0000
0001
ANB
T001
0002
TMR
000 #00020
0003
LD
T000
0004
TMR
001 #00010
0005
OUT
0500
Accumulator timer (Remains ON in case of power failure)

Counts special utility relay 2006 (1-s clock pulse) for 3600 s at C001 and inputs the
count value to C002. Accumulates the count for 10000 hours and retains the current
count value even when power failure occurs or power is OFF.
Input relay 0000
Reset relay 0001
(Resolution is 1 s at 2006.)
Ladder diagram
Coding
0000
C001 3600-s counter
C001
1-s pulse
0001
10000-s counter
#03600
C001
2006
1000
#10000
C002
1000
Line No. Instruction
Operand
0000
LD
0000
0001
ANB
C001
0002
001 #03600 2006
0003
LD
C001
0004
OUT
1000
0005
LDB
0001
0006
002 #10000 1000
3-327
18
8.2 Details
Accumulates 1 count to C001 for every 10000 counts by C000. This example can
count up to 655350000.
Count input relay 0000
Reset relay 0001
Ladder diagram
0001
Coding
C000
#10000
C000
0000
1000
C000
0001
#65535
C001
1000
Operand
0000
LDB
0001
0001
ANB
C000
0002
000 #10000 0000
0003
LD
C000
0004
OUT
1000
0005
LDB
0001
0006
001 #65535 1000
Multi-level UP/DOWN counter

UP/DOWN counter which allows the count setting value up to 99,990,000.
UP input relay: 0001
DOWN input relay: 0002
Reset input relay: 0003
The example below outputs the high-order 4 digits of 8-digit BCD to UDC001 and
the low-order 4 digits of 8-digit BCD to UDC000.
0004
C000
LDA
TBCD
8500
STA
C001
LDA
TBCD
8600
STA
Low-order
4 digits
High-order
4 digits
Ladder diagram
Coding
UDC000
UP
#09999
DW
0001
0002
BCD:
Low-order
4 digits
0003
RES
C000
0001
C000
0002
UDC001
UP
#09999
DW
BCD:
High-order
4 digits
0003
RES

0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
LD
LD
LD
UDC
LD
AND
LD
AND
LD
UDC

Outputs in 3 different levels according to the counter current value.
00000 to 00999 > 0500 turns ON.
01000 to 01999 > 0501 turns ON.
02000 to 02999 > 0502 turns ON.
Ladder diagram
0001
2002 C000
LDA
#09999
C000
0000
#00999 2011
CMP
#01999 2011 0500
CMP
0500
00000 to
00999
0501
01000 to
01999
#02999 2011 0500 0501 0512

02000 to
CMP
02999
3-328
Operand
0001
0002
0003
000 #09999
C000
0001
C000
0002
0003
001 #09999
8.2 Details
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
Instruction
LDB
C
LD
LDA
CON
MPS
CMP
CON
ANB
OUT
MRD
CMP
Operand
0001
000 #09999 0000
2002
C000
#00999
2011
0500
Line No.
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
Instruction
CON
ANB
ANB
OUT
MPP
CMP
CON
ANB
ANB
ANB
OUT
Operand
2011
0500
0501
#02999
2011
0500
0501
0502
#01999
Application of DIFU, DIFD Instructions

One-shot circuit using differentiate instruction
When input relay 0000 turns ON/OFF, output relay 0500 and 0501 turns ON oneshot (1 second).
Timing diagram
0000
1000
1001
0500
1S
0501
1S
Ladder diagram
Coding
0000
1000
DIFU
1001
DIFD
1000
T001
0500
0500
1001
#00010
T001
T002
0501
0501
#00010
T002
Refer to p. 3-78.

0000
LD
0001
DIFU
0002
DIFD
0003
LD
0004
OR
0005
ANB
0006
OUT
0007
TMR
0008
LD
0009
OR
0010
ANB
0011
OUT
0012
TMR
Operand
0000
1000
1001
1000
0500
T001
0500
001 #00010
1001
0501
T002
0501
002 #00010
Application of KEEP instruction

Detection of chewing gum packs
Detects chewing gum packs over the carton using the proximity switch ES Series
(0001 to 0003). If the switch detects that one or more packs of chewing gum are
missing, output relay 0500 turns ON for 1 s.
The timing clock is generated from the visible beam photoelectric switch PZ2 (0000).
Reflector (R-2)
ing ck
ew
Ch m pa
gu
ON
OFF
ing ck
ew
Ch m pa
gu
Proximity Switch ES Series
ON
ES Series
Gum
Gum
Gum
Gum
Gum
Gum
Gum
Gum
PZ2-61
3-329
18
8.2 Details
Timing diagram
0000
0001
0002
0003
0500
1s
Ladder diagram
0000 0001 0002 0003
KEEP
SE T
1000
Excecutes SET when

all input relays 0000 to
0003 are ON.
1001
RES
0000
1001
DIFD
1001 1000 T001
0500
0500
#00010
T001
Detects presence/absence
of chewing gum packs at
DOWN edge of 0000.
Outputs 1-s one-shot pulse

from output relay 0500
when 1000 is OFF.
Executes SET when all input relays 0000 to 0003 are ON.
Detects presence/absence of chewing gum packs at DOWN edge of 0000.
Outputs 1-s one-shot pulse from output relay 0500 when 1000 is OFF.
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
Instruction
LD
AND
AND
AND
LD
KEEP
LD
Operand
0000
0001
0002
0003
1001
1000
0000
Line No.
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
Instruction
DIFD
LD
ANB
OR
ANB
OUT
TMR
Operand
1001
1001
1000
0500
T001
0500
001 #00010
Refer to p. 3-80.
Applications of SFT instruction

Alternating circuit
Every time input relay No. 0000 turns ON, 0500 turns alternately ON and OFF.
Timing diagram
0000
0500
Ladder diagram
Coding
SFT
1000
D
1000
0000
CLK
1000
2003
RES
1000
0500
Refer to p. 3-82.
3-330
Operand
0000
LDB
1000
0001
LD
0000
0002
LD
2003
0003
SFT
1000 1000
0004
LD
1000
0005
OUT
0500
8.2 Details
Turns ON every output for a second sequentially. Sets 1000 to 2008 (ON for 1st
scan only at startup) and shifts outputs from 7500 to 7504 every second at T001.
When 1005 turns ON, 1000 is set and the same sequence as above repeats.
Ladder diagram
Coding
1000
SET
#00010
T001
2008
T001
SFT
2003
D
1000
T001
CLK
1000
1005
RES
7500
1001
7501
1002
7502
1003
7503
1004
7504
2003
1000
SET
1005

0000
LD
0001
SET
0002
LDB
0003
T001
0004
LD
0005
LD
0006
LD
0007
SFT
0008
LD
0009
OUT
0010
LD
Operand
2008
1000
T001
#00010
2003
T001
2003
1000 1005
1000
7500
1001
0011
OUT
7501
0012
LD
1002
0013
OUT
7502
0014
LD
1003
0015
OUT
7503
0016
LD
1004
0017
OUT
7504
0018
LD
1005
0019
SET
1000
Synchronous shift register

Turns ON input relay 0002 to reset the shift register (1000 to 1010) when the data
input to 0000 does not synchronize with the clock input to 0001.
Timing diagram
0001
0000
1000
18
1001
1002
.
.
.
Ladder diagram
Coding
1100
DIFU
0000
1100
1000
SET
2003
SFT
D
1000
0001
CLK
1010
0002
RES
Operand
0000
LD
0000
0001
DIFU
1100
0002
LD
1100
0003
SET
100
0004
LD
2003
0005
LD
0001
0006
LD
0002
0007
SFT
1000 1010
3-331
8.2 Details
When input relay No. 0000 turns ON, all internal utility relays No. 1000 through 1915
turn OFF.
SFT instruction can be substituted for RES instruction. This application can be used
to reset many relays at one time.
Ladder diagram
Coding
SFT
2003
D
1000
2003
CLK
1915
0000
RES
Line No.
0000
Instruction
LD
Operand
2003
0001
LD
2003
0002
LD
0000
0003
SFT
1000 1915
Applications of HSP instruction

When the input signal at 0000 has pulses of 5-ms interval and input relay 0001 is
ON, fetches data from input relay 0000 at high speed and outputs 1-s one-shot
pulse from output relay 0500.
Timing diagram
0000
0001
0500
1s
Ladder diagram
Coding
0001
0000
0500
HSP
0000
1-s timer
#00010
T000
T000
0500
Outputs
1-s one-shot
pulse from
output relay
0500.
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
To input a signal having pulse interval shorter than the scan time, use the interrupt instruction. Refer to p. 3-192.
When using the interrupt instruction

Ladder diagram
2008
Turn ON for 1st scan only at startup.

EI
2813
SET
0500
#00010
T000
T000
0500
RES
Interrupt enabled
Initial settings
Input time constant
10 s
Turns ON timer for
1s when 0500 is ON.
Resets 0500 when
T000 turns ON.
END
2002
INT
0000
Sets interrupt input

at 0000.
0500
SET
Sets 0500 when

0000 turns ON.
RETI
ENDH
3-332
Instruction
Operand
LD
0001
HSP
0000
LD
0000
OR
0500
TMR
000 #00010
ANB
T000
OUT
0500
8.2 Details
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
Instruction
LD
EI
SET
LD
T000
LD
RES
Operand
2008
2813
0500
#00010
T000
0500
Line No.
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
Instruction
END
INT
LD
SET
RETI
ENDH
Operand
0000
2002
0500
Refer to p. 3-86.
Application of MC-MCR instruction

When input relay 0000 is ON, 0500 turns ON for 1 s, then 0501 turns ON for 2 s,
and then 0502 turns ON for 3 s, repeatedly.
Once input relay 0000 turns OFF, 0500 turns ON when 0001 is ON, 0501 turns ON
when 0002 is ON, and 0502 turns ON when 0003 is ON.
Timing diagram
Coding
0000
0001
0002
0003
0500
0501
0502
Ladder diagram
0000
1000
1001
0001
0002
0000 1002 1002

DIFU
1000
1100
SET
1101
RES
1102
RES
MC
0003
1100
STG
1200
0004
#00010 T000
T000
1101
JMP
1101
STG
1201
0005
#00020 T001
T001
1102
JMP
1102
STG
1202
0006
#00030 T002
T002
1100
JMP
MCR
0007
1001
MC
0001
1203
0002
1204
0003
1205
0008
0009
0010
0011
MCR
0012
1200
0500
0013
1203
0014
1201
0501
0015
1204
0016
1202
0502
0017
1205
0018
END
0019
ENDH
0020
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023
0024
0025
0026
0027
0028
0029
0030
0031
0032
0033
0034
0035
0036
0037
0038
0039
0040
0041
0042
0043
0044
0045
0046
0047
0048
0049
0050
0051
0052
0053
0054
0055
0056
Instruction
LD
OUT
CON
OUB
LD
DIFU
CON
AND
SET
CON
RES
CON
RES
LD
MC
STG
OUT
CON
TMR
CON
AND
JMP
STG
OUT
CON
TMR
CON
AND
JMP
STG
OUT
CON
TMR
CON
AND
JMP
MCR
LD
MC
LD
OUT
LD
OUT
LD
OUT
MCR
LD
OR
OUT
LD
OR
OUT
LD
OR
OUT
END
ENDH
Operand
0000
1000
1001
0000
1002
1002
1100
1101
1102
1000
1100
1200
000 #00010
T000
1101
1101
1201
001 #00020
T001
1102
1102
1202
002 #00030
T002
1100
1001
0001
1203
0002
1204
0003
1205
1200
1203
0500
1201
1204
0501
1202
1205
0502
3-333
18
8.2 Details
Application Instructions
Application of W-UE instruction
Output relay 0500 turns ON when input relay 0000 is ON and input 0001, 0002, and
0003 turn ON in this sequence.
Output relay 0500 turns OFF when input relay 0000 is OFF.
Timing diagram
0000
0001
0002
0003
0500
Ladder diagram
Coding
0001
0000
Operand
1000
1000
0002
0000
LD
0000
0001
W-UE
0002
LD
1000
1001
1001
0003
0001 1000
0003
W-UE
0002 1001
1002
0500
0004
LD
1001
1002
0005
W-UE
0003 1002
0006
LD
1002
0007
OUT
0500

Checks the input sequence. Output relay 0500 turns ON when input relay 0000 turns
ON and then 0001 turns ON. Output relay 0501 turns ON when input relay 0001
turns ON and then 0000 turns ON.
Timing diagram
0000
0001
0500
0501
Ladder diagram
0000
0001
0001
1000
0000
1000
1001
Coding
Operand
Leave
warehouse
0000
LD
0000
0001
W-UE
0001 1000
Enter
warehouse
0002
CON
0003
AND
1000
0004
OUT
0500
0005
LD
0001
0006
W-UE
0000 1001
0007
CON
0008
AND
1001
0009
OUT
0501
0501
1001
3-334
0500
8.2 Details
Application of STG-JMP instruction

Enabling double coil
When start SW 0000 is pressed, output relay 0500 turns ON for 1 s, then output
relays 0500 and 0501 turn ON for 2 s, and then output relays 0500, 0501, and 0502
turn ON for 3 s. The above sequence repeats.
Ladder diagram
1100
DIFU
0000
1000
STG
1000
SET
1100
Turns ON 1000 when input relay 0000 turns ON.
0500 #00010 T000

T000
1001
JMP
Output relay 0500 turns ON for 1 s.
#00020 T001
T001
1002
JMP
Output relays 0500 and 0501 turn ON for 2 s.
1000
JMP
Output relays 0500, 0501 and 0502 turn ON for 3 s.
1001
STG
0500 0501
1002
STG
0500 0501 0502 #00030 T002

T002
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
CAUTION
Instruction
LD
DIFU
CON
AND
SET
STG
OUT
CON
TMR
CON
AND
JMP
STG
OUT
CON
OUT
Operand
0000
1100
1100
1000
1000
0500
000 #00010
T000
1001
1001
0500
0501
Line No.
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023
0024
0025
0026
0027
0028
0029
0030
0031
Instruction
CON
TMR
CON
AND
JMP
STG
OUT
CON
OUT
CON
OUT
CON
TMR
CON
AND
JMP
Operand
001 #00020
T001
1002
1002
0500
0501
0502
002 #00030
T002
1000
The double coil operates normally through different STG instructions. If

different STG instructions turn ON simultaneously, the latter programmed
instruction has the priority.
When input relay 0000 (start SW) turns ON, output relay 0500 turns ON. Then, as
programmed for conditional branching, output 0501 turns ON for 1 s when 0001
turns ON or 0502 turns ON for 2 s when 0002 turns ON. After either one of the
processes is completed, the program returns to the conditional branching and
repeats the same steps.
Ladder diagram
0000
1100
DIFU
1100
1000
STG
0500
0001
1001
JMP
0002
1002
JMP
1000
SET
1001
STG
0501
#00010
T000
T000
1000
JMP
1002
STG
0502
#00020
T001
T001
1000
JMP
3-335
18
8.2 Details
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
Instruction
LD
DIFU
CON
AND
SET
STG
OUT
MPS
AND
JMP
MPP
AND
JMP
STG
Operand
0000
1100
1100
1000
1000
0500
0001
1001
0002
1002
1001
Line No.
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023
0024
0025
0026
Instruction
OUT
CON
TMR
CON
AND
JMP
STG
OUT
CON
TMR
CON
AND
JMP
Operand
0501
000 #00010
T000
1000
1002
0502
001 #00020
T001
1000
Application of STP-STE instruction

Process progression
When input relay 0000 turns ON, output relay 0500 automatically turns ON for 2 s,
and then 0501 turns ON for 3 s.
Ladder diagram
0001
0000 1000 1000

DIFU
Coding
1001
SET
STP
1001
0002
T000
1001
RES
T000
0500
1001
#00020
T000
T000
1002
SET
0003
0004
0005
0006
STE
0007
STP
1002
0008
T001
1002
RES
T001
0501
1002
#00030
T001
0009
0010
0011
STE
0012
END
0013
ENDH
0014
The double coil operates normally

across different STP instructions.
Refer to p. 3-114.

0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023
0024
LD
DIFU
CON
AND
SET
STP
LD
RES
LDB
OUT
LD
TMR
LD
SET
STE
STP
LD
RES
LDB
OUT
LD
TMR
STE
END
ENDH
Operand
0000
1000
1000
1001
1001
T000
1001
T000
0500
1001
000 #00020
T000
1002
1002
T001
1002
T001
0501
1002
001 #00030
Application of ITVL instruction

Measures the pulse interval of input relay 0000 and writes the measured data into
DM0100 (in units of 10 ms).
Mode No. 1 (DM0000)
MAX. setting value 51 (DM0001)
MIN. setting value 49 (DM0002)
Average number of measurements 10 (DM0003)
3-336
8.2 Details
Reset input relay 0002
Output relay 0500 turns ON
when the pulse interval is not within the range from 490 to 510 mm.
Measure the pulse interval
ON
OFF
500ms
Ladder diagram
2008
2008
2008
2008
#00001
LDA
DM0000
STA
Sets mode 1 in DM0000.
#00051
LDA
DM0001
STA
Sets MAX. setting value (510 ms) in DM0001.
#00049
LDA
DM0002
STA
Sets MIN. setting value (490 ms) in DM0002.
#00010
LDA
DM0003
STA
0000
0001
1002
ITVL
PLS
DM0000
Measures the pulse interval when input relay 0000

turns ON.
PAUSE
Pauses measurement when input relay 0001 turns

ON.
1000
RES
0002
DM0007
LDA
DM0100
STA
Resets measurement when input relay 0002 turns

ON.
0500
RES
0500
SET
1000
Sets the average number of measurements (10) in

DM0003.
1001
Writes the average measurement value into

DM0100 and resets 0500 after every time a
measurement is completed.
Turns On output relay 0500 when the pulse
interval is not within the range from 490 to 510
mm.
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
Operand
2008
#00001
DM0000
2008
#00051
DM0001
2008
#00049
DM0002
2008
#00010
Line No.
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023
0024
0025
0026
0027
0028
Instruction
STA
LD
LD
LD
ITVL
LD
LDA
CON
STA
CON
RES
LD
OR
SET
Operand
DM0003
0000
0001
0002
DM0000 1000
1002
DM0007
DM0100
0500
1000
1001
0500
Fetching data from the KV-AN6 (For KV-300 PLC only)

Fetches data from Ch 1 of the KV-AN6. Writes this data value into DM0100.
Mode No. 9000 (DM0000) from Ch 1 of KV-AN6
MAX. setting value 2000 (DM0001)
MIN. setting value 00900 (DM0002)
Average number of measurements 10 (DM0003)
Reset input relay 0002
3-337
18
8.2 Details
Ladder diagram
Coding
2008
#09000
LDA
DM0000
STA
2008
#02000
LDA
DM0001
STA
2008
#00900
LDA
DM0002
STA
2008
#00010
LDA
DM0003
STA
ITVL
PLS
DM0000
2003
0001
PAUSE
1000
RES
0002
DM0007
LDA
1003
DM0100
STA
Refer to p. 3-117.
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023
Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
STA
LD
LD
LD
ITVL
LD
LDA
CON
STA
Operand
2008
#09000
DM0000
2008
#02000
DM0001
2008
#00900
DM0002
2008
#00010
DM0003
2003
0001
0002
DM0000 1000
1003
DM0007
DM0100
Applications of High-speed counter

High-speed counter multi-level setting
Sets the high speed counter comparator value of the input relay 0005 as below:
#0100 DM0000
#0200 DM0001
#0300 DM0002
When a comparator value is greater than the setting value:

Ladder diagram
Coding
2008 2813 #01000 DM0000 #02000 DM0001 #03000 DM0002

SET LDA STA LDA STA LDA STA
0001
CTH1
00005
8
2002
3-338
CTH1
LDA
DM0000 2009
CMP
0500
DM0001 2009
CMP
0501
DM0002 2009
CMP
0502
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023
0024
0025
0026
0027
0028
0029
Instruction
LD
SET
CON
LDA
CON
STA
CON
LDA
CON
STA
CON
LDA
CON
STA
LDB
CTH1
LD
LDA
MPS
CMP
ANB
OUT
MRD
CMP
ANB
OUT
MPP
CMP
ANB
OUT
Operand
2008
2813
#01000
DM0000
#02000
DM0001
#03000
DM0002
0001
0005
2002
CTH1
DM0000
2009
0500
DM0001
2009
0501
DM0002
2009
0502
8.2 Details
High-speed counter current value clear
Counts pulses at input relay 0005. When the count value reaches setting value
60000, clears the current value of high speed counter CTH1 and turns ON output
relay 0502 for 3 s.
Ladder diagram
Coding
2813
SET
2008
2203
SET
2002
CTH1
RES
CTH1
0005
#60000
CTC2
CTC2
0502
#00030
T001
T001
CTC2
RES
0502
RES

0000
LD
0001
SET
0002
CON
0003
SET
0004
CON
0005
RES
0006
LD
0007
CTH1
0008
CTC2
0009
LD
0010
OUT
0011
CON
0012
TMR
0013
CON
0015
AND
0016
RES
0017
CON
0018
RES
Operand
2008
2813
2203
CTH1
2002
0005
#60000
CTC2
0502
001 #00030
T001
CTC2
0502
Input of phase differential signal

Inputs phase differential signals to input relays 0004 and 0006 and counts pulses at
CTH0.
When high speed counter CTH0 reaches 60000, clears the current value of CTH0,
sets output relay 0500, and stops fetching count value to CTH0.
Sets 0008 as external reset.
Ladder diagram
2008
EI
2813 2103
SET SET
2113 2114 2115 CTH0

SET RES SET RES
0500
2002
CTH0
LDA
DM0000
STA
Initial settings*Note
CTH0
00004
#60000
CTC0
18
END
2002
INT
CTC0
0500
SET
RETI
ENDH
Note: Initial settings for special utility relays

Sets input time constant of input relays 0000 to 0009 to 10 s when 2813 turns
ON.
Clears the current value of CTH0 when 2103 turns ON and CTC0 is ON.
Sets CTH0 in the X 2 mode when 2113 is ON and 2114 is OFF.
Enables external reset (input relay 0008) when 2115 turns ON.
3-339
8.2 Details
CAUTION
External reset 0008 is predetermined on hardware even if you do not specify in

the program. However, you have to set external reset enable relay 2115 to ON.
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
Instruction
LD
EI
CON
SET
CON
SET
CON
SET
CON
RES
CON
SET
CON
RES
Operand
2008
2813
2103
2113
2114
2115
Line No.
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023
0024
0025
0026
Instruction
LDB
CTH
CTC
LD
LDA
CON
STA
END
INT
LD
SET
RETI
ENDH
Operand
0500
1 0004
0 #60000
2002
CTH0
DM0000
CTC0
2002
0500
CTH0
Application of Subroutine CALL

DM shift
Shifts the data from current DM to the next DM at UP edge of the synchronous
signal (timing).
As the number of DMs to be shifted increases, the required scan time becomes
longer.
Ladder diagram
0000 1000 1000 #00010 TM02 #00030 TM03
DIFU
LDA STA LDA STA
Synchoronous
signal
Designates the
Designates the
shift end
shift start
DM No. (DM0010). DM No. (DM0030).
00
Shifts data from
CALL DM0010 to DM0030.
END
SBN
00
2002
TM03 #00001
LDA
ADD
TM04
STA
TM02
SUB
TM05
STA
Shift level
8
2002
TM03
DEC
TM04
DEC
#TM03
LDA
FOR
TM05
#TM04
STA
Uses the indirect addressing

function to designate DM Nos.
NEXT
2002
#00000
LDA
#TM02
STA
Clears the start DM to #0000

after the data is shifted.
RET
ENDH
3-340
The program lines which

execute the data shift
are groped as the subroutine.
8.2 Details
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
Instruction
LD
DIFU
CON
AND
LDA
CON
STA
CON
LDA
CON
STA
CON
CALL
END
SBN
LD
LDA
CON
ADD
CON
STA
Operand
0000
1000
1000
#00010
TM02
#00030
TM03
00
00
2002
TM03
#00001
Line No.
0021
0022
0023
0024
0025
0026
0027
0028
0029
0030
0031
0032
0033
0034
0035
0036
0037
0038
0039
0040
Instruction
CON
SUB
CON
STA
FOR
LD
DEC
CON
DEC
CON
LDA
CON
STA
NEXT
LD
LDA
CON
STA
RET
ENDH
Operand
TM02
TM05
TM05
2002
TM03
TM04
#TM03
#TM04
2002
#00000
#TM02
TM04
Refer to p. 3-122.
Application of FOR-NEXT
Transfer of a block of DM data
Uses the indirect addressing function to transfer a block of data from DM0000 DM0099 to DM0100 - DM0199.
Ladder diagram
Coding
SBN
01
2002
#0000
LDA
TMO2
STA
1st DM No. of
transfer source
#00100
LDA
TMO3
STA
1st DM No. of
transfer destination
FOR
#00100
Number of DMs to be Transferred.
2002
#TM02
LDA
#TM03
STA
TM02
INC
TM03
INC
NEXT
RET
Data memory
DM0000
DM0099
DM0100
Transfer
a block of data

0000
SBN
0010
LD
0001
LD
0011
LDA
0002
LDA
0012
CON
0003
CON
0013
STA
0004
STA
0014
CON
0005
CON
0015
INC
0006
LDA
0016
CON
0007
CON
0017
INC
0008
STA
0018
NEXT
0009
FOR
0019
RET
Operand
01
2002
2002
#TM02
#0000
18
#TM03
TM02
TM02
#00100
TM03
TM03
#00100
DM0199
Refer to p. 3-125.
3-341
8.2 Details
Application of HKEY instruction

Writes the following 16-key input value into DM0000 in 4-digit BCD.
Pressing the keys in the lower line clear the input numerical value.
Wires the 16-key input terminals using 4 outputs and 4 inputs as shown below.
24 VDC
COM 000 001 002 003

KV
COM 500 501 502 503
Ladder diagram
2008
2814
SET
2002
HKEY
0000
0500
2815 2900 2010 $03FF TM05 2010 TM05

LDA
ANDA CMP
STA
DMX
KEY IN
TM06
STA
2815 2900 2010 $03FF TM05 2010 TM05

LDA
ANDA CMP
STA
DM0000 #04
LDA
SLA
2815 2915
TM06 DM0000
Input value
ORA
STA
(BCD)
#00000
Input value
DW
(BCD)
DM0000
END
ENDH
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
Instruction
LD
SET
LD
HKEY
LD
LDA
CON
ANB
ANDA
CON
CMP
CON
ANB
STA
CON
DMX
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
Operand
2008
2814
2002
0000 0500
2815
2900
Refer to p. 3-131.
3-342
2010
$03FF
TM05
2010
TM05
TM06
2815
2900
Line No.
0021
0022
0023
0024
0025
0026
0027
0028
0029
0030
0031
0032
0033
0034
0035
0036
0037
0038
0039
0040
Instruction
AND
ANDA
CON
CMP
CON
ANB
STA
CON
LDA
CON
SLA
CON
ORA
CON
STA
LD
AND
DW
END
ENDH
Operand
2010
$03FF
TM05
2010
TM05
DM0000
#04
TM06
DM0000
2815
2915
#0000 DM0000
8.2 Details
Arithmetic Instructions
Applications of TMIN (Analog timer) instruction
Changing timer setting value
Uses analog timer (TMIN0) to change the timer setting value (0 to 24.9 s).
Ladder diagram
Coding
2002
0
TMIN

0000
LD
0001
TMIN
0002
CON
0003
STA
0004
LD
0005
OR
0006
TMR
0007
ANB
0008
OUT
T000
STA
0000
#00010
T000
0500
T000
0500
Operand
2002
0
T000
0000
0500
000 #00010
T000
0500
Changing setting values of multiple timers

Uses analog timer (TMIN0) to change setting values of multiple timers (0 to 24.9 s).
Ladder diagram
2002
0
TMIN
Coding
T000
STA
T001
STA
0000
#00010
T000
0500
T000
0500
0001
#00010
T001
0501
T001
0501
0002
#00010
T002
0502
T002
STA
T002
0502
In the above example, T000, T001,

and T002 have the same setting value.
Refer to p. 3-138.

0000
LD
0001
TMIN
0002
CON
0003
STA
0004
CON
0005
STA
0006
CON
0007
STA
0008
LD
0010
TMR
0011
ANB
0012
OUT
0013
LD
0014
OR
0015
TMR
0016
ANB
0017
OUT
0018
LD
0019
OR
0020
TMR
0009
OR
0021
ANB
0022
OUT
Operand
2002
0
T000
T001
T002
0000
000 #00010
T000
0500
0001
0501
001 #00010
T001
0501
0002
0502
002 #00010
0500
T002
0502
Applications of LDA/STA instruction

DM data flow
OK/NG judgement
DM0000
DM0001
Data shift
DM0002
DM0003
DM0004
Unloading timing
3-343
18
8.2 Details
The data once fetched is written into DM0004, DM0003, ..., DM0000 in this order. At
the unloading timing, unload the data from DM0004 and shifts the data value to the
next DM.
The ON/NG judgement and unloading timings can be used in asynchronous programs.
Ladder diagram
0000
1000
DIFU
1000
OK/NG judgement timing
0001
$1111
LDA
DM0000
STA
Transfers $1111 to DM0000.

OK/NG judgement
0001
$5555
LDA
DM0000
STA
Transfers $5555 to DM0000.
2002 DM0004 $0000 2010 DM0003 DM0004 $0000 DM0003

LDA CMP
LDA
STA LDA
STA
2002 DM0003 $0000 2010 DM0002 DM0003 $0000 DM0002
LDA CMP
LDA
STA LDA
STA
2002 DM0002 $0000 2010 DM0001 DM0002 $0000 DM0001
LDA CMP
LDA
STA LDA
STA
Compares the DM value to $0000.

If it is equal to $0000, transfers the
value of the previous DM No. and
then writes $0000 into the current DM No.
2002 DM0001 $0000 2010 DM0000 DM0001 $0000 DM0000

LDA CMP
LDA
STA LDA
STA
0002
$0000
DM0004
LDA
STA
Unloading timing
Transfers $0000 to DM at unloading timing.
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023
0024
0025
0026
0027
0028
0029
0030
0031
0032
0033
0034
3-344
Instruction
LD
DIFU
CON
AND
MPS
AND
LDA
CON
STA
MPP
ANB
LDA
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
CMP
CON
AND
LDA
CON
STA
CON
LDA
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
CMP
CON
AND
LDA
CON
Operand
0000
1000
1000
0001
$1111
DM0000
0001
$5555
DM0000
2002
DM0004
$0000
2010
DM0003
DM0004
$0000
DM0003
2002
DM0003
$0000
2010
DM0002
Line No.
0035
0036
0037
0038
0039
0040
0041
0042
0043
0044
0045
0046
0047
0048
0049
0050
0051
0052
0053
0054
0055
0056
0057
0058
0059
0060
0061
0062
0063
0064
0065
0066
0067
0068
0069
Instruction
STA
CON
LDA
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
CMP
CON
AND
LDA
CON
STA
CON
LDA
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
CMP
CON
AND
LDA
CON
STA
CON
LDA
CON
STA
LD
@LDA
CON
@STA
Operand
DM0003
$0000
DM0002
2002
DM0002
$0000
2010
DM0001
DM0002
$0000
DM0001
2002
DM0001
$0000
2010
DM0000
DM0001
$0000
DM0000
0002
$0000
DM0004
8.2 Details
Sets the setting value of counter C000 to DM0000. Reset input is 0005.
Ladder diagram
2002
Coding
DM0000
LDA
0005

Operand
0000
LD
2002
0001
LDA
DM0000
0002
CON
0003
STA
C000
0004
LDB
0005
0005
C
000 #9999 0001
C000
STA
#9999
C000
0001

Sets the setting value of timer T000 to DM0000. Reset input is 0005.
Ladder diagram
2002
Coding
DM0000
LDA
0005

0000
LD
0001
LDA
0002
CON
0003
STA
0004
LDB
0005
T
T000
STA
#9999
T000
Refer to p. 3-140.
Operand
2002
DM0000
T000
0005
0000 #9999
Application of CMP (compare) instruction

When comparing values with no specific range
Turns ON 0500 when the DM0000 value is smaller than the CMP value.
Turns ON 0501 when the DM0000 value is equal to the CMP value.
Turns ON 0502 when the DM0000 value is greater than the CMP value.
Ladder diagram
2002 DM000 #01000
LDA
Coding
2009
0500
CMP
2010
0501
2011
0502
DM0000
<#01000
DM0000
=#01000
DM0000
>#01000

0000
LD
0001
LDA
0002
CON
0003
CMP
0004
MPS
0005
AND
0006
OUT
0007
MRD
0008
AND
0009
OUT
0010
MPP
0011
AND
0012
OUT
Operand
2002
DM0000
#01000
2009
0500
2010
0501
2011
0502

Turns ON 0500 when the C001 value is 1000 or less.
Turns ON 0501 when the C001 value is 2000 or more.
Ladder diagram
0001
2002
2002
C001
#01000
LDA
CMP
C001
#02000
LDA
CMP
2011
#09999
C001
0000
0500
2009
0501
C001 #1000
C001 #02000
3-345
18
8.2 Details
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
Instruction
LDB
C
LD
LDA
CON
CMP
CON
ANB
Operand
0001
001 #09999 0000
2002
C001
#01000
2011
Line No.
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
Instruction
OUT
LD
LDA
CON
CMP
CON
ANB
OUT
Operand
0500
2002
C001
#02000
2009
0501

Compares the current value of C000 to the CMP setting value. Sets the CMP setting
value to analog timer TMIN0.
The following example changes the setting value within the range from 0 to 100.
Turns ON 0500 when the C000 value is smaller than the CMP setting value.
Turns ON 0501 when the C000 value is greater than the CMP setting value.
Ladder diagram
0
#00001 #00004 #00010 DM0000
Sets the TMIN setting
TMIN ADD MUL
DIV
STA range from 0 to 100.
0001
#09999
C000
00000
2002 C000 DM0000 2009
0500
LDA
CMP
2002
2009
0501
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
Instruction
LD
TMIN
CON
ADD
CON
MUL
CON
DIV
CON
STA
LDB
Operand
2002
0
#00001
#00004
#00010
DM0000
0001
Line No.
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
Instruction
C
LD
LDA
CON
CMP
MPS
AND
OUT
MPP
ANB
OUT
Operand
000 #09999 0000
02002
C000
Multi-level comparator
Compares the counter current value according to the following range:
0 to 999 0500 turns ON.
1000 to 1999 0501 turns ON.
2000 to 2999 0502 turns ON.
Counter reset relay 0001
Counter input relay 0000
3-346
DM0000
2009
0500
2009
0501
8.2 Details
Ladder diagram
0001
2002 C000
LDA
#09999
C000
0000
#00999 2011
CMP
#01999 2011 0500
CMP
0500
C000 00999
0501
00999 < C000 01999
#02999 2011 0500 0501 0502

01999 < C000 02999
CMP
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
Instruction
LDB
C
LD
LDA
CON
MPS
CMP
CON
ANB
OUT
MRD
CMP
Operand
0001
000 #09999 0000
2002
C000
#00999
2011
0500
Line No.
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
Instruction
CON
ANB
ANB
OUT
MPP
CMP
CON
ANB
ANB
ANB
OUT
Operand
2011
0500
0501
#02999
2011
0500
0501
0502
#01999
Refer to p. 3-146.
Application of ADD instruction

Adding BCD and BIN values
Adds a 4-digit BCD input value (7000 to 7015) to the counter current value and
writes the sum into DM0100.
Ladder diagram
2002
2002
7000
DM0000
Converts BCD input value to BIN.
LDA
TBIN
STA
C001
DM0000
DM0100
LDA
ADD
0001
18
Adds converted BIN value to the current value of

C001 and writes the sum into DM0100.
STA
#09999
C001
0000
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
TBIN
CON
STA
LD
Operand
2002
7000
DM0000
2002
Line No.
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
Instruction
LDA
CON
ADD
CON
STA
LDB
C
Operand
C001
DM0000
DM0100
0001
001 #09999 0000
3-347
8.2 Details
Total count
Writes total count of counters C001 to C003 into DM0100. The total count must be
within 65535.
Ladder diagram
#09999 C001
C001
LDA
0001
#09999 C002
0000
C002
LDA
0002
#09999 C003
0000
C003
LDA
0003
2002 DM0001 DM0002 DM0003
LDA
ADD
ADD
0000
DM0001
STA
DM0002
STA
DM0003
STA
DM0100
STA
Writes total count (DM0001 + CM0002 + DM0003) into

DM100.
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
Instruction
Operand
LDB
0000
C
001 #09999 0001
CON
LDA
C001
CON
STA
DM0001
LDB
0000
C
002 #09999 0002
CON
LDA
C002
CON
STA
DM0002
LDB
0000
Line No.
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023
0024
0025
Instruction
Operand
C
003 #09999 0003
CON
LDA
C003
CON
STA
DM0003
LD
2002
LDA
DM0001
CON
ADD
DM0002
CON
ADD
DM0003
CON
STA
DM0100
Refer to p. 3-150.
Application of SUB instruction

Comparison of absolute values
Compares the DM0000 value to the DM0001 value and turns ON 0500 when the
difference of the two absolute values is greater than 5.
Ladder diagram
#0005 2009 1000

CMP
2002 DM0000 DM0001 2009

LDA
SUB
2009 DM0001 DM0000 #0005 2009 1001

LDA
SUB CMP
0500
1000
1001
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
SUB
MPS
ANB
CMP
CON
ANB
OUT
MPP
AND
Operand
2002
DM0000
DM0001
Refer to p. 3-150.
3-348
2009
#00005
2009
1000
2009
Line No.
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
Instruction
LDA
CON
SUB
CON
CMP
CON
ANB
OUT
LD
OR
OUT
Operand
DM0001
DM0000
#00005
2009
1001
1000
1001
0500
8.2 Details
Application of MUL instruction

Multiplying the counter current value by DM value
Multiplies the counter current value by the DM0000 value and writes the high-order
16 bits of the product into DM0101 and low-order 16 bits of the product into
DM0100.
Ladder diagram
Coding
0001
#09999
C001
0000
2002 C001 DM0000 DM0100 TM00 DM0101
STA
LDA
MUL
STA
LDA

Operand
0000
LDB
0001
0001
C
001 #09999 0000
0002
LD
2002
0003
LDA
C001
0005
MUL
DM0000
0004
CON
0006
CON
0007
STA
DM0100
0008
CON
0009
LDA
TM00
0010
CON
0011
STA
DM0101
Refer to p. 3-150.
Application of DIV instruction

Total count average
Outputs the average of 3 counter values in 4-digit BCD.
(C001 + C002 + C003) 3 BCD output value
The BCD value is output to 7500 to 7515.
Ladder diagram
0000
0000
0000
2002
2002
#09999
C001
00001
#09999
C002
00002
#09999
C003
00003
DM0001
LDA
C001
LDA
DM0001
STA
C002
LDA
DM0002
STA
Writes the C002 current

value into DM0002.
C003
LDA
DM0003
STA

value into DM0003.
DM0002 DM0003
ADD
ADD
#00003
DIV
TBCD
07500
STA

value into DM0001.
18
DM0001 DM0002 DM0003

3 Output to 07500
to 07515 in 4-digit BCD.
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
Instruction
LDB
C
CON
LDA
CON
STA
LDB
C
CON
LDA
CON
STA
LDB
C
CON
Operand
0000
001 #09999 0001
C001
DM0001
0000
002 #09999 0002
C002
DM0002
0000
003 #09999 0003
Line No.
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023
0024
0025
0026
0027
0028
0029
Instruction
LDA
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
ADD
CON
ADD
LD
DIV
CON
TBCD
CON
STA
Operand
C003
DM0003
2002
DM0001
DM0002
DM0003
2002
#00003
7500
Refer to p. 3-150.
3-349
8.2 Details
Application of ANDA instruction

BCD (1-digit) input
Sets a 1-digit BCD value, which is input to 0000 to 0003, in C000.
Ladder diagram
2002
0000
LDA
$000F
ANDA
TBIN
C000
STA
2002
Fetches data of 0000 to 0015 and retains data of 0000

to 0003 only.
Converts data to BIN and writes it into C000.
#09999
C000
7001
7000
Sets C000.
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
ANDA
LD
Operand
2002
0000
$000F
2002
Line No.
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
Instruction
TBIN
CON
STA
LDB
C
Operand
C000
7000
000 #09999 7001
Fetches input data separately

Sets the low-order 2 digits of the BCD digital switch (7000 to 7007) to counter C000
and the high-order 2 digits to timer T001.
Ladder diagram
2002 7000
LDA
$00FF
ANDA
TBIN
C000
STA
2002 7000
LDA
$FF00
ANDA
#08
SRA
TBIN
Converts data of 7000 to 7007 to BIN and

writes it into C000.
T001
STA
0001
#09999
C000
0000
0001
#09999
T001
Shifts data to right by 8 bits, converts it to

BIN, and writes it into T001.
Sets C000.
Sets T001.
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
ANDA
CON
TBIN
CON
STA
LD
LDA
CON
Operand
2002
7000
Refer to p. 3-159.
3-350
$00FF
C000
2002
7000
Line No.
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
Instruction
ANDA
CON
SRA
CON
TBIN
CON
STA
LDB
C
LDB
T
Operand
$FF00
#08
T001
0001
000 #09999 0000
0001
001 #09999
8.2 Details
Application of ORA instruction

Output of BCD 2-digit data
Converts the current value of counter C000 to BCD and sends 2 digits of BCD data
to output relays 7500 to 7507.
However, retain ON/OFF of 7508 to 7515 which are loaded.
Ladder diagram
7500
LDA
#00099
C000
0001
$FF00
ANDA
DM0000
STA
C000
LDA
TBCD
$00FF
ANDA
DM0000
ORA
7500
STA
0000
2002
2002
2002
Sets C000.

Converts the current value of C000 to BCD and
retains the low-order 2 digits of BCD in the
internal register.
ORs the data in the internal register and the
DM0000 data and sends the ORed data to 7500
to 7515.
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
Instruction
LDB
C
LD
LDA
CON
ANDA
CON
STA
LD
Operand
0000
000 #00099 0001
2002
7500
$FF00
DM0000
2002
Line No.
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
Instruction
LDA
CON
TBCD
CON
ANDA
LD
ORA
CON
STA
Operand
C000
$00FF
2002
DM0000
7500

Ladder diagram
0000
2002
7000
LDA
#00099
C001
0001
$000F
ANDA
2002
8000
LDA
$000F
ANDA
2002
#04 DM0000
SLA
ORA
TBIN
18
DM0000
STA
C001
STA
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
Instruction
LDB
C
LD
LDA
CON
ANDA
CON
STA
LD
LDA
Operand
0000
001 #00099 0001
2002
7000
$000F
DM0000
2002
8000
Line No.
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
Instruction
CON
ANDA
LD
SLA
CON
ORA
CON
TBIN
CON
STA
Operand
$000F
2002
#04
DM0000
C001
Refer to p. 3-161.
3-351
8.2 Details
Application of EORA instruction

Judgement of matching data
Turns ON 0500 (OK output) when the ON/OFF statuses of input relays 7000 to
7007 match the DM0000 setting value.
Ladder diagram
2008
2002
Coding
$00AA DM0000
LDA
STA
7000
LDA
$00FF
ANDA
DM0000 2010 0500

EORA

0000
LD
0001
LDA
0002
CON
0003
STA
0004
LD
0005
LDA
0006
CON
0007
ANDA
0008
CON
0009
EORA
0010
CON
0011
AND
0012
OUT
Operand
2008
$00AA
DM0000
2002
7000
$00FF
DM0000
2010
0500
For easy comprehension, the following data is set temporarily.

$BBBB 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 7000 to 7015

ANDA
$00FF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Operand
$00BB 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 Internal register
EORA
$00AA 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 DM0000
$0011 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 Internal register 2010 is OFF. When the
value of internal register

is 0000, 2010 turns ON.
Judges match between the operand and the data of 7000 to 7015.
When 2010 is ON, the two values match.

When 2010 is OFF, the two values do not match.
Refer to p. 3-164.
Application of SRA/SLA instructions

Ladder diagram
0001
2002
7000
LDA
#00099
C001
0000
$F000
ANDA
2002
#12
SRA
DM0000
STA
2002
08000
LDA
$000F
ANDA
2002
#04
SLA
DM0000
ORA
TBIN
C001
STA
2002
3-352
Sets C001.
Sends the data of 7012 to 7015 to internal

register.
Shifts the value of internal register to right by
12 bits and writes it into DM0000.
Sends the data of 8000 to 8003 to internal
register.
Shifts the data of internal register to left by 4
bits, ORs the internal register data and the
data of DM0000, and sends the ORed data to
internal register.
Converts the data of internal register to BIN
data and writes it into C001.
8.2 Details
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
Instruction
LD
C
LD
LDA
CON
ANDA
LD
SRA
CON
STA
LD
Operand
0001
001 #00099 0000
2002
7000
$F000
2002
#12
DM0000
2002
Line No.
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
Instruction
LDA
CON
ANDA
LD
SLA
CON
ORA
LD
TBIN
CON
STA
Operand
8000
$000F
2002
#04
DM0000
2002
C001
Refer to p. 3-166.
Application of RRA/RLA instructions

Error input count
Writes the number of error detection sensors, which are connected to input relays
(7000 to 7015) and turn ON, into DM0000.
Ladder diagram
7000
LDA
2002
FOR
#00016
2002
#01
RRA
2009
TM10
INC
Writes the data of 7000 to

7015 into internal register.
Executes FOR-NEXT instruction for 16 times.
Shifts the data including carry (2009) to right,
and increments TM10 by 1 when 2009 is ON.
NEXT
2002 TM10
LDA
DM0000 #00000
STA
LDA
TM10
STA
Writes the TM10 data into DM0000, and then writes

#00000 to TM10.
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
Instruction
LD
LDA
FOR
LD
RRA
CON
AND
INC
NEXT
Operand
2002
7000
#00016
02002
#01
2009
TM10
Line No.
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
STA
CON
LDA
CON
STA
Operand
2002
TM10
18
DM0000
#00000
TM10
Refer to p. 3-169.
Applications of INC/DEC instructions

Total count
Writes the total count of 4 lines (0000 to 0003) into DM0000.
3-353
8.2 Details
Ladder diagram
2008
#00000
LDA
DM0000
STA
0000
DM0000
INC
0001
DM0000
INC
0002
DM0000
INC
0003
DM0000
INC
0005
#00000
DW
DM0000

Increments DM0000 by 1 at UP
Clears DM0000 to #00000 when
0005 turns ON.
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
STA
LD
@INC
LD
Operand
2008
#00000
DM0000
0000
DM0000
0001
Line No.
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
Instruction
@INC
LD
@INC
LD
@INC
LD
DW
Operand
DM0000
0002
DM0000
0003
DM0000
0005
#00000 DM0000
UP/DOWN count
Performs UP count when input relay 0000 turns ON.
Performs DOWN count when input relay 0001 turns ON.
Ladder diagram
#00000
LDA
2008
DM0000
STA
0000
DM0000
INC
0001
DM0000
DEC
0005
#00000
DW
DM0000
Increments DM0000 by 1 at UP edge

Decrements DM0000 by 1 at UP edge
Clears DM0000 to #00000 when 0005
turns ON.
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
STA
LD
Operand
2008
#00000
DM0000
0000
Refer to p. 3-172.
3-354
Line No.
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
Instruction
@INC
LD
@DEC
LD
DW
Operand
DM0000
0001
DM0000
0005
#00000 DM0000
8.2 Details
Application of MPX instruction

Displays the current value of counter C000 to the 7-segment LED.
Outputs from 7500 to 7571.
Connection of 7 segments
Connect each of 7 segments to output relays as shown below:
a
a. 7500
b. 7501
c. 7502
d. 7503
e. 7504
c
d
f. 7505
g. 7506
Ladder diagram
Converts the counter value to 16-bit
data using the MPX instruction.
Auto reset counter
C000
1000
1001
1002
1003
1004
1005
1006
1007
1008
1009
#00009
C000
0000
Coding
C000
LDA
#0
MPX
1000
STA
Sends internal register data to

output relays starting from 7500.
$003F
LDA
7500
STA
$0006
LDA
7500
STA
$005B
LDA
7500
STA
$004F
LDA
7500
STA
$0066
LDA
7500
STA
$006D
LDA
7500
STA
$007D
LDA
7500
STA
$0007
LDA
7500
STA
$007F
LDA
7500
STA
$006F
LDA
7500
STA
7-segment display

Operand
0000
LDB
C000
0024
LD
1004
0001
C
000 #00009 0000
0025
LDA
$0066
0002
CON
0026
CON
0003
LDA
C000
0027
STA
7500
0004
CON
0028
LD
1005
0005
MPX
#0
0029
LDA
$006D
0006
CON
0030
CON
0007
STA
1000
0031
STA
7500
0008
LD
1000
0032
LD
1006
0009
LDA
$003F
0033
LDA
$007D
0010
CON
0034
CON
0011
STA
7500
0035
STA
7500
0012
LD
1001
0036
LD
1007
0013
LDA
$0006
0037
LDA
$0007
0014
CON
0038
CON
0015
STA
7500
0039
STA
7500
0016
LD
1002
0040
LD
1008
0017
LDA
$005B
0041
LDA
$007F
0018
CON
0042
CON
0019
STA
7500
0043
STA
7500
0020
LD
1003
0044
LD
1009
0021
LDA
$004F
0045
LDA
$006F
0022
CON
0046
CON
0023
STA
7500
0047
STA
7500
Refer to p. 3-176.
3-355
18
8.2 Details
Application of DMX instruction

Outputs the error sensor No. from input relay 7000 to 7015 to output relays 8500 to
8507 in 2-digit BCD.
Ladder diagram
2002
07000
LDA
DMX
TBCD
$00FF
ANDA
2002
Converts the most significant bit of 16-bit data

(7000 to 7015) to 4-bit BIN data and sends it to
internal register.
Converts internal register data to BCD data,
executes ANDA instruction, and outputs the data
to 8000 to 8015.
8000
STA
Coding
Line No.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
Instruction
LD
LDA
CON
DMX
LD
Operand
2002
7000
2002
Line No.
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
Instruction
TBCD
CON
ANDA
CON
STA
Operand
$00FF
8000
Refer to p. 3-176.
Applications of TBCD instruction

Outputs the current value of counter C001 to 7500 to 7515 in 4-digit BCD data.
Ladder diagram
#09999
C001
0000
7500
STA
0001
2002
C001
LDA
TBCD
Coding
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
Line No.
Instruction
0000
LDB
0001
0004
CON
0001
001 #09999 0000
0005
TBCD
0002
LD
2002
0006
CON
0003
LDA
C001
0007
STA
Operand
7500

Outputs the calculated product of DM0000 x DM0001 (0 to 99999999) in BCD of 8
digits at maximum as below:
High-order 4-digit BCD data To 8500 to 8515
Low-order 4-digit BCD data To 7500 to 7515
DM0000 x DM0001 = TM00
Internal register
(High-order 4 digits)
(Low-order 4 digits)
DM00 Internal register #10000 = TM00
Internal register --- TM01
(High-order 4 digits) (Low-order 4 digits)
(Display)
8500 to 8515 7500 to 7515

(High-order 4 digits) (Low-order 4 digits)
3-356
(Remainder)
8.2 Details
Ladder diagram
2002 DM0000 DM0001
LDA
MUL
DM0101
LDA
#10000 DM0101
DIV
STA
TBCD
TM01
LDA
TBCD
7500
STA
8500
STA
Coding
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
Line No.
Instruction
0000
LD
2002
0010
CON
0001
LDA
DM0000
0011
TBCD
0002
CON
0012
CON
0003
MUL
0004
CON
0005
DIV
0006
CON
0007
STA
0008
CON
0009
LDA
DM0001
#10000
0013
STA
0014
CON
0015
LDA
0016
CON
DM0101
0017
TBCD
0018
CON
TM01
0019
STA
Operand
750
DM0101
8500
Refer to p. 3-180.
Application of TBIN instruction

Sets 4 digits of the BCD digital switch (7000 to 7015) as the counter C001 value.
Ladder diagram
2002
7000
LDA
C001
STA
TBIN
0001
Converts data of 7000 to 7015 to BIN

data and writes it into C001.
#09999
C001
0000
Sets C001.
Coding
Line No.
Instruction
Operand
Line No.
Instruction
0000
LD
2002
0004
CON
0001
LDA
7000
0005
STA
Operand
C001
0002
CON
0006
LDB
0001
0003
TBIN
0007
001 #09999 0000
Refer to p. 3-183.
3-357
18
8.2 Details
3-358
Index
Index For Visual KV Users Only

The following is the index with some descriptions for your reference.
Purpose
Title
Page
A
Access Window, changing device value in
Device mode
1-87
Access Window, changing modes in
Selecting modes and setting/resetting key lock
1-82
Access Window, displaying directions in
User messages
1-97
Access Window, displaying errors in
Error messages and error status
1-97
Access Window, error display in
Error List
1-372
Access Window, increasing device selection speed in
Turbo function
1-83
Access window, part names functions of
Part names and functions of the Access Window
1-82
Access Window, switching the KV PLC between RUN and

PROGRAM (stop) modes in
System Mode
1-94
Access Window, using digital trimmer in
Digital Trimmer Mode
1-84
Application instructions, learning about
Application instructions
3-36
Arithmetic instructions, learning about
Arithmetic instructions
3-38
Basic instructions
3-34
Device used for cam switch function
3-233
Cam switch, using KV as
Cam switch function
3-233
CE marking, acquiring
Restriction on acquiring the CE marking
B
Basic instructions, learning about
C
Cam switch function, setting item for
(2)
Command transmission between KV and personal computer
Communication command/response list
3-310
Command transmission, when error occurs during
Error code list
3-316
Communication port, specifications of
Communications Specification
3-306
Contact comments, transmitting them to KV PLC
Contact comment save function
3-27
1-69
Contacts, protecting
Contact protection
Conventional KV series, differences with
Compatibility with conventional KV peripheral units
(4)
Current consumption
General specifications
1-4
Data memory, functions assigned to
Data memories
3-19
Direct clock pulse, outline of
Outline of direct clock pulse output
3-237
ON/OFF ratio of 1:1
3-238
3-238
Pulse output setting with the high-speed counter

comparator
3-238
Index
Direct clock pulse, outputting pulses with 1:1 ON/OFF ratio

using
Direct clock pulse, outputting pulses with variable pulse
width
Direct clock pulse, setting item for
E
Expansion unit, checking operation of
Connection information for expansion units
1-75
Expansion unit, connecting
Connecting Visual KV Series expansion units
1-71
Expansion unit, maximum number to be connected to
Number of connectable units
1-73
Expansion unit, setting its height flush with AC-type basic unit
Expansion unit spacer
1-66
External output, disabling
Output prohibition function
3-26
Input refresh disabled function
3-26
F
Forcing input ON/OFF without switch
Frequency counter function, setting item for
Devices used with the frequency counter
3-231
High-speed counter, increasing measurement range of
3-221
High-speed counter, measuring frequency with
Frequency counter function
3-231
High-speed counter, outputting pulses using
Direct Clock Pulse Output
3-237
High-speed counter, reading current value of
Reading the current value of the high-speed

counter
3-211
High-speed counter, resetting the value to other than "0"
Preset function
3-215
3-360
Index

Purpose
Title
Page
High-speed counter, resetting the value to "0"
Resetting the high-speed counter
3-214
High-speed counter, selecting input source for
Count input method
3-212
High-speed counter, specifications of
Specifications of high-speed counters
3-208
High-speed counter, specifying the preset value of
Preset value of the high-speed counter

comparator
3-211
High-speed counter, using, as ring counter
Ring counter function
3-225
I
Input time constant of basic unit, changing
Input time constant change function
3-23
Input time constant of expansion unit, setting
Input time constant for expansion units
1-76
Interrupt instruction, outputting relay status independent of

scan time
Direct Input/Output
3-197
Interrupt instructions, learning about
Interrupt instruction
3-41
Interrupt programs, instructions that cannot be used within
Instructions that cannot be used
3-196
Interrupt, reading current value of high-speed counter by
Input capture
3-195
Interrupt, setting input condition for
Polarity setting for interrupts by an external input
3-195
Interrupt: when several interrupts are executed
Interrupt priority
3-196
K
KV IncrediWare (DOS)/LADDER BUILDER for KV, using
Cautions when using the previous version of ladder

support software
KV-P3E(01), entering instructions using
Function No. list (alphabetical order)
(5)
3-41
KV-P3E(01), functions available with
Function Nos. list
1-216
KV-P3E(01), operating
Basic programming operation
1-200
M
Memory card, capacity of
Storage capacity
1-230
Memory card, replacing battery of
To replace battery
1-238
Multi-step comparator operation of DM, executing
Multi-step comparator mode
3-234
Output disabled function
3-26
Attaching a unit directly to a panel
1-66
O
Output, disabling output from KV
Personal computer, receiving data from
Receiving text data
3-318
Personal computer, transmitting data from KV to
Transmitting text data
3-319
Program capacity, calculation of
Calculating the byte count used
3-4
Program capacity, learning about
Program capacity
3-4
Programs, saving into memory card
Functions [used with KV-P3E(01)]
1-230
Pulse motor, driving
Parameter setting procedure
3-255
Pulse output at desired frequency
Specified frequency pulse output function
3-228
Relay Nos. assigned to basic unit
Relay list
3-5
Relay Nos. assigned to expansion unit
List of relays in expansion units
3-6
Relay Nos., assigning
Assigning relay Nos.
3-8
LOAD and SAVE modes
1-96
S
Saving current value of counter/DM into ROM
Scan time
Scan time
3-3
Sensors or other devices, connecting to KV
Wiring procedures for basic units
1-67
Special utility relays, change in status of, when arithmetic

instruction is used
Change in status of special utility relays

(arithmetic flags) by arithmetic instructions
3-186
Special utility relays, functions assigned to
Special utility relay list
3-86
Specified frequency pulse output function, setting item for
Device used for specified frequency pulse output
3-228
T
Temporary data memory, functions assigned to
Temporary data memory
3-21
Timers/counters, maximum number of
Timer/Counter list
3-18
Index
3-361
Index
P
Panel mounting of KV
Index For KV-300, KV-10/80 Users Only

A
A/D converter ........................... 1-312 [AN6], 1-334 [AD4]

A/D conversion table ................ 1-408 [AN6], 1-357 [AD4]
ADD/@ADD: Add .................................................. 3-150
AND: And ................................................................ 3-58
ANB: And Bar ......................................................... 3-58
ANDA/@ANDA: And A ......................................... 3-159
ANL: And Load ....................................................... 3-61
Application Instructions ...................... 3-36, 3-45, 3-95
Arithmetic Instructions ...................... 3-38, 3-48, 3-134
ASC/@ASC: ASCII Convert ................................ 3-183
Assignment of Data Memory ................................. 3-19
Assignment of I/O relay numbers ......................... 3-22
B
Basic Instructions ................................ 3-34, 3-42, 3-56
Baud rate ......................................... 2-136, 1-247 [KV-L2]
Break signal .......................................................... 3-308
C
C: Counter .............................................................. 3-72
CALL: Subroutine Call ......................................... 3-122
CMP/@CMP: Compare ......................................... 3-146
COM/@COM: Complement .................................. 3-171
Commands [Serial communication] ................... 3-310
Communications ....................................... 2-135, 3-306
CON: Connect ....................................................... 3-102
Connector wiring ....................................................... 1-72
CTC: Counter Comparator .................................. 3-204
CTH1: 16-Bit Counters ......................................... 3-204
Index
D
Data Memory ........................................................... 3-19
D/A converter ........................... 1-312 [AN6], 1-334 [AD4]
D/A conversion table ................ 1-408 [AN6], 1-357 [DA4]
DEC/@DEC: Decrement Memory ........................ 3-172
DI: Interrupt Disabled ........................................... 3-193
DIFD: Differentiate Down ....................................... 3-78
DIFU: Differentiate Up ........................................... 3-78
Dimensions ............................................................. 1-404
DIN rail (mounting) .................................................. 1-180
Direct Clock Pulse ................................................ 3-276
Display Interface Mode [KV-L2] .............................. 1-244
DIV/@DIV: Divide .................................................. 3-150
DMX/@DMX: Demultiplexer ................................. 3-176
DW: Data Memory Write ...................................... 3-136
H
High-Speed Counters .......................................... 3-276
HKEY: 16 Key Input .............................................. 3-131
HSP: High Speed .................................................... 3-86
I
INC/@INC: Increment Memory ............................ 3-172
Indirect Addressing of Data Memory or Relay .. 3-127
Input Relays .............................................................. 3-9
Instruction List .............................................. 3-34, 3-42
INT: Interrupt ........................................................ 3-192
Interface [RS-232C] .............................................. 3-306
Internal register .................................................... 3-135
Internal Utility Relays ............................................. 3-11
Internal Clocks for CTH0 and CTH1 ................... 3-278
Interrupt Instructions ........................................... 3-268
I/O distribution ......................................................... 1-187
ITVL: Interval Timer .............................................. 3-117
J
JMP: Jump ............................................................ 3-106
K
KEEP: Keep ............................................................ 3-80
KV-10/16/24/40/80 ............................ 1-167, 1-175, 1-177
KV-300 ......................................................... 1-166, 1-170
KV-AD4 ................................................................... 1-334
KV-AN6 ................................................................... 1-312
KV-B16R/B16S/C32T .............................................. 1-172
KV-C16X/C32X ....................................................... 1-171
KV-DA4 ................................................................... 1-334
KV-L2 ...................................................................... 1-240
KV-R1A/R16X/R16R/R16T/R8X/R8R/R8T .. 1-173, 1-174
KV-U4/U5 ..................................................... 1-168, 1-169
KV mode [KV-L2] .................................................... 1-253
L
LD: Load .................................................................. 3-57
LDA/@LDA: Load A .............................................. 3-140
LDB: Load Bar ........................................................ 3-57
E
EI: Interrupt Enabled ............................................ 3-193
END: End ................................................................. 3-94
ENDH: End Hi ......................................................... 3-94
ENDS: End Stage ................................................. 3-106
Environment requirements ........................................ 1-64
EORA/@EORA: Exclusive Or A .......................... 3-164
Error code list .......................................................... 1-372
Extended Ladder Diagrams ................................... 3-29
3-362
FOR: Repeat Start ................................................ 3-125
Index
Macros ...................................................................... 2-72

MC: Master Control ................................................ 3-89
MCR: Master Control Reset ................................... 3-89
Memory Card .......................................................... 1-230
MEMSW: Memory Switch ...................................... 3-92
Module names ......................................................... 1-175
Mounting Environment .............................................. 1-64
MPP: Pop .............................................................. 3-103
MPS: Push ............................................................ 3-103
N
NEXT: Repeat End ................................................ 3-125
Non-procedure mode [KV-L2] ................................. 1-292
NOP: No Operation ................................................ 3-94
O
OR: Or ..................................................................... 3-60
ORA/@ORA: Or A ................................................. 3-161
ORB: Or Bar ............................................................ 3-60
ORL: Or Load .......................................................... 3-63
OUB: Out Bar .......................................................... 3-65
OUT: Out ................................................................. 3-65
Output Relays ......................................................... 3-10
P
Peripheral equipments ............................................ 1-176
Port1/Port2 [KV-L2] ................................................. 1-245
Positionning control ............................................ 3-296
Programming examples ...................................... 3-324
R
RASC/@RASC: Reverse ASCII Convert ............. 3-183
Receiving text data .............................................. 3-318
Relay/Memory/Memory Switch Lists ....................... 2-167
Relay/Memory Nos. ................................................. 2-167
Relay No. List .......................................................... 2-167
Relay Nos. and Functions ....................................... 2-167
RES: Reset .............................................................. 3-66
RET: Subroutine Return ...................................... 3-122
RETI: Return Interrupt ......................................... 3-192
RLA/@RLA: Rotate Left A ................................... 3-169
ROOT/@ROOT: Square Root .............................. 3-185
RRA/@RRA: Rotate Right .................................... 3-169
RS-232C cable connection .................................. 3-307
RS-232C Protocol ................................................. 3-306
RS-422A [KV-L2] ..................................................... 1-248
System Configuration (Memory Card) ..................... 1-196

System specifications [Visual KV Series] ................ 1-382
System specifications [KV-300 Series] ................... 1-392
T
TBCD/@TBCD: Transfer BCD ............................. 3-180
TBIN/@TBIN: Transfer BIN .................................. 3-180
Temporary Memory ...................................... 2-172, 2-176
Timers and Counters ............................................... 2-169
TMH: 0.01-s Timer .................................................. 3-68
TMIN: Trimmer In .................................................. 3-138
@TMIN: Trimmer Setting ..................................... 3-138
TMR: 0.1-s Timer .................................................... 3-67
TMS: 1-ms Timer .................................................... 3-69
Transmitting text data .......................................... 3-319
Troubleshooting ...................................................... 1-372
U
UDC: Up-Down Counter ......................................... 3-76
W
W-DE: Wait Down Edge ......................................... 3-98
W-OFF: Wait OFF ................................................... 3-96
W-ON: Wait ON ....................................................... 3-96
W-UE: Wait Up Edge .............................................. 3-98
X
@xxxx: Differentiation ......................................... 3-137
Index
MPX/@MPX: Multiplexer ...................................... 3-176

MRD: Read ............................................................ 3-103
MUL/@MUL: Multiply ........................................... 3-150
S
SBN: Subroutine Entry ........................................ 3-122
Serial Communication ......................................... 3-306
SET: Set .................................................................. 3-66
SFT: Shift ................................................................ 3-82
SLA/@SLA: Shift Left A ....................................... 3-166
Special Utility Relays ............................................... 2-174
SRA/@SRA: Shift Right A .................................... 3-166
STA/@STA: Store A ............................................. 3-140
Station No. [KV-L2] ................................................. 1-246
STE: Step End ...................................................... 3-114
STG: Stage ............................................................ 3-106
STP: Step .............................................................. 3-114
SUB/@SUB: Subtract ........................................... 3-150
System configuration ............................................... 1-166
Index
3-363
Index Software/P3E (handheld programmer)
Index Software/P3E (handheld programmer)

MULTI-MONITOR [P3E] ......................................... 1-212
A
ACCS ...................................................................... 1-234
ALL CLEAR [FNC60] [P3E] ..................................... 1-217
ALL DATA MEMORY CLEAR
(DM ALL CLEAR): [FNC64] [P3E] ...................... 1-219
ALL LATCHING RELAYS RESET
(L-RELAY ALL RST): [FNC65] [P3E] ................... 1-219
B
Break signal .......................................................... 3-308
C
CLEAR [P3E] .......................................................... 1-232
Comments (Relay comment, Line comment) ............ 2-46
Compile ..................................................................... 2-75
Converting N.O./N.C. ................................................ 2-65
Copy, move and delete ............................................. 2-69
COUNTER CLEAR (CTR CLEAR): [FNC62] [P3E] 1-218
Customizing KV-LADDER ,
Defining Environment Strings ................................ 2-19
Copy, move and delete operation ............................. 2-52
D
Data Communications between KV
and Personal Computer .................................... 3-306
Display mode ........................................................... 2-19
Double coil check ...................................................... 2-76
E
Edit screen ................................................................ 2-27
Entering symbols ....................................................... 2-37
Environment requirements .......................................... 2-3
Error message list ................................................... 2-156
Index
H
HANDHELD PROGRAMMER CLEAR (P3E CLEAR):
[FNC61] .............................................................. 1-217
Handheld Programmer KV-P3E .............................. 1-196
HIGH-SPEED COUNTER CLEAR
(HIGH SPEED CTR CLR): [FNC63] [P3E] .......... 1-218
I
Installing Ladder Builder .............................................. 2-9
J
Jump ......................................................................... 2-58
L
Ladder Monitor ........................................................ 2-134
Ladder Simulator ....................................................... 2-84
Line comment ........................................................... 2-46
M
Macros ...................................................................... 2-72
Memory Card [P3E] ................................................. 1-230
Monitor Mode .......................................................... 2-134
Monitor screen ........................................................ 2-143
MOVE CURSOR [P3E] ........................................... 1-202
3-364
Index
O
OFFLINE EDITOR START (OFFLINE EDITOR):
[FNC67] [P3E] .................................................... 1-221
OFFLINE EDITOR STOP (QUIT OFF-L EDIT):
[FNC68] [P3E] .................................................... 1-221
ON/OFF MONITOR [P3E] ....................................... 1-215
P
Printer Setting, Defining Environment Strings .......... 2-77
Printing examples ...................................................... 2-81
PROGRAM CAPACITY CHECK (PROGRAM SIZE):
[FNC75] [P3E] .................................................... 1-229
PROGRAM SENT OR RECEIVED
(COMMUNICATION): [FNC66] [P3E] ............. 1-220
Q
Quitting software ....................................................... 2-16
R
READ TRIMMER SETTING (TRIMMER MONITOR):
[FNC73] [P3E] .................................................... 1-228
Registration of cursor position and
jump to registered position ................................... 2-59
RELAY ON/OFF (FORCED SET/RESET):
[FNC71] [P3E] .................................................... 1-226
Replacing relays ........................................................ 2-64
RS-232C cable connection ......................................... 2-7
RS-232C Protocol ....................................................... 2-3
S
SCAN TIME MONITOR [P3E] ................................. 1-212
SCROLL [P3E] ........................................................ 1-202
Search ....................................................................... 2-58
Searching Program [P3E] ....................................... 1-207
Selecting display mode ............................................. 2-19
Setting print range ..................................................... 2-77
Simulator Mode ......................................................... 2-84
Simulator screen ....................................................... 2-86
Starting and quitting software ................................... 2-16
Starting edit mode .................................................... 2-29
Starting the Monitor Function .................................. 2-139
Starting the Simulator ................................................ 2-86
SYNTAX CHECK (PROGRAM CHECK):
[FNC74] [P3E] .................................................... 1-228
T
Temporary Memory ................................................ 3-21
Time Chart Monitor ................................................. 2-157
Time Chart Viewer ....................................... 2-148, 2-167
TIMER/COUNTER SETTING CHANGE
(CHG: T/C SET-V): [FNC70] [P3E] .................... 1-224
TIMER/COUNTER CURRENT VALUE CHANGE
(CHG: T/C CURT-V): [FNC69] [P3E] ................. 1-222
W
WRITE INTO DATA MEMORY (DM WRITE):
[FNC72] [P3E] .................................................... 1-227
Index
Index
3-365
Index
3-366
Index
WARRANTIES AND DISCLAIMERS:

(1) KEYENCE warrants the Products to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of
one (1) year from the date of shipment. If any models or samples were shown to Buyer, such models or
samples were used merely to illustrate the general type and quality of the Products and not to represent
that the Products would necessarily conform to said models or samples. Any Products found to be defective must be shipped to KEYENCE with all shipping costs paid by Buyer or offered to KEYENCE for inspection and examination. Upon examination by KEYENCE, KEYENCE, at its sole option, will refund the
purchase price of, or repair or replace at no charge any Products found to be defective. This warranty
does not apply to any defects resulting from any action of Buyer, including but not limited to improper
installation, improper interfacing, improper repair, unauthorized modification, misapplication and mishandling, such as exposure to excessive current, heat, coldness, moisture, vibration or outdoors air. Components which wear are not warranted.
(2) KEYENCE is pleased to offer suggestions on the use of its various Products. They are only suggestions, and it is Buyers responsibility to ascertain the fitness of the Products for Buyers intended use.
KEYENCE will not be responsible for any damages that may result from the use of the Products.
(3) The Products and any samples (Products/Samples) supplied to Buyer are not to be used internally
in humans, for human transportation, as safety devices or fail-safe systems, unless their written specifications state otherwise. Should any Products/Samples be used in such a manner or misused in any way,
KEYENCE assumes no responsibility, and additionally Buyer will indemnify KEYENCE and hold
KEYENCE harmless from any liability or damage whatsoever arising out of any misuse of the Products/
Samples.
(4) OTHER THAN AS STATED HEREIN, THE PRODUCTS/SAMPLES ARE PROVIDED WITH NO
OTHER WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER. ALL EXPRESS, IMPLIED, AND STATUTORY WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF PROPRIETARY RIGHTS, ARE EXPRESSLY
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL KEYENCE AND ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES BE LIABLE TO ANY
PERSON OR ENTITY FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM
LOSS OF USE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF INFORMATION, LOSS OR INACCURACY OF
DATA, LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF SAVINGS, THE COST OF PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTED
GOODS, SERVICES OR TECHNOLOGIES, OR FOR ANY MATTER ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCTS, EVEN IF KEYENCE OR ONE OF ITS
AFFILIATED ENTITIES WAS ADVISED OF A POSSIBLE THIRD PARTYS CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OR
ANY OTHER CLAIM AGAINST BUYER. In some jurisdictions, some of the foregoing warranty disclaimers
or damage limitations may not apply.
Index
BUYERS TRANSFER OBLIGATIONS: If the Products/Samples purchased by Buyer are to be resold or

delivered to a third party, Buyer must provide such third party with a copy of this document, all specifications, manuals, catalogs, leaflets and written information provided to Buyer pertaining to the Products/
Samples.
Index
3-367
96M0366
INDEX
Installation
Support
Software
Programming
2. System Installation
3. Access Window
4. KV-D20 Operator
Interface Panel
1. Introduction
1. Programming
2. Editor
2. Instructions
3. Simulator
3. Interrupts
4. Monitor
4. High-speed Counters
5. Appendices
5. Positioning Control
6. Interrupts, High-speed
Counters, Positioning
Control
5. KV-10/80 Hardware
6. Handheld Programmer
7. Serial Communication
7. KV-L2 Serial Interface

Module
8. Programming
Examples
8. KV-AN6 Analog I/O

Module
9. KV-AD4/DA4 Analog
I/O Unit
10. Troubleshooting
11. Appendices
Specifications are subject to change without notice.

AFFILIATED COMPANIES
KEYENCE CORPORATION
1-3-14, Higashi-Nakajima,
Higashi-Yodogawa-ku,
Osaka, 533-8555, Japan
PHONE: 81-6-6379-2211
FAX: 81-6-6379-2131
KEYENCE CORPORATION OF AMERICA

PHONE: 201-930-0100 FAX: 201-930-0099
KEYENCE (MALAYSIA) SDN BHD

PHONE: 03-252-2211 FAX: 03-252-2131
KEYENCE (UK) LIMITED

PHONE: 01908-696900 FAX: 01908-696777
KEYENCE (THAILAND) CO., LTD.

PHONE: 02-369-2777 FAX: 02-369-2775
KEYENCE DEUTSCHLAND GmbH

PHONE: 0711-79 73 71-0 FAX: 0711-797 77 99
KEYENCE THAIWAN CO., LTD.

PHONE: 02-2627-3100 FAX: 02-2798-8925
KEYENCE FRANCE S.A.

PHONE: 01 47 92 76 76 FAX: 01 47 92 76 77
KEYENCE KOREA CORPORATION

PHONE: 02-563-1270 FAX: 02-563-1271
KEYENCE SINGAPORE PTE LTD.

PHONE: 392-1011 FAX: 392-5055
KEYENCE CORPORATION, 1999 NKVP-UM-4-1000 Printed in Japan
User's Manual
Visual KV Series 3 Programming
1. Configuration and
Specifications
Visual KV Series
Programming
How this manual is organized:

The Visual KV Series Users Manual is composed of 3 separate
manuals; 1-Installation, 2-Support Software, 3-Programming.
Please read each manual relevant to your purpose.

Keyence Programming

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Keyence Programming

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

96M0366

7. KV-L2 Serial Interface

8. KV-AN6 Analog I/O

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

KEYENCE CORPORATION OF AMERICA

KEYENCE (MALAYSIA) SDN BHD

KEYENCE (UK) LIMITED

KEYENCE (THAILAND) CO., LTD.

KEYENCE DEUTSCHLAND GmbH

KEYENCE THAIWAN CO., LTD.

KEYENCE FRANCE S.A.

KEYENCE KOREA CORPORATION

KEYENCE SINGAPORE PTE LTD.

How this manual is organized:

WARNING shock, burn, etc.)

Failure to follow instructions may lead to product damage.

Provides additional information on proper operation.

Use in conditions or environments not described in this manual

Restriction on Acquiring the CE Marking

The Visual KV Series is allowed to be installed in a vertical position only.

Be sure to use the Visual KV Series inside the control panel.

Features of the Visual KV Series

Compatibility with Conventional KV Series Peripheral Units

The internal clock cycle of high-speed counters consists of three types: 1 s, 10

The RUN/PROGRAM LED is displayed in the Access Window provided on the

Transistor output is not independent, but is common.

With the transistor type, the output terminal layout is different.

Assignment of special utility relays has partially changed.

Cautions when using the previous version of ladder support software

Expansion I/O units for the conventional KV Series: KV-8ER/8ET/8EX/16EX/

Cautions when Using the Serial Port

Programs can be transferred and monitored using either communication port A or

The KV-D20 operator interface panel can be connected to either communication

How this manual is organized

Configuration and Specifications [Visual KV Series Only]

System Installation [Visual KV Series Only]

Access Window [Visual KV Series Only]

KV-D20 Operator Interface Panel [Visual KV Series Only]

KV-300, KV-10/80 Hardware [KV-300, KV-10/80 Series Only]

KV-L2 Serial Interface Module [KV-300 Series Only]

KV-AN6 Analog I/O Module [KV-300 Series Only]

KV-AD4/DA4 Analog I/O Unit [KV-10/80 Series Only]

Interrupts [Visual KV Series Only]

High-speed Counters [Visual KV Series Only]

Positioning Control [Visual KV Series Only]

Interrupts, High-speed Counters, Positioning Control [KV-300, KV-10/80 Series Only]

Extended Ladder Diagrams .......................................................................... 3-29

Instruction List [Visual KV Series] .............................................................. 3-34

Instruction List [KV-300 Series, KV-10/80] ................................................. 3-42

Convention Details ........................................................................................ 3-55

Instruction Details .......................................................................................... 3-56

Programming Notes ..................................................................................... 3-189

Interrupt Instructions ................................................................................... 3-192

Interrupt Processing .................................................................................... 3-194

Applications of Interrupt Programs ........................................................... 3-198

High-speed Counter Instructions ............................................................... 3-204

Setting and Operation of High-speed Counters ........................................ 3-211

Extended Functions of High-speed Counters ........................................... 3-221

Special Functions Using High-speed Counters ........................................ 3-228

Specified Frequency Pulse Output Function .................................................. 3-228

Examples of Direct Clock Pulse Output .................................................... 3-242

Examples of Using the Positioning Control Function .............................. 3-258

Interrupts, High-speed Counters,

Communications Specifications ................................................................ 3-306